B RYAN M I SC E L L ANY .

flS T R0 13 0 611 04 13 SE RI E S .

TH E

BRl H AT J AT AK A
V A
RAH A M l H l RA .

TRA NSLA TE D I N T O E N G LI SH

N . C H ID AMBARAM AI YAR BA , . .
,

F el l o w f
o 11m Th eosoph i ca l $p eie a nd F o u nder f
o ”16
Ti r z wa di 3 0 113 111 1111 0 Su b /m .

fiecond H alo n —Re v i sed and E nl arged .

1 9 05 .

M AD RAS
PRINTE D BY T H O M P SO N co , I N T H E . 1 11 12 0 3 0 9 1113 ?
“
D E PART M E NT O F T H E M I NE RVA m ass ,

3 3 , P O PH AM S BR OA DW A
’
Y .

F O R S AL E AT TH E T H E O S O P H I S T O F F I C E ,
A D YA R M A D RA S I ND I A
. , .

R
[ g
e is ter ed Cojvy r igh t j
 PRE FACE TO THE SECO D E DITI O N N
.
1

The F ir st E dit io n w as car e fully rev ised and p ar tl y

re w ritten and enl arged by my brother t h e Tr ans l ato r a
-

few y e ars be fo r e his death whic h occurr e d in Janu ary 1 8 9 2

, .

Since then , a n e w E dition w as muc h in dem and by t h e

P ublic , both Indian and Forei gn , but owin g to m an y
un fo r eseen di ffi c u lties I h av e n o t been able t o b r in g o ut
the E ditio n e arlier .

Itwas the intention o f m y late lamente d b r othe r t o

inco rporat e in this E dition a supplem ent ary chapte r on
t h e gr eat m an y v ar ieties, cur ious and wond er ful , o f pl ane t
a ry and othe r y ogas fr o m hi gher t r eatises on H o roscopy
an d also to publish a key to this work whi c h would hav e

enh ance d the value of the b o ok and facilit ated the wo rk

of t h e o r din ar y reade r But un fo rtun at e ly h is u ne x p ec t ed
.

death has m ad e the fulfilm e nt impossible .

My thanks are to C 0 1 H S O l c o tt , Pr esi dent

due . . .

F ounde r of the Theosophic al Society , Adyar but fo r whose ,

hea rt y c o op erati o n I c o uld no t h av e no w b r o ug h t o ut t hi s

-

boo k .

ARYAN M I SC E LLANY O r i i c e f

)
N VI SVANAT H AAIYA
.

M AD URA R
j
.

Nova nber
.
,

2 4111 1 9 05 .
 CO NT E NT S .

PAGE

Introd u c tion
Astrolog i c al Term s Indexed

D e finition s and E le m entary Prin ciple s

'
( Zo diacal )
Do do
An i m al a n d Veg etable H oro sco py
'

Nish e k a k a l a or t h e Time o f C on c eption

Matter s c onnec ted w ith Birth Ti m e
Bal ar ish t a or E arly D eath .

Ay u rday a or the D etermination of the L en g th

of L ife
Planetary D i v i s ion s and Su b D iw s i o n s of Life
-

known as D asas and Antar D as as -

Ash t ak a Varg as
-

A v o cation
Raja Y og as or t h e Birth of Kin g s
Nab h asa Y og a s

C handra or L u nar Y og a s
D o u ble Planetary Y o g as
Asceti c Y og as
The Nak sh at ras or the Moon in the A steri sm s .

The Moon in the se v eral si g ns of the Zodiac .

The Su n Mar s an d other planet s in the sev eral

, .

s i g n s of the Zodiac

Planetary A s p ect s
Planet s in t h e Bh av as
Planet s in se v eral Varg as
M i sc ellaneo u s Yo g a s
M a l e fic Y og as
H oro sc opy of \V o m e n
D eath
Lost
D re kk an as
C on cl u s ion
vi CO NTENTS .

A PP E NDI X
. P AG E .

Met h od of finding L ag na Sp h u t am
Do do Lo cal Time ( b y
Do do do ( at Nig ht )
Table sho wing the Oblique Asc en sion of eac h sig n
of the Zodiac
do from any one si g n
to an y other si g n of the Zodiac
the An t ardasa pe rio ds of the
N aksh at ra Basas
the E quation of Ti me fo r India
the Time o f the C u l 111111a 11o11 of t h e
' ‘

Su n and the Vernal E qui nox

the F riend s E nemie s etc of Planet s
, , .
, .

the Time of the Cu lmination of Star s .

 P U BL I C AT I O NS
OF TH E

ARYAN MI SCELLANY OFFI CE .

A S T RO L O G Y .

IN E NG L I S H .

I . Th e B f —
rih a t Sa m h itaA c y cl o p x
o Va ra ka M 1h i 1 a
'
'
.

dia of in formation on Natural Astrology containing inte r ,

p re t at io n s of over phenomena of N ature and treating

of numerous other interesting subj e c ts —P rice Rs 5 .

n)
( India ) 1 0 3 ( Forei g . .

II . Th e Brih a t f a ta ka of Va rd h a M t h ird —Ac omplete

system of H oroscopy providing for the solution of all ques
tions of N ativity —Price R s 3 ( India ) : 63 ( Foreign ) . . .

III Sha tpa n ch asika ( with Sanskrit T ext ) — Awork on

. .

Pra sna or H orary Astrology by Prit h u y asas son of Vara b a ,

M ih ira con taining solutions of a number of important

,

H ora r y questions — P rice 8 As ( India) I S ( Foreign ) . . .

IV 7
‘
work on H ora r y
1 11e11d ra 111a l a An
— ex h a u st iv e
’

Astrology by U p d c
e n ra h ar iar providing for the solu ti on o f ,

all H orary questions —Price R e 1 8 0 ( India) 3 5 ( F 0 re ign ) .

- -
.

Apply w it h
'

ren u tta n ce or
f or V P P 10
. . .

Th e Manager ,
Th e Th eosoph ist Office, Adya r ,
Ma dr a s I 11dia .

OR

M RR
.
y . . N V isv an at h a Aiyar
.
,

Arya n M iscel la ny Office, Ma du ra .

OR

M RR
.
y C . . . Ram ach andra Aiyar BA , . .
,

Arya n M in d /a ny Office Tr ipl ica ne, Ma dra s ,

 INTRO D UC TI O N .

T H E RE i s probabl y n ot one subj ect wh i ch i s so i l '

u n derstood wh i ch so many peopl e pretend to know and o n

, ,

wh i ch so many a re prepared to express an O pi n ion as th e ,

subj ect of Astrology The I nd ian proverb truly says that

.

there i s no m an w h o i s not a bi t of a physici an and an

ast rol oge r an d i t i s equ ally tru e that there i s no s ubj ect
wh i ch is so ill u nderstood as th es e two T he fac t i s th a t
-
.

th e broad m ed ical and astrological pri nciples are so many

that everybody of necessity learns a few of these b u t ,

experi en ces a d i ffi cul ty i n m asteri ng all of th e m .

I t woul d be i nteresti n g to n ote th e variou s s ubj ects

wi th wh i ch astrol ogy i s con fo u nded Persons wi th well
.

devel oped i ntu itions are ofte n fou nd to make correct pre
d ictions of even ts T h e Y ogi s a r e persons of th is desc ri p
.

tion Thei r pecul iar k nowl ed ge i s certai nl y n ot th e

.

resul t o f a ny s t u dv of astrological works We also fi nd .

another cl ass of men wh o i mi tate these m en and also

m ake striki n g s t a fem en t s . B i rm ingham gold i s o fte n
taken for sterl i n g gol d German sil ver for pu re si lver an d
we have a variety o f i n ferior stones wh i te r ed and g r e en
, ,

that are often mistaken for d iamonds rubies and emeral d

,
s
.

Th e world i s full of th is d ual character of th in gs E v e r y .

d epartment of true knowled ge has its i n feri or cou n terpar t

an d so we h ave a n u mber of me n who possessi n g n o o c
,

cul t powers bu t securi ng th e h el p of a few elemen tal

,

spiri ts practi se i m posi tion on th e i gnorant p u bli c B ut th e

, .

world i s not wi th ou t a tou ch stone to detect th e h ol low ness

of th ei r pretensions : these men w ill gi ve you a fe w correct
parti cul ars regardi n g remote past e ven ts a great d eal o f ,

parti culars rega r d i n g presen t events on e or two partien

,

l a rs rega r di n g the i mme diate futu re , and no p a rti c ula rs a t,

2 I n t ro du cl z b n .

al l abou t th e d istan t f u ture I h ave k now n th e s e m en an d

.

tested th e truth of thei r state ments Th ese m en preten d .

to be astrologers S om e of th e m carry n o books at all an d

.

make amazin g statements tou ch i n g past events i n prose

a n d verse i n an e x t e rn p o re si ng son g fa sh i on and with ou t
-

th e l east e ff ort even th ou gh th e questi oner i s a perfect

,

stran ger wh ile o t hers sh ow you som e h u ge antiqu e cadj an

book an d preten d to read from i ts pages Th i s was exact .

'
l y th e way i n wh i ch C ol Ol c o t t s questions were recentl y
.

an swered by th e Brah m i n astrol oge r wh o prete n ded to read

from th e pages o f th e works of th e G reat Bh e e m ak av i ( a i de
M ay 1 8 8 5 i ssu e of th e Th eo soph i si )
, , I am su re th at n ei .

th er C ol Olcott n or h i s i n telli gen t friend s eve r h ad a l ook

.

i nto th e book to see wh eth er wh at was rea d ou t was reall y

written there and i f so wh eth er th e wri ti n g was n ot a
, ,

fresh on e I n al l th ese cases th e astrologer i f h e i s on e

.
,

at all d oggedl y refuses to allow oth ers to l ook i nto h i s

,

book for h e says h e is n ot perm itte d by th e book d eity

,
,

t o do so Th ere i s a more wond erful m an i n P ond i ch erry

at present H e pretend s to read from th e works o f
.

Nan dikes w ara S uch astrol ogers are m akin g vast su m s

.

of money Th e statem e n ts th ey m ake a re reall y puzzl i n g

.

ones B u t fo r th ese an d th e way i n wh i ch th ey are mad e

.
,

th e u tter wan t of preparation and th e li ke I sh oul d h a v e ,

been i ncl i ned t o d iscard th e el e men t o f th e h el p of th e

el emental spi rits L e t th ose wh o woul d obj ect to th i s
.
,

exam i ne th e m atter an d th en p ronou nce an opi n i on .

N oth i n g can be m ore fun ny th an to find you n g men

especi ally taki n g u p astrol ogy as th ei r fi rst subj ec t o f
,

attack i n th ei r publi c u tterances I t i s a subj ect to wh ich .

th ey pay l ittl e or n o attenti on except for purposes o f r id i

cul e To al l you r questi ons h ow d o you prove th is state *
.
,

m en t and h ow d o you prove th at : th ei r on e ready reply i s

th at th ei r com mon sen se tel ls th em so T hey forge t .

t h at co m m o n sen se is a s ens e wh i ch ch an ges i n i ts nat ur e

 I 11 3

as on e ad vances i n h i s study and i t chan ge s so m uch th at

,

th e comm on sense o f on e age i s d i ff erent fro m th e

com mon sense of an oth er age th e com m on sense of one ,

n ation or of on e i nd iv i du al i s d i fferen t from th e com m o n

sense o f anoth er n ation or of another i nd ivid ual Where .

proof i s ad van ced by a fe w i t i s equally i n teresti n g to ex

,

a m i n e i t The proof i s that s u ch and su ch astrologers

.

m ad e such an d such pred icti ons and that th e pred i cti on s

v —
h a e failed and erg o astrol ogy i s n o scien ce I t i s ev i
,

de n t l y take n for granted that th e astrol oger was really

learned i n th e scien ce an d th at th ere were n o t th ose
,

n u merous errors of data to m isl e ad h i m .

Anoth er obj ection to the science i s that astrol ogi call y

th e fortunes o f two persons born at th e sam e m omen t of
ti m e bu t i n th e opposite quarters of th e globe m u st b e ,

the sam e bu t th at they can not be an d are not th e sa me

, .

H ere i s an i gnorance betrayed regard i n g th e elem entary

pri n ci pl es of th e scien ce It i s true t h at th e planetary
.

posi tions are n early th e same except for th e sm al l matte r

of parall a x B u t i t i s n ot th e planets al on e th at go to
.

sh ape on e s fortu nes Ti me o f bi rth wh i ch i s re pre sen t

’
.
,

e d by th e L agna or th e ri sin g si gn h as a great deal to d o

,

wi th i t In oth er words because th e l ocal ti mes of th e

.
,

two places are di e ren t th e L agnas m ust b e d i ff eren t ;

,

for wh e n the 2 0 t h degree of Leo for i nstance i s i n , ,

contact w ith th e h orizon here th e 2 0 t h degree of Aq u ari es

,

wil l be i n con tact wi th th e h orizon of ou r j ust anti podes at

th e same m omen t O u r risi n g si gn i s thei r set ti n g si gn
.
,

an d ou r setti n g si gn is th ei r risi n g si g n ; so th at a
d i fference of l ongi tud e gi ves a d i ff e rence of local tim e
and con s equ ently a d i ff erence of L agna B u t suppose .

the pl aces to h ave th e sam e lon gitude Take t w o .

places for i nstance on th e sam e m erid ia n and the r efore

d u e no r th and s outh of each other N ow th e question i s .

wh eth er th e La g na is t h e s a m e for bot h th e pl a ce s No. .

4 I n t ro du ct i o n .

The L agn a i s a poi nt i n th e ecl i pti c w h i ch i s i n cl i ned t o

th e equ a tor Th e pl anes of th e h orizon of th e two places
.

are d i ff eren t an d they cu t d i ff eren t parts o f th e ecl i pti c .

I t th e r efore follows th at a d i ff eren ce of lati tud e gi ves a

d i ff eren ce i n th e Lagna S o tha t pl aces w i th a d i ff er
.

en ce of ei th er l on gi tu de or l ati tud e o r wi t h both can n ot

h ave th e sam e L agn a a t th e same ti me Tha t La g n a o r .

m ere ti m e or space i rrespecti ve of the pl an ets h as a

, ,

great deal to do with shapi n g th e fortu n es o f a native or

J a t a k i will be a n ew revelati o n to m ost pe opl e We wi l l .

com e to t h is subj ect presen tl y A h oroscopi c d iagram or .

fi gure of th e h eavens represents both l ocal ti m e or L agn a

an d planetary posi ti ons .

What th en i s Astrol ogy or H oroscopy ? Wh at i s i t s

’

n atu re a n d wh at i ts bou nd s ? H ere i s th e au thor s de fin i

tion of h oroscopy

ai m s am e assm ent e mu
-
h
-

ar I
su f
r ariwwt aaerfaw wq fa H QIWW EBl l

i s stated to be th e scien ce of Ah or o t r z o r
’

H oroscopy
th e sci en ce of day a n d n i gh t— th ese bei n g th e broad est
v isibl e d ivi si o n s of ti m e —m ul ti ples of wh i ch gi ve w eeks ,

m onth s y ears & c

, ,
an d d i vision s of wh i ch gi ve h ou rs
.
, ,

m i nu tes seconds & c

, , Th e fi rst l etter A and th e last
.
,

l etter ” 1, h avi n been d ro pped th e term has assu med

g
,

th e sh a pe of lz o ra an d th e a uth or says th at h o ra S hastra

,

treats of th e e ff ects of th e good and bad deed s of an i nd i

v idual i n h i s pre v iou s b i r t h ; s o th at th e m om en t a per

son i s born i t becom es h i s l ot to e nj oy an d su ffer certai n

,

ple a su res an d pains for h is past good an d bad d eed s

seeds cast i n to th e cos mi c regi on i n on e bi rth begi n
to bea r sweet and sou r fru its i n anoth e r bi r th acco r d in g
t o the ir quali ty .
 [72 17 0 4111 01£0 11 . 5

In th is con n ecti on w e m ay say a few word s tou ch i n g

th e lo n g d i spu t e d questi on of Fatal i sm v er su s Free w i ll - .

Pe rsons of th e form er sch ool h old th at even the m i n u test

e vents of one s l i fe are pre ordai ned and that m an i s com
’
~

p l e t e l y a pu p pet i n th e h an ds of certai n h i gh er agencies .

Th is e rror h as evidentl y bee n th e resul t of th e o b s e r

vatio n of a n u mber o f wel l proj ected e fforts i n particu lar
d i recti on s h avin g been thorou gh l y di s co m fit e d A gai n .
,

m en o f th e oth er sch ool h old th at m an i s a free agent ,

and th at th ere i s n oth i n g i mpracticable for h i m i f onl y

proper m eans are e mpl o yed for th e pu rpose Th is error .

a gai n h as bee n th e resul t of th e observation of even i l l

projected e ff orts i n parti cul ar d i recti ons p rovi n g h ighly ,

successfu l — th e failu res i f a u v bei n g accou nted for

,

by the i nsu ffi ci ency of th e m eans em ployed I n th e .

on e case man becomes an i rresponsi b l e age n t and i n the

oth er h e n ot onl y bootlessl y gri eves over h is fa il u res ,

bu t repeats h is attempts th u s putti n g h i msel f to troubl e

, ,

expense an d vexati on onl y to fai l agai n No w as regard s .

,
’
th e former posi ti on i t i s h el d th at m an s presen t d eed s
,

are al l th e e ff ects of h is prev iou s deed s As free agen cy .

of an y sort i s d iscarded fro m th e question i t woul d follow ,

that th ese previ ous d ee ds are t h e e ff ects o f d eeds sti ll

' '

more previous and so on a d z nfi m t a m o r till we are

, .
,

brou ght to a state of cosm i c e v ol u tion wh e n d i ff eren ces

of states an d cond i ti on s w ere i n fused i n to h u m an souls
by th e C reator S u ch a con di tion of i rresponsi bil ity i s
.

opposed to reason opposed to progress and equall y

, ,

opposed to d i vi ne and hu m an l aw It i s a very perni ciou s

.

doctri n e i n th e extrem e .

As regards th e l atte r vie w i f m an can wh olly shape

,

h i s ow n fortu nes , h ow are we to accou n t for th e ph en o

m en a o f su ff eri n g v i rtu e an d th e enj oyin g vi ce i n certai n
cases —for th e former reapi n g n o rewards and th e latter
es capi n g p u n i s h men t .
Asat isfa cto r y e x p lanati o n wo u l d
 T111r o da e1z o fl
'

6 .

poin t to th e form e ra s bei n g th e e ff ects of previ ous ka r m a ,

a nd th e l atter as d eed s for wh i ch m a n w ill both su ff e r

a n d en joy i n hi s n ext li fe Taki n g e nti re h u ma n l ife i nto
.

consideration ou r own opi n i on i s that m a n is both a

,

sl ave of th e e ff ects of h i s past d eeds and i s a free a g e n t as -

regard s fresh i nd e pend en t deed s — deed s wh i ch a re i n n o

way d irected to thwar t to arrest to al ter or i n any way to
, ,

m odi fy or remoul d th e e ffects o f h i s past ka rm a B u t .

i f h e wi sh es to m o v e al on g wi th th e curren t h e m ay d o ,

so an d th e cou rse w il l become more eas y an d m ore

,

s m ooth This vi ew w i ll accou n t for th ree th in gs :

.

th e many apparently u n accou n tabl e fa il u res of att e m p t s

even when th e m e a ns employed h ave been good ;
th e easy su ccess t h at h as attended m an y a n e ff ort wh e n th e
m eans employed were e ven weak th e su ccess wh i ch
i n certai n cases appears proporti on ate to l abou r I n th e .

fi rst case th e attem pt was on e ai med at m ovi n g a gain st

,
l
th e cu rren t o f fate ; i n th e seco n d c ase i t was on e o f
m ovi n g d own wi th th e cu rrent a nd i n th e th i rd case i t
,

was m oti on on stil l water w h ere an d w h ere al one free

,

h u m an agency can d ispl ay i tsel f .

H avi n g p remi sed so much w e may n ow proceed a

,

step fu rth er and state th at wh ere th e curren t i s a weak

on e ru n n i n g with t he cou rse of a L eena i t m i gh t be ,

opposed and su ch oppositi on m ay be eith er d i rect o r

,

obl i qu e accord in g to th e fi t n ess an d stren gth of th e

m eans employed and that th e task would becom e a d i lfi
,

cul t one i f th e cou rse to be resisted sh ould flow w ith

,

th e cou rse of a Ti gri s The ques t i on is pu rely a questi on

.

of karmi c dynam i cs e ff ects of past karm a as opp osed to

p r esen t karm a To oppose eve n a n o p p o s ib l e force o n e
.
,

m u s t first possess a knowl ed ge of i ts stre n gth a n d

d i rection o f action , and secondly a k n o w l e g e of th e prope r
,

m e an s to be empl oyed for th e purpose Th e fo r mer .

know l edg e i s s u p pl i ed to m an b y ast r ol ogy, and t h e l a t t er

b y su ch work s as th e K ar m av ip ak a G ran dh a The mean s .

p rescribed i n th e latter consist of gi fts of Japa psych i,c

train i ng or d evelopment ) an d certai n fire ceremon i es ’

h avi n g a n occul t si gni ficance It follows wh ere th e c u r

.

ren t is i rresi sti bl e th e attem pt to oppose i t becom es

,

futi le H o w can a person e v er h ope to w i n success i n a

.

fiel d wh e n h e i s i gno rant of th e d i recti o n of attack as wel l

a s th e stren gth of h is ene my Astrol ogy n ot onl y poi nts
.

ou t to h i m h i s enem ies bu t h i s frie nd s as well wh os e ,

h el p h e m i gh t seek and obtai n . By poi nti n g ou t fields

wh ere th ere are friend s an d fi elds wh ere there are foes
, ,

astrology i nd i rectly poi nts ou t t o h i m neu tral fi eld

wh ere m an s free agen cy h as i ts ful l s cope of acti o n a n d
’

whe re su ccess i s proportionate to l abou r .

T h e next i m portant questi on for consid eration i s th e

exam i nation o f th e con necti on i f an y bet w ee n th e
, ,

pl anets a nd h u m a n fortu n es : wh ere m a n su ff ers and

enj oys th e fru i ts o f h is past karma th e qu esti on asked
,

i s what part th e [fil o rz el s pl ay i n su ch h u man s u ff eri n g

and enj o y m ent H ere a gai n b el i e v e r s i n astrology a s a
.

sci ence a re di vid ed i nto two sch ools Th e on e ad m i t .

acti ve a gen cy for th e pl anets an d th e other denyi n g i t

, , ,

state that th e planets bl i ndly and m ech an i c all y i nd i cate

th e cu rren t of h u man d esti n i es I n su pport o f th e l atter
.

V i ew i t i s stated th at i f h u ma n su ff erin g and enj oym en t

,

are d i rectly traceabl e to m an s previ ou s karma t h en to

’
, ,

admi t acti ve a g en c v o n th e part o f th e planets b e ,

com es n ot onl y su p erfl uou s but i n cons istent i f a m a n

,

loses h is son it i s bec a use th ey sa y h e su ff ers for h is

, , ,

karma wh ic h m i gh t consi st i n h i s h avi n g caused a

,

si milar a ffl iction to somebod y i n h is pre v i ous bi rth and n ot .

becau se Mars occupie d th e st h hou se fro m th e ascend an t

or Lagn a at th e m omen t of bi rth an d that therefore ,
'

th e pl an etary pos i tions onl y z n dz ea fe an d do 7 10 1 b r i ng

’

a ho u t h u ma n su ff eri n g or enj oymen t These peopl e from

.

a h u ma n poi nt of v iew can no t co nce i ve th e possi bili t y

5 [a l rodu erz hn .

of more ca u se s th a n o n e for an e ve n t —ea c h cau se acti n g

i ndependentl y and with ful l force H i n d u l i teratu re i s fu l l
.

of events each o f wh i ch i s th e z zrz m ea z a t e e ff ect of a n u m

' '
’
,

ber of cau ses Th is pecul iar combi n ati on o f c au s es qu i te

.
,

i n com preh e nsibl e to us i s a feat u re wh ich d isti n gu ish es

,

d i vi ne d eed s from h u man d eeds We will quote a n i ns .

tan ce or two G an g a was cu rs ed to pass th rou gh a h u m an

.

i ncarnation th e Ash ta ( ei gh t ) Va s u s brou gh t o n the m

sel ves a si m ilar cu rse — o f th e ei gh t V as u s seven were
allo w ed to retu rn to S w arga i m med i atel y a fter bi rth
Raj a Sa n t an u goes ou t o n a h unti n g excu rsio n m arri es ,

Gan ga wh om h e fi nds o n th e banks of th e G an ges o n

, ,

cond i tion of her bei n g all o w ed to qu i t h im t h e m ome n t

h e opposes h er o w n m od e o f dis p o s i n g o f th e i ssu e o f th ei r
u n i on . E igh t ch ild re n are born i n al l T he m other .

th rows th e fi rst s ve n of th em i n to th e G an g es ; th e
e

K in g pu ts u p wi th th is for th e love of th e l ady H e can .

bear n o m ore i nh u man work of the sort a n d so h e r e

sists Gan ga qu i ts h er l ord l eavi n g th e babe —th e fu tu re
Bh ees h m a of th e M ah ab h ar a t A gai n Ki n g D asara t h a
.
,

goes ou t to h u n t and enters a d ense f orest ; h eari n g

som e gu rgl i n g s ou nd i n h is n ei ghb o u rh ood an d mis ,

taki n g i t to be th at of a wild eleph ant i n th e act o f d ri n k

i n g water th e k i n g d isch arges h is a rro w i n i ts d irecti on
’

and kills a lad wh o was d i p p i n g h is bo w l i nto th e waters

of th e stream to car r y i t to h is aged paren t s at som e d is
tance Th e cri es o f th e dyi n g lad brou gh t h ome to th e
.

ki n g h i s error and th e n ext m omen t th e k i n g h i msel f

,

proceeds to th e l ad s fat h er an d e ntreats pardon Th is

’

venerable ol d m a n expi res o n th e spot pronou nci n g

a cu rse on th e ki n g —rath e r readin g th e ki ng s fate th at ’

i n h i s old age h e sh al l d ie a si m ilar d eath fro m gri ef o n

accou n t of h is son s separati on I n the mea nwh il e Vish n u
’
,

h i msel f d raws on h is o w n h ead t h e cu rse o f a

h u man i ncarnati on attended with m uch su ff erin g
,

fr om se paration fro m wi fe from t h e sa g e B , h r ig u ,

I0 I n t rodu ct i o n .

h u man d esti n ies bu t brin g abou t su ch d est inies T h e

,
.

world i s a m i xed fiel d of h onor, o f pu ni sh ment and o f

pr obati o n An d th e pl an ets are th e reward in g an d ch as
.

t i s i n g o ffi cers and m edd le i n n o way wh en m an exerci ses

,

h is free will wi th i n its own sph ere .

Th e sam e i dea m i gh t be r epresen ted i n anothe r way

plan etary activity i s th e total activi ty of a n u mber of forces ,

som e for good an d som e for ev il an d wh il e a m an s ,

’

karm a leads h i m i nto the on e force or th e oth e r th ere are ,

oth er forces by a kn owled ge of wh i ch m an m ay bene

fi t h i mself th ou gh i t may n ot be iri s l ot to be d rawn i nto
,

a n y of them by h i s past karm a I f th is were n ot th e cor

.

rect v i ew of th e part pl ayed by th e plan ets a l arge por t ion ,

of th e scien ce of astrol ogy i n wh i ch m an i s a dvised t o

,

avai l h i msel f of su ch and su ch pl anetary positi on s for par

t i c u l ar u rpose s would becom e u seless Th e pl anets
p , .

th erefore can be m ad e t o d o m ore th an th e work of j ail ors

an d reward i n g o ffi cers For i nstan ce i n th e fou rth chap
.
,

te r ( B ri h at Jata k a ) w h i ch treats of Ni s h ek a ( conception )

a m an i s ad v i sed to avai l h i msel f of parti cular plan etary

position s i f h e d esi res a n excell ent issu e : Pa ras ara wh o ,

was a great a stronom er and astrol oger find i n g th at su ch ,

a n h ou r for Nis h ek a h ad approach ed j oi ned a boa t man s ,

-
’

daugh ter i n an i slan d on th e j u mn a and th e i ssu e was th e

great V e da v v as a A B rah m i n astrol oger u nder sim ila r
.

’
circumstances j oi ned a potter s d au gh ter and th e i ssu e was ,

th e great Sal i v ah an a .

Th at m an i s not al togeth e r a free agen t i s an i dea

cau gh t by S h akespeare i n one of h i s wel l known passages
i n As You L ike I t .

Al l t h e w o r l d is a s t ag e ,

And al l t h e m e n an d w o m en m er e ly p l ay er s
T h e y h a v e t h e i r e x i t s an d t h e i r e n t ra n c e s ,

An d o n e m an i n h i s t i m e p l ay s m a n y p ar t s ,

H is aot s b e i ng sev e n a g es
”

.
 11
A gai n wh il e th e heave n s form th e m a c r o cosm m a n
'

, ,

i s th e m icrocosm I n other w ords each m an i s a l i ttl e

.
,

w orl d exactly representi n g th e Un i verse Wh i l e a l l .

seems qu iet w i th ou t th ere is an acti ve worl d wi th i n

,

S uch a world is vi sibl e to th e i n ner si gh t o f a Yogi C c .

cu lt scien ce treati n g o i th is subj ect s ays

m mi nent
I

a im ?W
s e

at it

If th e P r a n a v a yu ( v ital ai r ) can b e take n to th e

S u s h m n a n a di,
ei gh t sorts of m usi c w i l l be h e ard an d fi re , ,

l i ghtni n g stars th e m oon an d th e su n will becom e v isi

, ,

ble Agai n i n C hapter I V al ready r e ferred to V arab a

.
, , ,

M ih i ra says th at m enstrual d isch ar g es occ u r i n wom e n

when M ars and the Moon approach each oth er In con .

n ec t io n wi th th is s ubj ect th e a utho r of S a r aval i s ays as

follows
er was W
n
i n ete
then
t h : nei “
e

mfm fit afi am : “ e nsi g n '

Th e M oon 15 w ater an d M ars I S fi re bi l e is t h e

resul t of a m i xtu re of fire and water an d wh en bi le m ixe s ,

wi th th e blood m enses appea r i n wome n

,
.
”

S o th at with th e ch an ge th at i s goin g on wi thou t ,

th ere is a ch an ge goi n g o n w ith i n and every ele men t o r ,

’
bi t of man s physi cal body h as i ts representati ve i n th e
h eavens S uc h bei n g th e case th ere i s a s ubtle con nec
.
,

ti on i mperceptible because subtl e betwee n th e cond ition s

, ,

of th e planets and th e stars above and th ose of m an below

W e sh al l n ow s ay a few words tou ch i n g th e cause s of
fai l u re of astrological pred ictions z th e m o s t i mpo r ta n t o f
t he se w e wi ll take u p fi rs t .
 Astrology r ests o n astron om y Th e l atte r sci enc e w as
.

p r obably i n a good cond i ti on at th e ti m e of V ikra m ark a .

Th e tables for th e cal cul ation of th e pl aces of the planets

wh i ch we r e th en fram ed or th en i n u s e were al l su i ted to
,

th e t im e O wi n g p robably to th e wear and tear of th e

.

several worki n g parts of th e wh ol e m ach i nery of th e S olar

system th e tabl es of on e a ge are u nsu i ted to anoth er age
,
.

To th is tru th th e an ci en t H i nd u astro nomers were keenl y

al i ve Th ey h ave accord i n gly l ai d d own th i s b r oad r ul e
.

fo r th e gu idance of th e futu re astronom ers .

i rline mm mfif
a mw m fil
fi ei mm ri m fa fi wmranh meéi:
fi
i i II
S i nce er r or i n cal culati on i s as si nful as th e mu rder o f
a B r ah mi n th e correct pl aces of th e pl anets s h al l be as cer
,

t ai n ed by d ail y m eri dia n observati ons .

A n d this can not be done wi thou t an Observatory Ob .

s erv a t o r ies of some sort d i d exist i n th is l and bu t owi n g

to forei gn i nvasions a n d th e wan t of encouragemen t o n th e
part of ru lers th e science h as ceased to progress an d th e
, ,

former tables for wan t o f corrections h ave become u seless .

T h e calendars therefore prepared by the n ati ve astrol oger s

d o not give th e tru e places of th e planets Th e erro r h as .

been goi n g on for th e l ast 1 0 0 0 years .

Th e n au ti cal al man acs prepared i n E u rope an d Am e

r i ca gi ve v ery correct positions of th e planets an d M essrs .

Bapu D eva S astry of Bena r es L aksh m an a C h at rai o f

,

P oona Ra g u n at h a C hari ar of M adras an d V e n cat es wara

, ,

D e ek sh i t ar an d Su n dares w ara S t outy of C o m b ac o n u m

h ave s tarted al m anacs basi n g thei r calcu lati on o n th e cor
r ect modern tables . These tables enabl e u s to ascertai n
correctly th e places of th e pl anets from th e Vern a l E ga n
n ow, on e of th e two poi nts wh ere th e eclipti c cu ts t h e

s u at o r Th i s p oi n t i s t h e W este r n fi r s t poi n t o f Ar i es
q .
.
It h as a r et r ograd e m oti on at th e rate of abou t 5 0 a year .

Bu t the H i nd u first poi n t of Aries is th e fixed sta r Rev a t i

( t h e Yo g at ar a of th e group ) wh i ch i s stated to b e o n th e
°
ecl ipti c Th i s star i s a t presen t abou t 2 0 to th e E ast of
.

th e V ernal E qu i nox Planetary places from th is star are

.

known as th e Ni r a ya n a Sph u t a m an d pl a c es from th e ,

V ernal E qu i nox are known as th e Sa ya n a Sph zd a m Th e .

l ittle bi t of i ncreasi n g space between th e two poi nts i s

kno w n as Aya n a m sa N ow H i nd u astrology rests on th e
.

Ni rayan a Sp h u t am of th e plan ets and modern tables gi v e

,

u s th e correct S ayana S p h u t a m so that i f th e len gth o f ,

th e Ay an am s a i s correctl y kn own i t may be subtracted ,

fro m th e S ayan a Sp h u t am and th e remai nde r will be th e

,

Ni rayan a Sp h u t am requ ired B ut th e exact l en gth of th e

.

Ay an am sa is n ot k n own an d i t can not be ascertai ned by

,

d i rect obse r vation because th e star Re v at i has d isappeared :

,

I h ave treated of th is subj ect at some l e n gth i n th e Ap ri l

'

( 1 8 8 3 ) i ssu e of th e T h eosoph z st Th e several al manac

.
1

publishers al ready referred to h ave arbitrarily assu me d

d i fferen t lengths of th e Aya n am sa evidently to su i t th ei r
,

own conven ience Thes e len gth s of th e Ay a n am sa o n t h e

.

I s t Janua r y 1 8 8 3 a r e

( 1) B ombay Almana c 18 14 20
( 2 ) Madras do 22 2 39
( 3 ) C o m b aco n u m
( )
4 B enares d o 21 58 29

( 5 ) V ak h y a do 22 41 4-4
( 6) S i ddh anta do 20 46 15

I h ave d iscove r ed th e true len gth to ran ge be twee n

20
°
23 8
' "
an d 2 0 2 5 2 2 o n th e I s t J an u ary 1 8 8 3
° "
By .

° '
adopti n g th e m ean n amely 2 0 2 4
, ,
th e m axi m u m
'
amou n t of error w ill onl y be 1 N ow th e d i ff eren ce
betwee n the correct Ayan am s a an d the va r iou s Ayanam sas
ab o v e g i v en w il l b e s e en fr o m t h e fo ll o wi n g
 I n l rodu et z hn .

0 I

(l) Bombay 2 9 55
(2 ) M ad ras
(3 ) C o m b ac o n u m } 1 38 24

( )
4 Benares 1 34
, 14

( 6) S iddhan ta 0 22 0
To express th e sam e i n oth er words Th e Ayan a m s a .

error as i t a ff ects th e pl an etary posi ti ons i n poi nt of ti m e

i n th e fi rs t fo u r al man acs wi ll be fou nd to be as follows
'

Plan e t s .

d ay . h ou r . d ay . h our . da y . h o ur .

2 5 1 16 1 14
Sun
O 4 0 3 0 3
M oon
3 3
Mars 4’ 3 0
0 13 1 0 9
M
26 o 19 17 18 21
1 9 1 0 0 23
Ven u s
S atu rn 64 . 16 48 23 46 20
Moon s ’
0 29 16

So ~
i t i s ev ident th at h oroscopes con stru cted o n
t h at
th e pla n etary positi ons as fou nd i n th e existin g almanacs
a r e wron g .

Ag ai n i n th e constru cti on of h o r oscopes , th e followi n g

,

wron g tables showi n g th e Ras i m a n a o r ti me of obliqu e

ascensi on of th e z od iacal si gns above th e h orizon i s
adopted nea r l y th ro ughou t th e lan d by a g r eat maj ori ty
of i gnoran t astrologers .

G h a t ik a s .

41 .

2
45
f 1
G
I
Sf
 15
'

l n 1ro dn e11 on .

Th e r eader i s referred to th e Append i x fo r a co rr ect

tabl e for all th e pla ces of I nd i a .

A th i rd cau se of failu re i s an i gn oran ce of th e local

t i m e Th e presen t d ays a re d ays o f cl ocks an d w atch es
.
,

a nd th ese a re l uxu ri es con fined to ou r town s an d d o n o t

exten d t o ou r villages Besides th ese clocks an d watch e s
. ,

a re rarel y m ad e to sh ow th e l ocal ti m e I n m ost of t h e .

pl aces of S ou th ern I nd ia th e clock sh ows th e Mad ra s

,

tim e and wh ere there are n o clocks th e ti m e i s as c e r

,

t a i n ed by a rou gh cal cul ati o n appl ied to th e l en gth of a

’
m an s sh ad o w Th e correction s du e to th e lati tud e of
.

th e pl ace an d to th e posi tion of th e su n on th e ecl ipti c

are om itted At ni gh t i f th e sky sh o uld happen to be
. ,

clear th e t ra n s is t of parti cul ar constellati on s over th e

,

m erid ian i s observed an d by th e appl i cation of a rou gh

,

tabl e begi n ni n g wi th .

W he n S ravan a crosses th e m eridian , Aries h a s

ri sen by 2 % G h a t ikas an a t tem pt i s m ad e to ascertai n
,

th e l ocal ti m e I n th e fi rst place th e tabl e i s a r o u gh

.

on e and i n th e second place i t appl ies to th e ti m e wh e n

,

th e Yo g at ara or ch ief star of th e grou p crosses th e

m erid ian Th e tabl e th erefo re becom es u seless for ti m es
.

l yi n g between th e transi t of th e Yo g a t ra of on e grou p

an d th at of th e Yo g at ra of th e n ext grou p Besi des .
,

m ost men are i gn orant not onl y of th e Yo g at a ra bu t o f

th e exact posi ti on of th e meri di a n an d tu rni n g toward s
th e star wh i ch m i gh t be to east or west of th e m erid ian ,

th ey fan cy th at i t i s j ust abou t to make th e t ran si t I f .

t h e n i gh t happen s to be a cloudy one th e ti m e i s pu rel y ,

o ne o f gu ess work So m an y e rrors m ust o f n ecessi ty

.
, ,

lead ofte n to an error i n th e L agna ; an d when th i s

o ccu rs i t u psets th e w hol e th in g
,
Add to th is th e e r rors
.

O
.
f the cal end a r re l atin g to th e places o f th e
p lanets C e n t .
16 I n 1r0du et z bn .

p er cent o f th e h oroscopes of th e present d ay a r e t h e r e

.

fore wron g I t i s a h oroscope of th i s type th at i s p u t

.

i nto th e h ands of a person w h o calls h i ms el f a n astro

l oger I n a great n u m ber of cases I nd ia n astrol o g ers
.
,

a r e poor m e n wh o h ave betake n th e m sel ves to the stu dy

of th e scien ce as a m eans of l i vel i hood Th e publi c .

would pay th e m o nly i f th ey woul d pred i ct so m e goo d

fortu ne ; i f h e correctly p red i c ts a n evil h e i s n ot only ,

n ot paid anyth i n g bu t i s set do w n for a sorcerer w ho m

, ,

i t woul d n ot be safe to ap p roach Th us th e astrologe r .

i s i nd uced to conceal an y un pl easant t ru t h s fw h ic h h e

m i gh t h appen t o kn o w an d after th is th e complai n t i s
,

th at th e pred i cti ons of su c h an d su ch astrol ogers h av e

failed For wan t of en cou ragement th e astrologer pays ,

l ittle attenti on to th e stu d y of h i s sub ject and ofte n has

recou rse to th e h el p of th e bl ack art as al ready d es
c rib ed .

f '

We sh al l now s ay a few word s regard i n g a parti

c u l ar branch of th e sci ence kn own as P ras n a or A ,
r u dh a

S hastra h orary astrol o g y T hi s d i ffers from h oroscopy

,
.

or n ati vi ti es i n th is respect m wh il e th e latter rests , ,

on th e m oti on s of th e vi sibl e pl anets round th e S un th e ,

former rests m ai nly 0 11 th e m oti ons of certai n i n visibl e

pl an ets wh i ch are su pposed to move rou n d th e h orizon .

Thei r l aws of m o t ion are exceed in gly si m pl e .

T hese planets wh ich are 8 i n n u mber m ove i n

, ,

th e fol lowi n g ord er : th e S un Ma r s J u pi ter , , ,

M ercu ry Venu s Satu rn th e M oon and R ah u at th e

, , , ,

d istan ce of a si gn a n d a h al f or 45 from o n e °
,

anoth er and take one ful l day or 2 4 h ou rs to go rou n d

th e h orizon—th e S u n bein g at th e first poi n t of Aries
every day at su nrise th e h orizon bei n g th ei r ecl ipti c an d
,

d i vided i nto 1 2 equal parts each part bein g know n as a

,

si gn and Taurus L eo S corpi o and Aq ari u s bei n g re s

, , ,
.

e c t i v el th e d ue ea stern , southern wes t er n an d n o r th ern

p y ,
 '

l8 I n f r o dn el z o n .

astrol ogy t h at th e m i n u test events of on e s l ife are pre ’

ordai ned and th at m an h as n o control over t h em .

I t only remai n s to say a few wo rds abou t certai n books

know n as Nadig ran t h am s Th e se pu rport to con tai n a
.

b ri ef accou nt of th e l i ves of al l m anki nd It woul d ap .

p ear o u a su perfici al consid erat ion of th e s ubj ect th at su ch

books can n ot at al l exist Th at th ey exist i s a fact an d
th e qu estion th erefore i s h o w cam e th ey to exist —n w were
.

th ey p r epared
Th e pl an ets occu py parti cular places o n the ecl ipti c at
pa r ti cular poi nts of ti m e E ver y mo ment th ei r posi tion s
.

are ch an gin g Th e qu estion th en i s i n wh at peri od of

.

ti m e the pl an ets retu rn to th eir former positi ons Th i s i s a .

questi o n of A r i th metic a questio n of th e L east C om m o n

,

M ulti pl e of 7 or 8 n u mbers T hese nu mbers are th e .

s i der i al periods of Mercu ry Ven us E arth Mars J upi ter

, , , ,

and S atu rn a n d of th e Moon m a , ,

Mercu ry 8 7 9 69 3 days .

Ven u s 2 2 47 008
-

E arth 3 6 5 2 5 64 -

M ars
J upi te r
S atu rn 1 07 5 9 2 2 000 -

M oon 2 7 d ays 7 h rs 45 m 1 1 5 5 . . .
°
.

N ow th e L C M of th e above n u mbers i s th e K al pa of
.
. .

th e H i nd u Astronomy wh i ch i s s i de r ia l years .

After wh i ch th e planets all retu rn to th e fi rst poi n t of Ari es

—
at th e h orizo n of Lanka a place on th e equator wh ose
u

lon gitud e i s 7 6 E fro m G reenwich A Kalpa con sists

. .

of 1000 C h at u ry u g as A C h a t u r y u g a consi sts of 48 2 0000

.

s ide r i al years of wh ich

,
K ali yu ga consists of 43 2 000 sid e
ri al years .

D wap ara yu ga 43 2 000 x 2 8 64000 y e ar s .

Treta yu ga 43 2 000 x 3 1 2 9 6 000

Kr i t a yu ga 43 2 000 x 4 1 7 2 8 000
 I n l r o da el z o n
'

19

A Kalpa forms Bra h ma s d ay at the end of w h i ch ’

,

the M ah ap ral aya com men ces Agai n th e nu mber o f .

,

Rasi C h a kr am s or th e Z odi acal representations of th e

positions of th e pl anets i s also l i m i ted H o w ? S u ppose .

t here was onl y on e pl anet say th e S u n , H e m i gh t

, .

occupy any one o f th e 1 2 h ouses ; so mi gh t Mars and each

o f th e oth er pl anets T h e 1 2 places of th e S u n combi ned
.

w i th th e 1 2 places of M ars wi ll gi ve u s 12 or 1 44 di ff eren t

2

places for the S u n and Mars Th ese combi ned wi th th e .

1 2 places of J upi ter will gi ve 1 2 2 x 1 2 or 1 2 ° o r 17 2 8

“

pl aces for th e th ree planets th e S un M ars an d J u piter , ,

.

S im i larly 4 plan ets w il l gi ve 1 2 positi on s and 5 planets

4

wi ll gi ve 1 2 5
positi ons an d so on N ow h oroscopy de al s
,
.

wi th th e position s 0 th e five planets M e rcu ry V e n us

.
, ,

Mars J u pit er and S atu rn as wel l as th e S u n th e Moon

, , ,

a n d Rah u ( Moon s ascen d i n g n ode ) O f th ese 8 planets

’
.
,

all excepti n g th e i n feri or planets M ercu r y an d Venu s

, , ,

will gi ve u s 1 2 6 posi ti ons N ow th e greatest el on gati o n

.

of M ercu ry fro m th e su n i s abou t an d th at of Ven us

i s abo u t 47 ° so that wh en th e S u n occu pies a particul a r
s i gn Mercu ry wil l occupy e ith er that si gn o r th e si gn
,

ne x t after i t or next before i t sim i larly Ven us wil l be

eith er i n th e h ouse occu pi ed by th e S u n or i n on e of th e
two si gns next after i t or next before i t In oth er words .
,

th e n u mber al ready obtai ned will h ave to be i n creased

th reefol d on acco u n t of M ercury and fivefold o n accoun t
o f Ve nus Th e n u mber th en is 12
.
6 x
3 x 5 C o mbi n e wi th .

t h is th e 12 L agn as Th e total n u mber o f Rasi C h ak r am s

.

t herefore i s 1 2 6 x
3 x 5 x 12 1 2 7 x 15
5 3 7 47 7 12 0 So th at .

wh i le th e l imit of ti me i s 43 2 0000000 s ider i al y ears th e ,

l im it o f Rasi C h ak ra m s d urin g th at peri o d i s 5 3 7 47 7 12 0 .

These figures h a v e been st ated sim ply with th e object of

d i spe lling cert ai n wrong notions th at th e n u mber of
h o ro scopi c Rasi C h a k ra m s i s i n fin i te and th at t h e ch anges
U Npt
r a n us , e d th
une an t l s o pi pler t e no t
e pp
co dt c a ne s a re su o se o

ex er ci s ea n
y pp cai b l rei nafl e v h m ff
ue n ce o er u an a ai r s .
20 I n t r o duct i on .

g o o n fo r an i nfin ite
peri o d of t i me O n th e o ther h and it .
,

wo uld be wro ng to suppose th at t h e scope o f a N a dig r a n

tham extends to th e peri o d o f a Kalp a o r that it t reats o f
s o m any C h ak r am s The C h ak ra m s th emselves can not be
.

so m a ny i n reality th e n u mber give n above expresses th e

,

p o ssible n u mb er o f positions i n wh i c h th e planets can

be co n cert/ ed t o be placed i n t h e 1 2 si gn s o f th e Zo diac a lg e
h r a z ea t ty
'

B u t t h ey can not assu m e all th ese posit i o ns for

.
,

th is si mple reason th at t h ey h ave m ot ions of their own

,

and can only come t o pa rt i cu l ar p o si ti o ns subj e ct t o su ch

motions Agai n o f 5 3 7 47 7 12 0 horoscop i c Rasi C h ak ra m s
.
, ,

red u ced as just poi nted ou t a very l arge n u mber refers to

, ,

anim als and plan ts ( t e C h 3 on An i mal an d V egetable

, .

h oroscopy ) A gai n , i t does n ot appear that th e Nad i

.

gran tham s treat of any perio d of ti m e oth er th an th e

'

present K a l z yn ga and i t is prob abl e th at those h u man

,

C h ak ra m s th at poi nted to births i n oth er yu gas h ave bee n

rej ected N ow a n u m b er of h oroscopes th ou gh agreein g

.
,

i n the broad Z odi acal d i visions of th e plan etary pl aces ,

m i gh t sh ow great d i ff erences wh ere the d i vision s are

m ore m i nu te ; as the Na v a m s a, T ri m s am sa H ora D r ek , ,

kana D v adas am sa a n d th e l ike d iv isions and i t m i gh t be

, ,

as ked w het h er th e N a di g ra n t h am s recognize these

d ivisi ons an d i f not on w hat basis th ese Grantham s a r e
, ,

bu i lt .

T h e 3 60 d egrees of th e ecl i pti c are d i vi ded i nto 1 2

equ al parts of 3 0 deg r ees each and each d i vi si o n i s k n own
,

as a s i g n of the Zodiac E ach s ign for purp ose of N adi

.
,

g ranth ams i s d ivi ded i nto 1 5 0 parts k nown as a m ra s and ,

th ese a m sas h ave parti cul ar n ames assi gned to them su ch ,

as Va m d/z a Va in/ ma m ,Br a h m a K a t a K a t a A/z z Sa n ka r a

'

, , , , ,

a nd so forth A degree of th e eclipti c con ta i ns 5 s uch

.

parts an d each part i s d i vided i nto two h alves known as

,

P u r v ab h ag a an d U t t a rab h ag a th e first h al f and the

,

second h alf For each hal f the Nadig ra n t h a m co n tai ns

.

a l i fe an d t h is half represents i n space 6 m i nutes and i n

, ,
 I n t ro du ct i on . 21

ti m e a V ig h at ika or 2 4 seconds 8 0 th at th e nu mber of

.

h oroscopes treated of i n Nadi g ran t h a m s as regard s th e

a m s a s is N ow the first volu m e of D h r u v an adi gi ves
a bri ef accou n t of th e l ives of persons for th e many a m sas
a l rea dv referred to . Th e sketch i s qu ite i ndepend en t of
th e posi t ion of the pl anets an d h olds t ru e wi th so me
sli gh t alterati ons f ro m pla netary i n flue nces Th e poi nts .

tre a ted of refer to th e materi al poi nts of o ne s l i fe No w ’

.

i n th e case of h u man h oroscopy there i s a law con necti n g

th e a m sas wi th th e posi tions o f th e planets I l on g su s .

p ec t e d th at such a l aw of co n nectio n m ust exist For .

other w ise i t wo uld not be possi b le to describe correctl y

the positions of the plan ts se veral th ousand y ears h en ce
e

an d for such lon g ages I exa m i ned the pa ges of th e vol u m e

.

already referred to and fou nd the auth o r wri ti n g i n on e

,

place as fol lows

We sh all n o w p r oceed to state th e m ethod of d is
coverin g th e places of th e pl anets for th e several a m sas
for h u m an births ”
.

A th rill of j oy ran th rou gh m e w hi ch was soo n

followed by bitter d isappoi n tm ent For th e next cadj an .
,

leaf wh ich ou gh t to h ave contai ned th e i nfo rmation

w anted was m issin g S ome person ev ide n tly seein g th e
,

i mportance of the i nfor mati o n must h ave carried away

,

th e leaf of th e book I exami ned Ou r readers are.

requ ested to exam i n e o th er copies of th e l s t vol u m e of

the D h r u v a n adi
.

Th e au thor of N a dig r a n t h am takes u p an am s am and

j ots d own th e positio ns or th e several sets of pos iti ons of
the planets taki n g i n to consi derati o n especi all y thei r
,

Zod iacal d ivision s and by sl i ghtly alteri n g or ad d i n g t o

, , ,

the brief sketch above referred to for the a m s as fin ish es, ,

h i s accou n t of a life The au thor says t hat h e treats on l y

.

of about or 40 i m port an t poi n ts i n each l i fe No w .

u nder one of thes e accou nts a n u mber of pe rsons wil l fal l

wh ose l ives w ill sh ow di ff eren ces o f a more m i nu te natu r e
22 I n t rodnet z bn .

wh i ch th e Nadig ra n t h a m does n ot take i nto accou n t T h e .

N a dig ra n t h a m s th erefore are only very brief sketch es of

h u m an l i ves A really l earn ed astrol oger can write ou t
.

a n accou nt of a m an s l i fe 1 0 or 2 0 ti mes th e l en gth of

’

th e sketch i n a Na di g r a n t h a m .

Th is perhaps i s th e p rop er pla ce for a few word s

re gard i n g a com m on co mplai n t on th e part of persons
wh o h a v e consu lted th e Na di g ra n t h am s th at these ,

books are und er a cu rse th at th ey correctly d escri be th e

,

past even ts of a person s l i fe an d err regard i n g th e f u tu re

’

even ts Th e fau l t i s n ot th at of th e G ran th am i t certai nl y

.

would not be possi bl e for th e au th or to ascerta i n before

’

h an d at wh a t peri od of on e s l i fe th e book would be con

s u l t e d an d th en to give a correct accou n t of su ch l i fe ti l l
,

th at peri od of t i m e an d then ( for su ch an a b l e astrol oger )

,

purposel y to err Th e fact i s th at as al ready explai ned th e

.
, ,

positi on of th e pl an ets as sh ewn i n th e h oroscopes d o n ot

agree wi t h an y gi ven i n t h e Na di g ra n t h a m s Th e pos .

s e ss o r o f a Nadi g ran t h a m exam i nes a n u m ber of h o r o s c o

pes i n wh i ch th e pl a n etary posi ti on s very n earl y approach

th ose sh ewn by th e h oroscopes presented to h i m Th e .

n earer th e astrol oger approaches th e correct h oroscope ,

th e m ore n u merous wil l be th e p o i n t s o f a g r eem ent betwee n

th e l i fe suspected as th e correct l i fe an d t h e actual l i fe of
th e person N ow i f whi le th e astrol o ger reads ou t from
.
,

h i s bo o k th e person consu lti n g i t m eets wi th an y past

,

events of h is l ife n ot tal lyi n g w ith th e statemen ts of th e

book th e pages are set asid e an d oth er pages exami n ed
,
.

B ut i f n o d i screpan cy i s n oti ced th e person comes hastily ,

to th e c oncl usi on th at th e l i fe pi cked out i s h is and goes

h om e sati sfied w i th a copy of it I n su ch cases th e
, .
,

ch ances of d isappoi ntm en t are more n u merou s th an those

o f su ccess T he best pla n w ould be for a person wh o
'

. .
,

w ish es to cons u l t th e Na dig ra n t h a m s t o h ave h is h oros ,

cope prepared wi th th e hel p of th e correct modern tables

an d t he correct ay a n a m s a .
 23
'
’
[n l ro a u cl z o m

As re gard s th e first astrologi cal w ork taken u p for

transl ati on v i a th e Br i h a t J ataka of Varab a M ih i ra i t i s
, , ,

gen erall y consid ered as on e of th e best works on th e

sci ence Th e a u t h o r h i msel f says of i t as fol lows
.

Q u an tu m P
( anam a?!

t i edgfi fi fw é agé nm gé m fi II
For th e ben efit of th ose of broken attem pts to cross
th e ocean o f h oroscopy I con stru ct th i s l i ttl e boat cons ist
,

i n g of a variety of m e tres with a m ul ti pl i ci ty of m ean

”
i n gs
. M ost of th e stan zas are pu rposely i nten ded to
convey sever a l m ean i n gs Fou r co mm en tari es h ave
.

accord i n gl y spru n g u p Th e wel l known on e i s th at o f

.

Bh atta U tpal a an oth er i s know n as S u b o dh i n i both of

these are n ow w i th m e ; a th i rd com men tary i s k n own as
M n dr ak s h a ri i n wh i c h i t i s sai d th at most o f th e stanzas
,

are i nterpreted ari th m etically—th e letters al l stan d in g

for so m any fi gu res a n d th e fi gu res represen ti n g th e 2 7
asteri sms th e 12 si gns th e 9 pl an ets and so for th Th e
, , ,
.

fou rth comm en tary i s k n own as Sre e p a t ey a m .

Th e au th or h as wri tten a s mall er work on astrol ogy

kn ow n as L agh u Jataka H en ce th e prese n t work i s
.

styl ed th e Brih a t J ataka Jataka o r h oroscop y i s on e of

.

th e th ree secti ons of Jyoti s S astr a an d th e au th or h as

-

treated of all th e th ree bran ch es T he oth er t wo branch es .

are S amh ita and Astronom y V a rah a M ih i ra s work .

’

o n th e form er known as th e B t i b at S amh i ta i s n ow

, ,

bei n g tran sl ated by m e and h i s astronom i cal work i s

,

known as Pa n c h as iddh a n t ika I t was long su pposed to

.

to h ave bee n l ost Fortu na tel y two copies o f th i s rare

.

work were recently d i scovered an d th ey were pu rchased ,

by th e B ombay Govern m en t M Th ibaut Ph i l D r i s . .

, . .
,

n ow preparin g an ed i tio n an d a n E n gl ish transl ati on of

th e sa m e assisted by Pand i t S u dd h ak a ra V ara h a M ih i r a
, .

h as also writte n a work kno w n as Yo g ay a t ra A man us .

24 I n t ro du ct i o n .

c ri
p t
copy of th is work i s wi th D r K erne, . n ow i n L eyd ou ,

H olland .

I
h ave deem ed i t ad vi sable to expl ai n an d retai n th e
use of a n u mber of S anscri t term s for the con ven i ence o f
th e nati ves o f th i s cou n try w ho m ust be m ore fam i l iar
,

w ith th e m th an w i th th ei r E n gl i sh equ ivalen ts w h ere

su ch exist It m ay be wel l to state h ere som e of th e sub
.

j ec t s tre a ted of i n th e work n ow taken u p for transl ati on .

Th e book c o ntai ns 2 8 ch apters T h e fi rs t two ch apters .

rel ate to d efin iti ons of astrological terms an d to el em e n

tary pri ncipl es th e t h i rd rel ates to an i m al and vegetabl e
,

horoscopy Th e fou rth treats of th e determ i n ati o n of

.

th e n atu re of i ssu e —th ei r ph ysical pecu l iari ti es fort u nes , ,

& c fro m th e plan etary posi tion s at th e ti me of c o n c ep

.
,

t i on A ch apter is devoted to th e dete r m i n ation of th e

.

d escri pti on of th e place of bi rth an d th e oth er i nci d en ts

con nected wi th th e ti m e of bi rth fro m planetary pos iti on s
wi th a vi ew to th e correct ascertai n me nt of th e L agna .

Th e next ch apter treats of earl y d eath Bal ari sh t a a n d ,

.

th e n ext is de voted to th e d eter m i n at ion of th e len gth of

l i fe o f a n ati ve — J a t aki A ch apter i s d evoted to th e par
.

t i c u l ar avocat ion s of m en an d to th ei r sou rces of wealth .

Th en foll ow several i m portan t ch apters o n Raj a and

oth er Yogas Th e ch apter on Pr av rij ya yoga d eterm i n es
.

u nder wh at plan etary aspects a n ati ve wi ll tu rn ou t an

asceti c Th e chapter h eaded An i sh t adh y aya c o n t ai n s a
.

n u mber of m al evol ent planetary pos iti ons each con nected ,

wi th som e evi l o f h u m an l i fe A chapter i s d evoted to.

w omen Th is i s followed by a chapter wh i ch d escribes

.

th e parti cul ar m an ner i n wh i ch a perso n m eets wi th h i s

death and th e n atu re of h i s futu re li fe I n th e n ext ch ap .

ter th e au th or l ays d o w n rules for th e d etermi nati on

of th e h oroscope of a person i gnoran t of h i s ti m e of bi rth .

The above i s n ot a compl ete l i st and i t wou ld be wron g ,

to j u d ge of th e i nteresti n g n atu re o f th e conte n ts o f each

ch apte r from the brief accou nt given ab ove .
 ASTRO L O G IC AL TE RMS
“
.

Th e foll owi n g l ist of Astrologi cal term s d efined i n

the fi rst two ch apters a nd ar ra n ged al ph abet i cally wi th
.

th e st anzas given opposit e to e ac h i s publ ish ed fo r con

v e n ien ce of re ference

C h Stanza . .

Agna ( ro t h ho u se )
Ak o k era ( G reek n ame fo r M akara C ap r1co rn ) ,
.

Amb u ( 4t h h ouse )
An gles or qu ad r an ts th e 1 r stre ngth ,

An t ya b h a ( Sign M eena ,

Apo k l im a ( th e 3 rd 6 t h 9 t h and 1 2 h ouses

, ,

from th e ascenda nt ) .

Aspects planetary
,

As t ab h a v an a ( 7 t h house or setti n g sign )

Ast an g at a pl a nets
At im it rag rah a ve ry frie ndly planets
,

At isat r u g r ah a v e r y i ni mical planets

,

B .

Be nefic planets
Ben e fic si gns
B i ped si gns the 1r st r engt h
,

C .

C astes pl anetary d i visions o f

, . .

C e n t i p e d si gns th ei r ,

C h ara r asi movabl e si gns

,

C h at u r asr a 4t h a n d 8 th h ouses
,

C h at u s h p ada rasi q u adru pe d si gns,

C h es h t a b a la 1n o t io n al stren gth of pl anets

,

Cl oth es planeta r y d i vi sion s o f

,

Colo r s , p l anet ar y d iv isions o f . 4 5

 At
r
i
528 l
s ro o z oal
g Ter m s .

C olo r s of Zodia cal si gns

,

C ommon s igns

D .

D a k s h in a asis Sou th ern si gns

r ,

D epression signs an d d eg r ee s "

D evas planetary d i visions o f

,

D h at u s or el ements of th e body planet a ry ,

d ivisions of
D ik bala q u arterl y stren gth o f pl anets
,

D i k d i rection of pl ane ts
,

D i rection s of pl anets
D i u r n al s igns
D re k k an as th ei r lords ,

D rish ti planetary si gh t o r aspect

,

D u s c h ik y a 3 rd h ou se
D w a das ab h av a si gnificat ion o f th e 12 house s
,

Dw ada sam s a di vision of a si gn i nto 12

,

parts
D welli n g h o u ses p l aneta r y d i visions o f
,

parts of
D w ip ada r as is b 1p ed si gns ,

D yu n a 7 t h house
,

E aste r n si gn s
E lements, dh at u s, of th e bod y plane tary
,

d i vi sions of
E lements pla netary d1v 1s 1o n s of
,

E x altation s i gns and d e g r ee s

Female p l anets
Femal e s i gn s
Fi xed s igns
Flavor pl a neta r y
,

Foot si gns th at rise wi t h t h e i r

,

F o r ms of t h e s i gn s
 At
s rolo
g i ca l Ter m s.
‘

20

C h S tanza . .

Fo r m s o f t h e p l an et s o
II 8 to 11
Friendly pl anets II 15 to 18

G ar ments , p l anetary d i vi s i ons of

G reek names for Zodi acal si gns
Gu na , temper planeta r y d iv isi ons
,

H .

H eads , si gns th at rise wit h th e i r

H ead an d tail , si gn th at rises wi th i ts ’
H
H erm aph rod it e IH
H i b u k a, 4t h h ous e H
H ora H
H oras , th ei r lo r d s H
H ouses t hei r lord s H
H ridro g a G reek n am e fo r K u riib h a Aq u ar1us
,

.
,
. H

Immovab l e signs
I n1m 1cal p lanets

J am it ra 7 t h h ou se
,

J ati C aste o f th e planets

, ,

J it u m a G reek nam e for M i t h u n a G em m i

, ,

J uka G reek nam e fo r Tu la , L ibra

,

K .

K al a ti me , pl anetary length s of
,

K ala bal a peri od ica l st r en gth of pla n

, ets
Ka l apu ru sha pla net t r y d ivisions o f
,
. .

Ka l a
pu rush a Z od i a cal di vi s i o n of
,

Karm as t h anam l ot h h ouse ,

K end ra , qu ad r ants o r an gles , th ei r

Kou rp ya, G r eek nam e fo r Vri sch i k a, S co r pi o .
30 At
s r ol og i cal Ter nl s .

K ria , G reek name for M esh a, A r ies -

K u l i r a, K ataka , C ancer

L agnaw,
st r engt h of
L eya, G reek name for Si mh a L eo
,

M ale planets
M ale si gns
M al e fic planets
M al e fic signs
M easu remen t of th e Zo diacal si g ns
M e s h oo ran a 1 0t h house
,

M etals pl a netary d i vi sions of

,

M i t r a g ra h a fri endly planets

,

M oola T r ik o n a si gns an d the i r

,

M oti on al stren gt h of planets

Movable si gn s
M ovabl e a nd i mm ovab lesi gns

Naisarg ik ab al a ,
natu ral relati ve st r ength
,

o f plan ets
N ames vari ous for planets ,

N a p u m s ak a graha, h ermaph rod ite plan

,

ets
N atu ral relati ve stren gth of planets
, ,

Nav am sa d i vi sion of si g n i nto 9 pa r ts an d

,

th ei r l ord s
Ne ec h a ,
d e p res s1o n s 1g n s

N eutral pl anets
N octu r na l si gns

Pa n ap ara si g ns , 2 u d, 5 th , 8 th 1 1t h hous e ‘

I
s II
a
.

Pa p a g rah a , ni al e fic pl anets .

Pap a ras i, 1n al e fic signs

Rasch im a ras1, W es t ern s i g ns
.
 At
s rol og iczz l
’

Tcrm s .

Pat h o n a, G reek name fo r K anya V i rgo ~

,

Periodi cal stren gth of th e planets

Pol iti cal d i vi sions of th e pl anets
Position al stren gth of th e planet s .

P rak rasis E astern si gns

,

P ri s h t o da 3 a rasis s i gn s ri si n g wi th thei r
, b

P u ru sh a gra h a ma l e p l a n et s ,

P u rush a ras is mal e si gn s ,

Q uad rants th ei r stre n gth

,

Q uad ru ped si g ns th ei r strength ,

Q uarterl y streng t h of plan ets

Rasi s Si gns n ames of

, ,

Rasi s th e i r lord s
,

Rik s h as a n dh i d efined ,

Ritus planetary d i vi si ons of

,

Ru pa shapes of planets
, ,

Rupa shapes of si gns

, ,

S .

Sama grah a neu tral pl anets ,

Sat ru graha i n i mi cal planet s

, . .

Seasons pl an etary d i vi si ons of

,

Sh ad v aa r g a 6 modes of th e d i vi sion of th e
,

ecl ipti c
Shapes of th e si gn s
Shapes of th e planets
S i ghts or aspects of the plan ets
Si gns names of
, .

S i gns th ei r lords
,

Sig n i fic a t io n s of th e 1 2 s 1 g n s of Z o
,
diac
Si rap ris h t o day a rasi si gn th at ri ses wi th i ts
,

h ead and tai l

Si ro daya rasis si gn s th at ri se wi th th ei r
,

h ead s
t
Sou her m si gns
St h an ab al a posi tional s t ren g t l i of l anets
,
p 0 9 .
82 Asl rolog z cal
'

Ter m s .

St h i1 a rasis , fixe d s i gn s .

St re e g rah a, femal e pl anets

S tree ras i s femal e s igns ,

S tren gt h of L agn a
S u b h a g r ah a b en efic planets ,

Sukha 4t h house
,

Su t ab h a 5 t h h ouse ,

Sw ak sh e t ra houses and t h eir l o rds

T .

T ails si gn s th a t ri s e wi th t h ei r
,
I
Ta pas 9 t h h ouse I
T av u r i G reek nam e for V ri sl iabh a Tau r us
,

, I ,

Temper of pl anets ,
. II
T o u k s h i k a G reek n ame for D h a n u s Sagitta r i I
, , .

Tri an gu l a r si g n s I
T r ik o n a 5 t h h ouse , I
T rik o n a rasi t ri an gu lar s 1g n s ,
.
I
T r i m sam sa d ivision of s i gn i nto 3 0 parts
, I
T rit rik o n a 9 t h h ouse , I

U b h aya rasi , movabl e an d i m movable si gn s ”

U c c h a ra s i, si gns of exaltatio n With

U p ac h ay a o r i m prov i n g si gns "

U ttara ras i N orth ern , sig ns

d efin ed
V arg o t t am a,
Varna color o f planets
,

Varna color of Zodi acal si gns

,

Vesi 2 u d h o u s e fro m t h e S u n
,

Vesma 4t h house ,

W este r n si gn s
2 E f f/t at J dl a kd .
[C H
. 1 .

A nd i n th e V edas we fi nd th e ( visi ble) Moo n briefly

d efi ned as follows
S u ry a ra sm is c h a u d1 am a h .

The Moon i s th e rays of th e Sun .

2 Though vari ous well writ t en w orks on A strology

.

( a ) t h e prod u ctions of abl e men exist for th e enli ghten

m ent o f i ntelligen t students ( of h oroscopy ) I begi n t o ,

con stru ct ( th i s ) small boat ( consi sti ng) of stanzas ( wri tten )
i n various metres a n d of several m ean i ngs for ( th e benefit
o f) persons of broken attempts to cross th e va st ocean of

horoscopy .

N OT E S .

( a ) S u ch works as th ose of Para s ar a, G arga B adara ,

y an a Sat y ac h ary a and oth ers

'

.
,

3 According to some th e word fro m i s a corru ption

.
,

o f th e Word A/z or a / r z the first and l ast l etters ( syllables )

'

be i n g dropped Th e sci enc e ( of h oroscopy ) treats of th e

.

e ff ects of t h e good an d bad dee ds ( ka rma ) of m e n i n th ei r

previou s bi rt h s .

4 Th e ( twel v e ) sign s of th e Zodi ac commenci ng

.
,

wit h th e fi rst poi nt of Ari es and of ( th e asterism of)

Asw in i and consisti n g e ach of ni ne stellar qua rt ers and
, , ,

form i n g a ci rcle are respectively th e h ead fa ce breast

, , , ,

h eart belly n avel abdomen g en ital organ two th i g h s

, , , , , ,

t wo k nees two a nkles and th e two feet of K a l ap u r ns h a

,
.

( Th e terms ) Rasi K s h e t ra G raha Rik sh a Bha m

, , , , ,

Bh av an a are synonymous terms

,
.

NOT E S .

Th e fol lowin g table wi ll be u seful for pu rposes of re ad y

referen ce
R sia . 5
M esh a A ries
Vri sh ab h a Tau r us
o n L]. Bl '

r z z al J am/ca
“
.

P ar/ l f o bo dy .

Breast
I I ea rt
B el ly
N avel
Abdome n
G eni tal orga n
0 0 . Two thi gh s
Two knees
' 00 O D . N o ankles
T w o fee t

Th e twe n ty seve n asteri sms a r e

-

As wi n i BAri et is
B h aran i 3 5 Ari etis and Musca ,

K r it t ik a 7 Tauri Alcyon e ,

Rohini a T a u ri A
. l d e b a ra n
,

M rig as irsh a P O rionis

Ardra a O rioni s
P u n a r v as u BGemini Pollu x
Pushya 3 Canc r i
As h l es h a 8 H ydrae
Magh a a Leon i s Re g ulas
.
,

P Ph a l g u n i
. 8 Leonis
U P h al g u n i
. BLeonis
H asta 8 Corvi
Ch itra at Virg inis Spica
a Bo o t is A
rc t u ru s
,

z Librae
8 Scorpioni s
a Sco rpionis A
. r i t a res ,

l Scorpi oni s
8 Sa g ittari i
6 Sagitta ri i
a Aquilae Atai r
.
,

BD elphin i
z Aqua r i i
,
4 Bih r at J a l a llcl
‘
.

P Bh adrap ada
. a Pe g asi
U . Bh adrap ad a 7 Pe g as i & An dre m e dae
Re v at i S Pisci t nn

Th ese asterisms or lu n ar m ansions are d ivided each

i n to fou r equ al parts k now n as N ak s h a t rap a das I h ere
’
.

a re therefore 1 08 su ch parts i n th e ecl i pti c an d each si gn ,

contains n i n e su ch parts o r 2 } stellar d ivisi on s Th e .

fi rst a steri sm Asw in i commences at th e fi rst poin t of

, ,

Aries wh i ch i s th e star Re v a t i abou t

,
2 0°
to t h e east o f
,

the V ern al E qu i nox — ( V id e Int rod uction ) so th at th e ,

s econ d qu arte r of th e asterism of K ri t t i k a com men ces at

th e first poi nt of Tau rus Th e th i rd qu arter of th e asterism

.

of M ri g as irs h a commen ces at th e fi rst poin t of G emi n i

a nd th e fou rth quarter of th e asterism o f P u n ar v a s u
commences at t h e first poi n t of C ancer and so on ,
.

E ach o f th e term s Rasi K s h e t ra G r a ha et c m eans

, , ,
.
,

a si gn of th e Zod i ac wh i ch i s a twe l fth part of th e

,
°
h eave ns or 3 0 of th e ecl i p ti c .

5 . Si gn P isces i s of th e shape of ( a ) two fish si gn

Aqu ari us i s of th e s h ape of a m an w ith a ( water ) pot ;
s i gn G e m in i i s of th e sh ape of a m a n an d woman ( th e ,

fo r mer ) wit h a stick an d ( th e latter ) wi th a lyre both ,

s eated i n one se at si gn Sa g ittari i s of th e sh ape of a m an

wh o i n h i s l o w er parts i s a h orse ; si gn C apricorn i s of th e
sh ape of a crocodil e wi th th e face of a deer ; si gn L i bra

i s of th e sh ape of a person with scal es ( i n h i s h and ) and

si g n V i rgo i s of th e shape o f a vi rgi n i n a boat wi th

crops ( i n on e hand ) an d a li gh t ( i n th e oth er ) Th e .

o the r si g ns resem ble i n sh ape ( 5 ) th e d i ff e r en t cr e atu res

d e noted by th e 1r n ames The dwelli n g p l aces of th e

.

s everal si gn s a re places appropriate to th e se ve r a l

c r eatu r es .

N O T ES .

( a) Si g n P i s c es is o f t h e sh ap e o f t wo fis h l yi ng
CH . L] Bih
r at J ci l a lt a
'
. 5

si de by side th e h e ad of th e o n e bein g n e ar th e ta il o f
,

the oth er .

( 5 ) Th at i s Aries ( Mesh a ) is of t h e sh ape of a ra m

,

Tau ru s ( V r is h ab h a) of th e sh a pe of a b ul l C a n ce r ( Ka t a
,

k a ) of th e sh ape of a crab ; L e o ( Si mh a ) of th e sha pe of

, ,

a l ion ; a 11d S corpi o ( V ris c h ik a) of th e shape of a scorpi o n , .

Th i s stanza as well as stanza 4 are c h ie flv u sefu l i n

questi on s con nected w i th h orary astrol ogy —i n th e d isco
very of stol en propert y an d th e l ike .

M ars V enu s M e rc m y th e M 0 0 11 th e Sun Me r

6 , , , , ,

cu ry V en u s Mars J u pi te r Sa t u rn S atu rn an d J u pi te r
, , , , ,

are respecti vel y th e l ord s of th e Sig n s and o f th e Nav a m ,

sas a n d D wadasa m s a s ; an d th e several si gn s ( o f th e

Z od iac b e g m n i u g from Ari es ) com m en ce respecti vel y
w i th th e Na v a m s as of Mesh a M akara Tul a an d K ataka , , .

N O TE S .

S i x modes of d ivis ion of th e ecl ipti c for h oro

scopi c pu rposes k now n as th e Sh a dv a r g a are m en ti oned
vi de stanza T hese are R asi ( s ig n ) i n wh i ch th e
(
°
e cl i pti c is d i vid ed i nto 1 2 e q u al parts of 3 0 each ( vid e
s tan z a H ora i n wh i ch each s i g n i s d i vi ded i n to t w o
°
equ al parts of 1 5 each ( vid e stanzas 9 an d Brekka
n a i n wh i ch a si gn i s d i vided i nto th ree equ a l parts of
10 each ( vide stanzas 1 1 an d
°
Na v a m s a i n wh i ch a
° '
s i g n i s d i vid ed i n to n i n e equ al parts of 3 2 0 each ; D wada
sama i n wh i ch a s i g n i s d i vid ed i n to twelve equ al parts
,

of 2 3 0 each a n d T r im s a m s a 1 11 wh i ch a si gn i s d i vide d
° ’
,

i nto th irty equ al parts of a d egree each ( vid e stanza

Th e Na v a m s as E ach si gn bei n g d i vi ded i n to 9 equ al
parts and there bei n g 1 2 su ch si gns there a re i n al l 12 x 9 ,

or 108 su ch d ivisi on s i n th e ecl iptic We have al ready .

vi de stanza 4 seen that the ecl i pti c contai ns 2 7 x 4 or

( )
108 stel la r quarters or Nak s h at r a p adas ; i t follows there
fo r e that a N av a m s a i s a Na k sh a t ra
p a da i
, th at s o e
n '
6 Bih
r at
l
J c ta zcll .

fou rth of a l u n ar man si on T h e 1 08 Na v a m s as begi nn i n g

.

fro m th e fi rst poi n t of Ari es bear th e sa me n a m es as th e

twel ve si gns of th e Zod i ac cou nted o ver a n d over a gai n
th e first Na v a m s a of Mesh a i s Mesh a i tsel f ; th at of V r 1
sh abh a i s M akara ; th at of Mit h u n a i s Tul a an d th at of
K ataka i s Kataka i tsel f Th e sa me orde r h old s for th e 4.

si gn s from Si mh a to V r is c h i k a an d for th e 4 fro m D h a n u s

to Meen a I n oth er words th e fou r sets o f T r ik o n a or
.

tri an gular si gns begi n w i th th e sam e Na v a m sas that is ,

th e T r ik o n a si gns of
Mes h a S i mh a D h anu s begi n w ith th e Na v a m sa of
, ,

Mesh a .

V r is h ab h a K anya M akara begi n w i th th e Nav am s a

, ,

of Mak a ra .

M it h u n a Tul a K u m bh a begi n w i th th e Na v a m sa
, ,

of T ul a a nd ,

K ataka V r isc h ik a M eena begi n wi th th e N av a m s a o f

, ,

K atak a .

Th e D wada sa m s as T h e twel ve parts i n to wh i ch

e a ch s i gn i s d i vi ded bear th e sam e n am es as th ose of th e
si gns of th e Zod i ac Th e n a m e of th e fi rst D wada sa m s a
.

of a parti cular s ig n i s th e n am e of th e s i g n i tsel f S o .

that th e 12 D wadas a m s as of Mesh a are Mesh a V r is h a b h a , ,

M i t h u n a & c end i n g wi th Meena

, . , Th ose of V ris h a b h a .

are V r ish ab h a M i t h u n a K ataka & c end i n g wi th M esh a

, , , .
, .

Th o se of M i t h u n a are M 1t h u n a Katak a, Si mh a & c , , ,

.

end i n g wi th V r is h ab h a and so on .

Th e l ord s o f th e Nav a m s as and D wa da sam sa s are

th e sam e as th e lords o f th e R asi s ( si gns ) Th ese a re .

m enti oned i n th e text i n th e order of th e si g ns I t wi l l .

be fou nd th at th e S u n an d M 0 0 11 h ave each a h ous e ,

wh i le th e oth er plan ets h ave each two h ouses Thes e .

h ouses are k nown as S wak s h e t ras : th us

M ars i s th e l ord of Mesh a a n d V risc h ik a .

V e n u s i s t h e l o r d o f V rish ab h a and T u l a .
CH 1 ]
. B l al'

rz z J a l a lz d
‘
. 7

Mer c u ry i s th e l ord of M it h u n a and K anya .

J u pi ter i s th e l ord of M ee na a n d D h a n u s .

S atu rn i s th e l ord of K u mbh a and Maka ra .

T h e Moon i s th e lord of K ataka and th e S u n i s th e ,

lord o f Si m h a .

Th ere are several m odes o f cons t ru cti n g a fi gu re o f

th e h ea v ens Th e on e u sed i n S ou th e rn I nd i a i s th e on e
.

r ecom me nd ed by J ai m i u i th e au th or of Astrol ogical

Aph orisms I t i s gi ven b elow a nd th e reader i s referred
.

to th e appen d i x fo r d i agram s rel ati n g to th e several

m odes of d i vi sion of th e ecl i pti c referred to above .

Ku m b h a, Sa t u r n K a t a ka , M o o n .

RA SI CH AK RA .

Ma kara , Sa t u rn ,
i h
Sm a, Su n .

Dh a n u s, J u p t e r i .

7 Fi ve fi ve ei gh t seven and five parts ( d egrees )

.
, , ,

ar e res p ecti vel y th ose of Mars Satu rn Ju pi ter Mercu ry , , ,

and V e n u s i n th e odd si gn s I n th e e v e n si gn s th ei r .

order i s reversed Th e ends ( l ast Na v a m s as ) of Kataka

.
,

V ri s ch ika and M een a are k nown as R iksh a sand h is .

N O T ES .

T h is stanza d efin es T r i m s a m sas a n d thei r l ord s As , .

al read y observed T r im s a m s a i s d ivi si on of each si gn i nto

,

th irty equal parts each part b e i n g a d egree T h e od d

, .

si gns are Mesh a M i t h u n a S i mh a T ula D h an u s a n d

, , , ,

K u m bh a T h e ev e n si gn s a re V r is h ab h a Kataka K an y a
.
, ,

V r isc h ik a M akara and M eena

, .

In th e od d si gn s th e first five d egrees are th e Tri m

,

sam s as of M ars ; th e n ext fiv e a re th ose of Satu rn t h e n ex t

8 Bihr at J el l o /ed
.

ei gh t are those of Ju pi ter th e ne xt seve n are those o f

Mercu ry an d th e l a st five are th ose o f V enu s . In th e
eve n s i gn s th e first fi v e are those of Ven us th e n ext seven
,

a r e those of Mercu r y ; th e n ext eigh t are t h ose o f J u p i t e r

th e n ext fi ve are those of S atu rn an d th e l ast fi v e are

th ose of Mars Th e T r i m s am s a d i visio n i s u sed by th e
.

aut h or i n h is C hapter rel ati n g to th e h oroscopy of women .

8 Th e terms K r iy a T a v u ri J it u m a K ul i ra L e y a
.
, , , , ,

P a t h o u a, J 11 k a , K o u r p i, T o u k s h i ka, Ak o k e ra , H ri dro g a
and Aty n ab ha are oth er names for si gn s of Z od iac .

NO T E S .

Al l th e above n am es excepti n g K u l i ra and An t yab h a

, ,

are evi dently G reek terms —a ci rcu mstan ce cl early i ndi ca

t i n g th at t h e i ntercourse bet ween th e l earn ed men of Ind ia
and H ell as w as more th an su perfici al .

9 A pl anet is said t o be i n i ts Va rg o i f it be i n its

.

D re k k a n a H ora Na v am s a T r im s am s a D w ada s am s a an d
, , , ,

K sh et r a Th e term H ora means both th e risin g si g n and

.

one h al f of a si gn of t h e Zod i ac
- .

N OT E S .

Th ese t er ms h ave al read y been e x pl ai ned ( vid e .

stanza
Th e term K s h e t r a means a house or a si gn For th e .

N ames a n d L ord s of th e H or a d i vision s of a si gn v ide , ,

S tanz a 1 ]
10 Th e si gn s Aries Tauru s Gemi n i C a n cer Sagi t
. , , , ,

t ari and C a pricorn are known as t h e n i g h t si gns ; ( a) and ,

w i th t h e excepti on of G emi ni th ey rise wi t h th ei r feet ,

Th e oth er si gns r ise wit h t h ei r head s ( c) and are po w e r ful

by d ay ( cl ) Th e two fish ri se by both ( h ead and foot ) ( c)
, . .

N OT ES .

( )
a Th erefore.
th e d ay s i g n s are Leo V i r go Libra, , ,

S corpio A q uariu s an d P isces

, ,
 10 Bih r at J o l a kci
‘
.
[C H . I

(a) For e x ample : Th e l ords of th e th ree D rek k an as

’
.

o f Leo a r e respecti vel y t h e S u n (lord of L eo ) J u pi ter ,

lord of Sagi ttari th e 5 t h h ouse ) an d Mars ( lord of Aries

,

th e 9 t h house ) .

12 . Accord i n g to s ome (a ) th e lords of th e two h ora s

of a si gn are respecti vel y th e l ords of th e si gn and o f th e
1 1t h si gn and th e lords of th e three D rek k an as of a
si gn are respecti vel y th e l ords of th e si gn th e 12 t h sign ,

a nd th e 1 1 t h si g n ( c) from i t .

NO T E S
(a )
That i s a cc ord i n g t o G arg a an d m en o f h i s
.
,
’
school B ut th e au th or s o pi nion i s th at expressed i n
.

stanza 1 1 i n wh i ch h e i s su pported by the opi nion of Satya

c h arya .

( o)
Th e l ords of t h e t w o h ora s of Sagittari for i n
.
,

stan ce are respecti vely J u pi ter ( lord of Sagi tt ari ) an d V e i

,

n u s ( lord of L i bra th e 11 t h h o u se ,
‘
.

Th e l ord s of th e th ree D re k k an as of Sagi ttari for ,

i nstan ce are respecti vel y J u pi ter ( l ord of S agi ttari ) Mar s

, ,

( lord of S corpio th e 12 th h ouse ) a n d Venus ( lord of Libra

, ,

th e 1 1t h h ou se ) .

13Th e si gns Aries Tau rus Capri corn Vi rgo

.
, , , ,

Cancer Pi sces an d L ibra are respecti vel y th e Ucc b a

,

( exaltati on ) si g n s of th e S u n an d oth e r pl a ne ts Th e .

1 0t h 3 rd 2 8 t h 15 t h 5 t h 2 7 t h a n d 2 0t h are th e d egre es
, , , , , ,

o f mai n exaltat ion of th e several pl a nets Th e 7 t h or .

opposi te si gn s are th e Ne e c h a ( d epressi on ) si gn s a nd th e

d egrees of mai n depressi on are th e s a me as gi ven above .

NOTES
A planet i n h i s exal tati on s i g n i s co n s de r e d as exceed
'

i n g l y powerfu l and on e i n h i s d epression sign as exceed

i n g l y weak T h e S u n a n d Moon are also treated as p l a
‘

n se t.
T h e H ind u A s tr ol o i ca l ord r of t h e pla ets i s t h
g e n e ,
. . CH L ]
. Bf/m l i
f
11

same as th e d ays of th e week Th e followi n g table i s .

give n for con ven ience of reference .

Nooc/z a
'

P l a rz ol s ’
. Ucc lz a or Ex ol or o c D eg r ee of m a cro
75m m
' '

fa l l e n s z grz s . }; S z lg m E x o l l a l z on o r
D ep r ess i o n .

Su n . Ari es .
L ibra . 10
M oon . Tau ru s . Scorpio . 3
Mars . C apricorn . Ca ncer . 28
M ercu ry . V i rgo . Pisces . 15
J u piter . Cancer . C a p r1co rn . 5
Ven us . P i sces . Vi rgo .

S atu rn . L i b ra . Aries .

In th e movable and oth er sign s ( a ) th e fi rst th e

14 .
, ,

ce ntral a nd th e l ast N a v am as are known as V ar g o t t a m a

posi tions Pl ane ts i n su ch posi ti ons wi l l prod u ce good
.

e ffects Th e si gns L e o Tau ru s A ri es Vi rgo Sagi tt ari

. , , , , ,

L ibra and Aqu ari u s are known as the Moola T rik o n a

,

houses of th e planets respecti vely ( 5) .

NO T E S .

(o) . Th e V ar g o t t am a p l aces are

Th e l s t Na v am s as o f th e fou r m o vabl e si gns Ar ies ,

C ancer L i bra and Capricorn

, ,
.

Th e 5 t h Na v a m s as of th e fou r fixed si gns Tau r u s , ,

Leo Scorpio an d Aqu ari u s

,
-

Th e 9 t h Nav am s as of th e fo u r movabl e a nd fix e d
s ig n s Gemi n i Vi rgo Sagi ttari a n d Pi sces , ,
.

Th ese N a v a m s as will be fou nd to bear th e sam e nam e s

as th e si g ns th e mselves For ex ample th e fi rst N av am s a .

of Ar ies i s Ari es ; t he fi rst of C a n cer i s C a n cer and s o ,

”

forth .

Th e fift h Nava m sa of T au r us is T au r us ; of Le o
is Leo and so fo r th .
12 Bil r zat J a t a ka
‘ ‘
. CH I. .

Th e n i nth Nav a m s a of Gemi n i i s G em i n i of Vi rgo i s

V i rgo and so fort h .
,

(l ) Th e followi n g li st cont ai ns th e Mool a

. T r ik o n a
s i gn s of th e planets
l [Moo l a Tr z lro /z a g
'

z ol s . sz fls .

S un .
L eo .

M OO 11 . Tau rus .

Mars . Ari es .

Mercu ry . Vi rgo .

J up i ter . Sagitt ari .

Ven us .
L ibra .

S at ur n . Aqu ariu s .

15 Th e s ig n i fic at io u s of the 1 2 houses fro m th e

.

r isi n g si gn ( ascend ant ) are respect ively ( a n at i ve s ) bod y

’

fami ly broth ers rel ations sons en em ies wi fe death d eed

, , , , , , ,

of vi rt u e avocation gai n and loss ( or) Th e 3 r d 6 t h 10t h

, , .
, ,

an d l 1t h hou ses from t h e ascend ant are known as th e

‘

Upa cl my a ( i m proving) s i gns bu t n o t so accord i n g to ,

some
NO T E S .

( ) Th
a e followin
. g i s a l ist of s i g n i fic at io n s o f th e seve

houses of th e Zod i ac from the ascend ant .

Ascend ant or
l st house . . . Body fame l i mbs
, ,
.

2 nd wealth eyes speech truth fu lness , , , .

3 rd bravery m eals , .

4t h ed ucati on moth e r, cows dwel , ,

li n g place carriage comfo r t , , .

i ntel li gence , prev i ou s karma .

k i nsmen d iseases ,
.

gen erosi ty , respect .

d u r ati on of l i fe .

D eed s of vi rtu e , fath er, m edi ci ne .

know l ed g e; clothe s .
CH I. .
j Er i/z a t J cl l a lt cl '
.

1 1t h e arni n g .

12 t h bad deed s travels ,

.

( b) G arga an d as t ro l o g e rs
of h is sch ool are of O pi nion
O

that th e 3 rd 6t h l ot h and 1 1 t h h ouses cease to be U pa

, ,

ch aya pl aces i f m al e fic planets or pl a nets wh i ch are u n

friendl y to t h e lord s of these 4 h ou ses sh oul d ei th er oc o n
p y su ch h ou ses or aspect th e same B u t th e Au th or does n ot .

agree wi t h Garga a nd h e i s su pported i n h i s vie w s by

Sat y ac h ary a and by Yav a n e sw ara .

16 Th e twel ve si gns of th e Zodia c beginn i n g from

.

the ascend an t are known tech n i cally as th e sig n s of ( l )

K al pa ( power) ( 2 ) Sva ( wealth ) ( 3 ) V i k ram a ( prowess ) ( 4)
, , ,

G rah a ( d welli ng place ) ( 5 ) P rati bh a ( i ntel ligence ) ( 6)

, ,

K sh ata ( wou nd ) ( 7 ) Manmatha ( desi re ) ( 8 ) Ra n dh r a

, ,

( h ole ),( 9 ) G ur u ( fath er or preceptor ) ( 1 0) M an a ( resp ecta ,

b il it y) ( 1 1) Bh av a ( acqu i si tion ) ( 1 2 ) V y a y a ( loss ) Th e

, , .

4t h an d 8 th houses are k nown as C h at n r as ra si gns Th e .

7 t h h o u se i s known as D y z wz a and the 1 0t h hou se i s

‘

k nown as Ag n u .

NO T ES .

A n u mber of ast r ologi cal terms i s d efi ned i n t h i s

s t anza .

17 T h e l st 4t h 7 t h an d 1 0t h h ou ses are known as

.
, ,

K a n t ak a or K end ra or C h at u s h t ay a h ouses ( qu ad ran ts o r

an gles ) If th es e four h o u se s sho uld h app e n t o b e
.

bi ped aqu a tic , c e n t ip e d and qu ad r u p ed resp ecti vel y th e y

, ,

th en poss ess stren gth .

NO T E S .

Th e bi ped si gns are : G e m i n i L ibra V i rgo th e fi r s t , , ,

h al f of Sagittari and Aqu ari u s .

Th e aqu at 1 e s 1 g n s are : C ancer th e fi rst h al f of

-
,

C apr icor n an d P isces .

Th e o n l y c ent ip ed s i g n is S co r p i o
. .
 14 Bl ’

r z zal j dl a kcl .
[C H I . .

Th e qu ad ru p ed sign s are A ri es Tau rus L e o t h e , , ,

s econd h al f of Sagi ttari and th e fi rs t h alf of C apricorn .

18 Th e houses n ext to th e an gl es ar e known a s

.

Pa n ap ar a h ous es and th ose n ext to t h e m are known as

Ap o k l im a houses Th e 4t h house i s known as H ib u k a
.
.

Ambu Sukh a and Vesm a Th e 7 t h h ouse i s known as

, .

J a m it r a T h e 5 t h h ous e i s k nown as T r i k o n a Th e
. .

10t h house is known as M e s h oo r a n a and Karma .

NO T E S
and Ap o k l i m a
‘

Pa n ap ar a ar e Greek t e rms .

Th e P a n ap a r a hou ses are th e 2 n d, 5 th , 8 t h and

1 1t h h ouses .

Th e Ap o k l im a hous es ar e th e 3 r d, 6 t h , 9 t h and 12 t h
h ous es .

19 . th e lord of t h e ascend an t or J u piter or Mer

If
c ury shou ld e ith er occu p y i t or asp ect i t th e asce nd ant ,

( Lagna ) wo ul d becom e power fu l a n d n ot by oth er

plan ets Th e Ke n dr a si gns are n atu rally p owe rful to )
. .

Th e bi p ed si gns are powerfu l d u ri n g th e d ay th e ,

qu ad ruped si gn s at n i gh t an d t h e c e n t ip e d si gns at
,

su nrise and at su nset T h e Ma n a ( m e asu rem en t ) ( 6) of

.
,

th e first si x signs from Ari es ar e 2 0 2 4 2 8 3 2 3 6 an d 40 , , , , ,

r esp ective ly ; an d th ose of th e n e xt si x si gns are 40 3 6 3 2 , , ,

2 8 2 4 and 2 0 resp ecti v el y

, ,
Th e 3 rd h ouse i s known as
.

D u s c h i k y a and th e 9 t h as Tap as and T r it ri k o n a .

NOT E S .

It th ere fore follows th at P an ap ar a h ouses a r e

( a) .

l ess powerfu l th an th e K e nd ras an d Ap o k l i m a h ouses ,

ar e th e we ak est h ou ses of all O f th e 4 Ke ndras agai n

.
,

th e bi ped si gns ar e powerfu l i n t h e fi rst Kend r a th e ,

qu ad ru p e d s i gn i n th e 1 0t h Kend r a th e c e n t ip e d si gn i n
,

th e 7 t h K end ra an d th e aqu ati c si gn i n t h e 4t h Ke nd r a .

( o) .T h is i s use d i n St an z a 2 8 ,
C h V . .
CH . IL ] Bih a t
r Ja t a ka
’ ‘
. 15

20 Th e twelv e si gns begi n n i n g from Ari es a r e r es

.

t i v e l y ( Ari es ) r ed ( Tau rus ) wh it e ( G e mi n i ) of th e

p e c , ,

color o f th e pa r rot ( C ancer ) of t h e color of P atal i ,

t ru m p et flower ) ( L e o ) black wh i te Vi rgo ) vari e gated

( , ( ,

i n color ( Libra ) black ( Scorpio ) of gol d color ( Sagi tt a ri )

, , ,

o f th e color o f th e h usk of padd y ( C apricorn ) wh i te red , ,

Aqu ariu s o f t h e color of Mongoos e an d Pi sc es of th e

( ) ( ) ,

color o f fish Th e si gns ar e k n own as Plava ( a ) ( d epressed )

.

i n th e d irection of th eir lord s Th e 2 u d h ouse to th at .

occu p i ed by th e S u n i s known as Vesi .

N OT E S .

( )
a . For th e use of th is wi de stanza 2 1, C h . V .

C H APT E R11 .

Defin it i o n s an d E l em en t a r y Pr i n c i p l es con t i n u ed .

( Pl an et ar y )
To th e K al ap u r u s h a t h e Su n i s t h e s ou l th e
1 .
, ,

Moon i s th e m i nd Mars i s str en gth M ercu ry i s sp eech , , ,

I u p it e r i s knowl ed ge and h e al t h Venus i s d esi re and

.
, ,

Satu r n i s sorrow O f th e plan e ts th e S u n an d th e Moon

.
,

are ki n g s M ars is g e n e ral M erc u ry i s th e fi rst pri n ce

, , ,

J upiter and V e n u s are cou nsel lors a n d Saturn i s s erv a nt .

el i i s th e Su n ; Se e t h ara sm i i s th e M oon ;
2 . H
H em n a Vi t G na B o dh an a a n d I u d u p u t ra
, , (son of M oon )
.

are th e nam es o f M e rcury ; Ara Vakra K ru ra dr ik , , ,

Avan e ya ( son o f earth ) are the names o f Mars ; Kon a

'

Manda Su r y ap u t ra ( son of th e Su n ) and Asita ( th e bla ck

,

plan et) are th e n am es of S at urn .

3 . J eeva ,
An g iras a
p recep t or of th e ,
Su ra g u ru ( th e
D evas ) V a c h asam p at i i a a re th e nam es of J u piter ;
, ,

Sukra Bh r i g u Bh ri g u s u t a Si ta ( th e wh ite pl a n et )
, , , ,

As p h u j 1t are th e names of Venu s ; T a ma ( darkness)

, ,

A gu an d Asu ra are t h e n ames of Rah u ( th e Moon s ’

asce nd i n g nod e ) ; S ik l n i s t he name of Ketu ( th e M oon s

’
 Bih a t r J ci l a kci .
[C H II . .

d escen d i ng nod e ) Terms synonymous wi th th e above

.

s hould also b e accepted ( a s th e n ames of th e several

plan e ts ‘
.

4 . Th e S u n i s of a red and dark brown color ; th e -

Moon is wh i te ; Mars i s not of a tal l fi gure and i s both

red and wh i te ; Mercur y i s gree n l ike th e col or of t h e
ben t grass ; J up it er i s yel low l i ke molten gold ; V en u s i s
n ei th e r very wh i te nor v e ry bl ack an d Saturn i s black , .

N OT E S .

Th e color of a p erson will be that o f th e pl anet most

powe rfu l at th e ti m e of h i s birth .

5 . Th e Su n p resid es over coppe r col or ; th e Moo n

l
over whi te c o o r ; Mars over red color ; M ercury over
green color ; J u p ite r over yellow color ; Ve nu s ove r a
mi xtu re of vario us colors an d S atu rn over black color ( a ) .

Th e S u n i s Agn i ; th e Moon i s Varu na ; Mars i s

S ubrah manya ; Mercu r y i s Vi sh n u ; J u p iter i s Indra ;
V e n u s i s Indran i ( Ind ra s wife ) ; a n d Satu rn i s Brah m a ( o)
’
.

Th e Su n p es i de s over east ; Venus south east ; ,

-

Mars south Rah u sou th west ; Satu r n west ; th e Moon

, ,
-
, ,

north west ; M ercury north J u p iter nort h —

-
,
east ( c) ,
.

Th e wan i n g Moon th e S un Mars S atu rn

, and
, ,

M ercu ry wh en i n conj u n ction wi th an y of these are ,

m a l e fi c plan ets (d ) .

NO T E S .

( )
a T .h ese are u sefu l i n a sce rt ai ni n g th e color of
s tol en arti cles an d i n de te rmi ni n g th e colo r of th e
flowers to be u sed i n th e worsh i p o f th e pl an ets .

F i om th e powerful plane t at th e time of one s

’
( o) .

birth i t can be ascertained wh i ch parti cu lar D eva a p er

, ,

son wou ld worsh ip .

(0 Th es e are u sefu l i n determ i n i n g th e positi o n of

th e e ntran ce of th e d el i very room of a woman and i n d is
co v e r i n g t h e d irecti on of esca pe of th ie ve s,
18 Br o/ ml J amrao .
[
C H . 11 .

Ve nu s l ead s a com for tabl e li fe h as a beaut i fu l bod y , ,

fai r eyes a wi ndy and ph legm ati c natu re and bl ack c ur

, ,

l i n g h ai rs .

NOT E S .

( )
a . Ju pi ter i s th e bi ggest of al l p l anets an d th e ,

a ncien t H i nd us were aware of t h i s cen tu ries a g o .

11 . Satu rn i s lazy h as eyes o f gol d color a th i n an d

, ,
'

t al l body large teeth s t i tl h ai r an d i s o f a win d y n atu re

, , ,
.

Satu r n i s stron g i n m u scles th e Su n i n bone s t h e , ,

M0 0 11 i n blood M ercu ry i n ski n Ven u s i n semen , J u pi

, ,

ter i n flesh and M ars i n th e m arrow of th e bones

, .

12 . S un presid es over th e pl ace of worsh i p ; th e

The
M oon over wells ; M ars over th e fi re place ; M ercu ry ove r
play ground s ; J u pi ter o ver th e store room Venu s ove r
bed room an d Satu rn over places wh ere sweepi n gs are
,

gath ered .

T h e g arment of th e S u n 1 5 of th ick th read ; that of

th e Moo n i s n ew ; th at of Mars i s partly bu rn t ; th at o f
M ercury i s wet ; th at of J u pi ter i s s omewh at u sed tha t
o f V e n u s i s stron g ; and th at o f Satu rn i s torn .

The Su n presides o v er c opper the M o o n over ge m s

M ars over gold Mercu ry o v e r brass ; J u p i ter o v er si l v er ;
( a ) Ven u s over pearl s an d Satu rn o v e r 11 0 11 .

Wh en ei th er Satu rn i s i n th e ascen d an t or w h en h i s .

D rek k a n a rs r 1s i n g th e s eason d en o t ed i s S is ir a—J an ua r y

,

and Febru ary .

Wh en e i th er V e n u s i s i n t h e ascendan t or wh en h is ,

D r ek k an a i s r isi n g th e season d enoted i s V a s an t a

'

—
,

( S pri n g ) March and A pri l .

Si m ilarly m th e case o f th e Su n or M ars th e season

,

denoted 1s G re esh m a (Su mm er) —

,

M ay a n d J u ne In th e .

case o f th e Moon th e se ason i s Varsh a — Ju ly an d Au gu st

‘

, ,

I n t h e ca se o f Mercu ry t h e se ason i s Sarat ( Au t u mn

k v
CH I L]
. Bi ’
r z co l J el l o t el / . 19

Septemb e r a nd O ctober An d i n th e c ase of J upi ter th e

.

season is H e manta ( Wi nter ) —N ovember and D ece mber .

N O TES .

( a ) Whe n J u piter i s i n h isgh o u s e h e presid es ove r

.
,

1 Al l th e pl anets aspect th e 3 rd and 1 0t h houses

wi th a qu arter s i gh t ; th e 5 t h and 9 t h h ouses with h al f a
si gh t th e 4t h and 8 t h ho u ses w i th th ree qu arters of a
,
-

si gh t an d th e 7 t h h ouse wi th a fu ll si gh t b il t S atu r n
,

aspects th e 3 rd a n d 1 0t h houses with a fu l l si gh t J u pi ter

aspects th e 5 t h a nd 9 t h h ouses wi th a full s i gh t a nd ,

M ars aspects th e 4t h an d 8 t h hou ses with a ful l si gh t .

N OT E S .

Su ppose A to be a poi nt i n th e ecl i ptic occupied by a n

aspecti n g pl anet ; d i vi d e th e eclipti c i nto 1 2 equ al parts of
3 0 each b e g i n n i n g fr o m A So th at th e 1 2 poi nts o f d i v i
°
,
.

sion wi ll be those respecti vely m arked by ASO ; °

, ,

°
an d 3 3 0 an d
for p u rposes of planetary aspects these poi n ts are r esp ec ,

t i v el y the m idd l e poi nts of th e l s t 2 n d 3 rd 4t h & c to , , , ,

.
,

1 2 th h ou ses S o that a plan e t a t A aspects wi th a qu arte r

.

si gh t th e m id dle poi nts of th e 3 rd and l ot h h ouses th e ,

°
poi n ts m arked 6 0 a n d 2 7 0 respecti vely ; si milarly i t
°

°
aspects wi th a h alf si gh t poi nts m arked 1 2 0 and 2 40 °

wi th th ere quarters of a si gh t poi nts m arked 9 0 an d

-
°

an d wi th a ful l si gh t poi n t marked Th e

° h
aspects extend to 15 o n ei th er sid e of t e poi nts note d
above .Th e same remark appl i e s to th e sp eci al aspects
o f Mars J upi ter and S aturn
,
.

14 T he S u n i ndi cates s ix month s th e Moon two

.

G h a t ik as or forty ei gh t mi nu tes M ars a d ay ; I erc u ry

-
.

t w o mon th s Ju pi ter a month V e nus a fo r tn igh t a nd ,

Satu r n a y e ar .
20 E f f/l a t Jdi a /eci .
[C I L 11 °

Th e S un presid es ov er pu n gent flavor ; th e moon ove r

sal t flavor Mars ove r ac e rbi ty M e rcury ov e r m i xed
flavor J u pi ter ove r sweetn ess ; Ve nu s over sourn e ss and
S at urn o v e r b i tte rn ess .

15 Accord i n g t o some Ju pi ter is th e frie n d of th e

.

Su n J u pi ter an d M ercu ry are th e fri en ds o f th e M oon

V e nus and M ercu ry are th e fri e nds of M ars Th e Moon .
,

M ars Ju pi te r Ve n us and S aturn are th e fri ends of M e r

, ,

cury T h e Su n th e Moon M ercu r y Ve nu s an d S aturn

.
, , , ,

are th e fri ends of J u pite r M ars M erc u ry Ju pite r a n d .

, ,

S atu rn are th e fri ends of Ven us Me rcu ry J u p i ter an d .

,

Ve nu s are th e fri end s of S atu r n ( us) But accordin g to .

Sat y a c h ar y a a pl anet s friends are th e l ords of th e 2 n d

,
’

1 2 th 5 t h 9 t h 8 t h and 4t h h o u se s from h i s M o o l a t r i k o n a
, , , ,

si gn as w el l as th e lord o f th e e xaltati on si gn of su ch
plan et provid ed th e y do not conflict wi t h th e l ord s of th e
,

r emain i n g h ouses ( é ) .

NOT E S .

( a) The oth er planets are th e e nem i es

. .

Th e same m ay be expressed oth erwise th e l ord s

o f th e rem ai n i n g h ou ses a r e th e fo es of a planet prov ided

the y d o not con flict wi th th e lords o f th e seve n h ou ses

described above P utti n g th e t w o togeth e r we get th e
.

f ol lowi n g resu l ts
( 1) Th ose lord s o f th e seve n h ou ses wh o may n ot at
th e sam e ti me be the l ord s of the remai n i n g h ouses are
th e friend s of th e parti c ul ar pl anet .

( 2 ) Th os e l ords of th e latter houses wh o may n ot a t

th e same ti me be th e lord s o f th e former h ouses are th e
fo es of th e parti cular planet .

( 3 ) And th os e who m ay be th e l or d s of bot h a re

n eith er th e friends n o r th e foes o f th e particular pl ane ts .

F ollowi n g th e above rule th e au tho r h i msel f gi ves ,

fo r each pl anet h is frie nds foes a nd n e u tral s i n th e fol

, , ,

l ow ing t wo stan z as ( Vide note at t h e end o f s t an z a I 7 )

. .
C 11 . IL ] Bk rz
’

af J cit a /écf 21

16
Saturn and Ve nus are th e en emi es o f th e Su n
.
,

M e r cu ry i s h is neu tra l and the re st a re h i s fri en ds

, .

Th e Su n and Mercu ry are t h e friend s of th e M oon

and th e rest a re h er n eu trals ( a ) .

The Sun th e Moon a nd Ju pi te r are th e friend s of

, ,

M ars ; M ercu ry is h is enemy and Ven u s a nd Saturn are ,

h is neu tral s .

The Su n and Ve n us are th e frie nds o f Me rcu ry th e

Moon i s h is enem y and th e res t are h is n eu tral s
, .

17
M ercury an d Ve nu s are th e e nemies of Ju pit er
.

Satu rn i s h is n eu tral and th e rest are h i s fri end s

,
.

Me rcu ry and Satur n are th e frie n ds o f Ve n u s M a rs

and J u pi ter are h er neu trals an d th e r est are h e r en em ies , .

V en us and M ercu ry a re th e fri end s of Satu rn Ju p i

ter i s h is n eu tral a nd th e rest ar e h i s en em ies ( 6)
,
.

Th u s h ave I stat ed ove r agai n at l e n gth th e v i e ws of

Sat y ac h ary a re gard in g t h e n atu ral o r perm a nen t fri en d
sh i p en m i ty a nd neu tral ity am on g pl an ets
, .

NO T E S .

Th e Moo n h as n o e nemies
( a) . .

( b) We wil l n o w exami n e how th e au th o r arri ved at

.

th e th r e e results gi ven i n th e l ast two stanz as Take th e .

case of th e Sun H is M o o l at riko n a h ouse i s Leo ( Vi da

. .

stanz a Th e 2 n d 12 t h 5 th 9 t h 8 t h an d 4t h h ouses
, , , , ,

fr o m Leo are respecti vel y Vi rgo C an ce r Sagi ttari A ries , , , ,

P isces and S corpi o The exal tat i o n h o u s e of th e Su n i s

.

Aries T h e l o rds of all th ese h ou ses are respect i vel y M er

.

cury th e Moo n Ju pite r M ars J u pi ter an d M ars o r d rop

, , , , ,

pi n g th e repeti t i ons we get M e rcu ry th e M oon Ju pi te r

, , , ,

and Mars O f th e seven h ouses Aries bei n g repeated w e

.
, ,

h ave bee n deal in g w i th on ly si x h ouses Th e o th er si x .

h ou ses o f th e Zod i ac are Leo L ibra C ap r i corn Aqu a ri us , , , ,

Tau rusan d G e mi n i Thei r l o r ds are r e spectiv el y th e Sun,

.
22 Ba/ r 2 a! M ia /id
”

.
[C H 11 .

V enu s , Satu rn Sat u r n V e n n s an d M ercu r y or d roppi n g th e

, , ,

repeti tions and also th e S h u we get Ven us S atu rn an d M e r

, , ,

cu ry We wil l compare th ese w i th th e l ords of th e forme r

.

s e t of h ouses vi z M ercu ry Moon J up iter and Mars W e

'

.
, , , , ,

fi nd th at Merc u ry i s th e onl y planet occu ri n g i n both th e

’
li sts It i s t herefore th e Su n s n eutral Ven u s an d S a
. .

t u r n are h i s en em i es an d th e M oon Mars an d J upi ter are

, ,

h i s friend s An d so wi t h th e oth er plan ets

. .

Pl anets th at o ccupy t h e 2 n d 1 2 t h 1 1t h 3 rd l 0t h
18 .
, , , ,

and 4t h h ouses fro m a parti cul ar pl an e t are th e friends of

th at p l anet and the rest are h is e n e m i e s / o r t /z e l i m e Ac .

cord i n g to som e th e pl an ets th at o ccu py t h e exal tati o n

,

si gn of a parti cul ar pl an et are also th e fri ends o f t h a t pla

n et C om bi n i n g togeth er th e th ree n a t u r a l relati ons ( vi d e
.

sta n zas 1 6 and 17 ) wi th th e two relati on s f o r Me t i m e no w

gi ven we m ay deter m i ne th e five fol lowi n g relati ons exist
,

i ng between pl a nets At i m i t ra ( great fri end ) M i tra ,

( friend ) Sam a ( neu

, tral ) S a t ru ( enemy ) an d At is at ru
,

( great enemy ) .

NOT E S .

Sta n z a s 16 and 1 7 rel ate to th e th ree rel ations of p er

m a n ez z t fri end sh i p n eu tral i ty an d en mi ty Stanza 1 8 r e
,
.

l ates to th e two rel at ion s of t e m po r a r y fri endsh i p and e n

m ity C ombi n i n g th e two togeth er we get th e fo l l o w m g
.

resul ts .

U nd er Stan z a s U nder Stanza R esult

"

16 . 17 . 18 .

Mi tra . M i tra .

Sat r u . S atr a .

Sama . M i tra .

Sam a . Sat r u .

Mitra . Sa t r u . Sama .

19 A pl a n et h as s t h a n aba l a ( local or posi ti on al

.

t r n th ) whe n i n h is ex altation s i g n , ( a) fr i end l s i n

s e g y g ,
CH I L] Br z lz at J amar
'

. . 23

b M l i k ) i n h i s N a m s a, ( d) or i n h i s K s h e t ra ,
( ) u a t r o n a , ( c av

h ou se ( a) .

Mercu ry a n d J upi ter are powerful wh e n i n th e E as t

( f ) or ri si n g si gn The S u n an d Mars are powerful wh e n
.

o n th e Sout h o r ten th si gn S aturn i s powerfu l when i n .

th e West or setti n g si gn an d th e Moon and Venu s are ,

po w erful wh e n i n th e N orth or th e 4t h Si gn ( Patal a ) .

NO TE S .

(0 ) m il e

( 5)
( C)
( )
d

( )
8

For th e rel at i ve val ues of th ese pl aces , v id e stanz a

11 Ch X X . .

( f ) Th at i sth ey then p o ssess D Z/rbzz l a A ccord i n g to

: .

some com ment ators Mercu ry an d J u pi ter are p o werfu l

,

wh e n i n th e E astern t ri angular si gns of Ari es L eo a nd ,

S agi ttari T he S u n a n d M ars are p o werful wh en i n th e

.

S ou th ern trian gul ar si gns of Tau ru s Vi rgo and C apri co rn ,

.

Satu rn i s powerful whe n i n t h e Western trian gu l ar si gns

of G em i n i L i bra and Aquari us an d th e Moon an d Ven u s
, ,

are powerful when i n th e N orthern trian g u l ar si gns 0 .

C a n cer S corpio and P i sces For th e D i k b a l a of th e signs

,
.
,

v i de n ote ( a to stanza 1 C h I
)
° . .
,

20 Th e S u n an d th e M o on possess Cfies /z l a ba l a
.

( motional s t rengt h ) wh en i n an y of th e s i x si gns fro m

Makara Th e other pl anets p o ss e s s i t wh en i n th ei r retro

.

grade m otion or wh en i n c o nj u nction wit h th e M oo n

( Sa m ag a m a ) or w h en i n th ei r g reates t bril li ancy ( a ) or
wh en they h appen t o b e th e n orthern planets i n pl anetar y
C onj u n ction ( Y u dha
) .
24 Bi h
r at J am/ea ,
[C H . 111 .

NOT E S .

( )
0 M ercu ry i s so wh e n abou t 2 9 °
apart from th e
S un Ven us wh e n abou t 47 apart from th e Su n and th e
,
°

other pl a nets wh en i n opposit ion to t h e S u n .

21 T he M oon M ars an d S atu r n possess K a l a b a l a

.
,

( tem poral strengt h ) at n i gh t ; M ercu ry po ssesses it b oth

d ay and n i gh t and th e oth e r planets ( a ) possess it by d ay .

The m al e flc pl an ets possess i t d u ri n g th e wani n g M oon

( Kri sh na paksh a ) an d th e b e n e fic pl anets du ri n g th e wax
i n g m oo n ( Su kl a paksha ) Also each planet h as i t i n h i s
.

year m on th d ay an d h ou r
, , .

S aturn Mars Mercury J upi ter V e nus th e Moo n an d

, , , , ,

th e Sun are each n atu rally stron ge r th an the i m m ed i atel y

p reced i n g planet i n th e order stated
N OT E S .

Th at i s th e S u n Ju pi ter and Ve n u s For th e , .

'

K a l a b al a of th e si gn s u z rl e sta nza 19 C h apter I

. . .

S u ch strength i s k now n as Na is a r gi ka ba l a .

Be fo re appl y i n g th e astrologi cal truth s contai ned i n

th e subsequ en t pa ges t h e reader m ust co nsider th e stren gth
,

o r weakn ess o f each h ouse of i ts Lord and of th e planets , ,

occu pyi n g o r aspect i n g su ch h ou se F o r th ese an d vari ou s .

oth er pu rposes i t w i ll n ot d o to h ave a m ere Rasi C hakra

,

or Nav a m s a C h akra to r epres en t ro u gh l y th e pl an etar y

posi t ions Th e ac t u al lon gi tu d es ( s p h n t a) of t h e planets
,
-

an d of L agna from Re v a t i sh ould be kn own .

C H APT E R I II .

On An i m al an d Yeget ab i e H or os co p y .

1I f a t th e ti me of birth ( a ) th e m al e fic pl anets ( b)
.
, ,

be power ful ( cl th e b e n e fic planets ( d) weak and on e of th e

, ,

h ermaph rodi t e plan ets ( 3 ) ei th er be i n on e of th e Kend ras

an les ) ( f
) or as ect th e L agn a ( ascendant , th e c reat ure
)
( g p
26 . Br ih at J cit a ka
‘
.
( C H . I II .

NOT E S .

( a ) Th e r isi n g si g n sh ou l d be oth e r th a n G em i ni ,
V i r go , Li bra th e secon d h al f of Sagi tta ri an d Aqu ariu s
, .

Th at i s th e creatu re wil l be th at represented by

b
( ) ,

th e D w adas am sa wh i ch th e Moon m i gh t th en occupy .

3 I n t h e case of qu ad rupeds Ari es i s th e h ead

.
,

Tau rus th e face an d neck Gem i ni th e forel egs an d sh ou l

, ,

d ers C an cer th e back L e o th e breast V i rgo th e sid es ;

, , ,

L ibra th e belly Scorpio th e an us ; S agittari th e h i n d

, , ,

l egs ; C apri corn th e pen is or testi cle Aquari us th e but

, ,

tocks an d P isces th e tail ,

N OT E S .

I n t h e case of birds th e wi ngs sta nd for th e fo r el egs

,
.

Th is stanza wil l also enable u s to ascertai n th e color or

’
wou nd s of parti cular parts of th e creatu re s body .

4 If there be any pl anet i n th e ri sin g si gn th e

.
,

color of th e creatu re wi ll be th at of th e planet itsel f ; i f not ,

th e color w ill be th at of th e pl anet aspecti n g th e

r i s m g S i gn an d i f n o planets aspect th e risi n g si gn th e
color w ill be th at of th e rising Nav a m sa The n u m b er .

and variety of col ors will be th at of th e p lan ets occu py i n g

or as p ec t i n g th e risin g si gn ( a ) Th e n u mber of stri pes .

o n th e back of th e creatu re wi ll be th at o f th e planets

occu pyi n g th e seventh h o u se .

N OT E S .

( )
a Th e col or of th e powerful planet will predomi nate .

5 . If a Pa k s h idrek k an a ( a ) o r a C h aran av a m s a ( b )
or a Nav am s a of M ercu ry ( 0) sh oul d rise an d be oce n
p ied by powerful pla nets th e creatu re born woul d be a ,

l an d bi rd i f th e risi n g D re k k an a or Nav a m sa be ei th er ,

occu pi ed or aspected by Satu rn and a water b ird i f it b e

cu ied o r as ecte d by th e Mo o n
o c
p p ,
CH TI L]
. Bi/ r zat J dt a fz ci . 27
NO T E S
Th ese are th e second D rekk an a or degrees fro m
( us)
1 1 to 2 0 of Gem i ni th e first D r e kk a n a or de g rees fro m 1 t o
,

1 0 of L eo t h e secon d D rek k an a of L i bra and th e fi r st

,

D rek k an a of A q u ari us .

( )
b C hara or movabl e N av a m sas go by th e s am e
names as the C h ara or m ovable si gns .

( 0) T h e Nav a m sas of Me r cu ry are those of G emi n i

a n d V i rgo .
~

6 I f th e r i si n g si gn th e Moon J upite r an d the S u n

.
, ,

sh ould be weak they i nd i cate th e bi rth of a tree su ch

,

tre e wi l l be ei th er a lan d tree or a water t r ee accord i n g as

th e ri si n g Nav a m s a i s o n e o f lan d or of water ( a) T h e .

n u mber o f trees w i ll be th e n u mber of si gn s by wh i ch

th e l ord of th e ascend an t Nav am sa h as r eceded from th e
risi n g sig n
NO T E S .

Th e wate r Nav a m s a s are th ose of C a nce r, the

( 4)
second h al f of th e N a v a m s a of Maka r a, and th e Nav a m sa
of P isces .T he other Na v a m s a s are th ose of l and .

b °
( ) For i nstan ce : suppose th e 1 0 of Leo to rise , th e
r isin g Nav a m s a i s that of G e m i n i i t i s a lan d Na v am s a .

The tree will th erefo r e be on e g ro wi ng on dry l a n d T h e .

l ord of G e m i n i i s Mercury Su ppose M ercu ry t o occup y

.

Sagi ttari at th e ti me Fro m L eo to S ag ittari i s 5 si gns

. .

The n u mbe r of trees wil l therefore be 5 .

A gai n i f the lord of th e ascen dant N av am sa sh oul d

,

be ei ther i n th e exaltati on s i g n or ret r ograde i n h is m otion ,

t h e n u mbe r alre ady obtai ned shoul d be trebled bu t i f h e

s hould be i n his V arg o t t a m ab h a g a or i n h is o wn N a v am s a

o r S i g n o r D r e kk an a s u ch n u mbe r shou l d be doubled

, .

For i nstan ce i n the i nstanc e cited above i f Mercu r y sh oul d ,

ei th e r be r etrograde i n m otion o r occupy h is exal tati o n

s ig n , n ame l y, Vi rg o , t h e n u mbe r v i a , t wo , fr o m Leo s h o u l d
,
2
‘

s Bi mz j am/id
n
'

.
te n I v .

b e t rebled Thi s w ill gi ve u s si x Bu t if Me rc u ry s h oul d

. .

occ u py th e last Na v am s a of Libra ( on e o f h is N a v a in s as ) ,

th e n u mbe r i s 3 x 2 6 I f h e sh ou l d occu py G em i ni } t h e
. .

n u mber i s l 1 x an d i f h e sh oul d occupy f o r ,

i nstan ce th e second D r e k k an a of si gn Tau rus th e n u m

, ,

ber i s 2 v

7 I f th e l or d o f th e asce nde nt Nav a m s a be th e Su n

.

( a) th e tree w ill be on e stron g w i th i n i f S atu rn th e tree

, ,

will be a n u gly one i f th e Moon i t wil l be a m ilky tree

‘ -

i f M ars a th orny tre e ; i f J u pi ter a fru i t tre e ; i f Mercu ry

, , ,

a fru i tless t ree ; i f V e n u s a flower t ree ; i f th e Moon a gai n

. ,

an oil y tree an d i f Mars a tree of sou r taste , .

( a ) The co nd i tion s g i ven in th e last stanza remai n i n g

the same .

I f th e lord of t h e ascend ant Na v a m s a be a ben e

8 .

fic pla net occu pyi n g a m a l e fic si gn ( a ) th e tree wil l be a ,

sup eri or one gro w i n g o n a bad g r ou n d i f oth e rwi se th e ,

r e ve rse wi ll be th e case ( b ) th e n u mbe r of trees i s also

t h e n u mber of N a v a m s as by w h i ch th e l ord of th e
asce ndan t Nav am sa h as reced ed from h is N av a m sa .

N OT E S .

( a) T h e oth e r cond i tions gi ven i n stan z a 6 r e mai n i n g

th e sam e .

( b) Th at is i f th e l o r d of th e ascendan t
, Nav a m s a be a
m al e fic pl an e t o ccupying a b ene fic h ou se the tre e will be ,

an i n ferio r on e growi n g o n a good g rou nd .

C H A P TE R IV .

On Nish eka Kal a . or The Ti me of Co n cep t ion .

l . The m enses t hat appear m on thl y, because of

Mars and t h e Moo n ( a) b r i n g abou t conception wh e n t h e
CH . IV .
] Bih r at J a l a kci
‘
.
29

M o o n i s i n o ne of th e An u p a ch aya si gn s ( b) I f t h e Moon
'

be oth erwi se ( 0) an d be aspect e d by a be n e fi c mal e pl a n e t

d ) there wil l be sexual u n i o n be twee n a wom an an d h e r
,

h usband .

N OT E S .

( a ) M enses appear i n wom en wh en ever th e M oo n i s

aspect ed by M ars th at i s especi ally wh e n th e Mo o n ocen
,

pi es the 4t h 7 t h o r th e 8 th h ouse from Mars I n con n e c

,
.

tio n w i th th i s subj e ct th e autho r o f Sara v al i says

The Moon is water Mars i s fi re a m ixtu re o f
water an d fi re i s bil e ; wh e n th e bil e m i xes w i th th e
”
blood menstrual d isch arge occu rs
,
.

( b) I f wh en aspected by M ars th e M oon h appen s

, ,

to occu py on e of th e An u p ac h ay a si gns i n th e h o roscope o r

n ati vi ty of th e woman at th e ti me of th e appearan ce o f
,

th e m enses conceptio n wi l l follo w Th e U p ach a y a si gns

, .

a r e th e 3 r d 6 t h l ot h an d th e 1 1 t h h o u ses from th e
, , ,

ascend ant and th e other si gns are known as An u p a

ch aya si gn s .

(5 ) That is fro m th e ti me th e wom a n bath es o n th e

4t h d ay when th e Moon reaches o n e of th e U p ac h a y a
,

h ouses i n th e h oroscop e o r n ativi ty of th e h usban d .

( d)
T here will be s e xual u n i on between th e h usban d
and w i fe i f th e Moo n i s aspected by Ju pi ter wh en power
ful Th e C om men t ator adds as follows
.

“
If th e M oon i s aspected by th e Su n th e woma n ,

wil l have sexua l u ni on wi th a n o ffi cer of th e lon g ; i f a sp ec

ted by Mars then with a voluptu ary i f aspected by
,

Mercury the n wi th a person of fickle m i nd 3 i f asp ected by

,

V enus , the n w ith a beau ti fu l person ; i f asp ected by

Satu rn , the n w ith a ser v an t an d i f aspected by seve ra l
m al e fic planets , th e woman wi l l becom e a h arlot .
”

2 T h e sexu a l u n i on will be of th e natur e of th e

.

u n io n o f c r e atu r e s r ep r ese n ted b y the s et t i ng s ig n Ag ai n» a

.
30 Bih r at Ja l a t u
‘ ‘
.
[
C H.I V.

i f at th e ti me of sexual u n i on the s etti n g si g n b e eith e r

,

occu pied or aspected by m al efic pl anets su ch u ni on w i ll

’

be attended w i th an ger and i f by b e n e fic p lanets , i t w ill

,

be attended wi th pla y an d lau gh ter .

NOT E S
Th e C ommen tator add s th at i f th e setti n g si g n be
occupied or aspected by both m al efic a n d b en e fic pl anets
the u n ion will be attended wi t h both j oy an d d ispleasu re .

3 . If at th e ti me of sexu al u n i on th e S un th e Moon
, , ,

V en us a n d M ars b e i n th e i r Na v am sas ( a ) or i f J upi ter ,

occu py th e risin g si g n or th e 5 t h o r th e 9 t h si gn from i t ,

f
such u n ion wil l produ ce a ch ild To person s devoid o
.

v iril i ty th e above Yoga ( pl anet ary posi tions) w ill b e as

,

u seless as th e r ays of th e M oon to the bli nd .

NO T E S
( a) T h e C om m e ntator adds th at th ere wou l d a l so b e
conception wh en th ese fou r plan ets a r e not i n thei r Na
v a m s a s , i f th e S u n an d Ve n us sh ou l d o ccupy th e U p ach ay a

si gns i n th e h oroscope of th e m an and at th e sam e ti m e

be i n th eir Nav am s as or i f M ars a n d th e M o on shoul d
,

occupy th e U p a ch aya si gns i n th e h oroscope of th e woman

and at th e sam e ti m e be i n th ei r N av a m sas .

4 . If at th e ti me of con ception ei t h e r M ars o r Satu r n

,

sh ould occupy th e seve nth house from t h e S u n o r t h e

M oo n th e m an an d h is wi fe would respecti vely fal l i ll ( a ) ;
,

b u t i f on e of th e two planets Mars and Ju pi ter, sh ould

,

occupy th e twelfth an d th e othe r th e secon d h ou se fro m

th e Su n an d th e Moon or i f on e of th e pl anets shoul d
,

be i n conj u ncti on wi th th e Su n or th e Moon and th e othe r

s h ould aspect ei th er th e Su n or th e Moon th e m a n an d ,

h i s w i fe w ill respecti vely m eet w ith death

N OT ES .

( 0 ) I n th e mon th o f Ma r s o r Satu r n as t h e case m ay

b e ( v i de St anz a
CH I V ]
. . Br ih at J dt a ka
‘
. 31

b
( ) In t h e m onth of e ith e r S atu r n o r Ma rs whoeve r i s
powe r ful .

Th e C om mentator adds th at th e two e ff ects described

i n th e Stanza wi ll occu r be fo r e a nd not after th e bi rth
of th e c h ild .

a I n th e case of concepti on ( a ) by day th e Su n an d

.
,

Venus re presen t respecti vel y th e fath er and th e mother ;

an d by nigh t Satu rn and th e Moon rep resen t respecti vely
,

th e fath er and th e m oth er I n th e form e r case S atu rn

.
,

an d t h e Moon represent respecti vel y th e paternal u ncl e

and th e matern al aunt and i n t h e l atter case the Su n an d
Venus represen t respecti vely th e paternal u ncle an d th e
maternal a u nt If th e planets representi n g th e father a nd
.

th e pate rnal u ncl e sh ould occu py th e od d si gn s or i f ,

th e plan ets represe nt i n g th e moth er an d th e m aterna l

au nt shou ld occu py th e ev e n si gns at th e t ime th en th e ,

fat her an d paternal u ncle or th e m othe r an d th e m atern al

au n t woul d be h appy .

NOT E S
(a ) O r bi rth accord in g to th e Comment ator .

6 If at th e ti m e of conception m al e fic pl anets
.

o ccupy th e twelft h h ou se ( a ) an d i f then t h e ri si n g si gn

,

be not aspected b v b en e fic planets or i f Satu rn occupy th e ,

ri si ng si g n and be aspected by th e wani ng Moon and Mars

( i n eith e r case ) t h e pregnant woman wi l l d i e
NOT E S .

(a) Th e secon d h ouse accord i ng to certai n Oom men

t at o r s .

( 6) Before d el ivery ti m e accord i n g to th e C o m m en

tator .

7If ( at th e ti m e ) eith er the ri si n g si g n or th e Moon

.

or bot h be betwee n m al e fic planets ( a ) an d at th e sam e

ti me not aspected by th e b ene fic planets , th e pre g na n t
wo m an w ill d i e
32 Brz lz at
'

JEt t a /ed
.
[C H . IV .

NOT E S
(a)
As th e m al efic planets i n th e presen t case c an
on l y be t h ree v i a th e Su n Mars a nd Satu rn both th e
, , , ,

risi ng si gn an d th e Moon can be bet wee n th em at th e

s ame t i me e i th er wh en t h e v are togeth er or occu py t wo
,

al tern ate houses Th e C o m men tator add s that m al e flc

.

planets migh t occu py eith er t h e 12 t h and th e 2 n d h ouses

fro m th e ascend ant or th e Moon or both or t h ey m i gh t ,

occu py th e Na v a m s a s o n ei th er si de .

Before del i very an d i n th e month of t h e power

( 5)
fu l m al efi c planet .

I f ( at th e ti me ) m al efic pla nets occu py th e fou rt h

8 .

h ouse and Mars th e ei gh t h ouse fr om th e ascendan t or th e

Moon or a gai n i f M ars occu py th e fou rt h h ou se and th e
,

S un the twel ft h h ouse from th e ascen dan t an d i f i t b e

,

th e wan in g M oon at th e ti m e th e pregnan t wom an w il l ,

die .

I f ( at th e ti m e ) Mars occu py th e Lagna an d th e

9 .

S u n occu py th e seven th h ou se th e pregna n t woman w il l ,

su ff er death from weapons I f th e lord o f any m onth ( a ) .

,

be a ffli cted ( b ) th e pregn an cy wil l m iscarry i n th at month

,
.

NO T E S
( a ) For th e l ord s of th e several m onth s of pregna n
( uz a e S tanza
’
’
cy

Su ff er d efeat i n conj u nction or be eclipsed at

(b )
th e ti m e of con cepti on .

I f th e b e n e fic planets ( a ) be w i th th e Moon or i n
10 .

th e ascendan t ( b) o r i f th ey occu py th e second fou rth

, ,
,

fi fth seventh ni n th an d th e tenth h ou ses from th e Moon

, ,

or the ascendan t th ere w ill be safe d el i very pro v ided

, ,

m al eflc pl anets occu py th e th i rd or el eventh h ou se from

th e Moo n or th e ascend ant an d th e Moon or th e aseen ,

dan t is at t h e sa m e t i m e aspect ed b y t h e Su n
34 8 7 172 0 1 J ci/ a /t zi .
( C H . IV

T h e s ex of th e i ssu e i n all th e abo ve case s sh al l be

d ete r m i n ed by th e posi tio n o f th e m ost power fu l pl an et .

NO T E S .

( a) Of concept ion or query accordi n g to th e Com

m e n t at o r .

Th is Yoga appl ies on ly

( b) in th e absen ce of th e
Yoga m en ti one d al read y .

N B—Yoga i s a parti cular posi tion of one or m ore

. .

pl anets eith er rel ati vel y to one anoth er or abso l u tely i n , ,

th e ecl ipt ic or both .

If ( at th e ti m e of conception ) th e Moo n and th e

13 .
,

S u n occupyi ng respecti vel y any of th e e v en and odd si gns

, ,

aspect each oth er or if Satu rn and Me rcu ry ( occ upy

,

i n g r especti vely any of th e even a n d odd si gns) aspect each

,

oth er or ( 3 ) i f Mars ( i n an od d si gn ) aspect ( or be aspecte d

,

b y) th e S u n i n a n eve n si gn o r ( 4) i f th e Moon an d ,

L agna i n o dd s ig n s b e aspected by M ars ( i n an eve n

si gn ) or ( 5 ) i f M ars aspect th e Moon an d Mercu ry ocen
,

py i n g respectiv el y even and odd si gns or ( 6 ) i f Ven us , ,

L agna an d th e Moon occupy ( mal e si gns and ) m ale

Nav am sas th e i ssu e w ill be a hermaph rod i te
, .

NO T E S .

T hese Nap u m s ak a Yogas take e ff ect only i n th e

absen ce of mal e an d femal e Yogas .

If w h e n th e Moon an d Ven us are i n even si gn s

14 . ,
,

Mercury Mars J upi ter and Lagna be i n od d signs o r i f

, , ,

a mal e planet aspect Lagna and th e Moon i n th e ev e n

si gns or i f Mercury Mar s J upiter and Lagna b e power
, , ,

ful and occu py e ve n si gns th e i ssu e wi ll be a mal e an d ,

a fem al e ch ild Agai n i f Lagna and al l th e planets occu py

.
,

th e U b h aya ( com m on ) N av am s as and be aspecte d by

Mercu ry i n h is Na v a m sa th e i ssu e will b eth ree ch i ld ren
,

O f th ese , two w ill be m al e ch ild ren i f th e Nav am s a o ccu

CH . IV .
] E r r/ mt j cit a /cci . 35
p ied by Mercu r y be th at of G em i n i an d two w ill b e ,

fem al e ch ildren i f su ch Na v a m s a be th at o f Vi rgo A ga i n .

,

i f wh en Mercu ry occu p ies th e Na v a m s a of Gem i ni t h e

, ,

oth er plan ets an d La gna occu py th e Na v a m s a s of G em i n i

an d Sagittari al l t h e th ree will b e male ch i ld ren ; an d
,

i f wh en Mercu ry occu pi es th e N av a m s a of V i rgo th e

, ,

othe r planets a n d L ag n a occupy th e Nav a m sas o f V i rgo

an d P isces al l th e th ree wi l l be fem a l e ch ild ren
,
.

15 If th e last N av a m sa of s i g n Sagit tari begi n to

.

rise i f all th e pl an ets occu py th e Na v a m sa of Sagi ttar i

,

and be powerful an d i f th e ri si n g si gn be aspected by

,

powerfu l Mercu ry and Satu rn th e issue wi ll b e m or e ,

th an th ree ch i ld re n ( a ) .

N O TES .

( )
4 That i s 5 or 7 or 10 accord i n g to th e Co m m en o

16 . In
th e firs t m onth o f p regna n cy , th e e mbry o i s
formed i n th e second it becomes flesh i n th e th i rd , th e
,

l i mbs are formed i n th e fou rth th e bones are f ormed ,

i n th e fifth th e ski n i s formed i n th e s i xth th e h ai r b e

, ,

gi n s to gro w i n th e seventh i n telli genc e i s i n fused i nto ,

th e ch ild ( a ) .

T he lord s of th e severa l m onth s fro m th e fi rst to t h e

sevent h are V en us Mars Ju pi ter th e S u n , th e Moon ,
, , ,

Satu r n and Mercu ry respecti vely .

N O TE S .

( a ) In th e ei gh t h m on th th e ch i ld begi ns to e at ,
‘

throu gh th e n ave ] cord I n th e n i n th month t h e c h il d i s

.
,

fi l le d w ith cares and i n th e tenth mont h th e ch il d i s born

,
.

Th e lor d of t h e 8 th month i s th e lord of th e risi ng si gn

at th e ti me of con cepti on Th e l ord of th e 9 t h m onth is .

th e Moon and th e lord o f th e 10t h m onth i s th e Su n

,
.

Accord i n g to Yav a n es wara th e lord o f th e fi rst m on th i s ,

Mars and that o f th e second month i s Ven us .

a
s Br z iia t Jaw/ea
’

( on . N .

T here w il l be m iscarri age of p re gnan cy i n th at

’

m onth wh ose l ord h appens to be a ffl icted at th e ti m e of

conception bu t i f any o f th e plan ets be of d i m a ppear
an ce th e f etu s wi ll s i mpl y su ff er i n th e m on t h of th e
,

particu lar planets I f th e Su n be powerful th e ch ild woul d

.

rese mbl e i t s fath er and i f th e Moon be powerfu l th e ch il d

, ,

woul d resem ble i ts m oth er Th e h ealth an d d isposi ti on .

o f th e ch i ld f ol low th ose of i ts pare nts at th e ti m e of

c on cepti o n .

17 . If Mercury occu py th e fifth or th e n i nth h ou se

a ) fro m th e ri si n g si gn a nd i f at th e same ti me th e oth e r
( ,

p l anets be powerless th e face t h e legs and t h e h and s of

, , ,

th e ch i ld wi l l be doubled If th e Moo n o ec u p y si gn Tau r us

.

an d i f m al e fic pl anets occu py th e Riksh a S an d h i s ( b ) th e

i ssu e wil l b e a mute ch i ld bu t i f th e M oon be aspected
b y a b en e fic pl anet , th e r e wil l be s peech after a long
ti m e
NO T E S .

( a ) Accord i n g to som e C omm en tators th e wo r d Tri

k ona i n th e text i s i nterp reted as Moola T riko n a th at i s -
, ,

si g n V i rgo h ere Bu t th i s i s opposed to th e opi n io n of

.

G arga .

( b ) That is th e l ast Nav a m s as o f th e si gns C an cer,

,

Scorpio an d P isces .

( c) B u t i f m al e fic pla nets aspect th e Moo n , th e ch i ld

w ill n eve r s p eak ; i f both m al e fic an d b e n e fic pl anets
a spect t h e Moon t h e e ff ec t s w ill follow th e powerfu l
,

p l an ets .
.
i

18 . Satu rn a n d Mars occupy eith e r t h e s ig n s o r

1f
th e Nav a m sas ( a ) of Mercury ,th e i ssu e wi ll be a ch i ld bor n
wi th teeth I f C ancer be th e risi n g si g n a nd i f th e Moon
.

occu py i t an d be aspected by S atu rn a nd Mars the ch i ld ,

wi l l be h u m pbacked i f Pisces be th e ris in g si gn a nd i f

i t be as
p ec t ed b y
. Sat u r n , th e Moo n an d M a r s , t h e c h i l d
CH I V]
. . Bi h
[ r at M i a /eff . 37

will be lame I f a m al e fic pl an e t ( b ) a nd th e Moo n be i n

.

any of th e las t Na v a m s as of Can cer S corpio an d P isces , ,

th e ch i ld w il l be bor n d eaf I n all th e above Yogas th e

.

e ff ects d escribed wi ll occur onl y if the several p lanets

are not aspected by b en e fic p lanets

NO T E S .

( a) both th e si gns an d Na v am s as accord in g t o

Or
some C o m men tators .

( b ) O n e of th e th r ee pla n ets th e Su n Mars an d , ,

S atu rn .

( 0) So tha t i f th e planets be aspected by powerfu l

,

b e n e fic plan ets th e e ff ects w i ll n ot occu r .

19 .I f t h e l ast Na v a m sa o f Makara begi n to r i se

an d i f i t be aspected by Satu rn t h e Moon and th e Su n , ,

th e i ssu e w i ll be a d wa i f If M ars occu py th e ri si n g

.

D rek k an a of th e L agna or th e correspondi n g D rek .

kan a of th e fi fth h ouse or of the n i n th h ou se ( a ) th e i ssu e

w i ll be ei th er w i th ou t a h ead or wi th out arms or w i thou t
l egs respecti vely i f M a rs be aspected by the S un th e
, ,

M oon and Sat u rn .

NOT E S .

( 4 ) Some C o m mentators i n terpre t th i s pa r t o f t h e

text as fol lows : i f Mars occupy th e l s t or th e 2 n d or th e
3 t d D re k k a n a of a risi ng si gn & c B u t thi s i s opposed
,
.

to the opi n ion of G arga .

20 I f Leo be th e ri sing sig n and i f i t be occupied by

.

t h e Su n and Moo n and aspected by Mars and Satu rn , th e

i ssu e wil l be a bli nd chi ld ( a ) i f i n th e above case b e n e fic ,

planets aspect th e risi n g si gn th e ch ild w il l be born wit h

,

a m ote i n i ts eyes I f th e Moon or th e S u n occupy th e

.

t welfth h ou se fro m th e risin g si gn th e ch i ld wi l l b e

bo r n bli nd respect i vel y of th e left or th e righ t eye
, ,

T h e seve r a l Yog a s m ent ione d abov e ( CD w i l l no t

38 E r r/ m1 Jam/«i .
[C a I V .

wh olly come to pass i f t h e pl an ets of each Yoga be

aspected by b e n e fic planets .

NO T E S
According to th e C om m en tator i f t h e Su n alon e ,

occu py sign L eo and i f i t be aspected by Mars and S atu rn

, ,

t h e ch i ld w il l be bl i n d of th e righ t eye an d i f th e Moo n

alone sh oul d occu py si g n Leo an d i f i t be aspected by ,

Mars and Satu rn th e ch i ld wi ll be bl i nd of th e

,

left eye .

( b ) At th e t i me of N i s h e k a ( con cepti on ) or o f birth .

( 0) Provided
‘
th e Su n or th e M oon i s a spected by
M ars and Sat u rn accord ing to t h e C omm entator Su b o dh i n i .

( )
d Th at i s begin ning from Stanza 1 7 .

21 . Fi nd out th e n u mber of th e parti cul ar D wada

sams a occupi ed by th e Moon at th e ti me ( a ) i n any Z od i
aca l si gn N ot e t h e Zo diacal si gn wh ose n am e t h e D wa
.

das a m s a bears C ou nt from th e n e xt sig n as m an y signs

.

as th e n u mber of D w adas a m s as by wh ich th e M oon m ay

h av e advanced i n any part i cular si gn Whe n th e M oon .

com es to s u ch l ast si gn th e birt h of th e ch ild will occu r

, .

Again th e bi rt h wil l occu r by day or by n i gh t accord

,

i n g as th e risi n g Nav a m s a at th e ti m e is a d ay or a ni gh t
Nav a m s a Th e hour of bi rth from su n rise o r su n set
.
- -

m ay be calcul ated from th e porti o n of th e risi n g Nav am s a

th at may h av e r ise n above th e h orizon .

NOTES
( )
a A t th e ti me of c onception or qu ery acco r d ing to
,

t h e C ommentator .

I n th is st an z a th e Auth or pu rposes to d iscove r th e

,
‘

t i me of chi l d birth from th e ti me of concepti on or query

-
.

Suppose t h e M oon to occu py, say, th e 8 t h D wa dasa m s a o f

s i gn Aqu ari us a t th e ti m e Th i s D wadas a m sa i s know n
.

as th e D wadasam sa of Vi rgo ( Kan ya) The Si g n n e x t .

CH I V ] E f f/ ml J a fa ka
’
39
‘
.
. .

to sign Vi rgo i n th e Zodiac i s si g n L ibra ( Tu l a ) As th e .

Moon occupies th e 8 th D w adasa m s a i n si gn Aq u ari u s th e ,

8 t h s ig n from Libra i s s i gn Tau ru s T h e ch il d will .

th e refore be bor n whe n th e Moon passes th rough si gn

Tau r u s .

Th e Com men tator adds th at th e parti cul ar asterism

wh ich th e Moo n woul d occupy at th e ti m e o f bi rth m igh t
be d iscovered from th e ad vance m ad e by h e r i n th e parti
c h l ar D w adas am s a occu pi e d by h e r For i nstan ce su ppose.
,

th e Moon t o occu py th e m iddle of th e 8 t h D wa das a m s a i n

Aqu ari us Th e m iddl e of si g n Tauru s i s i n th e 2 n d quarter
.
’

o f sta r Roh i n i so th at at th e ti me o f birt h of th e chi ld

th e Moon wil l o c cu py th e a sterism of Rohi n i .

Agai n i f th e risi n g Nav a m s a for i nstance be that of

, , ,

Sagittari a nigh t sign th e bi rth will occu r at n i ght Th e

, , .

ti m e of bi rth from su n set sh ould be cal cul ated by propor

-

ti on fro m th e ti m e by wh ich th e Nav a m s a of Sagi ttari

m ay h ave rise n above th e h orizon — th e peri od of obl iq u e
ascen sion of the Na v a m sa representin g th e period of th e
Wh ole n i gh t .

The sex of th e i ssu e can be determ i ned fro m stanzas

11 to 1 5 .

22 .
I f at th e ti me of concepti on , th e Na v am sa o f
S atu rn (a ) begi n to rise and i f Satu rn occu py th e seven th
house from th e risi n g sign , the re wi ll be d el i very after
th ree years an d i n si m i lar case of th e Moon ( 6) there wi l l
be deli very after twel ve years .

Wh i ch of th e several Yogas described i n th i s C hapter

are applicable to th e ti m e of b irth also sh al l be det e r ,

m i ned o u th e n atu re of suc h Y ogas ( c l .

NO T E S .

(a) That i s th e Nav a m s a of Makara or Kumbh a .

b ) I f the Na v am sa of C an cer sh ould be i n to ri s e

( g
40 E f/ mt J rih M [ H V}
C
‘

.
f . .

an d i f th e M oon sh oul d occu py th e seven th h ouse fro m “

th e risi n g s i gn .

cFor i nstan ce Yogas relati n g to th e bi rth of ch il

( ) ,

d ren wi th extra or d efecti v e organ s are to be take n to refe r ,

as m uch to th e ti m e of bi rth as to th e t i me o f c o n c e p t io n ;
As regard s su ch Yogas a s th ose rel ati n g to th e m i scarriage
of p reg na n c v an d the l ike th ey are to be take n to refer to
,

t h e t i m e o f con cepti o n alo ne .

C H A P TE R V .

On Mat t er s c on n ec t ed w it h Bi r t h Ti m e .

I f at th e t i m e o f b i r t h of a ch i l d t h e ri si n g si gn be
1 .
,

n ot aspected by th e M oo n th e fath er will n ot be n ear

,

wh en th e c h il d i s born — an d i f i n su ch a case t h e S u n ,

should occu py th e 9 t h or th e 8 th h ou se th e father woul d be ,

i n a forei gn cou nt ry i f t he h ouse b e a movable sign ; i n h is

own cou n try i f th e h ou se be a fi xed si gn an d would be
retu rni n g to h is cou ntry i f th e h ouse be a com m o n
Sig n .

2If at th e ti me of bi rth Satu rn be i n th e ri si ng

.
, ,

sign or M ars i n th e set ti n g si gn or t h e Moo n betwee n ( a )

,

Mercu ry an d Ve nu s th e f ath e r wi l l n ot be n ear

, .

N OT E S .

( ) a Wh eth er M ercury an d V en u s o ccu py th e s i gn s

’

on both sides of th e Moon or occu py th e s a m e si gn a s t h e

Moon .

3 If a t t h e ti me of bi rth th e Moon be i n th e D rek

.
, ,

k ana of M ars ( a ) and i f b en e fic pl a nets be i n th e 2 n d an d

11 t h houses from t h e risi n g si gn t h e i ssu e w i l l be a
'
,

serpent If th e sign ( 5) of a m al e fic planet be th e ascendan t

.

si gn an d i f th e D re k k a n a of M a rs should th e n be risi n g and

, ,

b e fic l nets occu y th e 2 u d a nd t h e 1 1t h h ou ses t h e

i f e n p a
p
 f Br zka t M i dled
‘ -

42 C V
'

[
‘ ‘

. H :

ot he r s ig ri or i f th e Moon be i n th e D rek k an a or N av am sa
‘

of Ju pi ter th e ch i ld wi ll n ot be i llegiti m ate

,
.

7 If at th e ti me of birth two m al efic pl anets ( a )

.
, ,

occu py one of th e m al efic si gns ( 5 ) a n d i f such si gn be th e

5 t h 7 t h or th e 9 t h house from th e S un th e father of th e
, , ,

ch ild wi ll be i n cu stody at th e t i me I f th e Su n occu py a .

movable si gn th e fath er will be so i n forei gn l and s i f h e

,

occu py a fixed si gn th e fath er wi ll be i n custody i n h is own

,

co n n t r v an d i f h e occupy a com mon sign th e father ,

wi ll be so on h is way to h i s n ati v e cou ntry .

NOT ES .

( a ) Mars and S atu rn .

( 6) A r ies L eo S corpio Capricorn Aqu ari us C an

, , , , ,

cer wh en i t i s wani n g Moon and Gem i n i and Vi rgo wh en ,

M ercu ry i s i n conj u n ction w i th m al efic planets .

8 If th e M oo n be full and i n C an ce r if M ercu ry be

.
,

i n th e ri sin g si gn an d Jup i ter i n th e 4t h h ou se th e birth ,

wi ll occu r i n a bo at Agai n i f th e watery si gns ( a ) begi n

.
,

t o rise and i f th e Moo n be i n th e 7 t h house th en too th e , , ,

bi rth wil l occu r i n a boat .

N OT E S .

These are C an cer th e latter hal f of C a pri corn

( 4) ,

and P isces .

9 If a watery sign begi n to ri se birth will certai nly

.
,

occu r o n th e banks of waters i f th e Moon be also i n a ,

watery si gn or i f th e Moon be ful l an d aspect th e ri s

,

i ng si gn or i f t h e Moon be i n th e 1 0t h or 4t h h ou se
,

or i n th e Lagna .

10If th e Moon occu py the risi n g si gn an d i f Satu rn

.

occu py th e 1 2 t h h ouse and be aspected by a m a l e fic

pl anet th e bi rth wil l occu r i n a prison Ag ain 1if ei th e r
, .
,

Scorpi o or C an cer begi n to ri se and b e occu pied by Sa

tu rn and aspected by th e Moon the bi rth will occu r i n ,

a di tc h .
 CH . V .
] Br ih a t J dt a ka
‘
. 43

11 a watery si gn begi n to ri se and i f S atu r n

. If
occu py i t and be aspected by Mercu ry th e Sun or th e Moon , , ,

th e bi rth wi ll occu r resp ectiv e ly i n a pleasure hou se a ,

temple or sterile grou nd .

12 I f a bi ped sign be ri si n g a nd i f Satur n occupy i t

.
,

and be aspected by Mars th e bi r th w il l be i n crem ation

,

groun d ; i f aspected by Venus and t h e M oon th e bi rth ,

will occu r i n som e beauti ful an d agree abl e spot ; i f as

p e c t e d by J u piter th en i n th e A
, g n i h o t r a Sal a ( a ) i f as
’

p ec t e d by th e S un th e n i n t h e Ki n g s palace or a templ e
,

or a cow sh ed ; and i f aspected by Mercu ry th e bi rth w il l ,

’
occu r i n an arti st s worki n g room .

NO T E S:
(4 ) A p l ace wh ere th e sacre d fi r e is kept an d
wo r sh ipped .

13 Th e b irth wi ll occu r i n places ( 4 ) rep r esented

.

by th e risi n g si gn or Nav am s a wh i ch ever i s pow erfu l , .

If such sign or Na v am s a be a movable on e th e birth wi l l ,

occu r i n roads i f fixed t he n wi t h i n a bu i ldi ng

,
If th e
risi ng Nav am s a be a V ar g o t t am a one th e bi rt h wi ll be ,

i n the moth er s ow n h ou se ’
.

NOT E S .

( )
a T hese places are those referred to i n Stanza 5 ,

C h apter I We w i ll give here th e several pla ce s app ro

.

p ri at e to th e several signs of th e Zod iac .

Mesh a represents the abodes ( cav es ) of the s heep ,

mo u ntai ns th e resid ence of a n army a fire place m etal

, , ,

m i nes an d m i nes wh ere preci ous stones are fou nd .

V r i s h ab h a represents forests botto m of b ills places , ,

frequ ented b y th e eleph ants and cattle and dwelling places

of th e farmers .

Mi t h u n a represents places frequ e n ted by women

learned i n music and p ai nti ng fo r purpose of eith e r
.
.

pl ayin g or carry i n g love m es s a ges to l ov e r s .

44s Bf '

r z zat J dt a kcf .
[C H V . .

Kataka represe nts rice fields tanks san d banks and , ,

places frequ ented by th e nymph s .

S i mh a rep resents forests i naccessible places caves , , ,

mou n tai ns covered wit h forests an d places freque nted

by forest m en .

Kanya represents places overgr own with grass w o ,

’
m en s sleep i n g apartm ents an d female schools ,
.

Tu la rep resent s custom s h ou ses m i ddle streets , ,

bazaars roads lead i ng to towns m arket places h i gh

, , ,

grou n d and places w here crops grow .

V ri sc h ik a
represen ts caves forti fied towns d itches , , ,

places w h ere there are poisonou s stones an d h i lls .

,

snake h ol es an d scorpi o n h oles .

D h an u srepresents good and even places wh ere the r e

are horses or cavalry m en or arm ed m en places o f sacri ,

fic i a l fire ceremon ies or wh ere v eh i cles a r e kept

,
.

M akara rep r esents ri vers, garde n s ,

fo r ests , tank s ,

water ban ks and d itch es .

K u mbh a represen ts places frequ e n ted by bi rds, by

women , by d eal ers i n l iqu or o r by gamblers .

M eena represen ts tem pl es, places fr equented by th e

Brah m i ns ,
holy waters r i vers and seas
,
.

( b) If both ( fixed and m ovable ) th e bi rth wo u ld ,

occu r in th e outer v erand ah of th e h ouse .

14 I f at th e ti me of birth M ars and S aturn oc

.
, ,
‘

c up y a si n gl e sign and i f th e Su n or th e M oon (a ) occupy

,

th e 5 t h or th e 9 t h h ou se from th em th e ch i ld wi ll be ,

d eserted by i t s m oth er ; bu t i f th e Su n or th e M oo n be
aspected by J upiter , th e ch i ld thou gh abandoned by i ts ,

mother w ill l ive lon g an d i n comfort

,
.

NO T ES .

( ) If t h e M oo n
4 oc c u p y th e sett i n g si g n acco rdin g
t o so m e o th er re ad i n g .
 Br ih a t
“

Ca . V :] Jam/t a . 45

15 If a m al e fic planet ( a ) aspect th e M oo n i n th e
.

risi n g sign M ars occu pyi n g th e 7 t h h ouse o r i f M ars an d

, ,

Satu rn occu py th e 11t h h ouse from th e M oon whe n i n th e

risin g si gn aspected by a m al e fic pla net ( 5) th e ch il d
deserted by i ts moth er w i ll d i e If th e M oon be also .

aspected by a powerful b e n efic pl anet ( c) th e d eserted ,

ch il d wi ll fal l i nto th e h ands of th e cl ass of m e n r e p re

sented by the aspectin g b e n e fic pl anet and w i l l l i v e If .

th e aspecti ng m al e fic pl anet be po w erfu l th e d eserted ,

ch ild wi ll fall i nto th e h ands of oth ers a nd w i l l perish .

NO T E S
Satu rn o r M a r s
( a) .

( 6) Th e Su n .

( 6 ) If Ju pi ter aspect th e M oon no ne of these ev ils ,

wil l befall th e chi ld .

16 If a paternal pl anet be powerful th e bi rth will

.
,

occur i n th e fat her s h o u s e ( a ) i f a m aternal pl an et be

’

powerfu l th e bi rt h w il l occu r i n th e moth er s h ou se (6)

,
’

i f th ree b en e fic planets be i n th ei r d epression si gn s th e

bi rth wi ll occu r at t he foot of walls t rees and th e li ke ,

and i f th e th ree planets occu pyi n g a si n gle sign fai l to

aspect the Lagn a an d th e Moon also occu pyi ng a si n gle
si gn th e bi rt h w il l occu r i n a forest ( d)
,
.

NOT E S .

( )
a Or i n th e house of th e p ate r n al u
. n cle or pate r
nal au nt .

6
( ) i n th e house of th e m ate r nal u n cle o r
Or
m at er n al au n t .

( )
c The like — Th at i s nea r ri ve r s , wells flowe r ,

gard en s or hi lls .

( a ) So th at i f th r ee pl anets occu p y i n g a si n gle

’
,

h ou s e as pect th e L agn a and the Moon th e bi rt h will occu r ,

i n a l oc al i ty W h e re crow ds of p eo p l e l iv e
‘

h
46 E mb ed Jamiaa .
[
C I L V a

17 If th e Moon occu py the Na v a m s a of S atu rn or

the 4t h h ouse ( a ) from th e L agna or i f she be aspected by ,

S at u rn or i f sh e occu py a watery Nav a m s a ( b) o r th e

,

same h ouse as S at u rn th e bi rt h wil l occu r i n a d ark spot

,

I f th ree or more planets be i n th ei r Ncech a si gn s

th e birth will occu r on th e bare groun d Th e birth
w il l follow th e m an ner i n wh i ch t he risi ng si gn reaches
th e h orizon (f ) If m al e fic pl a nets occupy th e 4t h o r 7 t h
.

h ouse from th e M oon th e m other w ill su ffer m u ch from

,

travai l (g ) .

NO T E S .

( a ) Ya v a n ac h ari ar u ses th e word K en dra , meani n g

th e l s t 4t h 7 t h and th e l 0t h h o u ses
, ,
.

( 6) Wat er N av a m s as are th ose of C a n cer - and

P isces .

( c) If th e S u n be powerfu l and be aspect ed by

M a rs th ere w i ll b e n o darkn ess
,
.

( )
2
4 Accordi n g to Sarav ali i f th e M oon occupy th e ,

L agn a or th e 4t h h ou se and be i n h i s depressi on si gn th e ,

bi rth wi ll also occu r o n th e bare grou nd .

(6 ) O n grou n d co vered wit h straw accord ing to t h e

C omme nt ator .

(f )Th at i s i f th e si g n be one th at ri ses with i t s

,

h ead t hen th e h ead of t h e ch i l d wi ll appear first ; i f th e

,

si gn be on e th at rises w it h its leg th e leg of t h e ch ild ,

wi ll appear first ; and i f i t be one th at rises with both i ts

h ead and leg as si gn Pisces th e h ands wi ll appear first
, , .

A c co r din g to certai n C om mentators t h is part of th e ,

tex t i s i nterpreted a s follows If t h e l ord of th e risi n g

s i gn be i n h is d irect cou rse th e bi rt h wi ll b e a n atur al
,

on e an d i f i n h i s ret rograde m otion th e bi rt h w il l be an ,

i rr e gu lar on e Th is m ea n i ng h as th e su ppo r t o f Man it t h a

.
”
.

(g ) i f m al e fic planets
Or s am e s i gn as
Moon , the m other w i l l s u fle r fro m t r a v ai l
'

the - o
.
CH . V .
] Bih
r at Jat a ka . 47

18 Th e oi l sh all b e determi ned from th e Moon ( a )

.
,

th e wi ck from th e risi n g si gn ( 6) t he fi xed o r oth er

n atu re of th e l a m p sh all be d eterm in ed from th e si gn o cc u

pi ed by t h e S u n Th e entrance to th e room wi ll be i n
th e d i rection of th e powerfu l planet occu pyin g a
K end ra (a ) or i n that of th e m ost powerfu l pl an et
’
.

(a)Th at i s i f th e Moon occu py th e begi n ni n g of a

,

Si gn t h e oi l of th e l am p i n th e deli very room wil l be ful l

,

i f th e Moon occu py th e m idd le part o f a si gn th e oi l w i ll ,

b e on e h alf an d i f th e Moon occu py th e end of a si gn

-
, ,

t h ere wil l be no oi l i n th e l amp i n oth er words th e ,

qu antity of oi l vari es wi th th e positi on of th e Moo n i n th e

si gn occu pi ed by h er .

Accord i n g to S aravali i f th e Moon be fu ll th e oi l wi ll , ,

be full an d t h e q u a n t it y of th e oil v ari es w i th th e i l l u m i

.

n ed portion of th e Moon s d i sc Bh atta Utp ala th e Com ’

.
,

m e n t at o r obj ects to th i s vi ew for h e s ays that i f su ch

, , ,

w ere th e case chi ld ren born on new moon days sh ou ld

,
-

al ways b e born i n th e d ark — th i s cannot be .

5
Th at i s i f th e begi n ni ng of a si gn begi n to rise
( ) , ,

th e wi ck will be l on g an d u nb u rnt i f th e m i ddl e of th e

si gn be gi n to r ise th e wi ck wil l be h alf bu rnt ; and i f t h e
,

end of t h e si gn begi n to rise th e w i ck wi ll be n earl y ,

wh ol ly bu rnt In oth er words th e len gth of t he wi ck v ari es

.
,

w i th th e posi ti on of the poi n t of th e ri si n g si gn i n contact

w i th th e h o ri zon Th e wi ck i s of th e col or ofth e ri sin g
.

si gn .

That i s i f th e si gn occu pi ed by th e S u n be a
(a) ,

fixed one th e l amp w i l l be fi xed i n som e place i f m ovable

, ,

th e l am p will be carried by som e body i n th e h and ; and i f

both ( fixed and m ov able ) th e lam p wi ll be a swi ngi ng
l amp The C ommen tator ad ds th at th e l am p wil l be i n th e
.

d i rectio n assi g n ed to the sig n s occ u pied by th e S u n Ac .

48 Bih at
r J at aka .
[C IL V .

cording to some th e lamp wi ll be i n t h e d i rection o f th e

,

sig n ( out of 1 2 equ al parts i nto wh i ch t h e room m ay be

d ivi ded ) occupied by th e S un Th i s latte r di vision eviden tly .

f
re e rs to th e d ivision referred to i n th e Introd u cti on i n ”

c onn ecti on with H orary Astrolo g y .

Ac cord i n g to others a gai n d i vidi n g th e 2 4 h ou rs of ,

d ay and n i ght i nto 8 equ al parts o f 3 h ou rs each begi n n i n g ,

from su n rise th e l am p wi l l be i n th e E ast S E ast S o u th

-
, , .
, ,

& c accordi n g as th e t i me of bi rth fal l s i n th e l st 2 n d

.
, , ,

3 rd & c
,
parts o f the d i visi on
.
, .

d If th er e are no pl anets i n th e K end ras th e e n

( ) ,

tranc e will be i n th e d i recti on of th e Lagna acco rdi n g t o

S walpa J ataka .

If S aturn be powerfu l the bi rt h wi ll occu r i n a

19 .
,

h ou se wh ich h av i n g become old h as been rebu i lt If Mars

, ,
.

be powerfu l th e birth wi ll occu r i n a house partly bu rnt

,

i f th e Moon be powerful then i n a n ewly bu i lt hou se i f , ,

th e Su n be powerfu l th e b i rth wil l occu r i n a h ouse bu ilt

,

of wood bu t weak i f Mercu ry be powerful th en i n a h ouse ,

bui lt by several bui lders ; i f Venu s be powerful then i n ,

a beauti ful n ew h ouse adorned with pictures and i f

J u pi ter be powerful th e bi rth wi l l occur i n a stron g bui l t
,

house ( a ) Th e h ous e s on th e fou r sid es sh all be described

.

si milarly by th e pl anets i n th e R asi C h akra

NO T E S .

aAccord i n g to S ara v al i i f th e Su n occu py th e

( ) ,

si gn occu pied by th e most po w erfu l plan et as gi ven i n th e

text th e d el ivery wi l l occu r i n th e room set apart for th e
,

worsh i p of th e D ev as ; i f th e Moon occu py th e si gn ocen

pied by th e most powerful planet th e birt h will occu r i n ,

th e bath or water room i f M a rs then i n th e kitch en or th e ,

Ag n ih o t r a Sala i f Mercu ry i n th e bed room i f J u pi ter , ,

i n th e treasu re roo m ; i f Venus t h en i n th e play grou nd ; ,

a n d i f Satu rn th e bi rth will occu r i n th e pl ace wh ere

,

s wee p in g s are d eposi ted .

50 Bih at
r Jat a ka .
[C H V. .

C apri corn or Aqu ari u s be th e risi n g si g n t h e bed wi l l be ,

i n th e n orth ern port ion of th e room and i f P i sces b e t h e ,

risi n g sign i t wil l be i n t h e n orth easter n porti on of th e

,
-

ro om T h e sam e rul e appl ies as regards the pl ace i n the

.

bed or cot where th e wom an m i gh t lie As regar d s th e

, .

cot again i t s two fron t l egs occu py t h e qu ar t ers assi gn e d

, ,

to t h e 12 t h a n d th e 3 rd h ou ses fro m the ascend an t a n d i ts

two hi nd l egs occu py the q uarters assi gn ed to t h e 6t h a nd
th e 9 t h h ous e s (a ) .

NO T E S .

( ) aIn oth er words th e 1 2 th an d th e 3 rd h ou se s

,

re p resent th e fore l egs th e 9 t h and 6t h h ouses repre se n t

-

th e h ind legs ; th e 3 rd and th e 6t h h ouses represen t t h e

-

two ri gh t l egs an d th e 12 t h an d th e 9 t h h ouses re p resen t

t h e t wo left l egs Also th e r isi n g si gn and th e 2 n d h ou se
.
,

represent th e h ead of th e cot th e 4t h an d th e 5 th h ou se s ,

rep r esen t t h e ri g ht s i de ; t h e 7 t h an d th e 8 th h ou ses

represen t t h e part bet wee n th e two h i n d l e gs ,
an d t h e 1 0t h an d th e 1 l t h h o us es represen t th e
l eft si de No w wh atev e r p orti o n o f th e cot m ay be
.
,

re presented by th e commo n si gns th ere; th e cot will be ,

ben t down a l i ttle an d th i s wil l n o t be th e case i f su ch

,

Si gn i s e i th er occu pied or aspected by i ts L ord or by a

b e n e fie pl anet A gai n there wi ll be d efects i n those
.
,

p ar t s of th e cot wh i ch are represented by si gns occupi e d

by m al efic pl anets an d th is wil l not be t h e case i f su ch
inal e fic plan ets be i n th ei r exal tation si gns i n thei r ,

Moola T ri ko n a si gns i n fri endly si gns or i n th ei r owri

, ,

h ouses .

22; n u m b er o f m id wi ves wi ll be th e n u m be r of
T he
th e p l an ets bet wee n th e risi n g si gn and th e M oon O f .

th ese planets , th e n u mber of those i n th e v isi bl e h em i ,

sphe r e will be th e n u mber of m idwi ves o u t s ide t h e roo m ,

an d th ,
e n u mber of p l anets i n th e i nvisible h emisph e r e
.

. ,
CH V ] . . Er r/t a t Jdt a kr f
. 51

wi l l be the n u mber of m idwi ves i nsid e the ro om . Accord

i n g to some th i s order i s reversed ( a )
, .

NO T E S
(a) Th at i s of th e planets bet wee n th e L agn a and
,

th e M oon th e nu mber i n th e v i sibl e h em isphe re i s th e

,

n u nb e r of m idwi ves w ith i n t h e room a n d th e n u mber o f

,

planets i n th e i nvisible hemisph ere will be th e n u mber of

m i dwi ves outsi d e th e room I n th i s v i ew V arah a M ih ira .
,

doe s not con cu r fo r i t i s opposed to h is Swalpa J ataka

,
.

Agai n i f b ene fic plan ets occu py t h e si gns from th e

i

.
,

Lagna to th e M oon th e m id wives wi l l al l be beautifu l ,

women well d r e ssed and ad orned ; i f m al e fie pl anets

,

occupy th e si g h s th e women w i ll be d i rty u gly an d

, ,

w ith n o ornaments .

Agai n i f any of th e planets betwee n th e Lagn a and

,

t h e M oon b e i n th ei r exaltation si gn s or retrograde i n

moti on th e n u mbe r gi ve n by the m sh al l be t rebled
, .

But i f th ey be i n the i r own si gns Na v a m s as or D rek

, ,

kanas & c th e n u m ber gi v e n by th e several p lanets shal l

,
.
,

be d ou bled .

Th e stru cture an d oth er pe c u l i ari ties (a ) of the

23 .

bod y sh al l be d ete rm i ned from th e lord of th e ri si n g N a

v am sa or from th e m ost powerfu l pla n et ; and the
color ( 6) of the bod y sh al l be d e t erm i n ed from th e ( l ord
o f th e ) Na v a m s a occu pied by th e Moon an d th e size of
th e s eve ral parts of th e body wil l follo w th e si gn s rep t e
sen tin g th em beg i n n i n g fro m th e ri s m g Si gn wh ich rep t e
,

s en ts th e head ( 6 ) .

NO T E S
(a ) T hese are given i n stanzas 8 to 1 1 in
C hapte r II .

The C om mentator a d d s th at i f th e si gn repr e sen ted

by th e ri sin g Nav a m s a be powerfu l th en th e physi cal ,

pecul i ar i ti es sh al l be d etermined f rom th e lord of su ch

52 Bra/ rat J am/t a .
( C H V ,
.

N a v a ni s a ; i f not, t h ey s h al l b e det er m i n ed from t l i e n z o st

' ' '
'

powerfu l planet .

( 6) Thi s i s give n i n stanza 4 C hapter I I Accord ,

.

i n g to some th e col or m u st be determ i ned from th e

,

si gn occu pi ed by th e Moon w a e S tanza 2 0 C hapt e r I ,

’
,
.

To th is th e C om m entator obj ects For h e says th a t .

,

th ere are n o peopl e of th e color o f th e parrot I n deter .

m i n i n g th e col or th e c o u n t r v th e cl im ate occupati on

, ,

and th e like sh al l be taken i nto account .

(5) Th e d i visio n of the b ody referred to here i s the

s a m e as th at refe rre d to i n Stanza 4 C hapter 1 wi th th i s , ,
i
d i fference th at wh il e the latter begi ns fro m s i gn Ari es ,

the form er begi ns fro m th e r i s m g si gn Th e d i vi si on s .

are as follow
Th e risi n g si g n represen ts th e h e ad th e 2 n d h ou se
r epresen ts the face th e 3 rd th e b r east th e 4t h th e h eart
; , ,

th e 5 t h th e bell y th e 6 t h th e h i p th e 7 t h th e l ower
, , ,

abdomen th e 8 t h th e ge n i tal organ th e 9 t h th e t w

,
o ,

thi gh s th e l 0t h th e two k nees th e 1l t h th e two sh an k s

, ,

an d th e 1 2 th th e two feet N ow i n S tanza 19 of C h ap:

,
.
,

t er I th e rel a ti ve m agn i tud es of th e several signs of th e

,

Zodi ac are give n as follow

( Ari es 2 0 — P isces
A Tau r us
.

l
’
— Aqu ari u s
. .

G emi n i 2 8—C apri corn

B C an c e r
.

il 3 2 — S agittari .

3 6 —Scorpi o “ .

C L ibra -
.

O f th ese t h e4 si gn s referred t o i n d ivi sion A are

‘

, ,

k nown as s h ort si gns Th e 4 of d i vi sion B are known as . :

Si gns of m idd le le ngth an d the 4 of d ivi sion C are k nown as

l on g signs So th at th at part of th e bod y wi l l b e long or

.
,

s hort accordi n g as th e s i gn represent ing i t i s lon g or

.
,

sh ort If th e l ord of a short si gn occu py a lon g si gn o r

. ,

i f the lord of a long si gn occu py a sh ort Si gn th e size of ,

Ca V ] . . Bri fz az
' ’

Jam/t a . 53

th e p ar t fo f b od y rep resented will be o f mid dl e l ength I f

'

, ;

s eve r al p l anets occupy a si gn th e most p o werful o f

‘

them sha l l be taken i nto accou nt and i f n o pl anet s occ upy ,

a si gn th e size of th e par t of body w il l sim pl y follow th at

,
«

of th e si gn .

Th e th ree fol d d i v i s i ons of t h e body beginn i n g

.
2 4 .
-

from th e h ead from th e neck and from c l ewer abdomen

, ,

a ccordi n g as th e ris i n g D re k k a n a is t fi rst th e se con ,

or t h e th i rd are as follow

D re k k a n a is

Th e th i rd .

Th e ri sin g N eck . Lower abdomen .

S ign .

2 u d h ouse R i g h t e ye Ri g h t arm .
al orga n .

12 th L eft eye L eft a ri n

. .

3 rd Righ t ear h a nd icle .

1 1t h
1

L eft e ar L eft h an d L eft testi cl e .

4i h , Ri gh t nostri l sid e .
Ri gh t thi gh
l 0t h L eft Left si d e L eft th i gh .
«

5 th Ri g h t t e m p l e Ri gh t breast - Ri gh t knee .

th knee
9 L eft L eft breast .

Ri gh t bel ly
0

6t l i
i
'
-
'

t a nkl e .

8th
'
~ c
~

belly an kle .

7 th navel feet .

Wo u nds wil l occu r i n th ose pa r ts of b ody t he

25 .

si gns representin g wh i ch a re occu pied b y m al efie planets ;

b u t i f s u c h f si gns be occu p ied o r esp ected b y b e n efie
‘ “
r

pl anets moles wi ll appear i n th ose parts i f such m a l e flc

,

or b e n e fic plan ets be i n t h ei r own s i gns or N a v am s as o r

i n fixed si gn s or fixed Na v a m s as th e wou nd o r t he m p l e ,
 54 Bid l r a Mia/h
f
.
t CH . V
.

from bi rth otherwi se t h ey w il l ap pea r at a

w il l u ex is t ,
‘

f utu re ti me ( a ) A s re g a r d s wou nd s i f the p lanet causi n g

.
,

i t be S atu r n th e wou n d wil l b e caused by a s t on e o r by

,

w i nd i f Ma r s th e n by fi re or weapon or by poison
,

i f ( m al e fic) M ercu ry i t wi ll be cau sed by earth ( b) i f th e

,

i
S u n th e n by w ood or by quad ru peds ; i f th e ( wani ng )
,

M o o n the n by hor ned an i m a ls or by water ani mal s There

, .

w i ll be n o w ou n d i n th o se parts of th e bod y wh i ch are

r e presented by si gn s occu pi ed b y th e ot her ( b e n e fi c )
planets ( 6 ) .

NO T E S
( a ) Th at is i n th e D as a or pl a net a ry period s of th e
,

several pl anets .

( 5) By landsl ips and by a piece o f clod .

( 6) B y J upi ter Ven us ( b e n e fic ) Mercu ry an d w ax m g

, ,

Moon .

For th e pu rposes of th i s stanza th e d ivi sion of body ,

'

is t h at re ferred t o i n Stanza 2 4 .

26 If th r ee planets wh eth e r m al e fic or b e n efie to

.
,

geth e r wi t h M ercu ry occupy a si ngl e si gn a w ou n d or a ,

m ol e wi l l appear with o u t fai l i n th e parts of bod y

rep r esen ted by th e si gn ( a ) Agai n i n th e di vi s io n (b) of th e
.
,

body i nto twel ve p arts be g i nn i n g from th e h ea d ( wh ich

th e L a g n a rep r esents ) i f a m al efi c planet occupy t h e
,

si xth house a w oun d wil l ap p ear( c) ( i n t h e h i p ) ; bu t i f

,

th e mal efic pla n et be aspected by a b e n e fic pl anet both a ,

d ark an d a wh i te m ol e wi ll appear ; bu t i f b e n efic planets

occu py th e si xth h ouse th ere wil l appe a r o n l y a c r owded
,

growth of h ai r .

N OT E S .

( ) a Th e d i visi on of b o dy r eferr ed to
’

i s th at gi ve n i n
Sta n za 2 4 .

Th e division r eferre d to i s t h at gi ven i n

( b) Not e ( 6)
t o Sta n za 2 3 .
CH . V I .
] Bih at
r Jat a ka .
53

( ) I per ih e D as a
od of th e m ost w f l l n et
”

c n tt p o e r u p a . .

Al so i f t h e pl an et occu py i n g th e 6 t h h ou se be in h is o wn ;
,

si gn or Nav am s a or i n a fi x e d si gn o r Nav am sa t h e wou n d ,

or t h e mol e w ill e x ist fr om birt h .

C H AP T E R VI .

On Bal ar i sh t a o r E ar l y Deat h .

1 . I f th e bi rth should oc c u r i n t h e S andh y ak al a ( a )

( t h e tw il igh t hou rs ) wh en th e l u na r H o r a ( 6) sh ould b e
risi ng a nd wh e n m al efic pl anets occu py t he last Nav am sas
of s i gns t he ch i l d woul d d ie soo n a fte r b i r th Agai n i f a t
, .
, ,

th e t i me o f bi r th th e M oo n and th ree m al efie p l anet s o c

,

c u p y th e fo ur K endras on e i n e ac h th e n also th e ch il d
, ,

wou l d d i e .

N o r as
( a ) San dh y ak al a ; Thi s i s de fined by th e Au tho r
i n h i s B t i b at S amh i ta S t a nza 1 c h 3 0 ,
That p e ri o d ,
.

wh i ch p recede s th e momen t wh e n t h e S u n has j ust

h al f ri sen and th at wh i ch succeed s th e moment wh en t h e
S u n h as j u st h al f set du ri n g wh i ch th e stars are i n visibl e ,
,

i s k nown as S an dh ya k al a or twi li gh t period .

”

( 6) I n th e odd si gns th e second hal ves and i n th e , ,

even si gns th e fi rst hal ves are kno w n as L u nar H o ras

’

.
,

2 If e ith er si gn C ancer or si gn Scorpio sh ou l d ri se

,

at th e ti me of bi rth and i f m al efic planets occupy t h e

ea stern h alf o f th e Zod iac wh i le th e b e n e fic planets c c I -

c u p y t h e wester n h al f( a ) the c h il d would d i e i mmediately

,

after birth Agai n i f m al e fic plan ets occu py th e 12 th

.
,

and th e 2 n d h ouses or t he 6t h and th e 8 t h h ouses fro m

th e risi n g si gn th e ch ild woul d d i e
,
.

NO T E S .

( ) The plane o f merid ian d i vid es th e Zodiac i nto

'
a

tw o equ al h al ves know n a s th e E aster n a n d Wester n

h al v es ; so t h at , i f t h e 10 of C ancer, fo r i nst ance ,
°
,
5B .
B iket
r Jat aka .
[C m v r.

i E a s te rn h al f w t ime,
’

Sh o u l d be r is i n g the
‘
at oul d the
'
' t - w -

r o u g l i l y c o m p r i s e th e port ion o f th e Zo di a c f r o m me c ca
' '

of A r ies t o t h e 10 o f L ibra s an d th e Western h al f wo u l d

‘

-
' °

comprise th e portio n of th e Zodiac fro m t he 10 of Libra ° >

t o th e 10 of Aries 0
.

( ) According to cert ai n C omm en tators th e two

6 ,

yogas are t aken togeth er and m ad e to form a si ngle yoga .

I n oth e r wor ds t h e ch i ld w oul d die u nder th e fi rst oga

, ,
y
o nl
y i f m ale fi c plan et s occ up y th e 2 m d th e 1 2 t h th e 6t h ,
'

_ ,

a nd th e 8 t h h ouses Accordi n g to Garga th ere

.
,

dea t h i n each of th e follo w i n g fou r yogas : M al efic pl anets

o c u p y i n g , ( 1) th e 6 t h and th e 1 2 t h 8t h
f
'

an d 2 n a h ouses ( 3 ) the 1 2 t h and 2 n d hous es , a n d ( 4) the

;

8 t h an d 6t h h ou ses .

3 I f th e r isi n g si gn th e setti n g s i g n and th e si gn

.
,

o c c upied by th e M oo n be e ac h occup ied by a i n a l efic pl anet :

and i f th e Moo n b e n o t a s p e c t e d b y b ene fi c pl anet s t h e

’

ch il d will di e i mmed i atel y after birt h

4 I f th e wan i n g Moon occu py th e 1 2 t h h o u s e from

.

t h e ascendant i f th e m a l e fic plan e ts occu py th e ri s in g

,

si g n and th e 8 t h h ou se and i f b e n efie pl anets d o n o t ,

o cc u p y f th e Kendras t h e ch ild w il l di e i mmed iatel y after

,
.

th e Moo n a ttended by a m al e fic pl ane t o ccup y

If
th e ris in g si gn or th e 7 t h th e 8 th or the 1 2 th h o us e end ,
. -

i f b e n e fic planets d o n ot occ upy th e K en dras and i f f th e y ,

do n o t aspect th e M oon the chi ld wil l d ie so on afte r ,

-

birth .

NO T ES .

So th at i f b e n efic planets occupy th e K e nd r as t h e re

, ,

will be n o early death .

6 If whe n th e Moon o cc u p ies th e 6th or th e 8 th

,

h ouse from th e ascendant a m al e fie pl an et aspect th e ,

s ame , t h e c h ild W i l l d ie soon afte r bi rt h “ i fh e n e fic p l an e t s

 58 Bra m J amar .
[o n W .

Moon occu py th e risi n g si gn an d b e betwee n m al efic

planets and i f m al efic pl anets occu py th e 7 t h an d th e 8 th
h ou ses and powerfu l b en e fie pl anet s fai l to aspect th e
M oon ( a ) both the m oth er an d th e ch il d wil l d i e
,
.

NO T E S .

( )
a I f th ey d o a spect th e Moon , th e moth er wi l l
escap e an d the ch ild will d ie .

8 If at th e ti me of bir th , th e Moon occu py th e last

.

N av am s a of a S i gn and n ot be aspected by b e n e fic pl anets ,

and i f m al efic planets occu py th e 5 t h and th e 9 t h hou ses

or i f th e M oon occupy th e risi n g si gn and m al efic pla nets
occu py th e 7 t h house th e ch il d wi ll d i e soon after bi rth
, .

9 I f at th e ti me of b irth th e ecl ipsed Moon occupy

. ,

th e ri si n g S ig n wi th a m al e fie planet ( a ) wh i l e M ars o c
c u p i e s th e 8 t h h ou se both th e m oth er an d th e i n fan t wil l
,

d i e I f i n stead of th e M oon th e S u n ( 5) be i n a Si m ila r

.
,

posi tion su ch d eath will be cau sed by weapons Again

,
.
,

i f ei th er t h e S u n or th e Moon occu py the risi n g Si gn an d

i f m al e fic pl anets occupy th e 5 t h 8 th and 9 t h h ouses th e , ,

ch ild wi ll d i e i f ei th e r th e S u n or th e Moon be n ei th er
,

aspected n or accompan ie d by p owerful b e n e fic planets .

N OT ES .

( ) a Th at is S atu r n .

( b) T h at i s i f th e ecli psed S u n occu py th e ri sin g

,

sign accompani ed by a m a l e fic planet ( either M ercu ry or

S atu rn ) wh i l e Mars occupi es th e 8 th h ouse
,
.

10If at th e ti me of bi rth Sat urn th e S u n th e

.
, , ,

Moo n an d Mars occu py respecti vely th e 12 th 9 t h l s t an d , ,

th e 8 t h hou ses th e ch i ld w il l d ie soo n aft er bi rth i f th e

,

pl an ets be n ot aspected by powerful J upi ter .

NO T E S
To aspect al l th e fou r pl anets Ju piter m ust occu py ,

t h e 5 t h h ouse I f Ju p iter sh ou l d as ect on l y some of t h e

p
.
.
 cs . VI ] .
Bfi rz
’

af J at a ka
. 59
'

fou r planets o r i f h e be weak though h e mi gh t aspect a l l

, ,

th e fou r pl anets th e ch ild w ill die S o th at th e ch ild

,
.
,

wil l escape d eath on ly i f powerfu l J u pi ter aspect all th e

fou r planets .

I f at th e ti m e of bi rth th e M oon (a ) ac c o m p a n i
11 .
, ,

ed by a ni al e fic pl anet occu py th e 5 t h th e 7 t h th e 9 t h , , ,

th e 1 2 t h th e l s t or t he 8 th h ou se an d i f sh e be n ei the r
, , ,

accompan ied nor aspected by powerfu l V e n u s Mercu ry or ,

J upi ter th e ch i ld wi ll d i e soon after bi rth

,
.

NO T E S .

(a ) Th e M oon i s t h e wan i n g Moon according to

Saravali .

12 The d eath wil l occu r wh en th e Moo n comes

.

ei the r t o th e sig n occupied b v the powerfu l plan et causin g

su ch death or to th e si gn occu pied by hersel f at t he ti m e
,

of bi rt h or to th e risi n g S i gn at th e ti m e provided th e ,

Moon i s bot h powerful a nd aspected by po werfu l m al e fic

planets and the Mu ni s say th at th e period for suc h d eat h
is a year ( a ) .

(a) Th e
Moon m akes about 13 revol u tions i n th e
cou rse of a year Whenever th e Moo n i n th e cou rse of
.

m otion becomes powerfu l a nd i s aspected by powerfu l

m al e fic pl anets on reach i n g on e of th e th ree plac e s m e n
t io n e d i n th e text th e d eat h wi ll occu r , .

Not es —Th e C o m me ntator now proceeds to d escri b e a

n u mber of vogas wh ic h cou nteract th e several Bal ar is h t a
yogas g i v en i n t h e text . T hey are gi ve n below :

1 .powerful J upi ter occupy t he ri si n g si gn there

If ,

wi l l be n o early d eath .

2I f th e l ord of th e risi n g si gn be powerfu l an d be

. ,

n ot aspe cte d by m al e fic plane t s bu t be aspected b y bene fi c

planets oc cupyin g th e Kend ras th e ch ild wil l live l en g , .
 60 Bl '

rz z al Jami e .
( o n
. v i .

3 . E ven
th ou gh th e Moo n sh ou ld occupy th e 8 th
house i f sh e shou l d at th e sam e t i me occupy th e D rek
, , ,

kana of J upi ter Mercury or Ven us th ere will be no ea r ly

, ,

death .

4 I f th e M oo n be full i f sh e sh o u ld occu py b en efic

.
,

S igns be between b e n e fic pla nets and be aspect ed by V e

,

n u s there wil l b e n o early death

,
.

If either Mercu ry V e nu s or J upi ter be powe r fu l

5 .
,

and occu py a K end ra th e re wi ll b e n o early deat h even ,

i f h e be accom pani ed by a m al efic planet .

6Thou gh th e Moon occu py th e 6 t h h ouse th ere

.

wi ll be n o e arly death i f sh e occupy th e D r ek k an a of

J upi ter Venus or Mercury
,
.

7 If th e Moon be f u ll an d be be tween b e n e fic
.

p l an e ts th ere w ill be no early d e ath

,
.

8 I f th e Moo n be ful l or if t h e bi rt h occu r d uring th e

.

d ay w h en i t i s wan in g Moon or duri n g th e n i gh t w hen ,

i t i s w ax in g M oon th ere wil l be n o earl y death even i f

,

th e M oo n occupy th e 6 t h or th e 8 t h house .

If th e Moon be full a n d b e aspected by Ju p ite r

9 .

occupy i n g a Kend ra th ere wi ll be no earl y d eath ,

.

10 I f J u piter th e M oon V enu s an d M ercu ry o cc u

. , ,

py
th e houses th e Na v am s as or th e D rek k an as of b en e fic
, ,

pl anets th ere w i ll be n o early d eath

,
.

If ei th er th e lord of th e house occu pied by th e

11 .

n efic pla n et occ u py fa K en d r a , th e r e w il l

'

M o on or i f a b e

be n o early death .

12 planets occu py b en e fic V a r gas ( d ivi

. I f m al e fic
an d be aspected by b e n e fic plan ets occu pyi n g
si on ),
,

b en e fi c V argas there wi l l be n o early

,
death .

13 Rah u occu.
py th e
If8 rd 6 t h o r 1 1t h house a n d ,

as
be p ected by b en efic pl anets , th ere wi l l be n o early
death .
62 Ba/ r ra t
f
J zii a /éc .
[CE Vl l .
‘

B e fore th e lengt h of l i fe can be ascertai ned the y ears ,

gi ve n abov e h ave to be su bj ecte d t o variou s re d u ctions .

2 I f th e plan ets ar e i n th ei r depression d egr ees

.
,

th e ir y ears wil l be one hal f of those state d above ; i f i n -

any oth er pl aces th e y e ars sh al l b e obtain e d b y p ropor

, .

tion ( a ) Th e n u mbe r of y ears gi ve n by L agn a i s th e

.

same as th e n u mber of Na v am s a s o f th e risi n g si gn th at

m ay h ave rise n above th e h ori zon Accordi ng to
som e th e nu mbe r of y e ars gi ven by L agn a i s th e
n u mber of si gn s betwee n t h e firs t poi nt of A ri es an d th e
L agn a Agai n i f a plan et be i n an i n i m i cal si gn h e
, ,

loses a t h i rd of h i s p eri od ( 6) i f h e be an As t an g a t a (f )
planet h e loses on e h al f ( g ) but n o redu ction n eed be
,

mad e i n th e case of Mars ( 6 ) occu pyi n g an i nimica l si gn ,

or i n th e case of Satu rn a nd Ven u s b ein g As t a n g at a

planets .

N OT ES .

( a ) Th is red u ction i s known as N e e c h ardh ah ar an a .

Su ppose for i ns t an ce th e Su n to occu py th e 2 l s t degre e

, ,

o f S agit tari Requ ired h i s years T h e exalt ati on d e

. .

g ree of th e S un i s th e 1 0t h degr ee of Aries and h i s de

pressi on degr e e i s th e 1 0t h d egree of L ibra Wh en i n .

th e l atter degree th e n u mber of years of th e S u n wi ll be

,

on e h alf of wh at i t i s i n th e form er d egr e e z l e on e h al f

-
,
.

of 1 9 or 9 5 ye ars From th e 1 0t h d egre e of L ibra to th e

,
.

l Ot h d egree of Ari es I S 1 8 0 d egrees So th at every degree .

,

gives u s 9 ye ars N ow from th e 1 0t h d egree of L ibra to

% ,
.

rs
th e 2 l st d egree of Sagittari 1s 2 si gns and 1 1 d egrees z e , . .
,

or 7 1 degrees 7 1 degrees give u s 7 1 x 2 y ears

.

1 mT
years 8 m on th s and 2 9 d ays Add in g th i s to 9 } yea r s
3 . 1 ,

we get 1 3 years 5 m on th s and 2 9 d ays Th e years of th e

, .

oth er pl an ets may be si m ilarly ascertai ned T hese y e ar s .

are subj ect to ce r tai n redu ctions as wi ll be seen fu rth er on .

( 6) Th e Aut ho r gives h ere wh at i s k nown as Lag n a a

on . VI I .
) Br z lz at
'

J ere /ea . 63

y u rd a y a th at i s th e risi n g si gn gives a nu mber of years i n

,

th e same way as th e planets d o A sign of Zod iac con sist .

,

i n g of ni n e Nav am s a s gi ves u s 9 years , So th at i f th e .

,

l ot h d e g r ee o f L eo be risi n g th e n u mber of years gi ven by ,

?
Lagn a i s 4 x 9 years = 3 years
7 .

( c) Som e : M a n i t t h a and m en of h is sch ool In t h is .

vi ew th e C om m entator c oncu rs
,
.

( d ) I n oth er words ea ch si gn of
,
th e Zod iac g i ves a
year ; so th at i f th e l ot h degree of L eo — th e 5 t h
,

si gn from Aries be ris i n g th e n u mber of y ears gi ven by ,

5 °
agn a 4 years = 4 years an d 4 month s Th e Co m
L = 41 3
-
r
,
.

m en t at o r add s th at accord i n g to Sarav ali i n th e case o f ,

L a gn ay u r da ya th e rul e gi ven i n not e ( 6) sh ou ld be fol

,

l owed i f th e lord of th e ri si n g Na wa m s a b e po w erful an d ,

th at g i ve n i n th is note sh oul d be fo l l o w ed i f th e lord of

th e risi n g Sig n b e powerful .

( e ) Planet ary p eriod ascert ai ned as p er n ote ( a ) In .

oth er words of h i s ye ars sh all be taken T h is red uctio n

,
.

i s known as Sat r u K s h et rah ar an a -

.

( )
f
’
A pla net i s sai d t o be an A s t a n g at a on e wh en

h e d i sappears w i th i n a parti cular l i m i t from th e S un h i s ,

l i gh t bei n g th en obscu red by th e l i gh t of th e Su n Th i s .

l i m i t v aries with d ifferent pl anets In d i rect cou rse d i s .

,

appearance and r e appearan ce take place as follow -

M ars wh en with i n 17 d egrees from the S un .

Mercu ry 14
B u t wh en retrograd e 12
J u pi ter 11
Ven u s 10
B u t wh e n r etrograd e 8
S atu rn 15
Th e Moon I2 3 ,

Th e reduct ion i s known as Ast a ng at a h arana -

.

( g ) In oth er words h al f of h is peri od shal l be taken

, .

Bu t wh ere both Sat r u kh e t ra an d As t an g a t a red u ction s

h ave to be m ad e t h e gr eate r r ed u ction sha ll be mad e
, ,

(G ar g a ) ,
 Br k M i a /ed [C V I I
’
‘
64 z az . PL .

(h) Th e word u sed i n th e te xt i s Va km th i s i s i n te r

“
e d to mean Mars by som e an d a l anet of etro
”
p r e t p r

grad e m oti on b y oth ers So th at accord i ng t o th e l at ter

”
.
, ,

n o red ucti on for bei n g i n an i ni m i cal si gn n eed be m ad e

from h is years i f th e plan et be retrograde i n moti on I n .

th is vi e w Varab a M i h i r a concu rs B ut th e oth er V i ew h as

,
.

th e support of Bada ra ya n a and G arga »

.

3 If m al e fic pl an ets occu py th e 1 2 t h 1 1t h 10t h 9 t h

.
, , , ,

8 t h or th e 7 t h h o u se from th e ri si n g si gn a redu cti on i n

, ,

fu ll on e ofon e half on e th i rd one fourth one fift h and on e

, '
-
,
-
,
-
,
-

sixth s h al l b e m ade respecti vely i n th e years obtai ned ( a ) If

, .

t h e planets occupyi n g t h e sai d h ouses be b en e fic o n es t h e ,

red uction wi ll onl y b e on e h al f ( 5 ) of wh at was stated fo r -

each Bu t i f several planets occu py a si ngle si gn th e

.
,

red uctio n sh all be mad e for th e most powerfu l one Th is .

i s accord i n g to Sat y ach ar ya

N OT E S .

Th i s red uct ion i s k nown as C h ak r ap at ah ara n a an d

m ust always be m ad e Wh ere two red u ctions h ave to .

b e m ad e ei th er may be done fi rst and th e oth er to th e

,

r esult T he fi nal resu lt wil l be t h e same

. .

( ) a o, —
g an d g of th e y ears sh al l respecti ve
ly be t aken .

( 6)Where the amou nt of red uction was stated to be

full i n th e case of a m al e fic pl anet i t i s onl y one h alf i n ,
-

th e case of a b e n e fic planet ; wh ere i t was stated to be o n e

h al f i n th e former case i t i s onl y o ne fourth i n th e latter
,
-

case a n d so forth I n ot her words 5 .

g g 7 44
6 of , ,
.

,
9
, ,

per i ods shall be taken .

(5) In th i s vi ew , V arah a M ih i ra concu rs .

4 . If a m al e fic
planet ( a ) occu py th e risi n g sign the n ,

m ul ti ply t h e total n u mber of y ears al r e ady obt ai ned by t h e

66 B l cz t J dmfid
‘

f
I E : Vl I l
C
'

rz z .

( )
a -
Do g a ndfian imal s w ith c l aw s, u s u c h
“
- as th e cat ,
‘

th e -

l ion and th e l i ke
,
.

( 6) C h at an d th e l i ke
‘

t h e d e er
“

.
,

6 Th e l e ngth o f li fe o f a person b or n wh e nt h e '

l as t Na v am sa of P i sces 1s r 15 1 11 g w h e n M ercu r y h as j u st ,

passed 2 5 mi nu tes i n sign Tau rus and wh e n all th e oth e r

plan e ts occu py th ei r exaltation s 1g n s I S t h e m axi mum
p e r iod of 1 2 0 years a n d 5 d ays ‘

N O TE S .

T h e ho roscope referre d to i n th e t ext is given be l o w;

-

I u p i t er ,
Ra si C hakra .

As all pl anets exceptin g Mercu ry are i n thei r e xal ta

t i o n si g ns ( and i n t hei r e xaltat ion d egrees as s upposed
by th e C ommentato r ) the y ears gi ven by su ch pl an ets are
th e maxi mu m years assi gned to th e m The m ax 1m u m .

n umber of years of M ercu ry wh e n m h is exaltation de , .

h e 1 5 t h d egre e of Vi rgo i s 1 2 and wh en i n ,

d iz t h e 15 t h degree of Pis c es i s 6 , .

'

Th e remai ni n g 1 5 degrees o f Pisces gi ve u s 6 month s .

S i gn A r i es g i v es i 1 s a year No w th e first d egree of .

Tau ru s g i ves u s 1 2 days and th e refore 2 5 mi nu te s of t h e

‘

l st d egree g i ve u s 5 da ys So th at , t h e years of
 '

B/ q trz z
'

M i a /id
. 67 .

Mercu ry 6 y ears 6 mo n th s l year + 5 days = 7

years 6 month s a n d 5 days
»

,
.

Again as th e e nd of sign Pi sce s was risi n g a ccordi ng

. , ,

to th e C ommentator th e ni ne Na v am sa s of si gn P isce s
,

g ive u s 9 years ; so that we h ave th e followin g

Th e Su n yrs . J upi ter 15 yrs .

Th e Ve nu s 2 1
Mars 15 Satu rn 20
M ercu ry 6 1n s . 5 ds . Lagna 9

N ow, reduction know n as C h ak rap a t al1ar a n a 1s

th e
t o be mad e fro m t h e years o f Mars an d S atu rn these two ,

b e i n g m al e fic planets th e former o cc u p y m g th e l l t h house

a n d the l att er th e 8 th h ouse from th e risi n g sig h Th e .

amou nt of r ed u ction t h erefore i s one l1 al f i n th e case o f -

Mars an d one fift h in t h e case of S a tu rn Accord i ngly

-
.
,

after m aki n g th e red u ct ion th e years of Mars w ill ] be 1 ,

"

and t h ose of S at urn wi ll be 1 6 Redu ctio n s k h o w n as .

Sat r u k s h et r a h ar ana As t an g a t a h ar an a a nd K r uro day a

-
,

h arana h ave not t o be m ad e 1n t h is case Th e r esu lti n g .

years th erefore are

, ,

Years Months D ays . . .

Th e Su n 19
Th e M00 11 25
M ars 7
Mercury 7
J upi ter 15
Venus 21
Sat u r n I6
L ag n a 9 .

Total len gth of li fe 12 0 5

7 Th is P in day u rda ya m eth od has also b ee n treated
.

of by V is h n u g np t a ( a ) D e v as w a m i an d Siddh ase n a Reject

, , .

i n g the age of 8 the period of Bal ar is h t a or e arl y de a h )

,

th e mai n faul t i n th is P 1n day u rday a i s th at i n no

t
.
, ,

case , i t g i ve u s years less th a n 2 0 ( c)

,
. .
68 Bf '

rz zat Jat a ka .
[ce r/ 111
.

N OT E S .

(a) i s oth er wise kno wn as Ch an ak y a

V is h n u g n p t a .

( b) To wh i ch n on e of t h e Ayu r da ya rul es apply .

( 0) T h e Commentator consi ders that t hi s stanza i s

n o t th e Au t hor s th e o bj ectio n to Pi n day u rdaya r aised i n
’

i t h e m eet s as follows b y provi n g th at P i ndayu r daya does

,

give y ea rs below 2 0 H e takes th e follo wi ng h oroscope

T h e fi r st N
.

av am sa o
q u a i i u s 15 th e L agn a
; t h e Sun th e ,

Moon an d Ven u s occu py th ei r exaltation d egrees M ercu ry ,

J upit er an d Sat urn occ u py t h ei r depressio n d egrees a n d

'

Mars occu pies th e 2 8 ih d egre e of si gn Aqu ari u s .

R asi C hakra .

J u p i t er .

N ow , th e Su n t h e Moo n and V enu s are i n t h ei r

as ,

e xal tation d egrees t h ei r years are respe ctively 19 2 5 and

, ,

2 1 and as M ercu ry Ju pi ter a nd Satu r n occu py th ei r de

‘

, ,

p ression d egrees thei r years a re one h alf of th ei r max i

,
-

rnii m years t h at i s one h al f of 1 2

,
1 5 a nd 2 0 or 6
-
an d , ,

10 respectiv el y No w th e 2 8 t h de gree of Capricorn i s th e

.
,

e xal tati on d egree of M ars an d as h e o ccupies t h e 2 8 t lf

,
“ ‘
~

de gre e of Aq h ar in s h e i s r e mo ved from th e exal tati on

,

d e gree b y exa ctly 3 0 degre es H is m axi mu m n u mber o f .

e n i n th e 2 8 111 d e g ree o f C apricorn bei n g 15

y ea r s w h 3 0
'

d e g rees or a si g n gives u s or a y ear an d 3 mo nths S ub .

s
 Bik t J at
r e aka .
[C11 5 V111
a scri bed t h e l i fe of a ki n g Th e r e i s an evident e r ro r i n
‘
~

t h is Another error i s th at persons born n nde n t h e

“ ‘

yoga of a sov erei gn are often fou nd to l i ve l o n g a n d poo r

‘

.
~
.

NOT E S
( a ) S uch as Ba dar a y an a and Y a v an e s w a r a .

( 6) T h e idea i s t h at ei th er m os t of th e ki n gs are
sh or t l i ved or that most of th e begga rs l i ve lon g
-
.

Th e obj ec tion a m ou n ts to th is
Th at th e very yoga wh ich accord i n g to P i n day u rday a ,

15 sai d to give a person th e m axim u m l e n gth of li fe i s c o n s i

d e red by certai n ast rologers as Raj a Yoga I n eith er ca se,

' ‘

several pl an ets occu p y th ei r exaltati on si gns (az a e Stanza ’

1 C h apter X I
,
Th e C om mentator consid ers th i s St anza
.

t oo n o t as th e Au th or s th e obj ectio n rais ed bei n g ’

, ,

For i t i s wron g to s u ppos e th at a ,

parti cul ar yoga cann ot be both a yoga for l on g l i fe an d

o n e fo r th e l i fe of a soverei gn Th e oth er obj ectio n .

r ai sed i n t h e t e x t 1s e v id ently a fri volous one and o ugh t

'

to b e proved before i t can be met .

A ccord in g to J e ev a sar m a th e m axi mu m n u mbe r

9 .
,

of years for each p la net wh en i n h is exal tati on si gn and

degree i s one seventh of th e m axi m u m length of h u m an
~

—
l i fe 12 0 years and 5 days — f w h i ch i s 1 7 years 1 mont h , , ,

i k = l 7 l 448 4
2 2 days 8 g h a t i k a s i h t years °

v g a as , ,
,

n o th in g omitted ( a ) I n th i s v iew J ee v asarm a stand s .

,

a lone an d is n o t su pport ed by Oth er au th ori ties Accord .

i ng to Sat yac h a rya th e planetary years a re th e sam e as ,

th e nu mber of Nav am sas passed over by e ac li planet

Th is vi e w h as th e su pport of many au thorities
. .

NO T E S .

J ust as i n Pin day u rday a t h e seve r al red u cti ons

(a ) ,

a r e 10 b e mad e an d then th e resulti ng l en gth of l i fe

‘
'
. .

as c ertai n ed .
0 11: a B l dt‘

rz z
‘

Jat a ka . 91

C ou ntin g fro m th e Nav am sa of Ar ie s i m m e diat e -f

'

( 6)
‘

ly preced i n g so th at no planet can gi ve more t h an 12

‘

Accord i n g to Sa t y ach ar ya convert th e Sph ut a

10 .
,
“ "

or l on gitud e of th e planet i nto m in u tes ; d i vid e , th e )

‘

nu mber of m i n utes by 2 00 ; th e quoti en t w il l re presen t

.
‘ ‘

th e n u mber of N av a m s a s pass ed over by th e planet frb m .

'

th e fi rst poin t of Aries D i vid e th i s by 1 2 t h e rem ai nd er . .

will gi ve the n umber of Nava msas from th e Na v am s a of

Aries and th e n u mber i s also th e n u mber of y ea r s an d? 1

fr a cti o n o f a y ea r for th e pl an et
'

N OTE S
S up p oser t h e longitud e of th e S u n to b e 1 15 d eg rees , 13 -
,

m i n utes Th i s con vert e d i nto I m m u t e s gi v es

.

N N
'

m in utes w as a a v a m s a con tai n s 2 00 m i n u tes t h

'

o , .
,
e ,

n u mber of Nav am sa s passed o y er by t h e Su n from t h e .

fi rst poi nt of Aries 3 4 D ivi d in g thi s by .

12 we get as remai nd er
,
Na v a m s as from th e n e x t
preced i n g Na v am sa of Aries Th is th en represen ts t h e .
,

years of t h e Su n w h i ch wi ll b e fou n d t o be 10 years, 6 _

month s 2 3 d ays and 2 4 g h a t i k as ; a n d so on for each

, ,

p l anet .

Agai n i f an y p l anet occupies i ts

-
,

sig n or i s retrograd e i n i ts motion th e years assi gned t o ,

i t shall be trebled ; an d i f th e p l an e t b e i n i ts Var g o t

'

t am a or N av am s a or Sw ak s h e t ra or D re k k a n a i ts years ,

sh all be doubled Th e above i s a speci al feat u re gi n .

Sat ya c h arya r s Ay u rda ya I n oth er respects i t r ese mbl es

’
.
,

th e Pi n day u rday a —t h e se veral reducti ons ( a ) a l ready r e

a ppl yto th e presen t case .

NO T E S .

; T h ese are ” for Sat ru K sh et ral 1a ra n a

( ) v
a except
Mars As t a n g at ah ar au a e xc e pt for Ve nu s an d Satu r na nd
,

C h ak ra p at ah ar an a T h e red u cti o nknown as K r ur o daya

'
 72 B ih a t
r J dt a kd .
[ca rV I I .

’
h arana does a pply to Sat yach aryar s m e thod ( v z ae
'
’
no t
S t a nz a
Accordi n g t o G arga a pl anet occu pyi n g h is Ne ech a 2
,
-

r as i lo se s one h al f as stated i n N ote (g ) to Sta nz a 2

- .

ex ce pt i n g C h a k rap a t ah a ran a wh i ch m ust al ways b e ,

do n e O f t h e o ther r e d uctions i f se veral h ave to be done

.
,

t o t h e ye ars Of a pl a ne t i t w ill be su ffi ci ent i f th e b i gge st ,

o ne al on e b e m ade S o s ay s B .h at t o t p al a a n d no aut ho r
r it y says o t h erw ise I t i s j u st t h e same w h e the r t h e
.

reducti o ns a re made fi rst and t h e remai nders are t h e n

doubled or trebled or th e m ultip l e s made first an d t h e .

r ed u ctions th en appl ied to th em .

12 Accord i n g to Sat y ac h arya th e years m onth s

.
, , ,

for t h e La gna th e ri si n g d egree are th e s ame as th e

, ,

n u mbe r-o f Nav a m sa s passed ov er ( a ) ( as i n th e case of

l )
an et sfi b ut 1 f th e risi ng s i gn be p o w e 1f u l ( é ) then t h e
p , ,

n u m b e r o f si g ns passed over repre sent s t h e y ears m o nths, ,

Th e red u ct io n kn own a s K r u rod ay ah ar a n a does

n o t a p ply to S a t yac h ar v a r 3 meth od In t h e ca se o f t h e
’ ' -
.

oth er red u ctio ns t h e years g w en i n t h e first st anza o u gh t

,

n o t to b e empl oye d

NO T E S .

( ) 4 Begi n ni ng fro m t h e next p r eced in g Nav a m s a

of Ar ies
. .

( b) As st at ed i n St a nza 19 C h I ,
. .

( 6) As e x pl ai ned i n Not e to Stanza 2 of th i s

C h apt er .

( 4) T hat
i s t h e sp ecial years o f each p la net a ccord
, ,

i n g t o S at yac h ar y a s m eth od o u gh t to be subj e cted to

’

th e several red uctions .

13 . I n th e mat ter o f Ay u rday a th e m eth od of ,

S ya
a t c h a r y a ( k now
. n as A m s a u rd
y a y a
) i s t he best
s o f A u rda ya) 5 m ade
(
1
o f t h e t h re e m ethod y O,
bj e cti on 1 .

t o i t, on t h e g rou nd, t h at t h e pl a netar y years h ave t o b e

~

.
 B ih a t
r J dt a lea
‘
.
[C PL VI I .
.

l i fe of a pe r son born wh en si gn C a nc er : is
Th e
i ri si n g wh en j u piter an d th e Moo n
,
- occu py s 110 h r i s in g
" -
~
.

as ig n ,
and Ven us occu py th e Kendr a s and . .

th e oth er pl anets occu py th e 1 1 t h 6 t h and ,

i s n ot subj ect to ord i nar y calculat ion but far exceed s th e ,

m a x i m u m period of th e n o rmal h u man existe n ce

.

N OT E S .

1 In oth er words th e o rd i nary Ay u rdaya r nl es , a

fo r as c e rt ai n i n g th e l en gth o f a m an s li fe d o n ot a p p l y t o ’

. th e horoscope m ention ed i n th e text F o r fur t h er p ar t i

. . . .
,
.

. c u l ars ai de N otes a t th e e nd of C h apter I X

_

, ,
.

Nol a
may be i n terestin g to quote h ere a ef w
.
-
It .

h oro scop es of th e natu re of the on e referred to i n th e l as t

st a nza to wh i ch th e ord i nary Ay u rda v a rules d o not
,ap p
l y T l1 ese are m ai
. nl y th e h oroscopes of e m ine n t
s ages wh o are supposed to l i ve fo r s e v er al c e n tu r i es .

Th e ri sin g si gn i s L eo an d J u piter occup i es i t ;

1 .

h
Venus occupies C an cer Mercu ry th e 2 n d ouse Vi r g o , ,

a n d :t h e zm al e fic plan ets occu py th e Up ac h ay a plac e s v i a , ,

“ h e 3 rd 6 t h 1 0t h and th e 1l t h h ouses A person bo r n

'

t , , ,
. .

:i n th e ab ove yoga w il l li ve for 1 000 years ,

.

2 . The
S u n a n d Mars occ u py th e 4t h ho u se from
th e as cen da nt ; S atu rn occup i es t h e risin g si gn Rah u t h e ,

1 2 th house an d the oth e 1 plan ets th e 8 t h hou se A p er .

sonb o rn i n th e above yoga w ill l i ve for years

‘

Th e risi n g si gn i s Ari es an d th e S u n occup i es

3 .

i t; S atu rn occu pi es t he 4t h or th e 9 111 h ouse M a rs t h e

‘ '

.
,

7 t h h ouse an d po w erfu l Moon th e 1 2 th h o u se Ap e rs o n

‘

. .

bo rn 1 11 t h e above yoga will l i ve fo r y ears b y t h e .

power of drugs .

Th e risi n g si gn i s S agi ttar i or Pisces and J u pi

4 . .

t er occu pi es i t ; sig n G emi n i i s u noccupied an d V e nu s

o ccu pi es on e o f th e K e nd r a hou ses Ape rs o n b or n i n .
CH VI LJ
. Bih r at M ia/ ltd
”
.

th e above yo g a w il l l ive fo r a great n u mber of year s b y

‘

1
th e po wer of d ru gs and will attai n th e posit io n of I n dra ;
5 If al l th e pl an ets occupy ei th er a si n gl e si gn o r
.

th e T rik o n a or th e Ke nd ra h ouses a pe rso n born i n th e ,

ab o v e yo g a wil l ei th er di e i m med iatel y after bi r th or l i ve

'

for a y u g a by th e po w er of m a n t r a s .

6 . planets do n ot occu py th e T ri k o n a
If m al e fic .

h ouses b e n e fic plan ets d o n ot occup y th e Kend ra h ouses

, ,

and i f th e 8 t h ho u se be not occu pied by a m al e fic pl anet ,

a perso n born i n t h e above yo ga wi l l become a D em .

T h e risi n g sig n i s Tau rus a nd Venus occupi e s

7 . .

i t ; J up iter occu p ies one of th e Ke nd ra h ouses a n d t h e

othe r planets occu py th e 3 rd 6 t h and th e 1 1t h h ou ses , .

A person born u nder th e yoga w il l beco me a D e v a after

l i ving for a great n u mbe r of years by th e power of d ru gs
and mant r as .

Th e ri si ng si g n i s C an cer ; Satu rn occu pi es

8 .

s i g n L ibra ; J u pi te r occup ies C apri corn ; a nd th e Moon

occu pies Tau rus A person bor n i n th e above yoga atta i ns
.

the position of Br a / mm after l i vi n g a great ma n y years

by th e stren gth of d ru gs an d m antras .

'

The risi n g si g n 1 5 C an cer an d C ancer i s also th e

9 .

ri sin g Nav am sa ; J u pit e r occupies on e of t h e Kend ra '

houses Mar s th e 7 t h hon s a n d Ve n u s i s i n Sim h as a

,

namsa ( a ) A person born i n th e a b ove yo g a wil l live

.

lon g by th e power of d ru gs .

Th e r i sin g Nav a m s a i s th e last Na v a m s a o f

10 . .

si g n Vi rgo an d Mercu ry occu p ies i t J u pite r occupies th e

7 t h h ouse and is i n G o p u r a m s a or Satu rn is i n M r id v a m sa .

A pe rs o n born u nd er the ab ove yoga wil l l i ve for a n i n h

n i te n u mbe r of yea rs .

11 . V en u s is in D e v al o k am s a ;Mars i s i n one of th e
( a) F o r an l
e x p a n at o n i of t h e se Am sa s o r pl t y p it i
a ne a r id t h
. os o n s, v e e
no t e s at t h e e nd .
 Bih M arita [CI I
l

at
-
r . .

K end ra h ou s es an d J upiter i s l o i n o ne of th e K end ra ‘

a s

h ouses and is i n Sim h as a n a m s a A person born i n th e

-

above yoga wi ll l i ve for a cou ntless n umber o f years .

12 Ven u s occu pies on e of th e K en dra h ou s es an d

.
1

15 m V arg o t t am a posi ti o n an d i n P ara v at am s a ; J u pi te r

occu pi es one of th e Ken d ra h ou ses and i s i n S w a rg al o
kamsa , A person born i n th e above yog a w i l l l ive for a
c ou ntl ess n umber of ye ars by th e power of d ru gs .

J u p i ter occu p ies on e of th e Ken dra hou ses an d

13 .
,
’
i s i n G Op u r am s a ; Ve nu s occu pi es one o f th e T r ik o n a
h ouses an d i s i n P a rav a t am s a an d th e ri si n g si g n i s C an
c er . Ap ers o n born i n th e above yoga will l i ve fo r a .

yu g a .

14 . Th e risi n g sign i s C an cer a nd Ju pi ter o c cupi es

i t a n d i s i n th e Na v am s a of Sagi ttari an d 2 or 3 pl a nets
o ccupy th e K en dras A person born i n th e above y oga
.

w i ll l ive l on g and attai n th e posi ti on of Br ah m a .

15 V enu s occ u pies th e 3 r d or l l th h ou se and i s i a

.

Gopu ra or oth e r Am s a s an d th e r i si n g Nav am sa i s

,

Tau ru s of si g n Tau rus A person born i n t h e a b o v e

.
,

y oga w i ll l ive long an d attai n th e po si tion of Br a / mm

'
.

16 V e n u s occu pies th e r isi n g si gn J upi ter t b e 7 t l 1

.

h o u s é ; th e M OO 11 si g n Vi rgo an d th e risin g Nav am sa i s

, ,
.

Ari es of si gn Sagi ttari A p er s on h o rn i n th e above

_

'
"

yoga will obtai n sal v a tion .

17 Mercu ry occupies th e 5 t h h ouse an d i s i n

.
,

G opu ra or oth er A m s a s ; th e risi ng si gn i s Aquari us a nd

J u pi ter occ u p i es i t A per son born i n th e above yoga
.
,
.

W 1I 1 attai n th e posi ti on o f B rah ma .

1
a

1
18Ju p iter oc cu pi es on e of t h e K en dra h ou ses
.
”

S a tu rn occ u pies t h e l l t h l i o u s e th e S u n occu pies th e t a

‘
'

2 n d h ouse ; G u li k a ( th e h i gh er apsi s of a pl a n e t s course )

’
, .

occu pi es th e 7 t h h ouse a n d Mars occu pies th e 9 t h h o u se .

A person born i n t he above yoga wi ll l i ve for a y u ga ,

.
78 ,
Bkif zat . Mia M .
[CH VI I . .
'

na m sa A perso n . b o rn xi nrt h e above yog a w ill becom e a "

Mn n i or a Ri sh i '
.

27 T h e Su n , occu pies si gn Ar ies , Ju pi te r ei th e rth e

‘

9th house o r sign C ancer a nd th e m al e fic

plan ets occu py
‘

th e : 3 rd; 6 th and t i1 e 11t h h o u ses '

-
. A person born in th e
above yo ga: wil l become a Mun i .

Am s as em pl a M ed .

In we; h ave referred to th e si x modes of di

C h ap t e r I ,
‘
, r

V ision 0 6 th e E cl i pt i c known as S h a dv a rg a
. C ertai n .

'
wri ters h ave fou r more d ivi si ons known as oSa pt a m a m sa , ,

D as a m s a Sl z oda s a m sa and S/z a s/z ly a m s a

, ‘
These te n .
t.

d i v i s i on s of th e E clipti c are known as D asa r/ a rg a .

is th e d i vi sion of a sign of th e Zod i ac

Sa p t am am sa
i n t o 7 eq u al p arts Th e l ords of t he 7 parts of th e odd . .

signs a re r es p ect i v e l y th e lords of th e 7 si g ns of t h e Zodi a c

r
. .

commenci ng from th e o dd sig n ; and th e lords of t h e 7

,
. . .
~

parts of th e even si g ns are respecti vel y th e lord s o fi the 7 -

si g ns o f t h e Z o diac begi nni n g from th e 7 t h si g n from th e

. .

e ven si g n .

i s th e d i vision o f a sign o f th e Z odi a c i nter

D as am sa
10 equ al parts Th e lord s of th e 1 0 parts of th e od d signs .
. 1 . .

are respecti vely th e l ords of t h e 10 signs o f th e Z o dia c c o m

m en c i n g fro m th e od d si gn an d th e lords of th e 10 pa r ts , .

o f t h e e v en si g ns are respecti ve l y th e lord s of th e 1 0 si g ns

‘

. .

com menci n g from th e 10t h sign from the even si gn .

Sh o da sa m s a i s — t h e d i v i s io n of a s 1 g n of t h e e cl i pti c .

i nto 1 6 eq ual p art s Th e lord s of th e 16 p ar t s o f t h e od d

. . . .

si gns are th e lords o f th e 12 signs com m e nci n g from t h e

'
,

odd s ig n; t o g e t li er with B rah ma V i sh n u Rudr a and S urya

-
,
, ,

t h e l ords oi th e 1 6 parts of th e even s i g n s are th e lord s o li

‘
x
. .

t li e 12 si gns com menci n g fr om th e even si g n t o g e t h e r

~

, i

w ith S urya R ud ra V i sh n u and Brahm a , , .

Sh ash t ya m s a i s th e d i vision of a si gn of t h e .
ec l ip t ic
OH v n q
. . Br ih a t J ci ta kd
‘
.
17 9

i nto 60 equal parts T 60 pa rt s f th e od d s ig n s are

' ‘ '
. he o

th ose O f
G h ora . 2 1 P adm a
. .
41
. . . K a li u as a .

2 Raksh asa . . 22 .
L aksh m i . 42 . M ukhy a .

3 Dev a
“
. .
‘

23 . V ag e e s a . 3 . V am s ak s l i ay a .

4 K uber a D i gam bara

‘
24
‘

. . . .

Rak s h og a ua D eva 45 K a la u pa
’

25
‘ ‘

.
5 . . . . .
-
r .
‘

26 . . Ardr a . 46 Sou m y a
“

.
‘
.

”
I . Bh r ash t a . 27 .
L
K aiin as a . 47 . M ridu .

K u l agl m 28 K s h i t i s w ar a 48 S u s it al a
‘

8
‘

. a . . . .

9 .
Gar ala . 2 9 . K am al ak ara . 49 . D am sh t rak ar al a .

Agn i M an da t iii aja 5 0 I n du m uk h

‘

10
‘

30
‘
. . . . . a.

ll Ma ya 3 1 M r it y u 51 P rav in a
‘

t . . . . . .

'

7
12 . Tré t fipu reesa . 32 . Kala . 52 . K al a gn i x
13 Ap am p at i 33 D av a g n i 53 D an day u dh a
’

. . . . . .

1 4 D e v ag au e sa
. . 34 . G h ora . 5 4 N i rmala
.
.

15 . K ala . 35 . . Am a ya . 55 . S ubha .

16 . . Ah i . 36 . C a u t a ka . 56 . Asu b h a .

'

l7 . Am ri t am s a . 37 . Su dl i a . 57 . At i s it a l a .

18 . C hand ra 38 . A m ri ta . 58 . S udh a .
[ na .

19 . M r icl u . 3 9 . Po o r n ach an dr ab p P ay o dh i bh i a m a .

‘
20 . Kom ala . 40 .

An d t h e B
O parts of th e even si gns are th e above i n
‘

'

t h e i u v ers eorder ; th at i s b e g i n ni n g f r o m I n du ré k h a an d
‘

e ndi ng i n G hora .

No w a pla net wh i ch occup i es h i s p art i cu lar h ou se

, ,

Nav am s a D w adas a m s a T r i m s a m sa &c i s sai d t o h e iii

, , ,
.
,

h is V a r g a A pl an et o cc u p y i n g t w o Va rgas i s sa id t o h e
. .
~

i n P ar ij at am s a i f l i e o c c u p ies t h r ee Varg as h e i s s a id i o
’

h e i n U t t a m a m sa ; i f Y o u r va r gas i n C op u ra m s a ; i f fiv e ,
.

v a t g as i n Si m h as an a m s a { i f si x i n P ar av at am sa
,
i f se ve n ,

o r ei ght i n D ev al o k a m s a ; i f n i n e i n A
, i r av a t a m s a ; a nd ,

i f ten i n V ai ses l i ikam s a

, .
b
 B l at J cit a kd [ I Ih
’

.
30 .
rz z .
O
C H V I n

C H A PT E R VI II .

On Pl an et ar y Di v i s i o n s and Su b Di v i si o ns of Li fe
Know n as Bas as a nd Ant ar das as .
i

i
“ L

1 .D et erm i ne fi rst wh i ch of th e follow i n g th ree i s

powerful —( a ) th e Risi n g S i gn th e S u n an d t h eMoon
b , .

H i s per i od comes first I h e n fol l ow th e per i ods of th e

’ ‘
.

planets occu pyi n g th e K end ra h ou s es fro m s uch power ,

ful r i si ng si gn or th e S u n o r th e M O O11 T he n com e th e .

period s of th e pl anets occupyi n g t h e P au a ph ara h ouses

fro m th e sa m e ; a n d lastl y co m e th e periods of planets
occ u py i ng th e Ap o kl i m a h ouses I f th ere be n o
p l an et s 1 n th e Kend ra or P an ap h a ra or Ap o k l im ah ou s es ,

then th e per i od s of th e oth er p l anets come i n th e ord er

sta t ed ( 0)
NOTE S I .

( a ) I ii more way s th a n on e c om par i so n wi th th e 1n

othe r two accord i n g to Yav an es w ar a m a e S tanzas 1 9 to

'
’

of C l1 .a n d S tanza 19 of C h I ) .

6
( ) T h e order i n wh i ch co m e th e pe ri ods of t h e
Se veral pl a nets o cc u p y m g th e Ken dra or th e Pa n a p h ar a
or th e Ap ok l i m a hous es 1 5 gi ve n i n th e n ext stanza .

( c) I n oth e r word s th e 8 Da sa p e 1 io ds divide i nto

,

t h re e d is t i n ct g rou ps Those of th e plan ets occu p y ing th e 4

.

Movable s i gn s for m on e grou p ; th ose of t h e p l anets occu py

i n g t l1 e 4 Fi xed si g ns for m anoth er rou p and th ose of t h e G

planets occu pyi n g th e 4 C o m m on signs fo rm a thi rd

‘

grou p No w i f th e L agna th e Su n or t h e M oon

‘ ;

.
, ,

W h i ch eve r i s m ore po w erful th an th e oth er two occu py a ,

M ov abl e si gn th e M ovabl e grou p c om es first, the F i x ed

,

group co m es n e x t an d th e C o m m on grou p co m es last .I f

’

i t occu py a fi xed si g n t h e F i xed grou p c o m

‘

C om m on grou p co m es n ext an d t l fe M o v ab l e gr o u p c o m es
’
‘

last An d i f i t occu p y a C om m on si gn th e C om m on grou p

.
,

comes first th e Movabl e grou p comes next and the F i x ed

,
82 Bih at r J dt a kci .
[C H V
. I I I .

th e planets occu py i ng th e 7 t h house from th e l ord are ,

each one seventh ; an d th ose of th e planets occu pyi ng th e

, ,

4t h a n d th e 8 th h ouses fro m t h e lord are e a ch one fou rth , , ,

-

of th e An t ardas a peri od of the l ord Th e An t ardasa .

per i ods o f th e Lagna dasa sh al l be deter m in ed i n th e

-

sam e way .

NO T E S .

Pl anetary d i vision s of l i fe are k now n as Dasa

per i ods and pl anetar y su b d ivi si ons of l i fe are kno w n as
-

th e An t ar da s a peri ods .

( 5 ) Th e An t ar das a peri ods of a parti cul ar Dasa period

of a planet co m e i n th e ord er stated i n th e
fi rst co m es th e An t a rdas a period of th e pl anet i tsel f t hen ,

th at of th e plan et occu p yi n g the sa m e h ouse a s th e lord of

t h e Dasa peri od th en th at of th e p l anet occu pyi ng th e 5 t h
,

or th e 9 t h h ou se from th e lord th en th at of th e p l a net ,

occupyi n g th e 7 t h h o u s e fro m th e l ord an d l astl y th at o f ,

th e plan et occu p y i n g th e 4t h or th e 8 th h o u s e fro m su ch

l ord If several pl a nets occu py t h e sa m e h ouse as th e
.

l ord of th e Dasa period th e lord of th e An t ar das a i s th e

,

m ost powe rfu l of th em Si m i larly i f several planets

.
,

occu py th e 5 t h or th e 9 t h h ouse or th e 7 th h ouse or th e

4t h or th e 8 t h h ou se fro m th e si gn occu pied b y th e lord
of th e Dasa t h e l o r d of the An t ar da s a i s th e m ost powerfu l
,

plan et If th ere be several plan ets i n th e 5 t h or the 9 t h

.

h ouse th en th e fraction for th e powerfu l planet of each

,

i s 4 S i m i larly i f there be several plan e ts i n th e 4t h or

.
,

th e 8 t h h ouse the fractio n for th e powe rful pl an et o f each

,

is If th ere be no pl anets i n any of th ese places th e An ,

t ardas a peri od s of th e other pl anets alone sh oul d be taken .

4 Th e fraction s
. should al l be m ade to h ave a
com m on den om i nator wi th d i fferent n u m erators Th e .

D asa peri od sh ou l d be d i vided b y the s u m of th e nu m era

tors an d th e quoti en t when m ulti plied by th e several
nu merators will gi ve the p e riods of th e several A n t ardas as .
ea vi m] Bih
‘

. r at J am/1.2 . as

NO T E S .

( a)Th at is are al l th e possible ones .

Su ppose for i nstance th ere are planets i n th e s everal

,

pl aces referred to i n th e last stanza excepti ng say th e 7 t h , ,

h o u s e fro m th e s i gns occupi ed by th e l ord o f th e Dasa .

Th e periods of th e fou r An t ar das as — those of ( l ) th e lord

o f th e D asa ( 2 ) th e planet with i t ( 3 ) th e planet occupy
, ,

i ng th e 5 t h or th e 9 t h house fro m i t and ( 4) th e p l anet ,

occup y i n g th e 4th or th e 8 t h h ouse fro m i t are i n t h e -

proportion of } g { Red uci n g these to fractions

l : 1 n

with a com mon d en o m i nator we get 45 : 1 2 : f f : 1 2 ;

6
,
3
1
4

i n oth er words th e An t a r das a periods are i n th e propor

,

ti on of 1 2 : 6 4 3 Th e s u m of these n u m bers i s 2 5 ; i f,
.

th erefore th e Dasa peri od be divided by 2 5 and th e qu o

,

t ient m ulti pl ied by 1 2 6 4 and 3 we shal l obta i n th e

, , ,

per i ods of th e fou r An t ardasas .

5 Th e Dasa period ( a ) of th e most pow e rful ( 5)

.

pl anet occu py i n g at t h e ti m e of bi rth th e exaltation d egree

of its exaltation si gn ( 6 ) i s known as S a m p u m a ( a ) Th e
,
.

d asa period o f a weak planet o ccu py i n g th e d epression

d egree of i ts d epression si gn i s known as Rz dl a ( e) T h e
'

’
.

d asa pe riod o f a planet occu pyin g a n i n i m ical Na v am s a

a nd also th e depression d egree o f i ts depr e ssion si gn i s
known as Am ie/2 m .

NO T E S .

( a ) As well as th e An t ardas a per i od i n th is a n d i n

the next two cases m en tioned i n th e text .

( 6) Power ful i n every way w ae S tanzas 19 to 2 1 C h

'
'

, .
,

(6 )
A n d al so th e d as a period of a planet th ou gh no t
powe r ful occu p y i n g th e exaltation d egree of i ts exaltatio n
sign accord i n g to the C o m m entator
, .

( d ) T h e dasa period of a p l an e t occu pyin g si m ply

i ts exa l tat i on si gn and n o t very power fu l is known as
 84 Br z lz at j am/1.2 m v I 11
'

. . . , .

( e)Th e dasa p er iod of a weak plan et occu pyi ng

si mply i ts depression si gn i s also known as Ri /el a .

6 Th e dasa p er i od ( a ) of a planet wh i ch qu i ttin g

.

th e exaltation degree m oves toward s th e d epressi on sign

i s k now n as Aw ro /z z n i wh i le so movi n g i f th e planet
’

occu py a friendly or an exal tation Na v a m s a h i s d asa

period i s know n as A l a d/zy a m a Again th e d asa peri od of
.
,

a planet wh i c h qu i tting th e d epressi on degree m oves

toward s its exaltation si gn is known as wh ile
so m ovi n g i f th e th e planet occup y a n i n i m i cal or a d e
,

pression N av am s a h is dasa period i s known as Adka m a

NOT E S .

( 4) A s wel l as th e An t ar das a period accordi n g to th e

C ommentator .

( 5) Such d asa periods produ ce evi l .

( 6 ) O r h i s ow n Na v am s a acco rdi n g to th e C o m m e n
tator E xalt a ti on N av a m s a i s one wh ich be ars th e n ame
.

of th e exa l tation sign .

Su ch d asa period s prod u ce prosper i ty .

( e) Ar o h i n i da s as and M a d h ya m a d a s a s prod uce

prosperi ty a n d Av a ro h i n i dasas and Ad h am a das as pro
d u ce e vil A planet wh i ch occupies a n e utral sign or
.

Nav a m s a prod u ce neither good nor evi l .

7 .Th e dasa period ( a ) of a pl anet wh i ch occu pies a ,

d e pression or an i ni m i cal Nav am s a when i n a good posi

,

i s k nown as M z s rap/z al a ( c) Th e several na m es of

'

tion .

th e dasas i n d icate b y t h e i r3 m e au in g th e natu re of th e d asa

‘

period s ( d) We sh all descri be ( i n th e course of th i s C hap

.

ter ) ( e) th e e ff ects of t h e several planeta ry da sas .

N OT E S .

A s we l l as th e An t a rdasa per i od accord i n g to

th e C o m m entator .

( b) Th at i s, w he n th e pl an et occup ies h is own house ,

a fr i en dly h ouse or h i s M o o l a t ri k o n a or ex altat i on house .

86 Bih
r at J ci t a kd . [C H VI I I . .

9 .
Th e Naisarg ik a das as i n th e case of al l
creatu res are those of th e M oon Mars Mercu ry Ve n us , , , ,

J upi ter th e S u n an d Satu rn i n th e ord er stated a n d th ei r

, ,

peri od s are res p ecti vely 1 2 9 2 0 18 2 0 an d 5 0 years

, , , ,

(a) . If th e Nai s a rg ik a d asa peri od and th e ord i nary pla

n e t a ry dasa ( 6) peri od h appe n to ru n togeth er su ch peri od ,

( )
0 wi ll be a prosperous one Accord .i ng to Ya v a n e s w a ra ,

t he closi n g pe riod ( d) is th e Nai sarg ik a L agna d as a an d

prod uces pro speri ty Th is is objected to by some
. .

NO T E S .

( )
a I n al l 1 2 0 y ears I f th.e l ord of the N a is a r g i

k a d asa period be po w erful an d occu py an y o f th e U pa

ch aya places h e w il l prod u ce prosperi ty and i f h e be weak
,

and occupy an An u p ac h a y a place h e wil l produ ce ev i l .

( 6) O r An t a rdas a period accord i n g to th e C om

m en t a t o r .

( ) c A si m i l ar remark appl i es to th e An t ardas a

per i ods .

'
( ) a T h e peri od of l ife a fte r 1 2 0 years .

10 I f th e lord of th e d a s a period or one of h i s

.

fri endly plan ets occu p y th e L agn a ( a ) or i f th e Lagn a ,

be l on g to th e Varga ( d i v i sio n ) ( 6) of th e lord of th e d asa

period , or i f a b en e fic plane t occu p y th e Lagna or i f th e ,

lord of th e d asa peri od occu py th e 3 rd 6 t h 1 0t h or th e , ,

l l t h h ouse fro m th e L agna su ch d asa period ( 6 ) wi ll be a

,

prosperous on e
Agai n when th e M0 0 11 occupies (e) a s ig n fr iendly (f )
,

t o the lord o f th e d asa (g ) or th e exal tation si gn of th e

lord of the dasa or the 3 r d 6 t h l 0t h 1 1t h 5 t h 9 t h or
, , , , ,

th e 7 t h house ( 12 ) fro m t h e si gn occu pi ed by th e l ord of

th e d asa period , sh e will brin g 0 11 prospe r i ty ; otherwi se
sh e wil l prod uce m isery .

NO T E S .

( a ) Lagna : T h is i s i nterpreted to m ea n th e r i si ng
s i gn at th e momen t of th e com m encemen t of t h e d asa
CH . VI I I J Bih at r J t iz a kci
‘
. 87

per i od so th at th e h ou r of co m m en ce m en t of a d a sa
,

period m ust first be ascertai ned and a figu re of th e Heaven s

d rawn u p for th e hou r It i s absolutely i mpossibl e to .

d eter m i ne the Lagn a at th e co m m en ce m e nt of the Dasa ,

m uch less i ts Varga ( D i vision ) .

( 6)
Varga : If for i nstanc e th e L agn a be th e si gn
, , ,

Hora D re kk an a Na v am sa D w adas am sa or T r im sa m sa o f
, , ,

th e lord of Dasa period .

( c) Or An t ardas a per i od accord i n g to th e Com

m e n t at o r .

I f e i t h er th e fri e nd ly plan et or th e b en e fic
(a )
’

pl anet occu pyin g th e Lagna be a n At im i t ra plan et to th e

lord of th e d asa peri od su ch peri od wil l be a very p ro s p e
,

rous o n e ; i f such b e n e fic pl a net b e a n At i sa t ru plan et ,

th e perio d w ill not be a prospe ro us on e ; bu t i f th e pl a n et

be a n eu tral one j ust th e e ffects of th e dasa period wil l
,

OC C H I
‘

( e) Th e M OO 11 cau ses p rosperi ty wh i l e i t passes

th rou gh th e several pl aces m ention ed i n th e text Th ese .

places are wi th reference t o th e sign s occu pied by th e

l ord s of th e Dasa and An t a rd a sa p er 1o ds i n th e course o f
th ei r m otions i n th e ecli pti c .

(f ) Fri endly for th e ti m e bei n g .

(g ) O r A n t a r d a s as accord i ng to th e C o m m en tator .

'

n ote
’
( b ) V z a e ,

( z ) That i s when th e Moon passes th rou gh th e

'

oth er places .

T h e firs t p ara of th e text wi ll d eter m i n e th e charac

.

ter of th e D asa an d An t ar das a period Th e s econd para .

.

wil l en able a person to determi n e th e h appy or u nh app y

da y s i nd i cated b y th e Dasa and An t a rdas a p eriod s It .

wi ll also e nable on e to d eter m i n e wh i ch of t h e 1 2 Bh av as

‘

f ro m th e risi n g sign a t th e t i m e o f bi rth th e M oon oc e n

ies ( for th e t i m e bei ng ) T h e good or b ad e ff ec t s w i l l

p .
88 Bih at
r J dt a kd .
[C H VI I
. I .

a fiec taccordi n g to G arga th e obj ec t s i gn i fied by the

several Bh a v as Vz a e S tanz a 1 5 C h I
'
’
. .
, ,

11 If at t h e ti m e of co m m en ce m en t of th e D asa
.
,

period of a pl an et the Moo n occu py sig n C an cer th e

, ,

n at i ve wil l beco m e rich will l i ve i n co m fort an d will be res

,

p e c t e d i f at th e ti,
m e th e Moo n occu p y si gn Ari es or si gn
,

S corpi o h i s w i fe w il l beco m e u n ch ast e i f th e Moon occupy

,
.

ei th er si gn G e m i n i or sign Vi rgo th e person wi l l becom e ,

l earned get fri e nd s an d beco m e ri ch if th e Moon ocen

,

py si g n Leo th e person w,
il l work i n forests 0 11 road s and ,

n ear h ou ses ; i f th e Moon occu py si gn T au ru s or si gn Li bra ,

h e wil l eat su m ptu ou s m eals ; if sh e occup y sig n C apri

corn o r s ig n Aqu ari u s h e wi ll get a bad woman an d i f
,

th e Moon occu p y si g n Sa g i ttari or si gn P i sces th e ,

person wi l l beco m e rich h app y and respect e d , .

12 I n th e dasa period ( a ) of th e Su n a person wi l l

.
,

acqu i re weal th by deal i n g i n perfu m es or n ai ls tu sks of ,

eleph an ts a nd th e l ike an i m al s i n ti ger ski n an d th e l i ke , ,

i n gold by act s of cruel ty b y means of roads b y th e k ing

, , ,

and by battle He wi ll beco m e cru el cou rageou s perse ver

.
, ,

i n g renowned an d v alorou s wi ll get i nto troubl e th rou g h

, ,

h i s wi fe son m oney e ne m y weapons fi re or th e kin g ;

, , , , ,

and h e will beco m e l iberal i n gifts and add i cted to si nfu l

deeds h e w il l quarrel w i th h i s servants a nd wil l beco m e
a ffli cted w ith pai n i n h i s ches t an d belly an d th e like
d iseases .

( 4 ) O r An t arda sa peri od accordi n g to th e C o m m e n

tator The tech n i cal na m es su ch as Sa m pu rna Adh am a
.
, , ,

& c gi ven to th e planets i nd i cate th e b e n e fic o r th e m a l e fic

'

.
,
’

ch aracter of th ei r Dasa period Vz de no te ( a ) to Stanza 7 ’

.

If th e dasa peri od be good th e g ood e fie c t s alon e

'

will co m e to p ass and i f bad th e b a d e ff ects alon e will ,

‘

co m e to pass and if both the e ff ect s wi l l be both goo d ,

'

and b ad Vz afe, Stanz a 1 9 ,

 90 Bri h at
[C H . VI II .

i n genu ity, b ri gh t pe rsonal appearance , m i l i tary f am e by ,

acts of generosi ty, m antras, d iplo m acy , th e k i n g a nd th e

Vedas H e wil l have an i n crease of gold h orses sons
.
, , ,

e l eph ants and cloths an d will acqui re th e fr i en dsh ip of

,

good k i ngs .

He wi l l l earn t h i ngs requ i ri n g mu ch i n ge n u ity w i l l ,

su ff er from foot j ou rney a n d pai n i n th e ear and w i ll

qu arrel wit h w i cked m en .

17
I n th e Dasa period of Ven u s th e person wil l
.
,

enjoy sweet m usi c v ari ous pl easu res perfu m es su m p

, , ,

tu ons meal s alcoh ol fiu e cloths women an d preciou s

, , , ,

ston es He w i ll be of fin e appearan ce valorous an d will

.
, ,

enj oy every substan ce p rovoki n g se xu al passi on w i ll be» ,

come l earn e d i n th e S astras wi l l obtai n th e obj ect of h i s ,

d esi re will acqu i re friends will beco m e ski ll e d i n trad e

, ,

an d i n Agri cultu re and will ge t h i dden treasu res a n d

weal th .

He w il l quarrel w it h crowd s of p eopl e wi t h th e ,

king h u n ters and w i cked me n and h e w ill su ff er gri ef

,

from h is own fri ends .

NO T E S .

( a) Yoga S astra accordi n g to th e C o m m entator .

18 I n the Dasa p eriod of Satu rn t h e person w i ll get

.
,

asses ca m el s bi rds bu ff al oes a n d ol d wo m en w ill rul e

’

, , , ,

o v er h a m l ets vi llages or towns and wi ll t h e reby b eco m e

, ,

renowned an d w il l ge t grai n of i nferi or qual it y .

H e w i ll s u ff e r di ffi cul ti es fro m phlegm ati c an d wi n dy

co m pl ai n ts from j ealousy an ger d i stract i on of m i nd , , ,

an d dirty habits He wi ll be i dle su ff er from gri ef and be

.
,

m u ch troubled H is se rv an ts sons d au gh ters an d w i fe

.
, ,

w ill exercise a u th orit y over l i i m and h i s organ s w i l l

beco m e d e fecti v e .

19 . If th e dasa period be a b e n e fic o ne th e good ,

e ffec t s w il l com e to pass i f i t be a m al efic on e , t h e b ad

 m B} Jam/1.1
"

vi
'

cH .
- rz ml . 91

e ff ects will come to pass If i t be of a m i xed nature both .

,

e ff ects wi ll come to pass T h e e ff ects for th e Lagn a D asa .

are th e sam e as th e e fiec t s for th e d asa period of th e lord

of th e r i s i n g s i gn .

NO T E S
As stated al ready th e ch aracter w h eth er b en e fic or
, ,

m al e fic of a dasa period i s to be determi ned fro m t h e t ec h

,
'

n i c a l na m es give n to th e lord of th e period Vz de S tanz as

5 to Again i f at th e ti m e of bi rth any of th e plane t s
, , ,

occu py th e U p ac h aya h ouses be of bri gh t d i scs and of ,

d i sti nct m otion th e e ff ects will b e good i n th ei r dasa p e

,

r io ds . Bu t i f th e planets occu p y th e Ap ach aya si gns

, ,

su ff e r defeat i n conj u ncti on be of d i sagreeable appearan ce ,

or of s m al l d i scs th e e ff ects w i ll be b ad i n th ei r dasa p e

,

r io ds . Th e planets wh i ch at th e ti m e of co m m ence m ent

, ,

of the i r An t ar da sa per i ods m igh t be aspected by b en e fic

p lan ets or occupy th e Vargas ( d iv i sions ) of b e n efic or
At im it ra ( v er y friendl y ) pla n ets are powerfu l and wi l l not ,

cause death i f they be si tuated otherwise th ey w i l l cause ,

death .

20 I n th e b en e fic Dasa periods o f t h e plan ets a per

.
,

s o n wil l acqu i re th e several m etals assign ed to th e pl anets ,

( m il e Ch apte r II 1 2 ) an d i n th e m al e fic Dasa period s of

,

th e planets h e wil l lose th e m Agai n i n th e Dasa peri od

, .
,
'
of a planet a person s occupation wi l l be that m entioned
,

for the planet ( a ) T h e e ff ects described fo r th e 1 2 houses

.

from th e ascendan t ( b ) for th e 1 2 si gns fro m Aries ( c) for

, ,

planetary aspects ( d ) and for al l yogas ( e) excepti n g

N ab h asa yogas ( f ) will occu r i n th e Dasa period o f t h e
planet wh i ch i s most powerful a m on g th e yoga pl anets ( g ) .

NO T E S .

( 4) Vz ae
’

’
S tanzas 2, 3 an d 4, Ch . 10
.

( 6) C hapte r 2 0 .

( c) C h ap t er 18 .
 Bf rz z a i
'

Izita /é d
. .
[C H V I I I . .

( ) C hapter 19
4 .

( 5 ) Ch apters 1 1 13 1 4 15 an d 2 1 , , , .

(f ) Th e e ff ects o f th e Na b h as a y ogas wi ll be fel t

'

th rou gh ou t l i fe Vz a e S tanza 19 C h 1 2 ’
, ,
. .

( g ) Vi da also S tanz a 5 C h 2 2 ,
. .

21 . In
th e Dasa period of a part icular planet the ,
’
person s co m plexi o n wil l be th at d u e to th e ele m entar y
pri n ciples p resid ed over by th e planet and th e co m plexion
w il l b e acco m pani ed by certai n oth er qu al i ties d u e to th e
ele m entary pri nciples o f earth water fire an d Akas an d , ,

d iscern ible by thei r respecti ve organ s of sense m th e , ,

n ose th e ton gu e th e e y es th e bod y and th e ears

, , , .

NO T E S .

P hysi cal m an i s a co m posi t ion of th e fi ve ele m entary

prin ciples—earth water fi re ai r and Akas ( eth er) Mer
, , ,

cu r y presi des over earth Ven us and th e M oon over water ;

M ars an d th e S u n over fi re ; Satu rn over ai r ; and j u piter
over Akas ( C h II S t. .I n t h e Dasa peri od of a parti
, .

c u l ar pl anet h i s el e m entar y pri n ci ples wi l l pred o m inate

,

an d th e co m pl exion of th e perso n d u rin g su ch peri od wi ll

be th at d ue to th e particular ele m entar y pri nciple Varab a .

Mi h i ra i n C h apter 6 8 of h is Br ih at Sa m h i ta ( Stanzas 9 0
,

to 9 3 h as th u s stated i n d etai l th e co m plexion d u e to

each of th e seven planets
“
T h e co m pl exion d i scernible i n sh i ni n g teeth sk in , ,

n ai ls an d h ai rs of th e body an d of the head wi ll be atten d

ed wit h prosperi ty ; i t i s caused by th e ele m en t of ea r l /z
i t m akes th e person h appy rich an d vi rtuous ,
.

Th e co m plexi o n wh i ch i s glossy wh i te clear green , , ,

an d agreeabl e to look at i s cau sed by th e ele m en t of

wa fer ; i t will m ake al l creatures possessin g i t h appy an d
successfu l i n al l th ei r atte m pts a nd will produce wealth ,
”
comfort lu xu r y and prosperi t y
,
.

T he co m plexio n wh i ch i s fearful u nbearabl e of th e , ,

Co l or of t h e l ot us , go l d or fire, and i nd i c at i n g s t r e n g th ,
 Vm
‘

( e n . .

22 . I n th e b en e fic d asa per i od of a planet th e good ,

e ff ects are cau sed i m m edi atel y b y th e D i vi n e S ou l l iv i n g

with i n th e body an d assu m in g for th e t i me bei n g a
b en e fic ch aracter ( a ) Wh en a person i s fou nd to e nj oy th e
.

good e ff ects descri bed for a pl an etary Dasa peri od i t m ay ,

be conclud ed th at su ch dasa p eriod i s goi ng on at th e

ti m e As regards th e e ff ects described for pl an ets wh i ch
.

m i gh t b e po werless th ese are experien ced by a person

,

e i th e r in h i s d ream or i n mental reve ries

NO T E S
(a) If th e d asa period be a m al efic one th e D iv i ne
,

sou l assu mes a m al efic ch aracter for th e ti m e an d pro ,

d u ces ev il an d i f th e peri od be of a mi xed n ature th e

, ,

D i v i ne so u l assu m es a correspond i n g ch aracter an d pro

d u ces both good and evi l .

( )
6 A wi ld trai n of th ou gh t i n wh i ch a person
enj oys or su ff ers accord i n g to h i s hopes or fears .

23 . If th e e ffe cts of a planet be foun d to be b e n e fic

u nd er o n e yoga an d m al e fic i n resp ect to th e sam e
poi n t u nder anoth er y oga ( a ) n ei th e r of th e e ff ects wi ll
occur i f two or m ore yogas gi ve a ch aracter one a ,

d ifferen t character to on e and th e sa m e planet th e for m e r ,

wil l take e ff ect Bu t i f to two d isti n ct planets con flictin g

.
, ,

e ff ects h ave been assi gn ed both w i ll co m e to pass i n th ei r

,

respecti v e d asa periods .

N OT E S .

For exa m pl e i f u nd e r an yoga a plan et i s d e

, ,

c l a re d to brin g wealth and u nd er another to destroy i t .

NB— T h e d i v i sion of l ife i nto

. . as g i ven by
das as
th e Au th or i s h ard l y stud ied by Ind ian Astrologers evi ,

d e n t l y from th e d i ffi cul ti es attend in g i ts appl icati on .

T hes e Astrol ogers as a cl ass e m ploy th e exceed i n g l y

, ,

si mple d i v i s i on of li fe i n to wh a t i s know n as Udu o r

on . VI I I .
] Br z lza l
'

J cit a kd . 95

Naksh at ra Basas . A ccor di n g t o th is , th e m ax i m u m per i od

of h uman li fe i s d i vi ded i nto 9 parts presided over by th e
seven planets and by Rah u and Ketu —th e two nodes of
th e Moon Th ey co m e i n th e fol l ow i n g order a nd the i r
.

years are also g i ven below

( 1 ) T h e S un , 6 years .
( 5 ) Ju p i ter, 16 years .

( )
2 T h e M oon ,
10 ( 6 ) S atu rn , 19
( 3 ) Mars ,
7 ( 7 ) M erc u ry, l 7
4
( ) Rahu ,
18 (8 ) Ketu ,
7

( 9) Venu s ,
20 years .

Th e lord of th e d asa peri od at the t i me o f b i rth i s , ,

ascertai ned from th e asteri sm wh ich th e Moon occu pi es ‘

—
at th e ti me th e n i n e tri an gular asterisms represen t th e
n i ne dasas i f therefore at th e ti m e of bi rth th e M oon ,

occu py one of th e tri an gul ar asteris m s of

U P h al g u n i an d U Ash adh a
K rit t i k a, . .
,
the dasa
p eri od is that of th e Sun .

Roh i ni Hast a an d Sravan a

,
Moon .

M r ig asi rs h a C h i tra and Srav ish t a

, M ars .

Ard ra S wati and S at ab h is h ak

,
Rah u .

P u n arv a su V i s akh a and P B

,
h adr ap ada . Ju pi ter .

P ushya An u ra dh a and U Bh adrap ada

,
. S atu rn .

Asl es h a J y esh t a an d K evat i

,
Me rcu ry .

As w i n i Magh a an d M ul a
,
Ke tu .

Bh arani P Ph al g u n i and P Ash ada

,
. . Venus .

H ow m u ch of th e peri od o f a part i cul ar dasa h as

elapsed and h ow m u ch re m ai ns at th e ti m e of b i rth m u st
be ascertai ned fro m th e po rtion of th e asteris m passed ove r
by th e M oon an d th e port i on re m ai n i n g at th e t i m e Th i s .

may be rou gh ly ascertai ned fro m th e ti m e take n by th e

Moon to go over th e porti on o f th e asterism —th e wh ol e
ti m e i n wh i ch the Moon passes th rou gh a particul ar
asteris m ( as g i ven i n th e C alend ar ) representi n g the full
p eriod of a d as a ; e g , su ppose th e Moon .
t o t
. ak e 64
 Br k J am e [C H V I II
‘
‘
96 z az . . .

g h a t ik as an d 42 v i g h a t ik as to go over th e asteri sm of
K r i t t ik a an d supp ose th at at th e ti m e of bi rth th e Moon
, ,

h as gone over a portion o f asteris m covered by 2 4 g h at ik as

an d 1 6 v i g h at ik as Requ i red th e nu m ber of years re m ai n
.

i n g at th e ti m e of bi rth i n th e dasa perio d of th e S un .

No w th e ti m e i n wh ich th e Moon w il l go over th e remai n

,

i n g port ion of th e asteris m of K r it t i k a = 64 g h 42 v ig h . .

2 4 g h 1 6 v ig h = 40 g h 2 6 v i g h
. . No w 64 g h and 42 . .
, .

v ig h .represen t th e wh o l e period of 6 years of th e Sun .

Therefore ti m e requ i red

6 years
x 40 g h 2 6 y i g h . .

6 4 g h 42 y i g h. .

6
x 60 y e ar s .

64 x 60 42

6
x 2 42 6 ye ar s 3 Say an a .
y e ar s ,

3 882 1 9 41

8 11
16 11 111 8 ,
29 d ay s ,
5 1 g h a t ik a s , 3 9 v i g h a t ik as = 3 So u r a ye ar s ,
8 m o n th s ,
1 4 d ay s ,
6 g h at ikas , 3 v ig h a t i k a s .

To th is m u st be add ed i n th e order stated th e dasa

periods of th e Moon Mars Rah u & c t i ll we come to th e , , ,
.
,

present age of th e person .

A gai n th e n ine dasa periods are each d i v i ded i n to 9

,

s u b d i vison s kn ow n as A
-
n t ar das as — th e lord of th e first

a n t ar da s a bei n g th e lord of th e d asa period a n d those ,

of th e a n t ar das as wh i ch follo w are th e sa m e as th e l ord s

of th e dasa peri od s wh i ch follo w ; so th at th e a n t a rdasa s , ,

o f th e d asa p eriod of Ju p i ter for i nstan ce are those of , ,

J u piter Satu rn M ercu ry Ketu Venu s th e S u n th e Moon

, , , , , ,

Mars and Rah u Th e length s of th e a n t a rdas a periods

.

bear th e sam e proportio n to each oth er as th e l en gth s of

th e dasa periods For i nstan ce requi red th e length of th e
.
,

an t ar da s a period of Venu s i n th e d asa period of Ju pi ter .

Th e dasa peri od of Ju piter i s 16 years th at of Ve nus is 2 0 ,

 Bz l a t
r
'

z J di dkd .
[C H . IX .

T h e b en e fic places of Mars ar e th e 3 r d, 5 th , 6t h ,
l ot h and l l th
houses fro m th e Su n ; th e l s t 3 r d 6t h l 0t h , , ,

an d l l t h h ous es fro m L agn a ; th e 3 r d 6 t h and l 1t h , ,

’
h ou ses fro m th e Moon th e l st 2 u d 4t h 7 t h 8 t h 1 0t h , , , , , ,

and l l t h h ouses from h i m self ( Mars ) ; th e l s t 4t h 7 t h , , ,

8 th 9 t h l ot h an d l l th h ou ses fro m Satu rn th e 3 rd 5 t h

'

, , , ,

6 t h and i l th houses f rom Mercu ry ; th e 6t h 8 th 1 1t h an d , ,

12 t h h o uses fro m Ve nu s ; and th e 6t h l 0t h 1 1t h an d 12 th , ,

h ouses from Ju p i ter .

4 . T he b en efic places of Mercu ry are th e l st , 2 n d ,

3 r d, 4t h ,
5 t h , 8t h , 9 th
houses fro m Ven u s th e an d 1 1t h
l s t 2 n d 4t h
,
7 th 8 th 9 th
,
l ot h an d l 1 t h hous es from
, , , ,

S atu rn and Mars ; th e 6 t h 8 th 1 l t h an d 1 2 th houses fro m , ,

J u pi ter th e 5 th 6t h 9 t h 1 1t h and i 2 t h h ouses fro m th e

, , ,

S u n th e l st 3 rd 5 t h 6 t h 9 t h l ot h 1 l t h an d 1 2 th
, , , , , ,

h ou ses from h i m self ; th e 2 u d 4t h 6 t h 8 th l ot h and l l t h , , , ,

h ouses fro m t h e Moon ; and th e l st 2 n d 4t h dt b , 8 th , , , ,

l 0t h and l l t h houses fro m Lagna

,
.

5 . The b e n e fic
pl aces of J u piter are t he l s t 2 n d , ,

4t h 7 t h 8 t h 1 0t h an d 1 1t h h ou ses fro m M ars ; th e l s t

,
, ,
2 n d 3 rd 4t h 7 t h 8 th 1 0t h and 1 1t h houses fro m h i m self ;
, , , , ,

th e l s t 2 n d 3 r d 4t h 7 t h 8 th 9 t h 1 0t h an d l l t h h ouses
, , , , , , ,

f ro m th e S u n ; th e 2 n d 5 t h 6 t h 9 t h 1 0t h an d 1 1t h , , , ,

h ou ses fro m Ve n us ; th e 2 n d 5 t h 7 t h 9 t h and l l t h , , ,

h ou ses fro m th e Moon ; th e 3 rd 5 t h 6 t h an d 1 2 t h h ouses , ,

fro m Satu rn ; t h e l st 2 n d 4t l 1 6 t h 6t h 9 t h l ot h a n d , , , , , ,

1 1t h hou ses fro m Mercu r y ; and t h e l st 2 n d 4t h 5 t h 6t h , , , , ,

7 t h 9 t h l ot h a nd 1 1t h h ouses fro m L agn a

, ,
.

6 . place of Ven us are th e l s t 2 n d 3 rd

Th e b e n e fic , , ,

4t h 5 t h 8 t h 9 t h an d l l t h h ou ses fro m Lagn a ; th e l st

, , ,

2 nd 3 r d 4t h 5 th 8 th 9 t h l l t h an d 12 th hou ses f ro m th e
, , , , , ,

Moon ; th e l s t 2 n d 3 rd 4t h 5 t h 8 th 9 t h l 0t h an d 1 1t h
, , , , , , ,

h ou ses fro m h i m sel f th e 3 rd 4t h 5 th 8 t h 9 t h 10t h and , , , , ,

1 l t h houses from S atu rn ; th e 8 t h l l t h an d f 2 t h h ous es ,

r
f om t h e Su n ; th e 5 t h 8 t h , 9 t h ,
l ot h and 11t h h o us es ,
CH IX ]
. . ,
Bil r l ai J dt a /td . 99

fro m J u p i ter ; t h e 3 rd 5 t h 6 t h 9 t h a nd 1 1t h h o u ses

‘

, , ,

f rom Mercu ry ; and th e 3 rd 5 t h 6t h 9 t h 1 1t h and 12 t h

, , , ,

hou ses fr o m M ars .

7 .Th e b en e fic place s of Satu r n are th e 3 rd 5 t h 6t h , ,

and l l th h ouses fro m h i m sel f ; th e 3 rd 5 t h 6t h 10t h l l th , , , ,

an d 1 2 t h h ou ses fro m Mars ; th e 1s t 2 n d 4t h 7 t h 8 th , , , , ,

1 0t h an d 1 l th h ouses fro m th e S u n th e l s t 3 r d 4t h 6 t h , , , ,

1ot h and 1 1 t h h ouses from L agn a th e 6t h 8 th 9 t h l 0t h , , , ,

1 1t h an d 1 2 t h h ou ses fro m Mercu ry th e 3 rd 6 t h an d ,

1 1t h house s fro m th e M 0 0 11 th e 6 t h 1 1 t h an d th e 12 th ,

h ouses fro m Venu s ; an d th e 5 t h 6 t h 1 1 t h and 1 2 th , ,

h ouses f rom Ju pi te r .

8 Th u s h ave been d escribed th e b e n e fic places of

.

th e pl an ets t h e other pl aces a re m al e fic ( a ) A p lace wi ll .

produ ce b e n e fic or m al e fic e ff ects i f i t be more b e n efic for

th e p l anet th an m al efic or v i ce v er sé
T hese places are all w i th reference to th e pl aces oc

c u p ie d by th e p lanets at th e ti m e of bi rth Th e plan ets .

w h i le passi n g th rou gh places which h appe n to be

U p a c h a ya h ouses ( 6 ) or w h i ch m i gh t be th ei r own hou ses
or th e i r friend ly or e x altation si gns ( d) produ ce b e n e fic ,

e ffects f u l ly i f su ch h ou ses or si gns are m ore b e n e fic for

th e pl anets th an m al e fic and p l anets wh ile pass i n g
t h rough places wh i ch h appen to be Ap ach a ya houses ( e )
or wh i ch m i gh t be t he i r i n i m i cal or d epressi on si gns ,

prod uce m al e fic e ff ects f u l ly i f su ch houses or Si gn s be

more m al e fic fo r th e planets tha n b en efic ( f ) .

NO T E S

( ) 4 i nstance th e 3 rd 5 t h 6t h and 12 t h hou se s

For , , ,

fro m h i m sel f ar e m al efic places for th e S u n Th e l s t , .

2 n d 4t h 5 th 7 t h 8 t h 9 t h and 1 2 t h houses from L agna

, , , , ,

are m al e fic places for th e Moo n , and so forth

( 6) In prepar i n g t ables of Ash t ak av arg a , it i s u s ual
 “

100 Bi '

r z zat M i a /e
d .
[C H I X .

t o mark th e b e n e fic pl aces with dots and th e m al e fic

places w ith l i nes We wi ll p u t d ow n th e As h t ak av arg a
.

table for M ars i n th e followi n g h oroscope

J u p it er .

RASI CH AKRA .

M ars .

M ark th e b en efic places of Mars w i th dots and th e

m al e fic pl aces w it h l i nes T h e resu lt w il l be fou nd to be
.

as fo l lows

000 - 3

1111 4
ASH TAKAV ARGAOF MARS .

11 1

Th e table m ean s th at wh il e M ars moves th rou gh

s i gn Aries for i nstan ce th e b e n e fic e ff ects wil l be 3 and
,

t h e m a l e fic effects wi ll be 3 I n oth er words h e produ ces

. ,

m al e fic e ffects to th e exten t of g or s of h is power .

S i m i lar remarks apply to th e oth er places .

( Th ese
0) are th e 3 rd 6 t h l ot h an,
d 1 1 houses
, fro m
th e Lagn a A l so from th e Moon ac c o rdin g t o Sree D eva
’

k e e rt i .

( ) 11 thei r
Or Sw a k sh e t ra or Mu l a t riko n a houses a l so ,
accord i n g t o S ree D e v ak eer t i .
102 Er it a t j eit a kcf .
‘

t
CH . IX .

of th e fi gu res i n th e several pa i rs of S1g ns form i ng th e

houses of th e plan ets from M ars to Saturn
,

I .

T RI K ONA OR T R I AN G U LAR RE DU C T I ON S .

T he Tri an gular si gn s are given i n th e n otes to

Stanz a 6 of C h apter I T h e redu cti on rul es are
.

1 .If th e figu res i n t h e tr i an gu lar si gns be n ot all

al i ke su btract fro m each th e l east of th e th re e figu res
, , ,

keepin g th e rem ai nders .

2 I f t h ere be n o fi gure i n on e of t h eth ree signs , n o

.

red u cti on n eed be m ad e .

3 .If t here be no figu re i n two of th e th ree s i gns ,

remove th e figu re i n th e th i rd .

4 If th e fi gu res i n th e th ree signs be equ al remove

.
,

t h e m all .

E K AD H I PATYA RE D U CT I ON S .

T h e E k a dh ip a t ya si gns a re gi ve n i n t h e n ote s to
Stan za of C h apter I Th e red ucti on ru les are
6 .

1 .I f there be pl anets i n both th e h ouses of a p l anet ,

no red u ction n eed be m ad e .

2 .th e two houses of a planet on e of wh i c h i s

Of ,

occu pi ed and th e other n o t ( 1) i f th e figu re i n th e for m er

,

be s m aller th a n th e figu re i n t h e l atter m ake th e l atter ,

equ al to th e for m er ( 2 ) i f th e fi gu re i n th e for m e r be

greater th an th e figure i n th e latter remove th e l atter ,

i f th e fi gu re s i n both be equ al rem ove th e figu re i n ,

th e latte r .

3 Of th e two h ous es of a planet both of wh i ch are

.
,

n o t occu pied ( a ) i f th e figu res i n th e two h o u Ses b e

,

equal re move both ; ( 5) i f th e figures be u nequ al m ake ,

t h e l arg e r figure e qual t o t h e s ma ll er o n e .

CH IX. .
] { Br ih at J dt a kd . 103
"

If t h ere be n o figu re i n one of t h e t wo h ouses n o

4
‘

,
,

red uct i on n eed be mad e .

5 T h e figu res i n t h e s i gn s C ancer and Leo wh i ch

.
,

are respecti vely th e h ouses of th e M oon a nd t h e S un are ,

n o t su bj ec t to t h e E k adh ip at ya red u cti on .

I LLU STRATI ON .

We w i ll apply these rul es t o th e A V . . t abl e of M ars

g i ven al read y .

RE DU C T I ON No I . .

Th e fi gu re s i n th e Trian gular si gn s of Ari es Leo an d ,

S ag i ttar i are respect i v el y 3 5 2 Under ru le ( 1 ) su btract , , .

2 from each an d th e resulti n g fi gu res are 1 3 O Th e

, , ,
.

fi gu res i n th e tri an gul ar si gns of T au rus Vi r g o and ,

C apricorn are respecti vel y 3 2 5 Apply i n g rul e

,
we , ,
.

get 3 Th e figu res i n th e tr i a n gul ar si gn s o f G em in i

.
,

L ibra an d A qu ariu s are 3 5 3 Appl y i n g r ul e , we get

,
.

0 2 0
, ,
T he fi gu res m th e tr i an gular si gn s of C ancer
.
,

S corpi o and P isces are 4 1 3 A pplyi n g r ul e , we get

,
.

3 0 2
, ,
So that th e A V of Mars after th e first redu cti on
. ,
. .

stand s as foll ows

AV
. . of Ma r s a f t er Re du c t io n
No I . .

RE DU C T I ON N0 II . .

T h i s redu ct i on sh ould be m ad e on l y to th e figu res re

u l/m g from Redu ct i o n N o I . .

O f A r i es an d Scor i o , th e t w o h o uses of Mars A r i es

p ,
104
“

Br ike t ‘

J dt a kd .
[OH . IX

i s occu pied S corpio i s u noccu p i ed T h e fi g u res i n t h em

an d .

are 1 a nd 0 respecti vel y Under ru le

, ,
n o red u ct ion n eed
.

be m ade Tau rus and Libra th e two h ou ses of Ven u s are

.
, ,

bot h occu pied u nder rul e no red u ction n eed be m ade .

G e m m i an d Vi rgo th e t wo hou ses o f Mercu ry are both

“

, ,

u noccu pi ed ; th e fi gu res i n th em are 0 and 0 Ru l e (4) appl ies .

,

and th ere i s no n ecessi ty for red ucti o n O f P i sces an d .

Sagitt ari t h e t w o hou ses of J u p i ter , th e for m er alon e

, ‘

i s occupied and th e figu res i n th em are 2 and 0 Und er .

ru le n o red uction n eed b e mad e O f Aqu ar i u s an d C ap .

r i co rn th e two h ous es of Satu rn th e l atter alon e i s oc e n

, ,

pied an d th e figu res i n them are 0 and 3 Ap ply i n g ru le .

n o reductio n need be mad e T h e figu res i n Can ce r an d .

Leo wh i ch are respect i vel y th e hous es of th e Moon and th e

,

Sun are not subj ect to red uct io n —m a e rul e 5 Th ese fi gu res
’
’
, .

are 3 and 3 .

So th at after R ed uctio n N o H t h e A V tabl e of Mars

, .
,
. .

w i ll stand th u s

AV . . t ab l e o f M ar s af t er Re ~

d u ct i o n s Ia nd II .

The total of fi gu r e s after th e two redu ctions i s 15 .

Si m il ar l y th e A V t ables of th e Su n th e Moon
,
. .
, ,

M e rcu ry J upit e r Ven u s a nd Sat u rn m ay be red u ced

, , .

We will now g i ve som e of th e u ses of these t ables .

A V of th e Su n
. . .

In th e case of A V of th e Sun . .
,
t a) m ul t i ply th e total
( ) AV
a . . of a
pl an et i s t h e As h t aka Var ga o f a.
pl an et b efore redu ct i o n .
106 Bih r at M i a /ed. [C H . IX .

D i v ide t h eprodu ct by 2 7 Take th e rem a i nd er an d for

'

.
,

i t fin d o u t th e asterism fro m Asw in i as before Wh en .

th e Moon passes th rou gh i t or th rough its tr i angu lar

aster i s m s th ere wil l be qu arrel a n ger a n d gri ef
, ,
.

N o w ork sh al l be commen ced wh en th e Moon p asses

throu gh si gn s i n wh i ch th ere are no fi gu res i n th e A V .

of th e M oon .

F i nd ou t th e D ik or qu arter as before an d i t will g i ve

th e posit ion of th e bath roo m i n th e h ou se of a person
-
.

A V . . OF M AR S .

Wh en Satu rn passes th rou gh si gns i n wh i ch there

ar e no figu res i n th e A V of M ars th e person will su ff er
. .
,

from d i seases i f M ars be powerful ; an d wil l d i e i f M ars

b e weak an d i f h e be not th e lord of th e Ascendan t .

F ind out th e Di k or qu arter as before an d i t will g i ve

’
th e posi ti on of th e kitche n i n a person s h ouse .

A V
. . OF M E R C U RY .

Whe n S atu rn passes th rou gh si gns i n wh i ch th ere

’
are no fi gures i n th e A V of M ercu ry th e p erso n s son o r
. .
,

friend s wi ll d i e .

Fi nd out th e Di k or quarter as before and i t wi ll

g i ve th e posi tion of th e pl ay grou n d i n th e h ou se of a
person .

A V . . OF J U PI TER .

T h e figu re i n th e 5 th
h ouse from J u piter i n th e A .

V of Jup i ter w il l give th e n u m ber of sons of a person

. .

T h e n u m ber o f those m eeting with early d eath wi l l be th e

n u mber of planets occu pyi n g i ni m i cal or d epression si gns .

Th e Dik or qu arter ascertai n e d as before wi l l g i ve

t h e p osi t i on Of th e T re asu ry or Store room -
.
CH . IX .
] Br ih at J a t a kd
‘
.

VEN U S A V . . OF .

A perso n will get a w i fe l and s and weal th wh en ,

Ven us passes th rou gh si gns contai n i n g th e largest figure

i n th e A V of Ven u s after red uction
. . .

T h e Di k or qu arter ascertai ned as before wil l gi ve

th e posi t i o n o f th e bed roo m .

A V O F S ATU R N . . .

In th e A V of S aturn ad d togeth er th e fi gu res i n

. .
,

th e si gns fro m th e Ascen dan t to th e h ouse occu pied by

Satu rn and also th e figu res i n th e si gns fro m Satu rn to th e
A scendant The two t otal s w il l gi ve th e y ears i n wh i ch
.

a person will suffer fro m disease s a n d fro m grief Ad d .

th e two totals ; t he s u m wi ll gi ve th e y ear i n wh i ch a

person s l i fe w i ll b e i n d an ger
’
.

A si m i lar re m ark appl ies to th e A V of M ars . . .

Whe n th e Su n an d th e Moon pass th rou gh s i gns i n

wh i ch th e figu res are least i n th e A V of S atu rn a perso n . .

d ies ( i n h i s y e a r of d eath ) .

T h e D ik or qu arter ascertai ned as before gi ves th e

pos i t i on of th e spot wh ere th e sweepi n gs are gat hered .

S a r m s /z miea Va rg a .

Th e As h t ak a v ar g as of th e Su n and other plan ets

con sidered separatel y are kn ow n as Bh i n n as h t ak a vargas
and th ei r s u m fo rm s wh at i s known as Sar v as h t a k a varga .

In th e l atter th e fi gu r e i n si g n Ari es i s th e su m of th e
,

fi gures i n si gn Aries i n th e several Bh i n n as h t ak a vargas

si m il arly th e fi gu re i n si gn Tau rus of S A V is the su m
, . . .

of th e fi gu res i n si gn T au ru s of th e B A V 5 an d th e . . .

figu res of th e oth er si gns may be si m i larly obtai ned Th e .

total of these figu res w ill a l ways be 3 3 7 th is bein g th e -

s u m of th e total s of th e figures of the seven B A Vs . . .

Th e l atter figures are 48 49 3 9 5 4, 5 6 5 2 and 3 9 fro m , , , ,

t h e Su n to S aturn ,
1 08 Bih at
r
°

J é t a kd .
[OH .
.
IX
’
.

N ow , v ar i ous events of life are pred icted by m e ans of

th e fi gu res of th e S A V t able . . . .

1 . I f th e fi gur e i n a parti cul ar si gn exceed 3 0,

th e n planets passi n g th rou gh i t will prod uce b en e fic
e ff ect s ; i f i t be between 2 5 and 3 0 su ch e ff ects wil l be ,

n ei th er good n or bad and i f th e figure be less th an 2 5 , ,

t h e e ff ects w i l l be bad .

Agai n all good works sh al l be co m m enced wh e n th e

,

risin g s i gn i s on e whose figure i s largest i n th e S A V .

-

. .

t abl e and marriages an d oth er conn ections sh al l b e for m ,

ed w i th persons wh ose star i s on e of th e stars of su ch si g n.

2 As th e 10t h house represents l abou r th e 1 l t h
" '

°
,
.

h ou se gain an d th e 1 2 t h loss i f th e fi gu re i n th e 1 l t h
, ,

h o use b e greater th an th e figu re i n th e l 0t h h ouse an d i f

th e figu re i n th e 1 2 t h h ouse be s m aller th an th e fi gu re i n
th e l l t h h ouse an d if t h e figu re i n th e ascend an t be g reater
th an th e figu re i n th e 1 2 t h h ou se th e p erson wil l be
h appy and prosperous —th e m eani n g i s clear t h e labou r
,

-
,

bei n g sl i gh t gai n m uch an d loss co m parati vely small If

, .

th e fi gu res b e oth erwise th e person wi ll b e u nh app y ,

.

3 .
E xcepti n g th e 6t h 8 t h a n d 1 2 t h h ouses of t h e , ,

re m ai n i n g 9 h ouses t h e s ig n i fic at io n s of th ose wh ere th e

,

fig ures are l arge wi ll be i n a condi t i on of prosperi ty ( Vi da

n ote ( a ) to Sta n za 1 5 C h apter ,

A Ad d togeth er th e fi gu res of th e fou r sign s f rom

.
’

P i sces — P isce s Ari es Tau rus an d Ge m i ni Add also th e .

, , ,

fi gu res of th e fou r si gn s fro m C an cer an d of th e fou r " ‘

si gns fro m Scorpio These th ree total s represe n t t h e

’

th ree sectio n s o f a m an s l ife Whi ch ever total i s th e ’

.

l a rgest the correspond i n g d i vi si on of l i fe w i ll be h appy

,

an d prosperous I f th ree or m ore m al e fic planets occupy

.

th e fou r si g n s from Pisces a p erson wi l l su ffer m i ser i es i n ,

'

th e l s t sec tion of l i fe i f th ey occu py th e fou r s rg n s f ro m

’

Can ce r t h e m is eri e s wi ll occu r i n th e 2 n d sect ion a n d i f

' “
'

, ,

t h e y o cc u py t h e fou r si gn s fro m S corpi o t h en , in t h e 3 rd ,

1 10 Br ih a t J a t a /ezi
‘
.
[OH . IX .

IV . Am sak ayu rdaya

V . As h t ak av arg a yu rdaya
VI . V i s h ay ay u r daya
VII . N ak sh at ram s ak ay u rdaya

T otal
I . P i n day u r da ya .

Th is i s divided i nto 3 sch ools ( 1) th at of Yav an ach arya

S tanza 1 C h th at of J e e v asarm a (m de Stan za
'

( v i de ,
.

9 Ch
, . th at of Badaraya n a accord i n g to wh i ch th e
maxi mu m y ears of e ach pl anet wh en i n h i s exaltat i on si gn
i s one seven th of 1 00 years
-
.

E ach of these t h ree sch ools has 4 sub d ivi si ons : ( a ) -

T h e Nee c h ardh a h a ra n a p rocess accordi n g to wh i ch th e

m ax i m u m peri od i s on e h al f at depress i on ( 6) T h e -
.

Neec h ab h av a process accord i n g t o wh i ch th e peri od

vani sh es at d ep ressi on ( 0) T h e K ri t ah aran a process
.

a ccordi n g to wh i ch t h e p eri od s su ffer r edu cti o ns (d ) .

Th e Ak r it ah aran a process accord i n g to wh ich th e per i od s

s n fie r n o redu cti on s .

T h u s Pin day u r day a i s of 12 sorts .

'
I] . D lz r u w y u m a ya .

T h i s i s oth erwi se k nown as Nais ar g ik ay ufrdaya (v z a e '

'

Stanza 9 C h A s stated above th ere are 4 ki nd s of th is

,
.
,
1

d epend i n g on th e 4 d i visions m entioned abo ve ( b ) ( c) ,

and ( d)
Rasm z faay
.
’

III . ur da ya .

Accordi n g to th i s th e years of th e planets from th e

,

S u n to Saturn are respecti vel y 16 2 0 9 , , ,

8, 9, 2 5 and 26 .

Th ere are 4 ki n ds of thi s as stated abov e .

Am s a/ea yu r day
'

I V . a.

’
Th i s i s Sa t yac h aryar s m ethod referred to at the end of
St anz a 9 C h 7 Th is process i n certai n cases h as to be
, . . , ,

var i ed i nto wh at i s kn ow n as P rak r am an u g at a method .

Th e two processes aga i n div i d e, each i n t o two parts k no w n

CH . IX ] . Br ih a t J dt a kd . 111

as K r i t a v riddh ik a an d Ak r i t av r iddh ik a th e years are

to be i n creased accordi n g to so m e an d n ot to be i ncreased
'
’

accord i n g to oth ers Vz a e P a r as ar a s Hora Sast r a Th u s

’
.
,

we get 4 ki nds of Am sak a y u rda y a .

V . A8 12 mfaa v a rg a yu r a a ya ’
.

Th i s process a s stated above h as to be v aried i n to

wh at i s know n as P rak ra m an u g at a m eth od The two pro .

cesses agai n d i vid e e a ch i n to two parts k nown as K r i t a

vri dd h i a n d Ak r it av riddh i as st at e d above —Vi da Parasa
, , ,

ra s Hora T h u s we get 4 ki nds of As h t a k av ar g ay u rda y a

’
.
,

O n e of th ese 4 m eth od s i s gi ven at th e end of th ese n otes .

VI .

Thi s consists of two ki n d s— th e on e a ccord in g to

Parasar a an d th e oth er a s mention ed i n a work n a m ed
P rak riy a m al a T hese p artake o f th e natu re of the Ash
.

t ak a v arg a process .

VI I . Na Xs/10 1m m sa /é ay u m
’
’
a
y a.

Th is i s of two ki n ds —the on e i s k nown as th e Ka l a

ch akra process a nd th e oth er as the Na k s h t radas a .

T h u s 8 2 processes are men tioned by P arasa ra who at ,

th e sa m e t i m e states th e parti cular cases to w hi ch each

,

process i s appl i cable O f these 3 2 processes V arah a

.
,

M i h i ra h as m en ti oned th e m ost i m portan t ones i n C hapter

VII For fu rth er p arti culars i n Ay u r daya th e reader i s
.
,

referred to th e w orks of Pa r as ara and other wri ters .

We sh al l h ere stat e th e d eta i l s o f th e As h t ak av arg a

p ro cess T he fol lowi ng tables are e m ployed i n th e pro
.

cess
Rm
e G w m ka m Z odz ca l F
'

aci o r s .

7 L i bra
10 S corpi o
8 Sagi ttar i
4 C apri corn
10 Aqu ari us
5 Pi s ces
1 12 Bih
r at J dt a kci .
[CH I X . .
‘

G ra h a G a rz a / mm or P l a n el a ry F a cl o rs .

T h e Su n 5 J u pi ter
Th e Moon 5 Ven us
Mars 8 Satu rn
Mercur y 5

M ulti ply th e several figures i n t h e si gns from Ar i es

i n th e As h t ak av ar g a of th e Su n by th e figu res of th e Ras i
G u n ak ara table respecti vely an d ad d th e prod u cts .

Again mu ltiply th e s everal fi gu res i n th e si gns oce n

,

p i ed by th e S u n an d other planets by t h e fi gu res of th e

G rah a G u n ak ara tabl e respectively an d add th e prod u cts
Ad d th e t wo totals Mul ti ply th e s u m by 7 d iv i d e th e
.
,

produ ct by 2 7 Th e qu oti en t w i ll gi ve th e y ea r s o f th e
.

S u n Mu lti ply t h e re m ai nde r by 12 an d d ivid e t h e pro

.

du ct by 2 7 th e qu otient wi l l gi ve th e m an / ks M ultiply
,
.

th e re m ai nd er by 3 0 an d d ivide th e prod uct b y 2 7 th e ,

quotien t wi ll gi ve th e day s A nd si m i larl y fi n d t h e G h at i f

i ‘

.
,

kas an d V i g h a t ik as T h us we h av e O btai ned t he A V

.
, . .

years of the S u n .

S i m ilarly th ose o f th e Moon Mars Mercu ry J up i te r)

, , , ,

V enu s and Satu rn m ay be obtai ned fro m t h e A V tables . .

N ow, th ese periods are subj ect to th e follo w i n g redue

t i ons .

If a planet is ac co m pani ed by an othe r planet i n

1 .

a sign th e amou nt of redu ction i s one h al f of t h e period

,
-

obtai n ed .

2 I f a p lan et occu py h is depress i on s i gn th e

.
,

am ou n t of red u ction i s one ha l f -

.

3 I f h e be an As t an g at a pl a n et , t h e am ou nt o f
.

red u ction i s al so one hal f -

.

4 I f h e occupy an 1 n 1m 1cal si gn th e a m ou n t i s one

.
,
i

thi rd .

5 If h e oc cup y t h e wi s ib l e h e m isph ere th e am ou n t

‘

.
,

i s o ne h a l f - .
 Br ih a t Jam/ed .
( C H x . .

presen ti n g th e b en efic plan etary pl aces Tables can al so be .

prepared wi th fig ures representin g th e m al e fic places of th e

pla n ets N ote 5 to S tanza ,
S peci al ru les exist
relat i ng to th e predi ction of eve nts of l i fe wi th th e h el p
o f the fi g ures of these tabl es T h e read er is referred to
.

th e works of Parasara .

C H A PT E R X .

On Av ocat i on .

1 . A person gets wealth from h i s fath er ,

oth er m ,

e ne m y friend brother w i fe o r servant accordi n g as th e

, , ,

plan et wh i ch occu pies th e l ot h hou se fro m th e L agn a or

fro m t h e M oon i s th e S un or th e Moon or Mar s or
, ,

M ercu ry or J u piter or Venu s or Satu rn respecti vely ( a )

,
.

Th e avocati on of a perso n wi ll b e th at st ated for th e

plan e ts (6) wh i ch m i gh t be th e lords of th e Nav a m s as
occu pi ed by th e l ords of th e l ot h h ouses fro m Lagna th e ,

Moon and th e S u n
NO T E S .

(a) He wil l get weal th i n the m anne r stat ed i n th e

Text i n t he Dasa period of th e planet accord i ng to G arga ,
.

If th e l 0t h house from t h e ascendant an d th e l 0t h h ou se

fro m th e Moon be both occu pi ed b y pl an ets a person ,

w ill acqui re weal th fro m both sou rces an d i f several

planets occu py th e 1 0t h house th ere wil l be several sou rces
,

of we alth .

'

6
( ) V z a e Stanzas 2
’
and 3 .

( c) Su ppose si gn Can cer i s the Lag n a th e l ot h h ou se

,

from C an cer i s Aries ; th e lord of Ari es i s Mars suppose ,

Mars to o ccu py th e Nav a m s a of S agi ttari ; t h e l ord of

Sagi ttari i s Ju pi ter and the avocati on stated for J u pi ter
d Stan za will be th e avocati on of a person i n th e
'

3 )
’
( m a e r ,

D asa er i d of u
J p iter acc ordi n g to Garg a I t also fo l lo w s
p o ,
.
Cu K ]
. Bit r a: Mi a /rd . 1 15

th at a person s avocation wil l be all t h e th ree stated for

’

th e lords of th e Na v a m s as occupied by th e lords o f th e

l ot h h ouse fro m th e Lagna the Moon and the Su n , .

2 I f th e lord o f th e Na v a m s a (a) be th e S un a
.
,

person wi ll get weal th by d eal i n g i n perfu m es gold , ,

wool len fabri c m ed ici ne and b y m ed i cal treat m e n t of

,

patients If th e l ord be the Moon h e wi ll get wealt h

.
,

by ti lling lands , by d ealing i n t h e prod uctions of wate r ( 6)

and th rou gh wo m e n If h e be Mars th e person ,

will get weal t h by deal i n g i n m etals or m i neral s fi re ( d) ,

weapons a n d wil l also acqui re wealth by acts of bol d

n ess i f h e be Mercu ry th e person wil l be a wri ter a n
, ,

accou ntant and the l ike (6 ) and wi ll also acqu i re weal th

,

by var i ou s hand icraft ( f ) .

NO T E S .

( a ) T hat i s th e lord of th e N av a m s a occu pied by th e

,

lord of th e l 0t h h ouse fro m Lagna th e Moon a nd th e S u n , .

( ) S uch as pe arls corals con ch sh ells wh a le b on es

6 , ,
-
,
-

and th e l ike .

(5 ) By servi n g u nder or oth erwise followi n g th e m .

( d) Fi re h e m a y b e th e d river of a fi re engi ne or
a deal er i n m atches a n d th e like .

( 6) By wri ti n g co m mentaries on th e works of W rit ers

a nd th e l ike .

( j ) S uch as pai nti n g book bi ndi n g arrow m aki n g

, ,
-

or th e m aki n g of flo w er wreaths sand al paste perfu m es

-
, ,

and t h e l ike .

3 If the lord of the Na v a m s a be Ju pi ter a person

.
,

wi ll ge t wealt h th ro ugh Brah m i ns th e D e vas or learned ,

m en th rou gh m i ne s ( a ) an d th e like ( b) and through acts

,

of vi rtu e ( c) ; i f h e be Venus th e perso n wi ll ge t wealth

,

by deal i n g i n ge m s ( d) si l ver and other m etals i n cows

,
,

and bu ff aloes and i f th e l ord be S atu rn th e person will ,

ac qu i r e w ea l t h by mean s of h ard l abou r by ac t s o f

 Bi h r at M i a /hi; [C H X.L

tortu re ( f) by carryi n g bu rd ens an d by low d eeds u n su i t

,

ed to h i s rank T hu s pe rsons acqu i re weal th by avo

.
,

cation stated for th e lord s of Nav am s as occu pied by th e

lords of t he l 0t h house ( g) a n d i n th e An t a rdas a per i ods
of s u ch lords ( lz ) .

NO T E S .

( ) a T h e word i n th e text i s A/ea m wh ich i ncl ud es

gol d and si l ver m i nes pl aces wh ere salt i s prod u ce d or
,

w here eleph ants are fou nd .

( 11) S uch as contract work ,

( 6 ) S u ch as sacri ficial rit es g i fts acts of ch arity , , ,

fast i n g pilgri m age servi ce u n d er G u ru or preceptor

, , .

( d) S uch as d i a m ond s rubies and th e lik e , .

( e) S u ch as w alki n g and th e l ike .

(f ) E i th er b y sel f tort u re or tortu r i n g oth er creatu res .

( 9 ) Fro m L agn a th e Mo o n a n d th e Su n ,
.

'

V a e S tanz a 2 0 C 11 8 an d subj ect to planetary

’
( 12 ) z , , .
,

s tren gth d eter m in ed by Stanza 1 1 Ch 2 0 ,

. .

4 . If su ch y o g a pl anet ( a ) occup y ( b ) a friend ly si g n ,

a perso n wi ll acqu i re weal th ( i n th e An t ar da s a peri od

of s uch pl anet ) t h rou gh a fri end If su ch y oga pla ne t .

occu py an i ni mi cal si gn th e person wil l get weal th ,

th rough h is ene m y and i f su ch plan et occu p y h i s own

h ouse , th e person wil l ge t wealth b y m eans of or fro m h i s
h ouse If whe n th e S u n h appens to be th e y oga plan et
.
, ,

h e occu py h i s exaltati on si gn th e per s o n wi ll acqu i re ,

wea l th by h is ow n powers If ( at th e ti me of birt h ) .

,

powerfu l b en e fic planets occup y th e 1 1t h ho u se , th e

L agn a or th e 2 n d h ouse th e person wil l acqu i re weal th ,

i n var i o u s ways

NO T E S .

( 4) T hat i s ei ther th e planet wh i ch occup i es th e

,

l 0t h h ouse f rom th e ascend an t or f ro m th e Mo o n or the

118 Br ih at J dt a kci .
[
C EL X I .

NO T E S .

3 2 Raj a yogas are m e ntioned i n thi s stanza Aper .

son born u nder any one of the m becom es a kin g : su ppose ,

al l th e 4 pl anets — Mars S aturn th e Su n an d Ju p i ter— to

, ,

occupy th e i r exal tati on signs at th e s a m e ti m e ; for any on e

of su ch si gns bein g th e ascendant th e n u m ber of Raj a ,

yogas obtai ned i s 4 Agai n of th e sa m e 4 pl anets th ere are

.
, ,

4 groups each of t h ree planets thus ( 1 ) Mars S aturn an d

, ,

th e S u n ( 2 ) M ars S aturn and J upi ter

, , M ars th e S u n ,

and Jupi ter ; S atu rn t h e Su n an d J u pi ter I n th e case

, .

of e a ch grou p for al l th e th ree pl anets o ccu p yi n g thei r

,

exaltat ion si gns and for each of su ch si gns bei n g th e r is i n g

s i gn the n u m ber of R
,
aj ay o as obta i ned i s 3
g there be i n g
4 su ch grou ps th e n u m ber of Raj a yogas obtai ned fro m
,
-

th em all i s 4 x 3 o r 1 2 Add i ng th is to th e 4 yogas .

al ready ob tai ned we get the first 1 6 yogas m e ntion ed i n

,

th e text .

Agai n of th e sa m e 4 planets th ere are 6 groups each

, ,

of 2 plan ets as follo w : ( i ) M ars and S aturn ( 2 ) Mars an d ,

t h e S u n ( 3 ) Mars an d J upiter ( 4) Satu rn an d t h e S un

, , ,

( 5 ) Satu rn and J upi ter a nd ( 6) th e S u n and J upiter I n .

th e case of e ach grou p for both th e pl anets occupy i n g ,

th ei r exaltat ion si gns and for each of su c h si gns bei n g th e

risin g si gn th e n u m ber of Raj a yogas obtai ne d i s 2
,
-
.

T here bei n g 6 such grou ps t h e nu m ber of yogas obtai n ed ,

fro m all of the m i s 6 x 2 or 12 I n each of these 12 cases .

‘

th e Moon occupi es sign C ancer Agai n of the sam e 4 .

,

pl anets b y thei r severally b ei n g i n th ei r exaltation s i g ns

,
,

wh ile such s i gn is also th e risi n g s i gn th e n u mber of ,

Raj a yogas obtai n ed i s 4 I n each of t hese 4 cases t h e

-
.
,

M oon occu pies si gn Cancer Add in g these 4yogas to th e .

1 2 yoga s alread y obtai ned , we get the secon d 16 yogas

m ent i one d i n the text .

3 Th e L agna or th e Moon bei n g i n V arg o t t am a

.

pos i t i ons, of al l t h e p l ane t s ex ce p t i ng t h e M oo n , for t h e

CH . X L] Bih at
r M i a /rd . 1 19

s everal g ro u p s o f four five and si x pl anets aspecti n g th e

,

L agn a or th e M oon t h e n u m ber of yogas obtai ned i n each

,

ca se i s 2 2 .

NO T ES .

44 Ra ja yogas are describe d i n thi s stanza

-
.

T he si x p l anets are th e S un Mars Mercu ry J upiter

, , , , ,

Ven u s an d S at u rn O f th ese there are 1 5 groups each of

.
,

4 planets as follow

( 1 ) Th e S u n Mars ,
M e rcu ry J u pi ter
, ,
.

( )2 Ven u s .

(3 ) S atu rn .

4
( ) J upi ter Ve nu s , .

(5 ) Satu rn .

( 6) Ven us Satu rn , .

( 7 ) T h e Su n M ercury Ju pi ter Ven u s

, , ,
.

(8 ) Satu rn .

(9 ) Ven us S atu rn , .

( 10) Ju pi ter ,

( 11 ) Mars Mercu ,ry J upit er Venu s , , .

( 12 ) S at urn .

( 13 ) Ven us Satu rn , .

14
( ) J upi te r ,

( 1 5 ) Mercu ry ,

A gain of th e sam e 6 plan ets th e re are si x grou p s

, ,

each o f fi v e planets as foll ow

( l ) T h e Su n Mars Mercu ry Ju piter Venus
, , , ,
.

(2 ) Satu rn .

(3 ) Venu s S atu rn ,
.

( 4) Jupi ter ,

(5) Mercu ry ,

( 6) Mars ,

All th e 6 pl anets form agai n i nto one grou p .

Th us th ere are 2 2 grou ps For th e planets o f each

,
.
1

grou p aspecti n g th e ri si n g si gn i n i ts V ar g o t t a m a positi on ,

t h e nu mber of yo g as obtai ne d i s 2 2 and b y t h eir aspec t ~

12 0 Bih a t
r J dt a kd .
[C H X I :
.

in g the M0 0 11 i n h er V a r g o t t am a po s i tio n th e n u mber of ,

yogas obtai n ed i s agai n 2 2 Accord i n g to M an dav ya for

.
,

each of th e 12 si gns from Aries bei n g e i th er th e risi n g

si gn or t h e si gn occu pied by th e Moo n i n th e case of each
yoga th e nu m be r of yogas obtai ned i s 44 x 12 or 5 2 8
,
.

4 Wh en Sat urn occ u p ies si g n Aqu ari us th e Su n

.
,

s i gn Ar i es th e Moon s i g n T au ru s Mercu ry si gn Gem i ni

, , ,

J u p i ter sign Leo an d Mars si gn Scorp i o a person born b e

, ,

comes a k in g when th e ri s i n g si gn is Aquar i us or wh en

i t i s A ries or wh en i t is T au ru s .

Again wh e n S atu rn occu p i es si gn L i bra th e M o o n

, ,

si gn T au ru s th e S u n and M ercu ry si gn V i rgo Venu s

, ,

si gn L ibra Mars si g n Ar i es an d Ju p iter sign C ancer a

, , ,

person born beco m e s a ki n g wh en t h e r isi n g si gn i s

L ibra or w hen i t i s Tau rus .

5 .When Mars occu p ies si g n C apr i cor n th e Su n ,

an d th e M oon si gn Sagi ttari S atu rn si gn C apricorn and ,

wh en th e risi n g si gn i s also C apr i corn a person born b e ,

co m es a ki n g .

A gai n wh en t h e r i s i n g s i gn i s Capricorn and wh en

,

M ars and th e Moon occu py it an d wh en th e S u n occ up i es ,

si gn Sagittari a person born becom es a ki n g

,
.

A ga i n wh e n Aries i s th e ri si n g si gn and wh e n th e
,

Su n occu pies i t whe n S atu rn a nd th e M oon occu py si gn

,

L i bra a nd J u pi ter occu pi es si gn Sagi ttari a perso n born ,

becomes a ki n g .

6 . Whe n th e ris i n g si gn is Taurus an d th e M oon

occu pies i t wh en th e Su n occupi es si gn L eo J u p it er si gn
, ,

Scorpi o an d S aturn si gn Aqu ari us a person born becomes ,

a k ing .

Agai n wh en th e risi n g si gn i s C apri corn and wh en

, ,

S a t u rn occu pies i t an d wh en th e M oon occup i es th e 3 rd

,

hou se M ars th e 6 t h house M ercury th e 9 t h h ouse an d

, , ,

J u pi ter th e 12 th h ou se a person born becom es a v i rtu o us

,

an d fam ous k in g .
 12 2 Bi l a fr z
[c H . x1 .

wh i ch wi ll beco m e ki n gs i f th ey belon g to a k in g s fa m i ly ’

a nd wi l l becom e r i ch i f oth erw i se , .

NOT ES .

( a
) 9 6 R j
a ay o a s h ave been
g d escribed i n al l .

13 When th re e or m ore planets are powerfu l an d

.

occu p y either th ei r exal tat i on si gns or th ei r M o o l at r ik o n a

si gns a pers o n b o rn beco m es a ki ng i f h e belongs to a
,

k i ng s fa m i ly
’

Again wh en fiv e or more pl anets are po w erfu l and

,

Occu py th ei r exaltation s s i g n s or th ei r Mo o l at r ik o n a s ig n s ,

a person born becomes a ki n g eve n i f h e be born i n a lo w

famil y I f i n ei th er case th e n u m ber of powerful p lanets
.
, ,

be l ess th an th re e :o r fi ve th e persons describe d above

,

w il l n ot beco m e k in gs bu t wi ll become onl y ri ch

NO T E S .

If th e 3 or 5 p l anets be n ot all powerfu l th e person ,

wi ll n ot becom e a kin g A gain i t i s not n ecessary th at

.
,

a l l t he pl anets m u st occu py th e i r exaltati on or M o o l a t ri

kon a sign s I t will be e nou gh i f so m e b e i n th e exalta

.

tion s ig n s and so m e i n t h e Mo o l a t rik o n a si gns .

14 Whe n Ari es i s th e ri si n g si gn a n d th e Su n ( a ) and

.

t h e Moon occu py i t when Mars occu pi es sign C apricorn i

,

Satu rn s i gn Aqu ariu s an d Ju pi ter si gn Sagi ttari a person

, ,

b orn beco m es a ki n g i f he belon gs to a ki n g s fami ly

’

NO T E S .

( a) Accordin g to anoth e r read i n g th e Su n i s ,

m ad e to occu p y si gn Leo a n d th e yoga r e m a i ns th e sa m e

i n oth er respects .

An d wil l beco m e on ly ri ch i f o t h erw 1se ,

.

15 Whe n Ve n us occu pi e s th e 4t h h ouse and wh en

. ,

su ch h ou se i s h i s o w n wh en th e Moon occupies th e 9 t h
,

h ouse an d wh en th e other planets occupy th e 3 rd l st an d

, ,

th e l 1t h h ouse s a person born beco m es a ki n g i f h e

,

b elon gs to a ki n g s fam ily ( a )

’
.
(
i
n . X 1]

NO T E S .

And only r i ch if oth erw i se , .

As Ve nus i s sai d to be i n h i s S waks h e t ra h e m i gh t

be e i th er i n sign T au ru s or i n si gn Li bra Th e L agn a .

m ust th erefore be e i th er si g n Aqu ariu s or si gn Cancer

resp ecti vely As th e M 0 0 11 i s sai d to be i n th e 9 t h h ouse
.

h e occup ies s i g n L ibra i n th e fo r me r case and sign Pisces

i n th e latter an d as th e oth er planets are sai d to occupy
,

th e 3 r d l s t and l 1t h h ou ses fro m L ag n a th ese hou ses

, ,

are si gns Ar i es Aquariu s and S agi ttari i n the one case

,

and Virgo C ancer an d Tau ru s i n th e oth er Th u s two

, , .

yogas are re ferre d to i n th is stanza .

16 W hen Mercu ry i s powerfu l and occu pies t h e

.
.

ri si n g si gn ( a ) wh e n a powerfu l b e n e fic pla net ( 6) ocen

,

pies th e 9 t h h ouse ( 6 ) an d wh e n th e oth er pl anets occu p y

th e 9 t h 2 md 3 rd 6t h 1 0t h a nd 1 1t h h ouses ( d) a p e rson
, , , , ,

born beco m es a v i rtuou s ki n g i f h e belon gs to a ki n g s '

fam i ly .

NOT E S .

Th is m ay be any on e of th e 1 2 si gns .

( 6) Th i s i s e i th er J upi te r or Ven u s
, .

(c) T he 4t h house accord i n g to a d ifie re n t re a di u g

'
'
.
,

( d ) I n any way accord i n g to th e C o m me ntator .

( 6 ) An d only rich i f otherwise ,

.

17 Whe n T au ru s i s th e ri si n g si gn an d th e Moon
.

occupies i t w he n J upi ter occu pi es th e 2 n d h ouse S atu r n

, .

th e 6 t h h ouse an d t he oth er pl anets th e l 1t h h ouse, a

'

,
'
perso n born becomes a ki n g i f h e belongs t o a ki n g s
fam ily
Agai n wh en J u pi ter occu p i es th e 4t h h o u se t h e S u n
, ,
“

an d th e Moon occu p y t h e l 0t h h o u se wh en Satu rn oce n ,

pies th e Lagna ( b ) and wh e n th e oth er plan ets occu p y!

th e l l t h h ouse a pe rson born b eco m es a kin g i f h e b e
,

born i n a k i n g s fa m i ly ’
 Bi hr at Jam/as .
( e n . xi .

NO T E S .

( a ) A nd only ri ch i f ot herw i se ,
.

( 5) Th i s may be a n y on e of th e 12 si gns a c c o rdiu g

t o th e C o m ment ator .

( 0) A n d onl y rich i f oth erwi se , .

18 \V11 e 11 th e Moon occu pies th e l ot h h ouse Saturn

.
,

th e 1 1t h h ou se J u pi ter th e risi n g s i gn M ercu ry an d

, ,

Mars th e 2 n d house an d th e S u n and Ven us occu py th e

,

4t h h ouse a person born beco m es a ki n g i f h e belon gs to

,

a king s fa m il y
’

Agai n wh en Mars an d S atu rn occu py th e r i s i n g sign

,
,

w h en th e M O O 11 occu pies th e 4t h h ouse J upi ter th e 7 t h ,

h ouse Ven u s th e 9 t h h ou se th e S u n th e 1 0t h h ouse and

, , ,

Mercu ry th e 1 1t h h ouse a person born beco m es a ki n g i f

,

’
h e belon gs to a ki n g s fa m ily
N OT E S .

( a ) ( 6) An d on ly ri ch i f otherwi se
, , .

19 O f th e plan et s p ro du c i n g a Raj ayo g a either i n

.

th e D asa per i o ds ( a ) o f th ose wh ich occu py th e 1 0t h

h ouse or th e L agn a ( b ) or i n th at of th e most powerfu l
.

plan et a person obtai ns kin gd om a nd h e l oses i t an d

cou rts th e fri endsh i p of a nothe r ki ng i n th e D asa peri od s
( d ) of th e planets occupyin g i ni m ical or d ep ressi o n signs
N OT E S .

Or An t ardas a periods accord i n g t o th e

, C o m m en
tator .

( b) If th ere be p l a nets both i n th e L agn a an d i n th e

10t h h ouse or i f th ere be sever al planets i n ei th er then i n ,

th e An t a rdas a period of th e m ost powerful of th e m .

( 0) If there be n o planets both i n th e L agna an d i n

th e 10t h h ouse .

( d ) O r A n t a rd a s a periods ac c ordi n g to th e C om

m en t a t o r .
12 6 Br z lz /ézi [cm xi i
'

at d a .
,

( d ) T h i s por t i on of th e text i s i n t erpre t ed by some

as fo ll ows
“
W h e n p o w e r f u l b e n efi c p l a n e t s oc c u py t h e Ke n dr as .

But th i s i nterpretati on i s opposed to G arga wh om the

C om m en tator quotes .

C HAPT E R XII .

On Nab h as a Yogas .

1 . N i ne, ten and ei gh t

m ul ti plied respecti ve l y b y ,

th ree t h ree and fou r gi ve th e su m s of the n u m bers of th e

,

fi rst t wo th e fi rst th ree a n d al l th e fou r grou ps of Nab h as a

, ,

yogas (a ) Th e Ya v an as treat extensi vel y of on e th ousan d

.

and ei gh t h u nd red of su ch yogas ( b) We shall here su m .

m arise the m

NO T ES .

( 0 ) C uriously enough th e Au th or adopts a rath er ,

c i rcu itous meth od of stati n g th e n u m bers of th e several

grou ps of Nab h asa yogas Th e state m en t a m ou nts to an .

Al g eb raic a l p ro b l e m to fin d 4 n u m bers su ch that th e l st +

th e 2 n d 9 x 3 2 7 l s t + 2 11 d + 3 rd = 10 x 3 3 0 l s t 2 n d
. .

3 rd 4t h 8 x 4 3 2 I t i s cl ear that the n umbe r of th e las t

.

grou p = 3 2 — 3 0 = 2 Th e n u mber of th e 3 rd grou p 3 0

.

27 3 T he nu m ber of th e fi rst a nd second grou ps is

.

gi ven as 2 7 Accord i n g to th e C o m mentator th e l st

.
,

grou p consists of 2 0 yogas and t h e 2 n d of 7 I n oth er .

word s wh at t h e Au thor w a nts to s ay i s brie fly th is —T h e

,

Nab h as a yogas consist of 4 grou ps as follow

Ak rit i yogas 2 0 S ankhya y ogas 7 As ra ya y ogas 3
and Dal a yogas 2 .

note at th e en d of th e Ch apter f r th e
'
’
( )
6 V z a e ,
o

parti culars of th e 1 8 00 Nab h as a yogas Accordi n g to .

S u c h idh w aj a th e n u m ber o f Nab h a s a yogas i s u nli m ited

,

thou gh th e Yav an as speak of of the m .

C H X IL] Br z lz a t
'

. J dl a /éci . 12 7

( c) T h e A ut hor says th a t h is 20 Ak r it i yogas and ,

7 San k ah ya yogas co ntai n th e 1 8 00 yogas of th e Ya v an as

a n d t h at h e speaks onl y of 3 2 yogas becau se th ei r e ff ects ,

are th e sa m e as th e e ffects of th e 1 8 00 yogas .

2 A c co rd i n g t o Sat y ac h a r iy ar i f al l th e pl anets occu p y

.
,

( a) th e movable fixed or co m m on si gns th e y oga s are

, ,

r especti vely known as Rajj u Musala and N ala an d th ese , ,

th ree form th e grou p of As r ay a yogas Agai n accord i n g to .

P arasa ra i f t h e b en e fic pl anets ( 6) occu py th e Kend ras ( c)

, ,

th e y oga i s known as S rik or Mal a ; and i f m al e fic p l anets ,

( d ) occu py th e Ken dras ( e) th e yoga i s k now n as Sarpa .

T hese two for m th e grou p o f Dal a y ogas .

NOT E S .

I n t h i s stanza th e Au th or d escribes t h e th ree As raya

,

Y ogas and th e two Dala yogas .

( ) O n e or two or th ree or al l th e fou r of th e si gns

a .

Accord i n g to so m e th e pl an ets ou ght to occupy al l th e fou r

,

si gn s T hi s i s opposed t o Garga
. .

( ) Vz z Mercu ry Ju p i ter and Ven u s accord i n g to

'

b , ,

Garga .

( )
0 Th ree of th e Kendras accord i n g to G a r ga wh il e
th ere are n o ni al e fic plan ets i n an y of th e Kend ra hous e s
accordi n g to Badara ya n a .

( )
d V z z —Th e S un M ars and Sat u rn accord i n g to
'

.
,

G arga .

( 5 ) T h ree o f th e Kend ras accord i n g to G arga wh i le

there are n o b en e fic pla nets i n any of the Kend ra h ou ses
accordi n g to Bada rayan a .

3 . O th er Ast rol ogers say th at th e A s ray a yogas are

identi cal with th e Yava ( a ) Abj a ( b ) Vaj ra ( c) And ej a ( d)

, , , ,

Gola ( e) and th e l ike yogas ( f ) and th at w h en th e effects o f

, ,
'

plan ets occu p y in g th e Kend ras are described th e e fie c t s of ,

Dala yogas are al so d escribed and th ey prod uce no separate

effects (g ) .
 12 8 E f f/ mi J cil a lt ci [C H X II
"

. . .

NO T E S .

I n th i s stanza th e Au th or ex pl ai n s th e reason wh y
,

certai n Astrologers h ave failed to t reat o f th e As ray a an d

D al a yogas i n t hei r work s

A k i i
'

( a ) (,
b) ( c) V z d e Stanza 5 These . are r t y ogas .

( )
d Vi ck S ta n za 4 Th i.s also i s a n A k r i t i yoga .

( ) Stanza Th i s i s one o f th e San khya yogas

’
’
e V z a e 1 0 . .

(f ) Th e l ike yogas : su ch as Sakata ( Stanza 4 ) an

Ak rit i yoga ; Kedar a Sul a and Yu ga ( St anza 10) S an kh
,

a y o gas
y .

T he As ray a yogas m ay be th ese and may not be th ese ;

h ence th e A uth or h as dee m ed i t ad vi sabl e to treat th em
,

separatel y For i nstance i f all th e pl anets occu py si gns

Ge m in i an d Sag i t tar i —2 of th e co m m on si gn s —wh e n one
.
,

of these i s also th e risi n g si gn th e yoga i s kn own both as,

Vaj ra and N al a bu t i f any oth e r si gn be th e ris i n g s i gn ,

i t i s not a Vaj ra yoga bu t on l y a N al a yoga .

( g) As regards t h e Dal a yogas i t i s sai d that ,

oth er
wri ters h ave descri bed th e e ff ects of b en e fic and of m al e fic
planets occu pying th e K e nd ras and a s these ar e al s o th e
e ff ects of th e two Dala y o g as th e y h ave o m i tted to treat of
th e m separatel y ; t h e Au th or t reats of these separatel y i n
order to m ak e i t k n own th at th e t w o are Nab h as a yogas
a nd as su ch th ei r e ff ects are fel t th rou gh ou t l i fe ( v i de
S tanza Wh il e th e oth er w ri ters h ave i ncl ud ed th em
a m on g oth er yogas .

4 . If all th e pla nets occu py a n y two adj acen t Kend ras ,

th e y oga i s k nown as G ada (a ) I f th ey al l occupy t h e .

ascendan t and th e 7 t h h ouse the y oga i s kn own as ,

S akata If al l th e pl an ets occu py th e 4t h an d th e l 0t h

.

h ouse th e y oga i s kn own as V i h a g a ( A

, j
n da a ) If all th e
plan ets occu py th e ascen dan t th e 5 th an d 9 t h h ouses , ,

th e yoga i s known as S ri n g a t a k a an d i f all th e planets

occu p y oth e r tri an gular h ouses th e yo g a i s k n own as ,

H ala
 Ba ker J etsam
f

13 0 .
[c a x n .

NO T ES.
is; th e Yav a y oga a
nd th e y ogas m en
t io n e d i n th e b e ginn i n g of s tanza 2 0, of th e Ch apter
Raj a y oga -
.

b
( ) M aya Ya v a n a G arga and others
, , .

e i th er s i d e
( )
c On : th at i s t h e 4t h or l ot h h o u se
from the S u n .

( 4) EA to Brah m a Sree Su n dar e s w ara

cco rdi n g

Sr au t i of T i ru vadi th e Vaj ra and Yava y ogas refer to

,

th e pos i t ion s of th e planets i n th e Bhava C hakra and n ot

to t he i r pos i tions i n t h ei r Rasi Ch akra as supposed by
V a rah a M ih ir a He i s th erefore of opi ni on th at G arga
.
, ,

an d ot h er w r i ters have not erred i n treati n g of these

yogas as possi bl e ones This w e sh all n ow explai n .
,

Varab a M i h i ra says H o w can M ercu ry and Ven us

o ccupy th e 4t h S ig n fro m th e S u n Th e w ord u sed i n th e ”
.

te x t is Bka w n a wh i ch m eans a s ign of t h e Zodi ac ( ai de

Stanza 4 C h apt er I ) If the Vaj ra and Yava yogas refer
,
.

to th e posit i on s of th e plan ets i n the Ras i C h akra th en

'

, ,

V arah a M i h i ra i s ri gh t i n decl ari n g t hat th e anci ent

w ri ters h a v e e r red but n ot so i f the yogas refer to the
po sitions of th e pl anets i n the Bhava C h ak ra In deed .
,

i n all yogas wh ere th e posi ti ons o f th e planets are stated with

re fere nce to parti cu lar B h a v a s or houses fro m th e aseen
d an t th ey refer to Bh ava C h akra As i t is som ewh at
,
.

tedio u s to constru ct th i s C h akra tabl e m ost of th e ,

A st rologers confou nd i t wit h the oth er C h akra and

wrongl y apply a l l yogas to th e Rasi C hakra Th is is one .

o f fru i tfu l sou rces of error i n astrologi ca l pred ictions We .

sh all no w explai n wh at i s m e an t by Bh ava C hakra .

Both Rasi an d Bh ava C h akras are d i visions of th e

ec li pt i c th e for m er i s d i vi sion i nto 1 2 equ al parts and
t h e l a t ter i s di v is ion i n to 1 2 u nequal parts depend i ng u pon
t h e l é t it ude o f t h e place
'

.
CH X II ]
.
f
Er z lza t M i a /eat . 13 1

Bh askara C h a ryar defines Bhav a C hakra as fol l o ws

i n h is Gola Ad h y ay a
W }
e

mis sh m fi m s aa fi

T he poi nt where th e ecl i pt i c cuts the ho r i zo n i n

th e E a st i s k now n as E astern or ri s i n g L agn a and i n t he ,

W es t as the Western or settin g L agna an d th e poi n t s

wh ere th e m eri di an of th e place cu ts th e ecli p ti c are
k nown as M ad hya or M iddl e L agnas — t h e l 0t h and t h e
,

4t h Lagn as
”
.

These 4 poi nts are respect ively th e m iddl e po i nts

of th e l s t , 7 t h l 0t h an d 4t h B
, h a v as The two poi n t s o f
.

tr isection of th e d istance bet ween th e m iddl e poi nt s of

the l st and 4t h Bh a v as are respecti vely the m i dd le poi n ts
of the 2 n d and 3 m B h a v as Th e two po i n ts of t rise c t i on
.

of t he d is t a nce between the m i dd le po i n ts of th e 4t h and

7t h B h a v as are respectively th e m i ddle poi nts o f t h e 5 t h
‘

and 6t h Bh av a s The two poi nts of tri section of t he dis

.

t a n ce bet ween m i ddle poi nts of t he 7 t h and l 0t h B h aVa s

are th e m idd le poi nts of th e 8 t h and 9 t h Bh av as An d th e .

two poi nts of trisection of t he distan ce between th e mi d dl e

‘

poi nts of th e l 0t h and l st Bh a v as are the m i ddle po i n t s ‘

of th e 1 1t h and 12 t h Bh a v a s Thus we h ave O btai ne d

.
,

t he m iddl e poi nt s of the 1 2 Bh a v as N ow i f we bis ect .

,

the se twelve d i vision s of t h e e clipti c th e space bet ween ,

the two poi nts of bisection i m med iately on both si des of

the m i ddle poi n t of each B h ava wi l l form a B/z a w .

N ow as th e ecli pti c i s i ncl i ned to th e eq uator by

,

about 2 3 d egre es t h e po le of th e eclipt i c wi l l a l ways b g,

.
,

re m oved fro m th e pole of th e e q u a t p r by abou t 2 3 h eg m es

an d w ill descr i b e rou n a ci rc e in th e co ur e
d it l s qf £ 3 6 151 .
 B kat
rz J dt akd .
( en . XII .

day . So th at, every day , t h e plan e of t h e ecl i pti c m eri d i an

w i l l co i nc i d e w i th th e plane of th e m erid i an of the place
tw i ce N ow, th e poi nt wh ere th e ecli pti c m erid ian bi sects
.

t h e e cl i pti c i s known i n Astrono m y as th e N onagesi mal

poi n t C al l th i s poi nt N C all the poi nt wh ere th e

. .

m eri di an of th e pl ace cuts th e ecli pti c M and th e poi nts .

wh ere t he h orizon cuts th e eclipti c i n th e E ast and West

as E an d W resp ecti vel y
. .
.

W
M N
S o th at N E ,
N W 9 0 Degr ee 3 i gns and M E
s ,

i s always 3 B h av a s and M W i s a l so 3 Bh av as M bei n g ,

t h e m i ddle poi nt of th e l ot h Bh ava .

No w when th e pl ane of th e ecli pti c m erid i an coin ci des

,

wi th th e plan e of th e m erd i an of th e place N coi ncid es ,

w i th M and th erefore N M vanish es an d th e R asi an d

Bh ava C h akras coi n ci de Thi s wil l occu r twi ce a day
. .

A t oth er t i mes th ey w ill d i ffer

, No w i n the h i gh er lat i
.
,

tudes the angle between th e two m erd ian l i nes i n cre as es

,
.

( Vi da S p he ri cal T ri gono m etr y) Therefore th e d istan ce

.
,

NM a l so i n creases a n d M W acco rd i n gly d im i ni shes and

i t m ay even b eco m e less th an 47 and 2 7 d egrees an d i t
n e verth eless contai n s 3 Bh av as So th at i t i s poss ib l e
.
,

for Mercury a n d Venu s to occu py M ( th e l 0t h Bhava)

w h ile t h e Su n occup ies W (th e 7 t h Bh ava ) V en us ,

an d Mercu ry m ay occu py th e 4t h Bh ava fro m th e S u n .

So that Garga and oth er wri ters h ave not erred i f t h e

,

Vaj ra and Ya v a yogas refer to t h e pos i t i ons of th e plan ets

i n the B h ava C h akra .

7If all th e p l anets o ccupy the fou r s i gns ( a ) fro m

.

the ascend an t th e yoga i s known as Yupa i f t h ey

,
‘

o ccupy th e four signs ( 6) from th e fou rt h h ouse th e yoga ,

i s know n as Ish u or B
“

ana i f th ey occupy th e four sign s

“

(0) fro m t h e s even th house th e yo g a i s know n as Sakt i

‘

,
13 4 Em ia ! J ci t a kci.
il
[e n X 11 .

pl an ets may occu p y ( 1) fro m th e 2 n d t o th e 8 th house ; ( 2 )

’

fro m the 3 rd to the 9 t h hou se ( 3 ) from th e 5 th to th e

l 1t h house ; ( 4) fro m th e 6t h to th e 1 2 th h ou se ( 5 ) from
th e 8 th to th e 2 n d house ; ( 6) fro m th e 9 t h to th e 3 rd
h ouse ( 7 ) fro m th e l l t h to th e 5 t h house an d ( 8 ) from
th e i 2 t h to th e 6 t h h ouse .

9 . I f th e planets ( a ) occu py th e six alternate signs

( 6) be g i n ni n g fr om th e secon d h o u s e th e y oga i s known
as Sa m ud ra and if th ey occu py th e six alternate si gns ( 6 )
,

begi n n i n g fro m th e ascendant the yo g a i s known as ,

C h akra T h u s th e Ak rit a yogas h ave been descri bed

.

br i efly .

NO T E S .

I n th is stanza th e Author descri bes th e rem a i n i ng

,

two ( ou t of 2 0) Ak r it i yogas .

( a ) All th e seven plan ets .

( b) T h at i s th e 2 n d 4t h 6 t h 8 t h 10t h and the 1 2 t h

, , , , ,

h ouses .

( 6 ) T h at i s , th e l s t 3 rd 5 t h 7 t h 9 t h and th e 1 1t h
, , , ,

houses .

10 If all th e planets occupy any s even si gn s th e

.
,

yoga is known as V a l l ak i i f the y occu py any si x si gn s ,

th e yoga i s known as D amini i f th ey occupy a n y five

si gns i t is k now n as Pasa i f any fou r si gns i t i s known
, ,

as Kedara ; i f any three si gns i t is kn own as S u la ; i f ,

a n y two signs i t is k nown as Yuga

,
and i f they occupy a
si n gl e si gn the yoga i s kno w n as Gola Wh en any of th ese
,
.

Sankhya yogas are at th e sa m e ti m e any oth er N abbasa

yogas , t hey are to be treated as belon g i n g to th e latter
cl ass ( a ) .

N OT E S .

(a ) In th i s Stan za th e Auth or describes th e seve n

,

Sankh y a yoga s .
c ra
.
a Bi h a t
r J cit a kci . 13 5

For i nstan ce th e Gada S akata and V ih ag a yogas

, ,

d escribed i n Stanza 4 are to be treated only as such and

n o t as Yu ga y ogas d escri bed in thi s stanza th e S tri n ga
taka and Hal a y ogas described i n S tanza 4 are t o be treat
ed onl y as su ch an d not as Sul a yogas described i n th is
stanza Agai n th e Vaj ra Yava Ka m al a and V api yog as
.
, , ,

described i n S tanza 5 a s wel l a s the Yupa Ish u Sak ti and , ,

Dand a yogas d escribed i n Stanza 7 sh all not be con

fou nded with th e Kedara y ogas descr i bed i n th i s s t an za .

And so on .

11 A person born u n der a Rajj u yoga w i l l be j ea

.

l ous of t he wealth of others will proceed to fore i gn lands

,

an d wi ll be fond of travellin g ; a person born u nder a

Musala y oga wil l be respect abl e ri ch an d wi l l e n gage i n , ,

variou s u ndertaki ngs and a person bor n u nd er a N ala

yoga wil l be o f d e fecti ve organs settled v i ews rich and , ,

ski lled i n work ( a ) Agai n a person born u nder a

.
,

Sr i k y oga wi ll l i ve i n co m fort and lu xu ry a nd one born ,

u n der a Sarpa y oga wil l be m iserable i n many ways

NO T E S .

'

In th i s stanza th e Au th or d escri bes th e e fiec t s of th e

,

th ree As r a y a yogas and of the two Dala y ogas .

Accord i n g to Sat yach ar yar .

(6) Accord in g to Garga .

12 If the As ray a yogas pa rta ke at th e s a m e t i me of

.

th e ch aracter of other yogas the y sh ou l d be treated as th e

,

latter oth erwi se th ey prod u ce th e e ffects described for

,

the m .

NOT ES .

Thi s su bj ect h as alread y been discussed i n St anza 3 .

F o r i n s t an ce i f a Rajj u y oga or a M u sala y oga or a N ala

,

yoga partake o f th e natu re of a K am ala yoga ( Stanza

i t sh o uld be t reated as t h e latter .
13 6 B h at
‘

rz J cit a kci .
[C H . XII .

13 A pe rson bo rn u nder a G ada yoga wi ll perform

”

sacri fici al r ites w ill be r i ch and will ever b e en gaged i n

, ,
-

th e acqu isi ti on of wealth a person born u nd er a Sakata

yoga wi ll li ve b y mean s of carts wi ll be a ffli ct ed wi th,

d iseases and will h ave a me a n wife a person born

,

u nd er a V i h a g a y oga wi l l l ive b y carr y i ng m essages ,

will be fond of travels and will cau s e q u ar rels a person

born u n der a Sr i n g at ak a y oga wil l be h appy i n th e latter
end of l i fe ( a ) and a person born u nder a Hala yoga w i l l
t i l l l an ds .

NOT E S .

In th is stanza th e Au th or descri bes th e e ff ects of

,

fi ve Ak r i t i y ogas .

( a ) Th e word i n th e text is C h i ra S ukh i Thi s ” ~

”
i s i nterpreted by som e to m ean h app y for a lon g t ime .

Thi s i nterpretation i s op posed to Garga who adds th at

th e person wi ll also be of h arsh speech .

14 . A person bor n u nder a Vaj ra yoga wi ll be h appy

both at th e begi n ni n g and en d of l ife wil l be a gene r al ,

favou ri te and will be bol d i n fi ght A person born i n Ya va.

yoga will be power fu l and w ill be happy at th e m idd le of

life A perso n born u nder a P ad m a ( Kam ala ) y oga will
.

be of great renown will be greatl y h appy and possessed of

,

m any attai n ments A person born u nder a Vapi y oga

.

w il l l ive i n poor com fort for a long ti m e will bury h is ,

weal th u nder gro u nd an d w ill be a m i ser .

NOT E S .

In th e stanza th e Au th or d escribes t h e e ffects of

,

fou r more Ak rit i y ogas .

15 A person born u n der a Yu pa y oga will be li beral

.

i n gi ft and will pe rfor m h i gh sacri fici al ri gh ts A .

person born u nd e r a Bana ( Ishu ) yoga wi ll i nd ul g e i n

tort u re will be a j ailor and w i ll m ake arrows A person
,
.

b orn u nder a S akti yoga wi ll engage d eed s disgracefu l

 18 8 Bi/z éz t
r J a t dkci
‘
.
[on x 11:

NO T E S .

In th i s stanza th e Au thor d escribes th e e ffe cts of th e

,

thr ee m ore Ak ri t i yogas and of th e first S ankh y a yoga .

( a ) I n ot her words h e wi ll become a n e m p eror or

,

ki n g of k i ngs by vi rtu e of h i s attai nme nts i n Divi ne

knowled ge ac cordin g to the C o m men tator .

18 A p erson born u nd er a Dami n i yoga wi ll b e l ib er al

.

i n gift will del i gh t i n h elpin g oth ers an d w i ll possess m any

,

cows A person born i n a Pasa yoga will wi th h i s servants

.
,

and ki nsmen e arn weal th b y proper m eans A person

, .

born u nder a Kedara yoga will til l land s and b y doin g ,

good deeds wi ll be useful to m any persons Aperson .

born u nder a S ula yoga wil l be bold i n fi ght wi ll recei ve ,

blo w s and wi ll be fond of m oney ( a ) b u t wil l be poor .

NO T E S .

In thi s stanza t h eA u thor d escri bes th e e fie ct s of fou r

' '

more Sankhy a yogas .

( a) Wi ll be fon d o f tort u re accord i n g to so m e

oth e r readi n g .

19 A person born u nd er a Yu ga yoga will be poor

.

and will act i n contr aventi on of Ved i c rul e s A person .

b b r n u nder a G ol a yoga wil l be poor d irty i gnoran t , , ,

addic t ed to l o w d eeds u nskil led i n work and will e ver

, ,

be wanderi n g fro m place to pl ace ( a ) Th us h ave been .

,

described th e several Nab h as a yogas wit h thei r e ffects .

’
T h ese e ff e cts are fel t th rou ghou t a m an s li fe .

NO T ES .

In th is stanza the e ff ects of th e re m ai ni n g two San

,

k h y a yogas are descri bed .

( )
a For bare s u bsi sten ce accordi ng to th e C o m m en

tat o r .

6 E cept i n h case o f Vaj ra and other ogas

( ) x t e y
v i de Stanz a 14) wh ose e fie c t s will be felt as sta ted i n
( , ,
CH . XI I ] Bih r at J dt a kci . 13 9
parti cu lar An t ar d as a periods of a person s l i fe SO th at ’
. .
,

wh erever n o per i od s are m enti on ed th e e fie c t s w il l be ,

felt t h rou ghout l i fe [Vi da S tanza 2 0 C h ap ,

.

NOT ES .
—
Yogas wi ll coi n ci de ne i th er wi th
D al a
As r aya y o gas nor with Ak rit i yogas Th ey m i gh t coi n
cide with Sankh y a y ogas —with th e V al l aki th e D a m i n i
.

, ,

th e Pasa o r th e Kedara yogas i n which case t h e yogas

, ,

are to be treated as onl y D ala yogas and n ot as San kh ya ;

yo gas ( Vi ae Sta n za
.
’
Agai n accord i n g to Sta n z a ,

i f th e As ra ya yogas coi n cide wi t h Ak rit i yogas , th ey

cease to be As r a y a y ogas a nd accordi ng to S tan za 10 i t ,

th e S ankhya y ogas coin ci d e w i th Ak ri t i yoga s; th ey

cease to be S ankh y a yogas No w suppose As r aya and .
, ,

Sankhya y ogas to coin cid e w i th each other Are th ey t o .

be treated as th e for m er or as th e latter Th e C o m m e n

tator say s that i f th e coi n ci den ce refers t o the Kedara ,

Sula and Yu ga y ogas th e yogas are to be treated as

, ,

As ray a yogas only bu t i f i t re fer t o th e Gola yoga i t i s

to be treated as su ch an d n ot as an Asray a yoga—oth e r
,

w ise th ere wi ll be n o room fo r Gol a yoga at all

,
.

We sh all n ow explai n h ow th e Ya v an as obta i n 1 8 00

Nab h as a y ogas As stated i n St anza 3 th e Yav an as d o
'

.
,

n ot treat of the th ree As ra ya y ogas an d th e t o Dal a

yogas Th e y treat of 2 3 Ak r i t i y ogas and 12 7 San k hy a
.

yogas or 1 5 0 yogas i n al l for a Lagn a th ere bei ng 1 2

L agnas th e n u m be r of N ab b asa y ogas trea ted of by t h e
,

Ya v an as i s 12 x 1 5 0 = 1 8 00 .

We sh all expl ai n t hese m o re fu lly As explai ned i n .

n ote ( a ) to S tanza 4 the Ga d a y oga of th e A u th or is

, . ,

treated of a s 4 d i sti n ct yogas by t h e Ya v a n as Ad di n g .

th ese t o th e re m ai n i n g 19 Akr it i yogas we get 2 3 Ak ri t i ,

yogas as treated of b y th e Ya v an as ,

Agai n the seve n S an khya y ogas o f the Au thor are

,

Spli t i nto 12 7 S ankh ya yogas for a Lagn a by the Y av an a s

 30
14 Bri ha t J at a ka .
[en xzn
.
‘

as f o l l ow s : T h e
first S ankh ya yoga treated of by V ar ah a
M ihi ra is know n as V al l a k i yoga accordi n g to whi ch t h e
7 pl an et s m i gh t occupy a n y seven si gns T h i s m ay be .

in m an y ways ; bu t th e Ya v a n a s select only a few As each

o f t h e seven plan ets m i gh t occup y th e Lagn a th e n u m ber

o f yogas u nder thi s d ivi sion i s 7 A gai n th e 2 u d Sankh y a

.

y o ga trea ted of by th e A uth or i s one a cco rdi ng to wh ich

t h e 7 planets are sai d t o occupy any si x si gns T hi s m ay be .

in m an y wa y s bu t th e Yav a n as select th e followi n g few

o f t h e 7 planets 5 m ay oc cu p y 5 h ou ses and 2 more m ay
,

occ upy t h e Lagna These two may be any two of th e

.

sev e n pl a nets T h e n u m ber of yogas u nder th i s head wi ll

.

b e t h e nu mber of combi n a ti ons of 7 th in gs take n 2 to

e t h er x g 21
g .

Agai n th e 3 rd S ankh y a yoga is on e i n wh i ch th e

,

sev en pl anets occupy 5 houses This m ay be i n m any ways

.

b u t the followi ng are selected 4 plan ets occupyi n g 4 -

h o uses an d 3 more occupyi n g th e Lagn a Th es e t hree m ay .

be any th r ee ou t of th e 7 planets Th e nu m ber of cases .

u n d er th is head i s the nu mber of com bi nati on s of 7 th i ngs

t a k en 3

Th e n ext Sa nkhy a yoga of Varab a M ih i ra is si m i

l axl y split by th e Yav a n as i nto { x gx gx % 3 5 and t he ,

n ext i nto x
g g
-
x x x
§ = 2 1;
-
and the next i nto i g g §
x x x

and th e la s t So
th at th e seven Sankhy a y ogas are split i n t o 7 + 2 1 + 3 5 +
,

3 5 21 7 1 ==12 7 These added to 2 3 Ak r i t i y ogas gi ve

r
.

u s 1 5 0 yogas for a Lagn a or 1 8 00 yogas for th e 1 2 L agn as .

To fin d th e n u mber of combi nat i ons of n th i n gs ta ken

r at a t i me , t he reader is referred t o th e L i l a v a t i of E b as

k ar a C h ar y ar or to th e C h h a n d a s S utra of P i n gala or to
C h apter 7 7 S ta n z a 2 2 ( note s ) of th e E n gl is h Tran slati on
,

of B h o f the nex t
t i b at S a m h i ta or to t e note s to S tan z a 4

C h ap t e r o f t h i s B oo k .
142 Br ih a t J amiaa .
[C H . X II I .

D e s c r i p t io n .

Th e 7 Sa n kh y a Yoga s .

p l an et s o c c u p y a ny s e ve n s ig n s
Do . do . an y s ix s ig n s
do . any fiv e s i g n s
do . a n y f o u r s ig n s
do . a n y t h r e e s ig n s
do . a n y t w o s ig n s
do . an
y s in g l e s ig n

C HAP TE R XIII .

On Ch an dr a ( L u n ar ) Yoga s .

The cond u ct wealth knowled ge i ntelli gence and

1 .
, , ,

skill of a person wi ll be poor m oderate or excellent accord

,

i n g as th e Moon occupies th e Kendra th e P a n a p h a r a o r ,

th e Apo k l i m a h ouses fro m th e S u n ( a ) an d a person wi ll ,

be r i ch and wi l l l i ve i n co m fort i f th e Moon occupy h is own

Nav am s a or an At m it ra Na v a m s a provi ded sh e i s
aspected by J up i ter i f th e birth occu r by d ay a nd by ,

Ve nus i f t h e b ir th occur by n i gh t .

NO T E S .

(4) At th e ti m e of bi rth In ot her word

. s a person ,

w ill h ave very l i ttl e of th ese q ualities i f th e Moon occu py ,

ei th er th e si gn occupi ed b y th e S u n or th e 4t h 7 t h or l 0t h ,

s i gn from i t He wi ll h ave th ese qu al i ties i n a m oderate

.

de gree i f th e Moon occu p y th e 2 n d 5 t h 8 t h or th e 11t h si gn , ,

from th e s i gn occu pied by th e S u n an d h e will h ave th es e

qu alit i es i n a l arge measu re i f th e M oon occu p y th e 3 rd
,

6 t h 9 t h or th e 1 2 t h sign from th e si gn occu pi ed by th e

,

Su n .

An At i m it ra Nav am s a i s a Nav am sa o f an
( b)
At im it ra or a very Fri end ly plan et ( Vida Stanza 1 8 C h II ) .
,
. .

I f the b e n e fic planets ( a ) oc cupy the 6 t h 7 t h and

2 .
,

t h e 8 th h o uses fro m the Moon th e yog a i s k nown as Ad hi

‘
,
CH . XI I I ] . Br lz a z
'

z
‘
J a t a kd
‘
. 143

y oga ( b ) A person born i n th i s yoga w

. i l l becom e a gen e
ral a m ini ster or a ki n g ( 0) and will be i n th e e nj oyment
,

of great pleasu res and weal th with su bd ued ene m i es an d

l on g l i fe and free fro m di seases and fear .

NOT ES .

( ) a These are Mercu ry J upi ter and Venu s ,

.

Accordi ng t o Sru t ak e ert i th e y oga i s of 7 sorts

( 6) ,

accordi n g as th e b e n e fic plan ets occu py one or m ore of the

th ree ho u ses Th e y m i gh t occupy ( 1 ) all th e th re e
.

hou ses ; ( 2 ) the 6t h an d th e 7 t h h ouses ; ( 3 ) th e 6 t h

an d th e 8 th ( 4) th e 7 t h an d th e 8 th ( 5 ) th e 6t h ; ( 6)
the 7 t h th e 8 th h ouse fro m th e Moon .

( 6 ) Accord i n g as M ercu r y J u pi ter and Ven u s are ,

weak of mod erate pow er or of very great power accord i n g

, , ,

to Ba dara y a n a .

I n th e Astrologi cal work kn own as S aravali th e Adh i ,

yoga i s classed with Raj a yoga wh e n th e plan ets M ercury ,

Ju pi te r an d Ven u s are n ot As t an g at a pl anets n or aspec t ed ,

b y m al e fic planets M a n da v y a i s of th e same opi n i on

. .

Accord i n g to Sr u t ak e e r t i i f m al e fic pl anets occu py th e ,

6t h 7 t h an d th e 8 t h h o u ses fro m th e M oon th e e ff ects w i ll

, ,

be bad If both th e b en efic an d m al efic planets occu py

.

th e said hou ses the eff ects wi l l be both good and bad
,
.

3xcepti n g th e S un i f th e oth er plan ets occu py

. E ,

th e 2 u d th e 1 2 t h or both th e 2 n d a nd th e 12 t h houses
, ,

fro m th e Moon th e yogas are respecti vel y kn own as

,

Su n ap h a An a p h a or D u r u dh u r a ; oth erwi se ( a) th e yoga

, ,

i s k n own as K e m adr u m a by nu m erou s wri ters Accord in g .

to so m e ( b ) i f th e Moo n occu p y th e Ken dra h ouse from

,

th e ascen dan t or i f t h e Moon be acco m pa nied b y a pla n et ,

th e y o g a ceases to be a K e m adru m a yoga A ccord in g to .

oth ers th e three y ogas Su n ap h a An a p h a an d D u ru , ,

d h u ra are referred to th e K en dra houses fro m th e Moo n

144 ~
B 2h a t
r J dt a kci .
[OH . XII I .

( d) ; wh i le agai n some oth ers ( 6 ) refer th e th ree yogas

,

to th e hou ses on both sid es of th e si gn th e Nav a m s a of

wh i ch th e Moon occu pi es ( f ) B ut th es e vi e w s ar e no t .

consi dered as au th or i tat i ve .

NOT E S .

( )
a O th erwise : i . e. , in th e abs en ce of th ese 3 yoga s .

In th i s v iew Sat yach aryar concu rs .

( b ) Garga a n d P ar a s ar a .

( c) Sru t a
k eer t i and oth ers .

Th at i s i f on e of th e plan ets e xcepti n g th e S u n

(d ) ,

occupy th e 4t h house fro m the Moon th e yoga is kn own ,

as Su n ap h a ; i f i t occu p y th e l 0t h h ouse fro m th e

Moon th e yoga i s known as An ap h a an d i f the y occu p y
, ,

both th e 4t h and th e l 0t h h ou ses fro m th e Moon i t is , ,

k n own as D u r u dh u ra and i f th e 4t h an d l ot h h ouses from

the M oon be n ot occu pi ed by planets the yoga is kn own ,

as Kem adr um a .

( e) J eev as arm a .

Su ppose the Moon to occupy th e Nav a m s a of

(f )
Sagi ttari i n si gn Ari es N ow i f th e planets excepting
.
, ,

th e Su n and the Moon occu py th e 2 n d or th e 1 2 t h or bot h ,

th e 2 u d an d th e 12 t h h ou ses from si gn Sagi tta r i th e y ogas ,

are respecti vely k n own as Su n ap h a An ap h a and Duru ,

d hu ra Bu t i f th ese two h ouses be not so occupied th e

.
,

yoga i s known as Ke m adru m a .

4 Th e Su n ap h a and th e An a p h a yogas a r e each of

.

th irt y one sorts and th e D u r u dh u ra y ogas are of one h u n

-
,

dred and e ight y sorts as wi ll be fou nd to be th e case by

,

form i n g seri es as described i n th e rule for find ing th e n u m

ber of co m bi nati ons of a gi ven n u m ber of th i ngs .

N O TES .

Th e rul e for find in g th e nu m ber of co m bi n ations of

a g i ven nu m ber of thi n gs is only hi nted at i n the T ext ,
 146 Bi h
r at Je l akci
‘
.
[C H.X I II .

t ake n fo u r at a t i me tak en five at a

take n SI X at a ti m e = § x
7; an d taken se v e n at a t i m e l x g x

No w th e , in A Su n ap h a
yog as th e 2 nd o r or n ap h a ,
‘

t h e 12 th house from th e Moon may be occu pied by t h e five

planets fro m M ars e i th er s i n gly or two at a t i m e o r
th ree or fou r or al l at a t i m e T he n u mber requ i re d i s
“
.

t h e su m of th e n u mber of comb i nations of fine th i n gs

t ake n 1 2 3 4 an d 5 togeth er at a t i m e
, , , T h i s i s to b e d e .

du ced from th e follow i n g fract i ons 3 g T he ,

n u mbe r w i l l be fou nd to be 5 + 1 0 + 1= 3 1 .

Tak e th e case i n wh i ch th e 2 n d h ou se fro m th e Moon

i s occu pied by a s i n gl e p l anet wh i le i t i s so occu pi ed , th e
rem ai n i n g fou r p lanets m ay occupy th e 12 th house from
th e Moo n 1 2 3 or 4 at a ti m e Th e n u m ber of th ese
, , .

w i ll be th e su m of th e n umber o f com bin ation s of f o u r

th i n gs take n 1 2 3 and 4 toge th er T hi s will be
, ,
.

found to b e 4+ 6 + 4 1 1 5 So th at for on e of th e five .

,

Su n ap h a yogas we get 15 D u r udh u ra yogas , Th e five .

Su nap h a yogas of on e pl anet w i ll th erefor e gi ve u s 5 x 1 5

7 5 D u ru dh ura yogas Tak e on e of th e 1 0 Su n ap h a.

y ogas of t w o planets from Mars to S atu rn th e re m ai n

i n g 3 planets may occu py th e 12 t h house from th e Moon ,

1 2 an d 3 at a t i m e
,
Th e n u m ber requ i red i s t h e su m
.

of t h e n u mber of comb i nati ons of th ree th i n gs taken 1 2 ,

and 3 at a t i m e Th i s wi l l be fou n d to be 3 + 3 1 = 7
. .

C omb i n i n g th ese w i th th e 10 Su n ap h a yogas of 2 pl anets

w e sh all get l o x 7 7 0 D u ru dh u r a yogas S i m i larl y th e .
,

1 0 Su n ap h a y ogas of th ree pl a nets wil l give l 0 x 3

3 0 D u r u dh u ra yogas an d th e fiv e Su n ap h a yogas of
4 plan ets w il l g i v e u s 5 x 1 5 D u ru dh u ra yogas S o th at .
,

= 75 70 3 0
th e n u mber of poss i bl e D u ru dh u ra yogas
5 18 0 .

A pe rson born i n a Su n aph a yoga w i ll be possess

5 .

ed o s l f
f u i d pro erty w i l l b e a k i n g or wi ll r ese nt
ac
q re
p
-
e ,
s
ea x i i i )
. . Bib r e! j am/ea . it ?
bl e a k i n g, and w ill be a man o f i n t elli gence, weal t h and
r eno wn .

A perso n born i n an An ap h a yoga w i ll be a m an of

i n flu ence and au thor i ty w i l l be free from d i seases , w il l
,

h ave a control over h i s pass i ons w i l l be of great ren o wn , ,

w i l l be i n t h e enj oyment of al l m a n ner o f pleasu res w i l l ,

wear neat d ress a nd w i l l be free from gr i ef .

6
. A person born i n a D u r u dh u ra yoga w i l l be i n
th e enj oyment of al l m an ner of pleasu res w i l l be possess ,

ed o i weal th an d carriage w i l l be l i beral i n h i s g i ft an d

,

w i ll h ave good s ervants .

A person born i n a K e m adru m a yoga th ou gh h e m ay ,

belon g to a k i ng s fa m i ly w ill be d i rty a ffli cted w i th gr i ef

’
, , ,

will do deeds not su ited to h is r an k i n l i fe w i l l b e poor, ,

will serve u nder oth ers and w i ll be wi cked .

7
. If th e yoga planet be Mars th e person w i l l b e ,

act i ve fon d of figh t wealthy an d w i ll en gage i n

, , ,

d eed s w i thou t thou gh t If th e yoga plan et be Mercu ry ,

.

t h e person will b e sk illed i n work w i ll be of good speech ,

and learned i n th e ar t s ( a ) I f the yoga plan et be J u p i te r,

.

the person w i ll be weal th y an d vi rtu ous w i l l l i ve for ever ,

i n comfort and will be respected by the k i n g If t h e y o ga .

pl anet be Venus th e person w i l l be affli cted w i th se x u al

,

passion wil l be very wealth y an d i n th e enj oymen t of a ll

,

man ner o f pleasu res .

NOT ES .

( )
4 In m usi c,
dance pai nti ng,
& c ,
.

8
. I f th e y oga planet b e Satu rn th e person w i l l ,

enj oy wealth property and servants of oth ers w i ll en gage

, ,

i n various deeds a n d wi l l be th e ch i ef of parti es of m e n

( )
a.
If th e b i rth occu r by d ay th e M oo n wi l l br i ng
,
on
m isery i f sh e occu p y th e v isibl e hem i sphere w i l l ,

br ing on prosperi ty i f sh e occu py the i nvisible hem i sphere

i f th e birth occur by n i ght th e resul ts wil l be th e rev e rs e
,

of t h es e
 Br ihat J ci z a cd
‘
f .
[CH X II I
. .

NO T E S .

( a) If t wo or more planets be yoga pl anets , the effects

described for th em al l w i ll co m e to pass .

( b ) That is i f th e b i rth occu r by n i gh t th e Moon

, ,

will brin g on misery i f sh e occu py th e i nvisi b l e h e m i

,

sph ere an d prosperity i f sh e occu py th e visible h e m isph ere .

9 . If all th e b en efic plan ets ( a ) occupy th e Up ac h aya

places ( 6) from th e Ascendan t at th e ti m e of bi rth a person ,

will be very ri ch and i f they occupy th e U p ac h aya places

f rom t he Moon h e will be m oderately ri ch
,
If two of th e .

pla nets oc cupy th e Up ac h a y a places a person wi ll be ,

m oderately weal th y and i f on e of th e m occu py su ch places ,

h e will possess s m all wealth E ven i f th e person be

born i n other m al efic Yogas ( d) th e present y oga wi ll take
,

e ff ect to the i r exclu s i on

NO T E S .

M ercu ry J upiter and Venu s

,
.

( b) Th e 3 rd, 6t h , 10t h an d 1l t h houses from th e

A scendant .

( cl So th at i f b e n e fic planets occupy th e Up ach ay a

,

places both fro m th e Ascend an t and from th e Moon a ,

person wi ll b e exceed i n gly ri ch ; and i f th e U p ach a ya

places be not so occu pied by any of th e b en e fic planets ,

th e person w ill be poor .

( d ) Su ch as K e m a d r u m a yoga .

( e) Th at i s su ppose
,
a person to be born i n a Ke m a
dru m a yoga an d su ppose th e b en e fic p l anets to occupy t h e
Up ach a ya places fro m th e Ascendan t or th e Moon or both ,

th e person will becom e rich and not poor .

 15 0
'

Bml ‘

z az Jam/id . o
[ n X I V .

( b) T h e S anskri t term for th e wom a n i s P u na r biz u .

Sh e i s said to be a wom an wh o ou t of sexu al passion

, , ,

qu i ts her h usband and m arries a person of h er o w n caste

wh eth er or not sh e may h ave j oi ned i n sexu al u n i on .

3 If th e d ou bl e planets occupyi ng togeth er a si g n

.

of th e Zodi ac at th e tim e of birth be M ars an d M ercu ry ,

th e person wi ll d eal i n roots and th e li ke ( a ) i n oil , i n works ,

of art and wi l l be ski lled i n d uels i f t hey b e Mar s an d

Ju piter th e p e rson will be th e ch i ef of a tow n or
‘

a k i ng or a weal th y Brah m i n ( b) i f t h e v be Mars

,

an d Venu s the person wi ll protect cows w i l l en gage i n

, ,

d u els w i ll be ski lled i n work w ill i n du lge i n sexu al

, ,

u n ion w ith th e wi ves of o ther men an d will be a ga m bler ;

i f they be M ars and S aturn th e pers o n w ill be a ffli cted
,

w i th gr i ef w i ll be a liar and wi ll be d espised by others

, , .

NOT ES .

( ) a Fru i ts flowers bark j u i ce & c

, , , , .

( 6) O r learned accordi ng to anoth er read ing .

4 If th e double planets occu pyi ng t ogethe r a sign of

.

th e Zod i ac at th e ti m e of birth be Mercury and J upi ter ,

th e person wi ll be s k illed i n d ue l s will be fond of m usi c ,

and learn ed i n d an ce i f they be Mercury a n d Venus th e ,

person will be one of good speech and wi l l be a ruler ,

over cou ntr i es and over m e n ; i f th ey be Mercu r y an d

S atur n th e perso n will be ski lled i n deceivi n g others
, ,

an d wi ll rej ec t th e ad vi ce of hi s preceptor ; i f they b e

J upiter and Ven us th e person will b e learned i n some
,

respectable departm en t of kn owled ge wi ll p osses s w ealth , ,

a wi fe and various vi rtues i f th e y be Jupi ter and S atu rn ,

th e pe rson w i l l be a barber a pot man or a cook , .

5 .If the double planets occupy i ng together a si gn

of th e Zod i ac a t t h e tim e of b i rt h be Ven us and Saturn ,

th e p e rso n w i l l b e s h ort s i g h te d w i l l h av e an i nc rease of

-
,
 o n x 1v
. .
] Br ih at w as . 15 1

wealt h throu gh th e fri endsh i p of a you ng woman and ,

w il l be skil led i n writi n g and pai ntin g I n th e case of .

oth er planetary yogas ( a ) t h e e fiec t s described sh al l b e

'

de t ermi ned an d appl ied .

NOT E S .

( ) aTh at is i f th ree or more ,

planets occu py toge t her
a sign of th e Zod iac at th e ti m e of bi rt h th e yoga shall ,

first be spl i t into a n u m ber of doubl e pl anetary yogas an d

th e e ff ects d escri bed i n th i s C ha pter sh all th en be appl i ed .

For exam ple suppose th e fou r pl an ets th e S u n th e

, , ,

Moon Mars and M e rc u r y t o occupy togeth er a si n gle si gn

'

, .

T h i s yo ga can be spl i t i nto si x d oubl e plan etary yogas

as follo w s : th e S u n a n d th e M o on th e Su n ,

an d Mars th e Su n an d Mercu ry
,
th e M oon a nd ,

M ars ,
th e Moon and Mercu r y Mars and M ercu r y ,
.

Th e e ff ects descri bed for each sh al l be d eter m i ned an d

appl ied .

No/es — The followi n g yogas referri n g to th e several

.

grou ps of 2 3 4 5 and 6 pl a nets occu p y i n g together a

, , ,

sin gle si gn of th e Zod iac a t th e ti m e of bi rt h are taken

w ith th ei r e ff ects fro m a work k nown as Jataka Parij ata .

I — O F T W O P LA N E TS
. .

If th e yoga pl anets occup y i n g a s i n gl e si gn b e

( 1 ) T he S u n and th e Moon th e person wi ll be ,

subj ect to th e i n flu ence of wo m en wi ll be skilled i n ,

work an d will be of bri gh t appearan ce .

( 2 ) Th e S u n an d Mars wil l be a stro n g man a ,

-
,

l iar an d si n n er .

( )
3 T h e S u n and M ercury — wi ll be l earned beau ti
, ,

ful stron g an d of fixed vi ews

,
.

( )
4 Th e Su n an d J u p it erfi w i ll be earnest i n work ,
-

wi l l be a favou r i t e wi th t h e ki n g and W il l b e ri c h ,
15 2 Br ih at Jat a ka .
[o n x rv .

Th e S u n a nd Venu s —w i ll acqu i re weal th

( )
5 ,

th ro u gh women w i l l h ave ki nsme n an d e n e m i e s and wi l l

,

b e i n tell i gen t .

T he Sun and Satu rn — w i l l be of dul l u nder

( )
6 ,

s t andi n g and subj ect to h is e nem i es .

The Moon and Mars — wil l be bold and born of a

( )7 ,

h i gh fam il y ; wi ll be v i rtuous wealth y an d p ossessed of ,

good qual i t i es .

—
( 8 ) Th e Moon an d Mercu ry wil l be ch ar i table , ,

l earned i n sciences and possessed of excellent q u alit i es

,
.

( )
9 Th e Moon and J up i ter — wil l protect good an d
,

pious men an d w il l be very i ntel li gent .

T h e Mo o n and Ven us w ill be a s i n n e r an d a

( )
1 0 -
,

m erch ant .

( l 1) T he Moon an d S aturn wi ll possess a bad w i fe ,

-
,

w i l l i ll treat h is fath er a nd wil l be poor

-
.

1
( ) 2 Mars an d Mercu ry — wil l be of good speech an d
,

learned i n m ed i ci n e arts an d s ciences , .

13 ) M ars and Jupi ter — will be of stron g sexu al pas

,

si on will possess e x cellen t q u alities an d wil l be a m ath e

,

m a t i c i an .

M ars and Venu s —wi ll be fond of figh t and of

( 14) ,

th e world an d will b e decei tful

,
.

1
( ) 5 Mars and Satu rn — will be li ti gious fond of
, ,

m u si c a nd of a d ull u n derstandi n g .

( 1 6 ) Mercu r y and Jup i te r —wil l be o f good speech ,

~

beau ti fu l an d ver y ri ch
—
.

( 1 7 ) Mercu r y and Venus W ill be a r ul e r over cou n ,

tri es and over m en

—
.

( 1 8 ) M e rcu r y and Satu rn w il l be deceitful a nd wil l

, ,

n o t be open to th e ad vi ce of h is preceptor .

1
( )9 J u piter and Venu s — wil l be of bri ght appear ,

ance a favou ri te with t he kin g will be very i ntel li gent

, ,

and s killed i n work .

15 4 Bri ke t Jam/t a.
[
o n KW .

( 1 1) T h e S un , Mercu ry an d Ven u s, —
w i l l be of soft
body w i l l be learned famous and will l ive i n c o m
, ,

fort .

- w i ll
( )
1 2 Th e S u n Mercury and S atu rn be with
—
, ,

o u t k insme n an d poor wil l hate m ank i nd a n d will be of

v i c i ous h ab i ts .

( )1 3 T he S u n Ju p i ter an, d Ven u s — w i 11 posses s a ,

good w ife an d ch ild ren will b e very i n telli ge n t wi ll su ff e r

‘

, ,

from d i seases of th e eye an d w ill b e ri ch .

( ) T S i —
1 4 h e u n J p
u t er ,
and Satu rn wi ll be fearless , ,

w i ll h e l iked by th e k i n g an d will be of qu iet an d excel le n t

d i spos i t ion .

—
i

( )1 5 T h e S un Venus an d
,
S atu rn wil 1 be o f bad ,

reputation an d wi l l be h au gh ty a nd i nsol e nt .

1
( ) 6 T he Mo o n Mars a nd M ercu
, r y — wil l b e gl u t
tonou s wi ll be add i cted to wi cked deeds and wi l l abuse
,

o th er people .

( 1 7 ) T h e Moon Mars and J up

,
it er — wil l be of an gr y
,

speech w i ll be of stron g sexu al passion an d wil l be

,

beau t i ful .

( 1 8 ) Th e M oon Mars a nd Ven us wil l be of bad

, ,
-

condu ct will h ave n o sons an d will be fond of t ravels

,
.

( 19 ) Th e Moon M ars and Satu

,
rn — wil l be vi rtuous ,

and wealth y wi l l h ave a bad wi fe and will be l iti gi ou s

, .

( 2 0) Th e M oon Mercury an d J upi ter , wi ll be ,

-

ch ari table and le arned i n sciences will protec t good an d ,

p
i ous m en an d wil l be of good speech .

( 2 1 ) T he Moon Mercu ry and , Ve nu s —wi ll be ,

l earned will be add i cted to l o w deeds an d will h av e

,

n u merou s servants .

Th e Moon Mercury and Satu rn —W il l b e , ,

l i beral i n gift wi ll be respected by th e ki n g and will be

,

possessed of good qu al iti es .

T he Moo n , J up i t er a nd Ve nus w i 11 be — ,
CH XIV ] E r i ka! J ci t a ka
‘
. . .

i ntel ligent w il l h av e good sons a nd w ill be sk ill ed i n

,

works of art .

2
( ) 4 T h e Moon J upiter an d Saturn — w ill be l earned
,

i n sciences w i l l be fond of o l d wome n a n d will be as

,

h appy as a k ing .

( )2 5 T h e Moon Venus an d S atu rn —w il l be

, ,

learned i n th e Vedas w i l l be t h e ki ng s ch apla i n an d w i ll

,
’

h e l iked b y al l people .

( )2 6 Mars Mercu ry and, J u p i ter — w i l l be fo n d of ,

m usi c of Vedas of l i teratu re and of d ra m a

, , .

( 2 7 ) M ars Merc u ry and Ven ,us - w il l be of de fe c ,

ti ve organs will b e bor n of a bad family and w ill be of

,

settle d v i ews .

( 2 8 ) Mars M ercu ry and Satu rn ,

wi ll serve u nder ,
-

oth er m en w il l su ffe r fro m d i seases of th e ey e an d w i ll b e

,

fond of travels .

( )
2 9 Mars J u pi te r an d Venus ,
— w i ll h e l i ked by the ,

ki n g wil l h ave good sons and wil l l i ve i n com fort

, , .

( )3 0 Mars J upiter a nd S aturn

,
— wil l be of th i n ,

body w ith out com fort respectable an d gi ven u p to a

, ,

v icious cou rse of l i fe .

( 3 1) M ars Ven u s an d S atu rn , w i l l h ave bad sons ,

-

and will ever be of pu re m i nd .

( 3 2 ) Mercury J upi ter and Ven us , w i ll conqu er ,

-

o v er h is ene m ie s and wi ll be of w id e spread fa m e -

.

( 3 3 ) Merc u ry J u p it e r and S atu rn — ,wi ll li v e i n great ,

c o m fort will be weal thy and will be a ttach ed to h i s wi fe

, .

— w i11 tel l lies

( )3 4 Mercu r y Ven us and Satu rn , , .

( 3 5 ) J upit e r Ven u s an d Satu r n , will be of clear ,

-

u nderstand i n g and wil l be h appy and famou s .

 15 6 3 7 172 4 1 M ia/i d .
[C H X IV . .

I II —OF F O UR P L AN E TS
. .

Agai n i f th e yoga planets occupy i n g to g et h er a s i gn

,
’

of th e Zod iac at th e t i me of birth be

( 1 ) Th e S u n th e Moon
,
Mars and M ercury , th e ,

pe rson wi ll be deceitful sk i lled i n t h e art of wr i t i n g an d

,
0

w i ll s u ff er from d i seases .

( 2 ) T h e S u n th e Moon M ars and J u pi ter wi ll be

, , ,
-

r i ch , famous i ntelli gent an d l iked by th e k i n g and w i l l be

,

free from diseases an d fro m gr i ef .

( 3 ) T h e S un th e ,Moon Mars an d Ven

,
u s — w ill h ave ,

a w i fe and ch i ldren wi ll b e learned a m oderate eate r

, , ,

h appy skilled i n work and merci fu l

,
.

4
( ) T h e Sun th e
,
M o o n M ars and S atu , rn — will ,

w i l l be fon d of trave l s
'

s ufie r from d i seases of th e eye ,

an d of prosti tutes a nd w i l l be poor .

( 5 ) T h e S un th e,
Moon M ercu ry a n d,
J upi ter w i l l ,
-

h ave e i gh t sons w il l be ri ch and possessed of good qu a l i

,

t i es w il l be famous powerful an d l ib eral i n gift

, .

( ) 6 T h e Su n th e , M oon M ercu ry an
, d Ven us — w i ll ,

b e of d efect i ve organ s an d of good speech .

( )7 T h e Su n , th e M oon Mercu ry and ,

S atu r n — w ill ,

be poor and u n grateful .

( )
8 T h e S u n th e, Moon J u p i ter and ,
Ven us ,
— w i ll be
p ossessed of many good qu ali ties w i ll com m i t adulter ,
y
wi th oth er wo m en w il l b e i ntel l i ge n t and w il l s u ff er from
,

d iseases of th e eye .

( )9 Th e S u n th e Moo
, n J u p i t e r an d ,Sat ur n — w i l l ,

b e fon d of travels wil l be ri ch i ntelli gen t an d att ach ed to

, ,

p rosti tutes .

( )1 0 Th e S un th e Moon, Venu s and Satu

, rn — wi l l ,

be of defect i ve l imbs w il l be ti m id wi ll fo l lo w gi rls an d

, ,

w i ll be fond of wealth and m eal s .

( 1 1 ) T h e Sun M ars M ercu r y a n d Ju pi ter —w il l b e

, , ,

s tron g, w i l l get i n t o di ffi c u lt i es w i ll b e m arr i ed an d r i ch ,

,
 Bri h at James [OH . X IV .

15 8
.

T h e M
M ars M ercury an d S aturn wi ll -

( ) 3
‘

2
‘
oo n , ,
,

w il l be bol d and wi ll h av e several

h ave doubl e parents ,

w i ves and ch i ldren

—
.

Th e M oon M ars J u piter and Ven us wil l do

( )
2 4 , ,
,

wil l i n dulge i n sleep an d wil l be fond of

s i nfu l deeds ,

m on ey
—
.

Th e Moon M ars J u piter an d Saturn wi ll be

( )
2 5 , ,

of firm v i ews ,
bold h appy ,
and lear n ed .

—
Th e Moon Mars V en u s and S at u rn w i ll be
( 2 6) , ,
,

w il l have n o sons wil l be l earned i n th e

of bad cond u ct ,
’
,

Vedas or w i ll b e t h e k i ng s p riest .

M ercu ry Ju pi ter and Ven u s — w i ll

( )
2 7 T h e Moon , , ,

r i ch at t ach ed to h i s ki ns m en an d v i rtuous .

be very
—
,

i l 1
’

T he Moon M ercury J u pi ter and Sat u r n w

2
( ) 8 ,
, ,

respected by th e k in g an d will
be l i beral i n gi fts w il l b
,
e
w ill be wealthy and attach ed to h i s
l iv e i n great comfort ,

w i fe .

Mercury Venus and S atu rn — wi ll

( 2 9 ) T h e M oon , ,
,

peopl e and wil l b e fon d of th e w ives of

be h ated by th e
oth er m en .

J upiter Ven u s an d S atu rn — w i ll

( )3 0 T h e Moon , ,
,

sons wil l not be earnest i n work a nd w i l l be

be w ith ou t ,

w i th ou t m ercy .

M ars M ercury J upiter a nd Venu s wi ll be -

( 3 1) , ,
,

ri ch an d despi sed by th e p eople .

J u pi ter an d Sat u rn — w il l
( 3 2 ) Mars M ercury
,
, ,

su ff er fro m d i seases and w ill be poor .

Ve nu s d Satu rn — wil l be of
(3 ) 3 M ars Mercu ,
ry an
, ,

wil l serve u nder oth er m en will tel l l ie s

defecti ve l imbs
,
,

and w i l l h ave bad sons .

J u pi ter Ven us an d Sat u rn — wi ll h e l iked

(3 )4 M ars , , ,

k i n w i ll be of th i n body wi ll h ave bad sons an d

by t e h g ,
,

u n derstand i ng
will be of cl ear
.
CH X I V
. .
] Br z iz a t M i
'

a /2 d . 15 9

3 5) Merc ury J upi ter Ven us and Satu rn

, , ,
- wi l l be
ver y r ic h , lea rned , a nd of goo d co nd u c t .

IV .
—
O F FIV E P L A N E T S .

Agai n i f th e yoga plane ts occupy i n g togeth er a s i g n

,

of th e Zodi ac at th e ti m e of bi rth be
J

( 1 ) T h e S un th e Moon Mars Mercu ry and

, , ,

Ju p i te r th e person w i l l en ga ge i n fi gh t wil l be d ece i tfu l

, ,

and skilled i n work .

( 2 ) Th e S un th e Moon Mars Mercu ry an d Ven u s

, , , ,

—will be devoid of ch arit y w i l l be earnest i n work wil l be , ,

wi th ou t ki ns m e n and wil l work for oth er m en .

( 3 ) The Su n t h e Moon Mars Mercur y and S at ur n

, , , ,

wi ll be of sh ort l i fe wil l be fo n d o f earni n g m on ey and

,

w i th ou t w i fe and ch i ld ren .

( 4) The S u n the Moon Mars J upi ter and Ven us

, , , ,

wi ll del igh t i n a n n oyi n g oth er men wi l l be rej ected b y ,

h i s parents a n d ki n s m en and wi ll be of d efective eyes .

( 5 ) T he S un th e Moon Mars Ju pi ter and Satu rn

, , , ,

w il l be avari ciou s and will be a ffl icte d wi th gr i ef ow i n g to

separatio n fro m h i s w i fe .

( 6)The S un th e Moon Mars Ven u s an d S atu rn

, , , ,

wi ll be wealth y po w erful abl e and dirty and wil l covet

, ,

th e w ives of oth er m en .

( 7 ) The S un th e Moon M ercu ry Ju p i ter and

, , ,

Venus will be a m i n iste r wi ll be ri ch successfu l

,
-
, , ,

fa m ous and powe rfu l and wi ll also be a m agi strate .

( ) Th e Sun th e Moon Mercury J u piter an d

8 , , ,

Satu rn wi l l depend on oth er m e n for m eals wil l be t i m id

,
-
, ,

will co m m i t si ns and w il l en gage i n fearfu l deeds .

( 9 ) T h e S un th e Moon Mercu ry Venu s and

—
, , ,

S at urn ,
w i ll be poor tall , wi thou t s on s a
,nd s i c kl y ,
160 3 7 2 72 4
1! J ci/ a é d .
[C H . X IV .

( )
1 0 T h e Su n th e Moon J up i ter Ven us and
, , ,

Sa t urn - w i l l be w ithou t a wi fe of good sp eech w i l l hav e

, , ,

e nem i es w i ll be fearle s s and l earned i n j ugglery

,
.

( 11) T h e Su n Mars Mercury Jup i ter an d Ven u s

, , , ,

will b e w i thou t gr i ef a good frien d a nd m aster of hors es

,

an d covet th e w i ves of ot h er m en .

( 12 ) T h e S un Mars Me rc u ry J u p i t er and Satu rn

, , , ,

w i l l beg h i s meal s wi l l be di rty and dressed i n ragged

,

c l othes .

( 13 ) T h e S un Mars Mercu ry Ven us and S aturn

, , , ,

w i ll be an i mportant pe rson and w i ll be a ffl i cted wi th gr i ef ,

fear, d i sease an d h u nger .

( 1 4) Th e S u n Mars J u piter Ven u s and S a tu rn

, , , ,

w i l l be respected everywh ere wil l be rich w i l l b e bl in d , ,

an d w i l l h ave fri end s and ki nsmen .

( 15 ) Th e S u n Mercu ry J u pite r Ve nu s and S atu r n

—
, , , ,

w i ll possess a know l ed ge o f Al m a will d o deeds accept ,

a ble to D evas an d t o h i s precep tors an d w i l l be learn ed

i n sc i ences .

( 1 6) T h e Moon Mars Mercu ry Ju piter an d Venu s

, , , ,

w i ll be of a m i l d dispos i tion h app y ri ch powerful and , , ,

l earned .

( )1 7 Th e Moon Mars M erc

,
u r y J u p i t e r and S atu rn
, , ,

-
w il l be ski ll ed i n E n gineering wi ll be of stron g phy ,

si qu e an d w i ll be fa m ous fo r h i s skill i n work .

( 18 ) Th e Moon Mars Mercu ry Venus and S atu rn

—will h ave a goo d wi fe and sons wi ll be i ntelli gent and
, , , ,

w i l l l i ve i n com fort .

( 19 ) T h e Moon Mars Ju pi ter Venu s an d S atu rn

, , , ,

w i l l work for oth er men will be poor of dirty appearan ce

, , ,

i g noran t an d addi cted t o th ievi n g .

( 2 0) Th e Moon Mercu r y Ju pi ter Ven us and Satu rn

, , , ,

w i l l be respected i n al l lan ds will be of defecti v e ,

li mbs wil l b e a m i niste r and wi l l re sem b l e a king

,
.
 Bi ket
r J ci t akci .
[
e m x v

C H AP T E R xv .

On Ascet ic Yogas .

1 . A person bo rn wh en fou r or ( ) powerful ( b ) m ore a

plane t s occupy a si n gl e si gn of th e Zod iac beco m es an

ascet i c of th e Sakya Aj i vik a B h ik s h u k a V ri ddh a s rav a k a
, , , ,

C hakra Nir gr an dh a o r V an yasa n a class accord i n g as th e

,

m ost powerfu l planet of t h e grou p i s Mars Mercu ry , ,

J up i ter th e Moon Ven us Sat u r n or th e S u n ( c ) If su ch

, , , .

powerfu l pl anet be on e th at h as su ffered d efe at i n con

j u nct i on a t th e ti me of bi rth th e asceti c will after a t i m e
, , ,

revert to h i s prev iou s condition of l i fe .

N OT ES .

( 4) Th at i s 5 6 or 7 pl anets , .

( b) I f n o planet be powerfu l th ere w ill be n o P ravra ,

jya ( asceti c yoga ) .

( ) T h e ascet i c l i fe of th e m ost powerfu l pl an et w il l

c

be embra ced by th e person fi rst th en th at o f th e pla n et ,

n ext i n power an d so on Th e first ch an ge o f l i fe wi ll

.

occu r i n th e Dasa an d An t ar dasa p eri od of th e m ost

powerful planet ; th e su cceed i n g c h a n g e s wi ll occu r i n th e
An t ardasa periods of th e respect ive planets I f th e y oga .

plan et be a si n gle po werfu l pl anet wh i ch does not s u fle r

d efeat i n c onj uncti on th e asceti c l i fe assu m ed will
,

conti nu e t ill death We sh al l now expl ai n th e ter m s

.

re ferri n g t o t h e several cl asses of asceti cs .

(l ) Sakya z—A Buddh ist ascetic dressed i n red robes .

(2 ) Aj i v ik a z—A Jai n a asceti c ; th e term i n clu des

Va i sh nava asceti cs as well .

(3 ) Bh ik sh u k a z—ABrah m an asceti c who abandon s

h is h ou se and fam ily and s u bsi sts en tirely on al m s .

( 4) V ri ddh as rav ak a —known as K apali k a, a fol low er

of Si va .
CH X V ] . ; Bi h
r at Jdt a ké . 163

(5) C h ak ra z— k n o w n as C h ak radh ara, an asce t i c

wh o wears a d iscu s .

( 6) N i rg ra n dh a —a naked ascet i c .

(7) V a n y as an a — an asceti c wh o subs i sts o n th e

roots an d fru its of t h e fores t and i s en gaged i n D i v i n e
m ed i tati on .

2 I f th e m ost powerfu l yoga pl anet be a n Astan

.

gata planet (a ) a per s o n w ill not bec o m e a D eek s h i t a ( b)

,

bu t wi ll be attach ed to persons who are su ch Agai n i f .

,

th e po w erfu l planet wh ich su ff ers d efeat i n conj u nction

be aspected by other plane ts a person will not b e come a ,

D ee k s h it a but will possess a stron g desi re to becom e

0 11 6 .

NO T E S .

Th is h as al ready bee n expla i ned ( ai de N ot e s to

(a)
Stanza 2 C h ,
.

( b) Th at i s one of th e holy order of m e n

, .

( 6 ) If n ot aspected h e wil l becom e one a n d after a

, ,

ti m e revert t o h is for m e r condi tion of l ife as stated i n th e

,

last Stanza .

NB Stanzas l an d 2 shou ld be read togeth er

. .
-
.

th e lord of th e s ign occu pied by th e Moon as

3 . If
peets Satu rn and be n ot asp ected by an y oth er planet ( a ) ,

or i f Sat urn ( b ) aspect th e l ord of th e si g n occupi ed by

th e Moon when such l ord i s n ot powerful ( c) a person wi l l
beco m e an asceti c A gai n i f th e M oon occu p y t h e Drek
.
,
~

kan a of S atu r n an d th e Na v am sa of Satu rn or Mars and

be aspected by Satu rn ( d ) a person wi ll beco m e an ,

asceti c
NO T E S
( ) a T he Pra v raj ya wil l be that of su ch lord or Satu rn
wh ich ever i s po w erful .

( b) When powerfu l accord i n g to th e C om m e nta t or .

 Bf ’

r z z at M ia /id .
[C H X VI
. .

( c) Th e w i ll be that of Satu rn
P rav raj y a .

( d ) An d not aspected by any oth er pl anet .

( e) T h e as cet i c li fe will be th at d escr ibed for Sa t urn .

4 .A person born wh en Ju p i ter th e Moon an d t he ,

ri si n g s i gn are aspected by Satu rn wh e n J u piter occu pies

,

th e 9 t h h ouse from th e Ascend an t an d u nd er on e of th e

Raj a yogas becom es a sci enti fic Au th or (a) A gai n a .
,

person born wh e n Satu rn occu pies t h e 9 t h h ouse from th e

A scendant an d i s not aspected by oth er planets and u nder a
Raj a yoga w i l l becom e both an em peror an d an asce t i c
NOT E S
( )
a If th e h oroscope contai n a Raj a yoga and a n
a scet i c yoga th e form er wi ll not take e ffect but th e l atter
, ,

will such for i nstan ce as th e l i ves of Varab a M ih i ra

, ,

Kan ada Buddh a Pa n ch as ik h a Brahm a Gu pta and others

, ,
-
.

If th e h oroscop e contai n t wo Raj a yogas and a n asceti c

yoga th e pe rson wil l beco m e a ki ng as w ell as a sc i enti fic
Au th or —s uch as Janaka, K a sir aj a lS uch i dh w aj a an d
,

oth ers .

(6) If th e horoscope conta i n n o Raj a yogas b u t onl y

th e asceti c yogas d escribed i n th e Text th e per son w i l l b e ,

com e an asceti c .

E li n or r oonv s s s s es (m m

C HAP T E R X VI .

On Th e Nak sh at ra s
OR

Th e Moon i n Th e Ast er i sm s .

1 . Aperson born wh en
th e Moon passes th rou gh th e
aster i sm of Asw i ni wil l be fon d of orna m ents will be of ,

fin e appearance w ill be p opular, skilled i n w ork an d in

,

t el l ig en t .
166 Bit r a: J at a ka .
[CH X vi .

A person born when th e Moon passes th rou gh th e

asteris m of P P h al g u n i w i l l be of s w eet speech w i l l be
.
,

liberal i n h i s gi fts of fin e a pp earan c e of wanderin g h abits

,
'

and wil l serve u nder ki n gs .

7. A person bor n whe n th e Moon passes th rou gh th e

asteris m of U P h al g u n i wi ll be generall y l iked wi ll earn
.
,

money by h i s l earn in g an d wi ll l i ve i n co m fort .

A person born wh e n th e M oon passes throu gh th e

asterism of Hasta wil l be o f acti v e h abi ts ful l of re so u r ,

ces s h amel ess m erci less an d a t h ief a n d a dru nkard

, , .

8. A person born when th e Moo n pass es throu g h

th e asterism of C h ittra wi l l wear cloth s and flowers of
var i ous colou rs an d w il l h ave bea uti fu l eyes an d li m bs .

A perso n bor n when the Moon passes th roug h th e

asteris m of S wat i wi ll be of a mild and qu iet n at u re wil l ,

con trol h i s passion wil l be sk illed i n trade w ill be m erci

, ,

fu l , ( a ) of sweet speech an d disposed to do acts of ch ari ty .

NO T E S .

( 4 ) U nabl e to bear th i rs t accord i n g to anoth er

r ead i n g .

9. A perso n born wh en th e M oon passes through

t h e ast e rism of V i s akh a w il l be j ealous of another s pros
’

p e r i t y,
wil l be a n i ggard of,
bri gh t appearance of d isti n,
ct
speech , ( a ) skilled i n earni ng m on e y and d isposed t o
b ri n g abou t qu arrels amon g m e n .

A person born w hen th e Moon passes th rough t h e

ast e ri s m of A n u r a dh a wi ll be ri ch will l i v e i n forei g n
,

l an ds will be u nable to bear h u n ger a nd disposed t o

,

wand er fro m p l ace to pl ace .

NOT ES .

( )
4 W il l be ski l l ed i n earn in g money accord ing t o

a noth er readi n g .

10 . A person born wh en th e Moo n p asses th rou gh

t h e as t eris m of J yes h t a w ill h ave few frien ds w i ll be ,

v e ry cheerful v i rtuous an d of i rasc i b le t emper

, , .
 CH . x vr] . Br ike t J a t a ka
‘ ‘

. 16 7

A pe rson bo rn when th e Moon p asses th rou gh th e

asteri sm of M ool a wi ll be h au gh ty ri ch h app y not d is , , ,

po sed to i nj u re oth er m en of firm vi ews an d wi l l l ive i n ,

l u xu ry .

11 A perso n born wh en th e Moon passes th ro ugh

.

th e asteris m of P As h adh a wil l h ave an agreeabl e w i fe

. ,

w il l be prou d a n d attach ed to fri end s .

A person b o rn wh en th e Moo n passes th rou gh th e

asteris m of U As h adh a will be obedie nt wi l l be learned
.
,

i n th e rules of v i rtu e wil l possess m an y fri ends wi ll be

, ,

grateful a n d retu rn favours recei ved and will be gen erally

l iked .

12 Aperson born wh en the Moon passes th rou gh

.

th e asteri s m of S ravan a wil l be prosperou s an d learned ,

wi ll h ave a l iberal m in ded wi fe w i ll be rich and of wid e

-
, ,

spread fam e .

A person born wh e n th e Moon passes th rou gh th e

asteris m of D h a n i sh t a wi ll be liberal i n gi fts ri ch valian t , , ,

fon d of m usi c and wil l be a ni ggard .

13 A person born when the Moon passes th rou gh

.

th e asteris m of Sat ab h is h ak w i ll be h arsh i n h i s speech ,

will be tru th ful wil l su ffe r grie f wil l conqu er h is ene m i es

, , ,

wil l t houghtl essly en gage i n work and wi ll be of i nd e

pe nden t ways .

A person born wh en th e M oon passes th rou gh th e as

t er is m of P B h ad ra p a da w il l su ff er fro m gri ef wi ll pl ace
.
,

h is weal th at th e d isposal of h i s wi fe wi ll be of d isti nct ,

speech an d wil l be a n i ggard .

NO T ES .

( 0 ) O r w il l be sk il led i n earn i n g money .

14 A person born wh en th e Moon passes th rou gh

.

t h e asteris m of U B h a dr a p a da wi l l be an abl e speaker

.

will be h appy will possess ch i ld ren and grand ch ildre n

,
-
,
wi ll conquer h is enem ies a nd w i ll be vi rtuo us .
 Br iko t J at a ka [ n x vn
o .

A person bor n when t h e Moon p asses th rough t h e

'

asteris m o f Re v at i wil l possess p erfe c t l im b s wil l h e liked ,

by al l people val i ant i n figh t will n ever covet the

, ,

property of other men a nd wil l b e rich .

NOT E S .

T h e e ff ects d escribed above w i l l ful ly com e to pas s

only i f t h e Moo n be po werfu l .

C HAP T E R X VII .

On t h e Moon i n t h e Sev er a l Sign s of

t h e Z odi a c .

1 A person b o r n wi th th e Moon i n sign Ari es will

.

h ave rou n d red e yes W l l l be fo n d of vegetabl e food an d

-
,

wi ll eat h ot m eal s bu t i n a m oderate degree ; wi ll be of a

qu ickly relen ti n g n atu re wi l l be fon d of travels and of
,

sexu al u n i on w ill be o f weak knees ; w ill possess n o

p er m anent weal th ; wi l l be fon d of figh t an d of wo m en ;
will b e ski ll e d i n s e rvi n g u n der o ther m e n wil l h ave d i s
fi gure d nai ls and a wou nded h ead wi ll be h au gh ty wi l l ,

be t h eeldest of hi s broth ers wil l h ave lines i n h i s h and of

th e sha p e of th e weapon k nown as S a kt i ; wi l l be fic kl e
m i nded an d wi ll be afraid of water .

2 : Aperson born with th e M c c u i n sign T au rus wi ll

i

be of fine appearance a n d of beau ti ful gai t ; will possess

.

large th igh s and face wil l possess m arks on h i s back face ,

or sid es w ill be l iberal i n h is gi fts ; will bear m isfortu nes

will possess great i n fluen ce and au th ori t y will h ave a
l arge h u m p on th e n eck ; wil l h ave dau gh ters ; will su ff e r
from ph leg mati c a ff ections ; will be separated fro m h i s
ki ns men weal t h a n d sons w il l be li ked by al l men
,
,

will be of p atie nt n atu re wil l be a great eater ; wi l l be

fond of wo m en will be at tached to h is frie nd s and wi ll be ‘

h appy b oth i n middle a ge and ol d age ( a ) .

17 0 Br i h at J a ta lz al
‘

.
[CH . XVI I .

an d i ntell i gen t , wi ll be fond of sexu al u n ion ; enj oy wi ll

t h e h ou se an d p r operty of oth er men wi l l l i ve i n forei gn
lands w il l be of sweet speec h an d will h ave d au gh t ers
an d very few son s .

H
4. A p erson born wi th th e Moo n i n si gn L i bra wi ll
r es pect t h e D evas Brah m ins and h ol y m e n wi l l be l n
, ,

t e l l i g e n t ( a ) wil l never covet t h e pro p e r ty o f oth e r m en

wil l be learned i n th e Vedas wil l be subj ect to th e
i n fluen ce of wom e n ; wil l be tal l wi ll h ave a ra i sed n ose ;
wi l l b e of t hi n and d efective l i m bs an d fond of trav el s
w ill b e ri ch w ill be a trad er ; wil l bear th e na m e of a
Deva cou pled w i th a n excellen t su rn am e granted by a
bod y of l ear ned m e n ; wi ll be sickl y will protect h i s
family a n d wil l b e d isgraced a nd rej ected by h is k i ns m en
, .

NO T E S .

( a Tfie S a n s / 3
7 2 2 fe r / u
wh i ch is i
u sed n i s F r ag / 1 a
terpre ted t o mean a perso n of v ery acute i ntelli gen ce
and o n e that p ossesses a k nowled ge o f th e cu rrent and
fu tu re e ven ts .

8 .A person born w i th th e Mo on i n si gn S corpio will

h ave broad eyes a broad breast an d rou n d shan ks th igh s
, ,

an d k nees wi ll be separated fro m h i s paren ts and p re c e p

tors ; will be a ffli cted w i th d ise ases wh en y ou n g will be
respected by th e k i ng s fa m ily ; will be of brown colou r ;
’

wi ll not be of a strai gh tforward natu re ; wil l h av e l ines i n

h i s h an d and feet of th e shape of th e fish th e V aj ra y u dh a ,

or a bi rd a nd w ill en deavor t o con cea l h i s si n s .

9 .A person born with th e Moo n i n si gn Sagi ttari

wil l h ave a lon g face an d neck wil l i nh erit h i s father s
’

property ; w i ll be l ibera l i n h i s gi ft wi l l be a l iterary

au thor wi ll be powerful and s k i lled i n speech ; wi ll h ave
l arge teeth ears l i ps and n ose W i ll en g age i n n u m erou s
, , ,

w orks will be ski lled i n fin e arts wil l h ave i nd isti nct

sh ou l ders disfi gu red n ail s and large arm s wi ll be o f a
,
a
CH X Vl l
. .
] Bih r at 17 1

d eep an d i n ven tive i n tellect wi ll be a man of ri gh t u nder

,

st and in g ; wi l l h ate his ki ns m en will ne ver yield to com

pulsion bu t only to ki nd treatmen t .

10 .A person born wi th th e Moon i n si g n C apricorn

w i ll be ever attach ed to h is wi fe a nd ch il dr e n ; wil l d o
d eeds of vi rt u e for ou tward sh ow ; wi ll h av e weak lower
li m bs good eyes and a th i n waist ; wi ll readi l y u nder
,
a

sta nd what i s spo ke n wi ll be l iked by a l l and slow at

work will not bear cold will be o f a wanderin g n at u re ,
l i b eral or powerfu l an d a l it e rary au th o r ; w il l be a n i g
gard an d wi ll be attached to old wo m e n of l o w ca s te
will be sha m el ess and m e rci less .

l l .A p erson born wi th th e Moon i n si g n Aqu ar i u s

w i l l h ave a neck l ike th at of th e ca m el a body covered ,

w ith m uscl es rou gh and covered w i t h h ai r ; wi ll be ta ll

,

w ill hav e large feet th i g h s back buttocks face an d

, , , ,

l owe r belly wi l l be d eaf ; will be attach ed to th e wi ves

and property o f oth e r men and do w i cked deed s wil l ri s e
an d fal l by tu rns w i ll be fond of flo w ers an d perfu mes ;
and wi ll be attach e d to friend s and w i ll wal k w i thout
feel in g ti red .

12 . A
person bor n w i th th e Moon i n si gn P isces
wi ll be a deal er i n th e prod u ce of th e sea and enj oy th e
property of oth er m en wi l l be fond of h is w i fe and cloth es
w il l h ave perfect l i mbs a bri gh t bod y , lon g n ose an d
,

l arge h ead , wi l l pu t h is ene m ies to dis g race, wil l be sub

j ce t to th e i n fluence of wo m en wi l l h ave be auti fu l ,

eyes , and wil l be fai r ; w ill enj oy h i dden t reasu re ; will be

rich , an d learned .

13 I f at th e ti m e of bi rth of a person th e Moon th e

.
, , ,

si gn occu pi ed by the Moon a nd th e lord of su ch si g n b e

al l powe rful , th e e ff ects described i n thi s chapter wil l ful ly
come to pas s ( a ) ; th e sa m e re m ark appl ies to p lan ets oth e r
t h an th e Moon
 17 2 B ih a t
r M ia /ref
.
[CH Kv.l I l .

NO T E S

( ) I f two
a of th e th ree be powerful th e e ffects ,

wi ll come to pass i m perfectly i f o n l y one of th e th ree

be powerful th ey will co m e to pass sti l l m ore i m perfe ct
,

l y an d i f 1i o u e of t h e th ree be po w erful th e e ffe cts w i ll

‘

fai r

( b ) T h i s refers to th e n ext ch apter i n which th e

A u th or descri bes th e e ff ects of th e vari ous plan e ts occu py
i n g th e seve ra l si gns of the Zod i ac at th e ti me of birth .

C H A PTE R x vr
g .

On t h e Su n , Ma r s r Plan et s
in t h e s ev er 0 Z od i ac .

lA per
. i n Ari es
bu t n o t i n
it s exaltat i on degree of wi de spread fa m e abi l
-
,

ty of wan d eri n g 11a possessed of sm al l wealth an d

wi ll carry weapons .

A perso n born with th e S u n i n si gn Tau rus will d ea l

i n cloth es perfu mes and oth e r a rti cles w i ll h ate wo me n
, ,

a n d w i ll be skilled i n m usi c vocal and i nstru m en tal

, .

No r ss

( a) A person b 1 th e S u n 1 11 th e e xal ta t i o n

degree will be very r i c re m ai n for eve r i n a place ,

w i l l h ave servant s carry i n g t ar ni , wi l l be of g reat fam e

s .

an d ab i l i ty .

2 A person born w i th th e S u n i n Si gn Gem i n i w i l l

.

be l ea rned i n grammar , wi ll be an Astrologer and w i ll b e

r ic l 1.

A perso n b o rn th e Stl n in C an cer wi l l be 1 m

w ith
d epend en t and fie rce, poor, will d o th e wor k of oth er
‘

e op l e and W il l s u ff er 11 0 m th e fa t i u e of foot j ourney

p g
-
.
174 Bih r at Ja t a ka
‘ ‘

.
[C H . X VII I .

5 A person bor n wi th Mars i n si gn Aries o r Scorp i o

.

w i ll be respected by th e k i n g w i ll be of a wand eri n g ,

n atu re wi ll be a co m m ander of armi es a trader wi ll be

, , ,

ri ch wi l l h ave a bod y m arke d w i th w ou nds w i ll be a

, ,

th ief and w ill b e i n th e enj oy men t o f th e pl e asu res of t h e

se nses .

A person bor n w i th Mars i n si gn Tau rus or L i bra

w i ll be subj ect to th e i n fluen ce of w o m en w i ll n ot be ,

ope n to th e ad vi ce of fri e nds w i ll be fond of t he w i ves of

,

other m e n wil l be learned i n th e ga m es o f m agi c will

, ,

ad orn h i s person w ill be of a ti m id n atu re and w il l h ave

,

a rou gh body .

6 A person born with M ars i n s i gn G e min i or V i rgo

.

w i l l be of bri gh t appeara n ce will have sons and n o ,

fri end s w i ll h el p others , wi ll be ski lled i n m usi c and

,

fi gh t wil l be a n i ggard an d will b e fe arless and of a

, ,

begg i n g n ature .

Ap ers o n bor n w i t h M ars i n si g n C ance r will be

ri ch , wi ll cross seas an d e arn weal th , wi l l be i n telli ge nt ,
w i ll be of d efect i ve l i m bs a n d w il l be w icked .

7 A person born w i t h M ars i n sign Leo wi ll be

.

poor wi ll patiently bea r a fflict i ons wi ll wan der i n th e

, ,

forests, w il l be fearl ess an d wi ll h ave fe w w i ves an d

ch i ldren .

A person b orn w i th M ars i n s i gn S agi ttar i or P i sces

wi l l h ave man y ene m i es wi ll be th e kin g s m i ni ste r w ill
’
, ,

b e of wid e spre ad fame wil l be fearless an d w ill h av e

-
,

v ery few ch il dren .

A person born w ith M ars i n s i gn Aq uar i u s w i l l e v e r

su ffer grief, wi l l be poor, will wander fro m place to p l ace ,
wi l l be a l iar, w i ll be i ndependen t a nd w i cked .

A person born wi th Mars in si gn C apr i corn w i l l b e

Ve ry rich w il l h ave m any sons and wi l l be a king or w il l
,

res e mble a ki n g .
CH . X vlI l .
] Br ih a t J dt a lz a’ . 17 5

8A person born w i th Mercu ry i n si gn Ari es or

.

Scorp i o will be fond of gambl in g of ru n n in g i nto debt , ,

an d of l i quor w il l be a n atheist wi ll argu e agai nst th e ,

sp i r i t of th e Sastras wil l be a th i ef w i ll be poor will

, , ,

h ave a m ean w i fe wi ll be d ecei tful w i ll b e a l i ar and wil l

, ,

swerve from th e path of rect i tu de .

A person born wi t h Mercu ry i n si gn Tau rus or L i bra

wi ll be a preach er wi ll h ave m any sons and w i ves wi ll
, ,

ever be engaged i n earn i ng m on ey wil l be l i beral i n g i ft ,

a nd will respect h i s preceptor ( a ) .

NO T E S .

( a ) A n d parents accord i n g to t h e C om mentator ,

.

9 A p e rson born with M ercu ry i n si gn G em in i wi l l

.

be boastful will be l earned i n the sciences a n d i n m usic

, , ,

d an ce an d pai nti n g ; will be of swee t speech a nd will l i v e

i n com fort .

A p erson bor n with Mercu ry i n si gn C anc e r wil l

earn m oney by works con nect ed wit h water ( 0 ) a n d wil l
be d isliked by h is ki nsme n .

NOT E S .

(a ) Acts of stren gth accord i n g to a noth e r readi n g

. .

10 A person born w i th Me rcu ry i n si gn Leo will b e

.

d isl iked by wo m en wil l be poor wi l l h ave n eith er com

, ,

fort n or sons will wand er fro m place to place w ill be

, ,

i gnorant wil l be fon d of wo m en and wi ll su ff e r disgrace

, .

A pe rson born wi t h M ercu ry i n s i g n Vi rgo will be

l i b e ral i n gi ft wil l be l earned wi ll possess m an y vi rtu e s
, ,

will l i ve i n co m fort wi ll be of a pati ent n atur e w i l l be

, ,

i n gen i ou s an d fearless .

11 A person bor n w i th Mercu ry i n sign C apri corn

.

or Aqu ari u s will work for other m e n will be p oor wil l , ,

be a sculptor wi ll r u n i nto debts a n d wil l wo rk for no

,

fe es .
17 6 Br ih a t M ia /ed .
[C H . XV III .

A pe rson born w i th M ercury i n si gn S agi ttar i w i ll be

respected by k i n gs , wi ll be l earned i n sc i ences and i n
l aws .

A pe rso n bor n with Mercury i n sig n P isces will be

skil l ed i n befri e nd in g othe r m e n wil l read ily d iscove r
,

t h e v i ews of other people and w i ll be l earned i n th e

,

n —
h and icraft of m e of low castes such as sh oe making -

a n d t h e l ik e .

12 A per s o n bor n w ith J u piter i n sign Aries or

.

S corpio w i ll be a co m mander of armies w i ll be ver y ri ch , ,

w il l h ave m an y wi ves and ch i ld ren w i ll be liberal i n gift , ,

wil l h ave good servan ts wi ll be of a patien t n atu re an d

, ,

o f b r ig h t appe aran ce w ill be happy with

,
hi s wi fe and
will be of great fa m e .

A perso n born w ith J upite r i n si gn Tau ru s or Libra

w illbe free fro m d iseases wil l l iv e i n co m fort will be
, ,

ri ch wil l h ave friend s an d son s will be l iberal i n gi ft

, ,

and wi ll h e l iked by all .

A person bor n with J u piter i n si g n G em i n i or Vi rgo

wi ll h ave m any cloth es h ouses servan ts sons a n d fr i ends
, , , ,

wil l be a m i n ister an d w ill l i ve i n co m fort .

A perso n born w i th J u pi ter i n si gn C a ncer wi l l

13 .

be possessed of gems sons wealth w i fe i n fluen ce i n t el l i

, , , , ,

gence and co m fort .

A person bor n wit h J up iter i n si gn Leo w i l l b e al l

th at h as been s ai d i n th e case of a person born wi th J u pi
ter i n C ancer a n d w ill besides be a command er of ar m ies
, , .

A person bor n with J upi ter i n si gn Sagi tt ari or P is

ces wi ll be th e ruler of a provi nce or a m i n i ste r u nder a
ki n g or th e co m m a nd er of ar m ies or wil l be very r i ch .

A person bo rn with J u pite r i n si gn Aqu ariu s wi ll be

al l th at h as be en s aid i n th e case o fa person bo rn wi t h
t h e M oon i n si gn C a ncer .
‘

17 8 Bih at
r J dt a kd .
[C m x v m .

fer i m pr i sonment will recei ve bl ows w i ll b e i n difleren t

, ,

to work and wil l be m erc i less .

A person born with Satu rn i n si g n Gem i n i or V i rgo .

wi l l b e sh am eless wi ll su ff er gr i ef will be po or wi l l h av e
, , ,

n o sons wil l be a bad pai nter or writer , wi l l be a const a

,

ble an d w i l l be a ch ief o fli c e r .

18 A person born wi th Sat u rn i n si g n Tau ru s wi ll

.

be fond o f wom e n of l ow caste w ill possess s mall w ealth ,

a nd wi ll h ave se v eral w i ves .

A perso n born wi th S atu rn i n si gn Li bra wi ll be a ,

man of well know n fam e f wil l be th e ch i ef of a p art y of

- -

m en i n a town or i n an a rm y or i n a v illage an d w i ll be
ri ch .

A person born w i th S atu rn i n si gn C ancer w i l l b e

’

poor, wil l h ave v e ry fe w teeth w ill be separated f ro m h i s ,

moth er an d will h ave n o son s an d wi ll b e a fool

, .

Ap erson born wi th Satu rn i n si gn L eo wil l not be «

d eservi n g of res pect w i l l su ff e r grief w i ll h ave n o s o n s

, ,

and w ill carry bu rden s .

19 A person bor n w i th Sat urn i n si gn Sagit t ari or

.

P i sce s w il l die a n excel len t death wil l be a faithful o ffi c e r ,

-

i n th e ki n g s palace w i ll h ave good sons and a good wi fe

’

, ,

wil l b e p o s s es sed of good wealth wil l be th e ch i e f m a n i n

, ,

a town i n a n ar m y o r i n a vil lage

, .

A person born w it h Sat u rn i n sig n Capricor n o r

A q uar i us wi ll b e wi t h th e w i v es an d propert y of oth er
men wil l b e th e h ead of a town a v illage or an arm y w i l l
, , ,
'

h av e weak e y es will be dirty wil l be 1 n di fie r e n t to bat hi n g

, , ,

wi ll h ave a per m anent weal th and au th ori ty an d will

enjoy th e property acqu i red b y h i m .

NOTES .

To d eter m i n e th e e ff ects of th e pl an e t ary places t h e ,

reader i s re ferred to Sta n za 1 3 a n d Not e (é ) t o i t of t h e l as t

C h apte r .
 j Br l
' '

J dt a ka 17 9
‘

c
'

a . X VI I L z z at .

20 . si m i lar t o t h ose d escri bed for th e

E ff ects
se v eral s i gns of th e Zod iac wh en th e Moon occu p i es th em
and wh en sh e i s aspected by planets are m entione d also fo r
t h e risi n g si gn n ay— more e ffects are d u e to t h e ris i ng
si gn and to th e 2 u d 3 rd and other b /z cw a s ( houses) i f th e
,

h ouses be powerfu l an d i f th ei r lord s b e a lso powerfu l t h e ,

obj ects si gn i fied by t he m w il l be promoted an d red u ced , ,

i f weak .

NO T E S .

I f th e risi n g sign and i ts lord be po werful a perso n ,

born wil l be of strong ph y siqu e if t h e 2 u d house an d its

l ord be powerful th e person w i l l be r i ch S i m i lar rem arks
, .

apply to th e other blz av a s .

T h e follow i n g h ave been extracted from Sat yac h aria r s ’

wo rk on Horoscop y .

l A pe rson born wh en Arie s i s t h e ris i n g s i g n W 111

.

h ave d isfigu red fin gers wi ll be of i rasci ble te m per w i l l, ,

br i n g on en m i ty w i ll act i n c o n s is t e n l y w i th h is v i ews
, ,

w ill b e of bi liou s and w i ndy te m pera m en t wi ll be a n i g ,

'

g a rd ,
: w i l l s u fle r grief will wh e n you n g be separated from
, , ,

h is parents an d from h i s preceptor will h ave fool i sh sons

.
, ,

wi ll ass i st h i s broth ers an d ki ns m en wi l l be v i rtu ou s w i l l , ,

travel to foreig n l an ds w i ll en gage i n u sel ess work wil l

, ,

m arr y ei th er a wom an of low caste or a d e cei tful woma n or

a wo m an of defecti ve l i m bs or on e wh o was al read y m arri e d ,

wil l obtai n as rel at i on persons of a fr i endly n at u r e an d wil l ‘

m eet h i s d eath e ithe r by weapon s or by po i son o r b y i

b il ious co m pl ai nts or by th e peopl e abou t h i m xo r by fire _ ,

b v rain by bein g sh u t u p i n a prison or by fall

, .

A person born whe n Tau rus i s th e r i si n g si gn w i l l

2 .

h ave l arge l ips ch eek , n ose and foreh e ad wil l be of p h l e g

, ,

m at i c a nd wi n dy te m peramen t wi l l be li b eral i n gi f t wil l , ,

b e a spendthri ft w i ll h ave da u ghters and ver y few sons

"

, ,

w il l ill t reat h i s pa ren ts , w ill be fond of work wil l d o

-
,

w i cked deeds w ill ear n m u ch wealth w il l ever be fo nd of Z

, ,
18 0 Br ih a t Jat a ka
"

.
[C H . X VI II ;

h i s w i fe a nd w i ll su ff er fro m weapons He w i l l m eet h i s .

d eath by weapons ropes o r ani m als i n fore i gn land s o r

, ,

w ill d i e th ro ugh overwork or by water or by a spear or

th rou gh wan t of exercise or by qu ad rupeds .

3 . A person born wh e n t h e r i si n g s i gn i s Ge m i n i w i l l
e i th er be of defec t i ve l i mbs or wil l possess e x t r a l im b s wil l ,

be of sweet speech w i ll en gage i n excellent works w i l l be

, ,

of a m i xed t e m pera m ent wil l be of smal l u nderstand i n g

,

and of small bod y w i l l be l iked by h i s preceptor and by

,

sages w i ll have very few you n ger broth ers w i ll n ot be of

, ,

very act i ve h abi ts wil l put ot her me n to d i sgrace wi ll

, ,

possess good qu al i ties w il l be anxiou s to engage i n a

,

n u m ber of works will be v i rtuou s and n ot wicked w ill ,

earn a n d spend m u ch will possess several w i ves an d w i ll

,

b e free from ser i ou s d iseases He w i ll meet h i s death b y .

s nake -b i te poiso n an imal s or by water

, , .

4 . A person born wh en th e r i si n g si gn i s C ancer w i l l

be a m an of n o fixed pri n ci ples wi ll suffer from diseases of ,

gen i ta l organs w ill b e of a ti m i d natu re wi ll be grateful

, , ,

will be of ph legmati c an d w i ndy tem peram ent will be of

'

firm u nderstand i ng w i ll d o si n fu l a ct i ons wi ll spend th e

, ,

property of other m e n also wi ll b e h au gh ty am on g h i s

.
,

peopl e will be pu t to d isgrace b y h is k i nsm en wi l l lose

, ,

h i s ch i ldren wi ll en ga g e i n i mportan t works i n forei gn

,

l an ds w i l l b e o f i mperfe ct speech will b e a master ove r

, ,

oth er m en will h ave an u nequal wife will su ffer d i sgrace

, ,

from h i s ene m i es an d will be respected by m any persons .

H e w i ll meet h is death by m eans of a n eck orna m ent or a

r ope , by phlegm ati c com plai nts by th e fractu re of ,

bon es b y sword cut or by d ropsy

, , .

5 . A p erso n born wh en th e r i si n g s i g n i s L eo w i l l
b e severe fond of a n i mal foo d an d of biliou s te m pe ra
,

ment w ill di spel destru ct ion w ill su pport h i s fami ly by

, ,

en gagi n g i n various works w il l be a n i ggard wi ll l i ke, ,

people wi l l be a ma n of ren o wn an d of r e s i g n a t i on ;
,
182 B li rz
'

at Ja t a ka
‘ ‘
.
[C H X VI II,
.

n ot l ive i n com fort will h ave n o e nem i es w i ll lose h i s v ir

, ,

tu es w il l protect oxen , will fall i nto bad te m per on accou n t

,

of h i s wi fe will yi eld noth i n g to h is enemies w i ll h ave h i s

, ,

own m e n fo r h i s en e m i es w i ll s uffer fro m n u m ero us ,

d iseases an d will su rrender h i m self to h i s foe ou t of fear

of sword cut He w ill m eet h is d eath by i m pr i son ment;
-
.

blows sword ent bad d iseases or by fire

,
-r
,
.

9 A person born wh e n th e risin g si g n i s Sagi ttar i

.

will h av e l ar g e li m bs teeth an d nose will be of phleg m ati c , ,

and w i ndy te m pera m ent wi l l h ave a flesh y ge n it a l organ , ,

th igh s a n d arms will be o f defecti v e nai ls wil l be ski lled

, ,
.

i n work will be bold i n figh t will serve u nd er men of

, ,

l o w caste w i l l be d epri ved of h is property by thi eves , b y

, .

fi re or by th e ki n g wi ll be learn ed i n la w s w i l l be respect e d
, ,

by many people wi ll gi ve trouble to h i s brothers —

, wi l l ,

work i n forei gn la nds wi ll be l iked b y th e ki n g will be , ,

.

i ndi ff eren t to d eed s of vi rtu e wi l l quarrel with h is wi ves ,

a nd will h ave a diseased face He w i ll m eet h is d eath b y .

qu adru peds snakes th e kin g or b y i m prison men t

, ,
.

10 A person born wh e n th e risi n g s ig n is C apricor n

.

w i ll h ave a s m all n ose lon g face ar m s an d legs ; will be , ,

of wi ndy t empe ra m en t of a ti m i d n atu re will thou gh tlessl y , ,

e u g a g e i n work will su ff er i m pri son m en t wi ll h av e a s m al l

, ,

fa m ily and s m al l wealth will be a n i ggar d will h ave

‘

, , ,

d au gh ters w i ll h ave n o ki ns m e n will li ve i n plenty wil l

, , ,
'

ac q u i re wealth by h is valou r t hrou gh th e king and by for est ,

wi ll observe fast in g wi ll h ave a wi fe of low caste an d will , ,

b e attach ed t o h er will h ave a large bod y few h ai rs and, ,

.

weak knees and w i ll su ff er from d is eases He w i ll meet . .

h is death by ch i ld ren by th e w i nd by weapo ns by th e , , ,

k i n g b y poi son by fall by an eleph ant , by an inc re as e

, l , ,

of b ile or by dyspeps ia .

11 A perso n born wh en the risi ng si gn i s Aq u ar iu s r

.

w i l l be of i nact i v e h abits an d of h arsh n atu re wi l l be th e ,

?

el dest i n th e fam i ly w i l l be of bi li ous and wi ndy temper a

,
 C H I X IX .
] Biha t
r J dt a kd . 18 3

m e nt w i ll h a v e a nose sh aped l i ke th e flower o t sesa

' ‘

,
.

m u m pl ant wil l waste h is weal th w i ll h ave many ser

, ,

van ts w ill h e h ated by h is k i ns m en p rece p tors e n e m i es

, , ,

a nd fr i e nds ; be fon d of d eeds of wi ckedness wi l l acqu i re ,

m uch property w il l n ever spe nd m oney on charity w il l

, ,

a ss u m e a sh ow of vi rtu e will worsh i p the D evas a n d w i l l ,

su ff er from phl e g m ati c attacks a ff ect i n g th e ch est H e .

w il l meet h i s de a th fro m p a i n s i n t h e belly by vom i t i o n

a n d by dru gs ad m i n iste red by women .

.12 A perso n born w he n t h e r is i n g s ig n i s P isces

. ,

wi ll have th ick lips fis h l ik e eye a nd l arge n ose w i ll be

,
-
,

o f ph legmati c a nd wi ndy te m pera m ent wil l be a sa ge , ,

w ill be of d is figu red ski ns and of act i ve h ab i ts w il l be ,

remarkable for h is gai n a n d loss wi ll h a v e good s ervants ,

and kinsmen wi ll be disposed to d eeds of v i rtu e wi ll

, ,

h ave a good wi fe w ill h elp h i s fat h er wi l l j o m a w o m an of

, , o

low d eeds and wi l l h ave bad e n e mi es He wil l m e e t h i s .

d e ath b y disease corru ption of th e blood snake bit e attack

, , ,

df a l ion by th e ch i efs of parties of m en , by venereal

,

d iseases by d ru gs by fasti n g or by t h e fati g ues of j ou rn ey

, ,
:

C HAP TE R X IX .

On Pl an et a r y A s p ec t s .

1 If at t h e t i me of bi rth th e M oon occu py si gn

.
‘

Aries and be aspected by Mars th e perso n wi ll become a ,

kin g i f sh e be aspec t ed by Mercu ry th e p e rson w i l l be

- ~

l earned ; if by J upi t er h e w i ll resemble a ki n g ; i f by

.

Venus h e wil l be a m a n o f good conduct or a trade r

,
‘
,

accord i n g to anoth e r read in g i f by Saturn h e wi ll b e , ,

a th ief an d i f by th e S u n h e wi l l be poor , .

E a t the t im e o f birth t h e Moon oc cu py si gn Tau ru s

o

an d b e asp e c t e d b y Mars th e person w ill be poo r i f sh e

‘

; , ‘

be a s pected by M e rcu ry, h e wi l l be a th ief ; i f by J upit e r ,

h e wil l be res p ected by t h e peo ple ; or wi ll b e a r i ch k in g

18 4 Br z/ a t
z J dt a kd .
[C I I
-
X IX
. .

accord i n g to another read i n g i f by Venu s h e w i ll be a ,

ki n g ; i f by S atu rn h e w i ll be ri ch and i f by th e S un h e
, ,

wi l l be a servant .

If at th e ti m e of bi rth the M oo n occu p y s i gn G em i n i

an d be aspected by Mars the perso n w i ll sel l weapons ; i f
,

sh e be aspected by Merc u ry h e will becom e a ki n g ; if by ,

J up i te r h e w i l l be l earned if by Venus h e wi ll be fear

, ,

less ; i f by S a tu rn h e will be a weaver a n d i f by th e Su n ,

,

h e w i ll be poor .

If at th e ti me of b i rth the Moon occu p y s i gn C an cer

,

and be aspe c ted by M ars th e person wi ll be a val i an t sol

,

d i er i f sh e be aspected by M e rcu ry h e will be a l i terary ,

A uthor ; i f by Ju p i ter h e wil l be learn ed ; i f by Venu s h e

, ,

w i ll be a k i n g i f by Satu rn h e w i ll l i ve b y weapons and ,

i f by th e Su n h e wi ll su ff er f rom d iseas es of th e eye

, .

2
. If a t th e ti m e of b i rth th e Moon occu py sign L eo ,

an d be aspected by Mercu ry th e person w ill be an Astro ,

l oger ; i f aspected by J upi ter h e w i ll b e ri ch ; i f by ,

Venu s h e will be a k i n g ; if by S atu rn h e w i ll be a bar

, ,

ber i f by th e Su n h e w i ll be a kin g an d by i f M ars h e

, , ,

w i ll also be a k i n g .

I f at th e ti me of bi rth th e Moon occu py sign V i rgo ,

and be aspected by M ercury t h e person w i l l be a ki n g i f , ,

aspected by J u p i ter h e will be a com m ander o f ar mies i f

, ,

by Ve nu s h e wil l be v i gilan t and i f b y Satu rn t h e Su n

, ,

or Mars h e w i l l l i ve b y se rvi n g u nde r women

,
.

I f at t h e ti m e of bi rth th e Moon occu py si gn L i bra

an d be aspected by Mercu ry th e person wi ll be a ki ng ; i f ,

aspected by Ju pi ter h e wil l work i n gol d i f b y Venus h e

, ,

wi ll be a tra der an d i f by Satu rn th e Su n or Mars h e will , ,

be deceitfu l .

If at th e t i m e of bi rth th e Moon occu py si gn S corp i o

an d b e aspected by M ercu ry th e person will get twi ns (or ,

will h ave two fath ers accord in g to som e C o m men tators ) i f

as p ec t ed by Ju p i ter h e wi ll be obed i ent ; i f by Venus , h e
,
 . 18 6 B z lz r
’

at J cit a é a
l
‘

.
[C H X I X
. .

Sol ar and Lu nar flow s If th e Moon be aspected ( l ) by

.

th e lord of th e D rek k a n a occup i ed by h er ( a) or ( 2 ) b y ,

th e Lords of p l anets occu pyi n g fri endl y si gns sh e w il l

.produ ce b en efic e ff ects T h e e ff ects descri bed for th e
.

Moon occup y i n g th e several signs an d b ei n g aspected by

th e several p lan ets appl y to h er wh en sh e occupies th e
seve ral D w a dasa m s as and i s aspected by th e several
planets ( d) I f th e Moo n occu py part icu lar N a v am s as an d
.

b e a s p e c t e d by th e several pl anets the e ff ects w i l l be

'

those stated as follow .

NO T E S .

(a ) If t h e Moo n be aspected by planets occu pyi n g

b ard s wh ose lords are di ff erent from t h e lords of th e b um s
occu pi ed by h er th e e ff ects wil l be m al e fic Th e same t e
,
.

m arks appl y to th e ri s i n g h am .

( 6) Accord in g to S wal pa Jataka i f th e lord of th e ,

D rekk a n a aspecti n g th e Mo o n be a b e n e fic plan et th e

e ff ects wil l b e b e n efic i f m al efic th e e ff ects wi l l also be ,

m al e fic T h e sa m e re m arks appl y to th e risi n g Dr ek

.

kan a .

( 6 ) So th at i f th e Moon be aspected b y planets

occu pyi n g i n i m i cal si gns th e e ff ects wi l l be m al efic .

( d ) Th e sa m e re m ark h ol ds w i th referen ce to th e
ri sin g D w adasa m sa I f th e risi n g D wa das a m s a b e ot h er
.

th an that of Can cer an d i f th e r isi n g si g n be aspected

,

by th e Moon th e e ff ec ts wil l be m al efic ; i f th e ri sin g

,

D w a dasa m sa be th at of C ance r a nd i f th e ri sing s i gn be

,

aspected b y th e M oon th e e ff ects will be b e n e fic

, .

5 If a t th e ti m e of birth th e Moo n O ccu py th e

.

Nav am sa of M ars a n d be aspected by th e S un th e p e rson ,

will be th e protector of a cit y i f aspected b y Mars h e ,

wi ll be fond o f tortu re ; i f aspect e d by M ercu ry h e w i ll ,

be ski ll ed i n d u el fi gh t ; i f b y Ju piter h e wi ll be a ki n g ; ,

i f b y Ven u s h e wil l be ri ch an d i f by S atu rn h e wil l ,

b rin g on q uarre l s .
 CH X IX ] Br z fz a z l ”
1 87
’

J u / a ka
‘
. .
.

I f at th e time of b i rth t h e M o o n occu py th e Nav am sa

, '

of V e n u s an d be aspected b y th e Su n th e p erson wi l l be ,

a fool i f aspected by Mars h e w i ll be fond o f t h e w i ves of

,

oth er m en i f b y Mercu ry h e w i l l be a good poet or w i ll

covet th e w i ves of oth er m e n accord i n g to anoth er readi ng 3
and i f b y J u piter h e wi ll p rodu ce good l i terary works ;
,

i f by Ven us h e w i l l be fon d o f comforts i f by S atu rn h e

, ,

wi l l u ni te w i th th e w ives of oth er m e n .

6 I f at th e ti m e of bi rth the Moo n occu py th e

.
,

Nav a m s a of Mercu ry an d be aspected by th e S u n th e ,

perso n W il l be a d u el l ist or a d an cer i f aspected by Mars ,

h e wil l be a th i ef ; i f by Mercu ry h e w i ll be a great p oet ; ,

i f by J upi t e r h e wi ll be a m i ni ster ; i f by Ven u s h e w i l l

, ,

be skilled i n musi c an d i f by S atu rn h e wil l be sk i l led i n

, ,

m ech an ical arts .

I f a t th e t im e of b i rth th e M oo n occu py th e Na v am sa
,

o f C an cer and be aspected by th e Su n th e person w il l be ,

of s m al l body ; i f aspected by M ars h e w i ll be ei ther a , -

n iggard or wi ll possess s mall weal th i f by Me r cu ry h e ,

.

wi l l practise au steri ties i f by J upi ter h e w i l l be a ch i ef , ,

i f by Ven us h e w i l l th rive by wo m en and i f b v S atu rn

, ,

h e wi ll be fond of work .

7If at th e ti m e of bi rth th e Moon occu py th e

.
,

Nav am sa of Leo an d be aspected by th e Su n th e perso n ,

will be a man of angry te m per i f aspected by Mars h e w ill ,

be liked by th e ki n g i f by Mercu ry h e wil l becom e r i ch ,

by th e discovery of h i dde n treasu re i f by J up iter h e wi ll ,

be a man of i n fluen ce and authori ty ; if by Venus h e w i ll ,

h ave no sons and i f by Satu rn h e wil l d o w i cked d eeds .

If at the ti m e of bri th th e Moon occu py th e Nav am sa

,

of Jupi ter and be aspected by the Sun th e person w il l be a ,

m an o f well k now n p owers ; i f aspected by Mars , h e wi ll be

-

l earned i n th e ru les of figh t i f by M ercury h e w ill be ,

sk i lled i n r i d i cule i f by Jupiter, h e will be a m i n i ster i f

18 8 3 7
7 2 20 1 J ata ka
.
[C m X IX .

by Ven u s h e w i ll be a m an of no v i r i l i ty and i f by S atu rn ,

.
,

h e wil l be ch ari tably d isp o sed .

8
. I f at th e t i m e of b irth th e Moon occu py th e
,

Nav am sa of S atu rn and be a spected by th e S u n th e per ,

s o n w il l h ave v e ry few chi l dren i f aspected by M ars ,

h e wil l be u n h appy th ou gh ri ch i f by Mercu ry h e w i l l ,

be h au gh ty i f b y J u piter h e w ill d o d eed s su ited to h is

,

stat i on i n l i fe i f by Venus h e w i ll be fond of bad wo m en

,

an d i f by Sat urn h e wi ll be a n i gg ard ( a )

,
Al l th at h as.

be en s aid for th e Moo n occu pyi n g part icu l ar Na v a m s as

a nd be in g aspected b y th e several pl anets appl ies also t o

t h e S u n — w i th t h is exception th at wh er e S ol ar aspect h a s

been refer red to i t sh al l be read as L u na r as pect

,
.

NO T E &
( a ) Th e sa m e rem ark a ppl ies to th e r i s i n g Nav a m
sa as t o. th e M oon — bu t i f th e M 0 0 11 aspect th e risi n g
si gn w h e n th e risi n g Na v am s a i s oth er th an that of C an
cer , t h e e ff ects w i l l be m al e fic .

9 I f t h e M oon occu py a V a r g o t t am a pos i t i on h e r

‘

.
,

own Na v a m s a or oth er Nav a m s as th e b e n e fic e flec t s

'

, ,

d es cr ibe d for the M o on occupy i n g th e several Na v a m s a s

and bei n g aspected by pl an ets wil l res pe cti vely be fu l l ,

i mperfect an d s m all a nd th e m al efic e ff ects descri bed wi ll

.

r esp ecti vely be sm all i m perfect and full ( a ) If t h e lord o f

, .

t h e N a v am s a be po w erful t h e e ff ects d e scri b ed fo r plan et

,

ar y aspects i n th e ca s e of N a v am s as will alon e co m e t o

p ass an d n ot th ose d escribed for t h e M oon occu pyi n g th e
sev eral si gn s a n d be i n g aspec ted by t h e several plan ets ( c l .

NO T E &
( )
a T he sa m e remar k applies ri s i n i
g g n and
s t o t he
t o t h e S un occupyin g p arti c ular Nav a m s as and be in g
,
»

as p iec t e d b p l an et s
y .

( b) Na va m s as o ccu p ied by th e Moon or th e r i s i n g

Nav amsa a nd be i n g aspected by th e pl an ets .
 19 0 3 7
7 73 2 4 5 J dt a /ai .
( C H . xx .

3 I f at th e t i m e of b i rth o f a person th e S u n occu py

.
, ,

the 7 t h h o u se from th e Asce ndan t th e person will su ff er ,

d isgrace at th e h and s of women i f h e occu py th e 8 th

house th e perso n will ha ve very few sons an d wi ll beco m e
,

bl i nd i f h e occu py th e 9 t h h ouse th e perso n wil l h ave sons , .

wea l th an d co m fort ( 4 ) i f h e occup y th e l 0t h h ouse th e ,

person wi ll l i ve i n co m fort and wi ll be po w erfu l i f h e

occu py th e 1 1t h house th e person wil l be very r i ch a nd i f
,

h e occu py th e 12 t h h ou se h e w il l beco m e a n apostate .

NOT E S .

( a ) Accord i n g to anoth er read i n g a person born w i t h

th e S u n i n th e 9 t h house wi ll h a ve nei th er sons nor wealth .

Accord i n gly Sa t yac h ar iar says tha t su ch a person will do

,

wicked deeds will be a ffli cted with d iseases and wi ll attai n

,

a n hu m ble posi tion i n life .

4 .If at th e ti m e of birth of a person th e Moon occup y

the ascend an t su ch person will beco m e du m b or m ad or
an i d io t or bli nd or deaf ; h e wil l d o mean d eeds or wil l
becom e a sl ave if th e risi n g sig n occu pied by th e M oon
b e Cancer A ri es or Tau rus t he person w i l l be ri ch w ill
, ,

h ave m any sons or w i l l be wealthy respect i vel y If t h e .

M oon occupy th e 2 n d h ouse fro m th e ascen dan t th e per ,

son will be a m an of a large fam i ly If sh e occu py th e 3 rd .

house h e will deli gh t i n tortu ri n g ani m a ls If s h e occu py

,
.

t h e 4t h or th e 5 t h hou se h e will be i n th e full enj oym en t

,

of wh at th e h ouses si gn ify ( a ) If sh e occu p y th e 6 t h hou se

.
,

t h e person wi l l have n u mero us e nem ies w i ll be of soft ,

body w i ll h ave a d ull appeti te wi l l be spari n g i n sexu al

, ,

u n i on , w ill be cru el a n d w il l be slow at work .

NO T E S .

( )
a Th at i s , i f th e M oon o ccu py th e 4t h house fro m
th e ascend ant th e person wi ll be happy will h ave k ins
,
.

m en and houses an d wil l be l earned and i f sh e occup y

,

th e st h h ouse th e perso n wil l poss ess i ntelli gence sons

, ,

an d th e l i ke .
cn xx ] E r ika ! J a t a kd 19 1
‘

. .

5 . I f at th e ti m e of birth th e Moon occu py th e 7 t h

h ouse fro m th e asc e n dan t t h e p erson will be jealous o f th e
,
‘

prospe rity of oth e r m e n an d wi l l be l ustful If sh e occupy .

th e 8 t h h ouse th e pe rson w ill be fic k l e m i nd ed an d wi l l

,
-

be a ffl icted wi th d iseases I f sh e occu py th e 9 t h h ou se th e

.
,

perso n wi ll be l i ked b y al l an d w il l h ave so ns friend s , ,

ki nsm en an d wealth I f s h e occu py th e 1 0t h h ouse h e

. ,

wi ll be su ccessful i n al l pl aces w i l l be v i rtuous wealth y , , ,

i n telli gen t an d valorous If sh e occupy th e 1 1 t h h ouse

.
,

th e person wi ll be fa m ou s and wil l gai n weal th and th e

like and i f sh e occu py th e 1 2 t h h ouse fro m th e asce n dant ,

th e person w i l l be w i cked and of d e fecti ve l i mbs .

6 . I f at th e t i m e of birt h of a perso n Mars occupy

th e ascenda n t su ch perso n wil l possess a w ou nd ed bod y ;
,

i f h e occu py th e 2 u d ho u se th e perso n w i l l eat l o w m eals ,

i f h e occu py th e 9 t h h o u se th e person w il l b e a si n ner ,

and i f h e occu py th e re m ai n in g h ou ses ( a ) h e w i ll produ ce

th e sa m e e ffects as th e Su n i n th ose pl aces .

Aga m i f a t th e ti m e of bi rth o f a person Mercu ry

,

o ccupy th e Ascen d an t su ch p erson wi ll be learn ed

, If .

h e occu py t h e 2 n d house th e person wil l be wealth y

,
If .

h e occu py the 3 rd h o u s e th e p e rso n w i l l be very wi ck ed .

I f h e occu py th e 4t h house th e perso n w ill be l earned , .

If h e occu py th e 5 t h h o use h e wil l be a m i n ister u nder a ,

ki n g ; i f h e occu p y th e 6t h h ou s e h e wi ll h ave n o e n e m i es ,
.

'

If h e occu p y th e 7 t h house h e wil l possess a k nowled ge , .

of th e l aw I f h e occu py th e 8 th h ouse t h e person wil l be

.
,

renowned for h i s vi rtues I f h e occup y th e 9 t h , 10t h

.
,

1 1t h and 1 2 t h houses h e will prod uce th e same e ff ects as

th e S u n i n th ose pl aces .

NOT E S .

( a ) Th at i s th e 3 rd 4t h 5 t h 6th 7 t h 8 th l ot h
, , , , , , , ,

l l t h an d i 2 t h h ou ses .

7
. I f at th e ti m e of b ir t h of a pe rson Ju pi ter occu py
t h e 12 si g n s fro m t h e Ascendant su ch person w ill re s p ec ,
 Br z lz a t J am/ea
'

19 2 .
[C rL xx ;

t iv ely be l e a rn ed of good s peech a n i ggard w il l li ve i n

, , ,

com fort w i l l be i ntelligen t wi l l h ave no e nem ies wi l l

’

, , ,

possess v i rt ues su pe r i or t o t hose o f h i s father w ill do ,

d eeds u nsu i ted to h is r a nk i n li fe wi ll be a d e votee , w i ll ,

b e po sses sed of we al th wi l l be ful l o f ga i n and wi l l b e

,

w i cked .

8 I f at th e t i m e of bi rth o f a person Venu s o cc u py

.

th e ascen dant su ch pers on w i l l be ski lled i n act s of l ov e

,

and wi ll l i ve in great com fort i f V en u s o cc tl p y t h e 7 t h

h ou se th e per s on wi ll be fon d of quarr el s an d of sex u al
,

u n i on i f Venu s occup y th e 5 t h h ou se th e pe rson w i l l li ve

i n com fo rt an d i f h e occu py th e rema i n i n g h ou ses ( a ) th e
e ff ects wi l l be th e s a m e as th ose of Ju pi ter i n t h ose pl aces

bu t i f Ven u s occu py sign Pi sces at th e t i m e o f b i rt h th e ,

person w il l become r i ch .

NO T E S .

(a) T h at i s
th e 2 ud '

,
3 rd ,
4t h , 6t h , 8 th , 9 th , 10t h ,
1 1t h an d 1 2 t h h ou ses .

I f at th e t i m e of b i rth o f a person Sat u rn occ u py

’
9 .

th e A s cendant su ch person wi l l be poor w i ll be a ffl i cte d

, ,

wi t h d iseases an d sexual passion wil l be di rty w i l l s u ff e r , ,

mu ch fro m d iseases wh i l e you n g and wi ll be of i nd i st i nc t ,

speech But i f t h e Asce n d an t occu pied by S atu rn be L i b ra

.

S agi ttar i C ap r1c o rn Aqu ari u s o r Pi sces t h e person w i l l

, , ,

be as h appy as a ki n g w ill rul e over a Vil l age or a town

, ,

w i ll be learned and will possess fin e l i m bs B

‘

u t i f S atu rn .

Occupy any of th e oth er h ouses ( fro m t h e 2 n d to t h e 1 2 th )

'

th e e ff ects w i ll be th e sa m e as th ose o f th e Su n i n th e
sa m e pl aces .

10 I n d eterm i n i n g th e e ff ects of th e plan ets i n th e

.

several h ouse s from th e Ascendan t th e n at u re of su ch

h ouses sh all be taken i n to accou nt that i s wh e th e r th e , ,

h ou se s occupi ed b y th e several planets a re t hei r fri end l y

s i g ns or in i m i ca l or neu t ral si g n s o r the i r own h ou s es o r
: 194 Br ih at J ci t a kci .
[C H . xxr .

d epressi o n si gn s o r i f they be As t a n g ata pl an e t s th e ev i l ,

e ff ects will fu lly co m e to pass If th ey occupy t h er i n i m i

.

cal s ig n s then th ree fou rth s i f t h e v occu py thei r frie n dly

,
-

si gns th e n one h al f ; i f they occu py th ei r own s i gns t hen ,

, ,
-
,

on e qu a r ter i f they occu py th ei r M oola T r ik o n a si gns t h e n

-
,

less than a quarter of t he evi l e ff ects will co m e to pass .

Bu t i f they occupy t h ei r exaltat i on si gns th e ev i l eff ects ,

w ill fai l .

C HAPT E R X XI .

On t h e Pl an et s i n t h e
l V ar ga s s ev er a .

I f a s i n gle plan et occupy i ts own h ouse at th e t i m e

of birt h of a person such person w il l possess th e average
di gn ity of th e m e m bers of hi s fa m i l y i f two planets occupy
the i r own hou ses th e p erson will be an i m portan t m e m ber of
h i s fa m i l y i f t h re e pl anets occu py th e i r own h ou ses th e ,

person wi l l be respected by h i s ki ns m en i f fo u r planets

o ccu py thei r o w n h o u ses th e person wil l be ri ch i f fi v e
,

planets do so h e will l i ve i n com fort if s i x h e will l ive

,
‘
,

i n l uxur i ous ease an d as h appy as a ki n g and i f seven

pl anets occu py thei r ow n h ou ses th e perso n wi ll becom e ,

a kin g .

Agai n i f on e of th e pl anets occupy a fri en dly s i gn th e

, ,

person w ill lead a dependen t l i fe ; i f two planets do so h e ,

‘

will be protect ed by h i s fri e nd s i f th ree by h i s ki nsm en ,

i f fou r by h is brothers and cou si ns ; i f fi ve th e person wil l

, ,

be a m aste r over m any people ; i fsi x h e wi ll be com e a com ,

mander of an arm y an d i f seven h e wi ll beco m e a ki n g , .

2 .I f at th e ti m e o f birth of a person a s i n gle plan et ,

occu py i ts ex al tation si gn an d be aspected b y a friendly

pl anet su ch perso n wi ll beco m e a k in g ; i f at th e ti m e o f
,

birth one of th e pl anets occup y i ts e xaltati on si gn and be

accom panied by a friend ly planet th e person wi l l beco m e ,

very rich and will be u ni versall y respected i f at th e ti m e

of birth , o n e of th e pl anets occ upy eit her a n i n i m i cal or a
on . X X L] E r ika : Mia /l ei . 1 95

d epressi on s i gn th e perso n w i ll becom e poor i f two planets

,

occupy thei r i n i m i cal or depression s igns th e perso n w i ll

.

becom e a fflicted with grief I f t h ree planets occu py th ei r

.

i n i m ical or depression signs t h e person wil l beco m e a fool

, .

I f four planets d o so th e pe rson will becom e a ffl icted wi th

,

d iseases If fi v e pl anets do so the perso n w ill su ff er i m

.
,

prisonment i f si x pl an ets th e perso n will be a v i ctim to

,

mu ch grief and i f seve n planets do so h e wil l subj ect to ,

tortu re persons who ough t n o t to be tortu red .

NO T E S .

Mercury a nd th e S u n can not at th e same ti me occu py

th ei r d epressio n si gns m P isces and L i bra respecti vely
, ,
.

Seven pl anets can not th erefore occup y thei r depressi on

si gns at th e same t i m e I n th is as i n certai n ot h er cases
.
,

alread y stated th e Author h as s i m p l y quoted the v i e ws of

,

former wri ters .

3 . A ccord i n g to Sat ya c h arya, a person bor n when

Aquar i us i s th e ri si n g si gn will not be h appy bu t accord
i ng to th e Ya v a n as a person born wh e n Aqu ari u s i s t h e
,

risi ng D w adas a m s a wi ll not be h app y ( a ) Th is latter V i ew .

i s obj ected t o by V is h n u g np t a o n th e grou n d th at each

si g n of th e Zod iac contai n s th e D w adas a m s a of Aqu ari u s
and th at ben efi c af act s h ave been ascri bed to several si gns .

NO T E S
( ) a T h i s h as th e support of Sr u t ak ee rt i .

4 A person born wh e n m al e fic pl anets occupy th e

.

Sol ar h am s of odd si gns wi ll be of wi d e spread fam e wil l -

,

d o i m porta nt d eed s wi ll be powerful wealth y a nd of

, ,

bri gh t appearance A person born when b e n e fic planets

.

occupy th e L u n ar Iz o r a s of even si gns wi l l b e of gentl e

m an ners a nd of b ri gh t a p pearance ; w il l l i v e i n co m fort ,

w il l be l i k ed by all ; w i l l b e i ntelli gen t a n d w i ll be o f

s w e e t speech .
19 6 Bi h
r at J dt a fra
‘

.
[CH X X I
.

5 If th e 12 0 / a s occup i ed by th e m a lefic and b en e fic

.

planets be th e sa m e as stat e d above wh i le th e si gn s a re ,

d i ff erent ( a ) th e person wi ll be all th at h as been stat e d

,

above for th e t wo yoga s i n a m od e rate d egree bu t i f

both th e lz or a s an d s i gn s b e d i ff eren t ( b ) th e e ff ects w i ll ,

fai l
.

NO T E S .

Th at i s i f th e m al efic plan ets occu py th e Solar

,

[t om s i n eve n s i gn s or th e b en efic pla nets occupy th e L u n a r

b ow : i n odd signs .

( é ) Th at i s i f th e m al e fic pl an ets occu py th e Lu nar

lz o m s of th e even sign s or th e b e n e fic planets oc cupy th e
Sol ar lz or a s of od d signs .

NB — Bot h th e Au thor and C om ment ator h ave fa i led

. .

to noti ce t h e case of a person born wh e n th e m alefi c

planets occu p y th e L u n ar flo r et s o f o dd si gns o r th e b e n e fic
planets occu p y th e Sol ar l z o m s of even si gns E v i dently a
”

person born u nder these yogas wil l be al l th at h as been

st ated i n th e 4t h stanza i n a m ode rate d egree .

6 . A perso n born wh en th e Moon occu pies ei th e r he r

own D rek k an a or a frie ndl y ( 0 ) D rekk a n a will be of ver y
fin e beau ty a nd of well kn ow n v i rt ues bu t i f th e Moo n
-

occupy other D re k k a n a s th e perso n wil l be wh a t h as be e n

stated above agreeably to th e ch aracter of th e lord o f su ch
,

D re k k an a ( b) . .

I f at th e ti m e of b irth th e Mo o n occu py a V y a l a
( serpent ) D re kk a n a ( c) th e perso n will be wi cked i f sh e
occu p y a n Ay u dh a ( weapon ) D rek k a n a ( d ) th e pe rson wi l l
do de eds of tortu re ; i f sh e occup y a C h at u sh p a d
( qu adruped ) D re k k an a ( e) th e p erso n w il l coh abit w ith
h is p re c eptor s w i fe and i f sh e occupy a P a k s h i ( bird )
’
,

D re k k a na (f ) th e p e rs on wi l l be of wand er i n g h ab i ts .

NO T E S .

( a ) F ri endl y at the t i me of b i rt h Vi da C h apter I I ,

Stanza 18 .
 Bi hr at Mi a/ed .
[
C H X XI . .

T h e risi n g D w ada sa m s as
p rod u ce th e same e ff ects
as if th ey were th e r i si n g si gns ( d) .

NO T E S .

( )a These N av am s as of Ari es Tau rus Gem i ni & c , , ,

.
,

are Nav a m s as oth er th an th os e of th e respecti ve s 1g n s

Ar ies T au ru s G e m i n i & c In oth er words V a rg o t t a m a
, , ,
.
,

Na v am sas excepted .

( b) T hat i s th e N a v am s a s excl ud e d i n note ( a )

, .

( c ) For i n stan ce, th e p erson w i l l be a ch i ef o f

'

th i eves & c ,
.

'

( d) Vz de S tanza 2 0 C h X V I I I , and Vz a e C h XVII

'
’
, . . .

8 .A person born wh e n Mars occupies h is own

T r i m s a m s a wi ll be a m arri ed m an wi ll be powerful w ill , ,
'

wear ornam e nts wil l be generous w il l be o f br i gh t

, ,

appearance and wi ll th ou gh tlessl y en ga ge i n work .

A pe rson born w h en Satur n occupi es h i s ow n Tr i m

samsa wil l be a ffl i cted w ith d iseases ; h is wi fe w i l l d i e
before h im h e wil l be w i cked w ill covet t h e wi ves of
, ,

oth er m e n will be a fflicted wi t h gr ie f wi ll h ave a h ou se

, , ,

cloth es atte nd ants an d th e lik e an d w i ll be dirt y

, .

9 A perso n born wh en J u p i ter occupies h i s own

.

T ri m s am sa wi ll be ri ch famou s h appy i nte l li gent of

, , , ,

brigh t appearan ce u n i ve rsal ly r espected free from

'

, ,

d iseases of act i ve h a bits an d will l i ve i n l uxu ry

,

Ap erso n born w he n Mercu ry occu pies h is ow n

T rim s am s a w i ll be i n tell i ge n t a nd learn ed i n th e fin e
arts ; wil l be a fop a l iterary au th or o f d isti nct speech ,
, ,

w i l l be skille d in carpe ntry an d th e l ike w i l l follo w th e ,

rules of l ife l aid down by sages wi ll co m m e nce bo ld ,

p roj ects an d will be m u c h respected .

10 A perso n born wh en Ven us occup i es h i s own

.

T rim sa m sa wi ll h ave m a n y sons wil l l ive i n great co m ,

fort w i ll be free from d i seases wil l be liked by al l (a ) wi l l

, ,
on . X XII ] . Br ih at Ja t a ka
‘ ‘

. 19 9

be ri ch beau t i fu l w i cked of fai r body an d w i l l enj oy m a n y

, , ,

wom en .

A person born wh en th e T r im s am sa o f M ars i s oc en

pied by t h e S un w i l l be bold i n fi gh t an d w h e n i t i s
,

occu pied by th e M oon h e will be slow at work

,
.

A p e rson born w h en th e T r im s am s a of S atu rn i s

occu pied by th e S u n w i l l be w i cked and wh en i t i s ocen ,

pied by th e Moon h e w il l i ndu lge i n acts of tortu re

,
.

A person bor n wh en th e T r i m s a m s a of J u p i t e r i s
occu pi ed by th e Su n w ill be of good d isposi tio n an d
w he n i t i s occupie d by th e Moon th e person w ill bec om e ,

r i ch .

A person bor n w h e n t he T ri m s am sa of Mercury i s

occup i ed by t h e S u n wi l l l i ve i n com fort and wh en i t i s
occu pied by th e M oon th e person wil l be learned
, .

A person born wh en th e T r im s am s a of Venu s i s ocen

pied b v t h e S u n wi ll p ossess a fin e bo d y a n d when i t i s
,

occu p i ed by th e M oon h e wi ll h e liked by th e peopl e

, .

NOT E S
( )
a Accord i n g to an oth er read i n g h e ,
w il l h av e a

C HAPT E R XXII .

On Mi s c ell a n eo u s Yogas .

l
P lan ets occu pyi n g th ei r own signs or th e ir e x al
.

t at io n or M oo l a t r ik o n a si gns are s aid to be K a m ka planets

t o one ano t h er i f at th e sam e ti m e th e y oc cu py th e Ken
, ,

d ras fro m th e Ascendan t In th e above case a planet .

,

occupyi n g th e l ot h h ou se from a n oth er pl anet i s said to

be th e specia l Karaka of th at plane t .

N OT ES .

In th i s and i n th e next two stanzas th e term , K araka

( h e l pi n g) plan ets i s define d ,
2 00 Bih
r at J a t akd
‘

.
[C H XXI I;
.

2 Accord i ngl y i f th e ri si n g s i g n be C an ce r an d t h e
.
,

Moon occupy i t a n d i f Mars S atu rn t h e S u n an d Ju p i t e r

, ,

occupy th e i r exal tat i on si gns t h ese fou r plan ets are ,

kn own as Karak a pl anets to one another ( a ) Aga i n to a ,

plan e t occu py i n g th e r i si n g s i gn a l l p l anets ( b) occu py

i n g th e l ot h or th e 4t h h ouse ar e K a t ak a plan ets ( c) .

NO T E S .

d
( ) I n other word s J u p i ter occup i es sig n C an ce r
,

w h i ch i s at t h e sa m e ti m e th e ris i ng sign Sat u rn occup ies ,

t h e 4t h h ouse Li bra M ars th e 7 t h house C apr i corn a n d

,

t h e S u n t h e 1 0t h h ouse Ari es T h e C om m ent ator i nfers

.

from th is stanza th at planets occu p y i n g th ei r Sw ak sh et ra ,

Uch a an d M u l at r iko n a si gns are a lso m u tu a l ly Karaka

plan ets i f th ey occu py K endra s i gns fro m o ne anot h e r
,

though not th e Kend ra si gns fro m th e Ascen dant .

( b) Al l th e planets wh eth er th ey occu py th e i r own

s ig n s t h e i r exaltati on si gns or th ei r M u l a t r ik o n a si gns or
, _

not accord in g to th e C o m men tator

, .

( c) Th a t is th e rev e rse d oes n o t h old

,
.
In oth er .

word s th e pl anet occupy i n g th e Asce nd an t is not a K a

,

raka planet of th ose o ccup y i n g th e 4t h or t h e 1 0t h h ou se . .

3
. A plan et occupyi n g i ts Mu l a t rik o n a and exal tation
s i gn (a ) i s also sa i d to b e a Karak a plan et t o one that
occu pies t h e 1 0t h h ou s e ( 6) fro m su ch si gn an d to th e ,

latter h i s At im it r a p l anet i s also said to b e a Karaka pl anet

,
.

NOT E S .

( )
a Bu t not occu py i n g th e Ke nd ra h ouses from th e
A sc end ant .

b
( ) T h is latter planet must be i n h i s S wak s h e t ra,
M u l at ri k o n a or exaltati on h ou se
'

Th e e fie c t s of th e K a
.

raka plan ets are descri bed i n Varab a M ih ira s work on ’

Yoga Yatra i n wh ich i t i s stated th at wh en a p ri nce loses

h i s kin g do m h e re co vers i t i n th e An t arda sa p eri o d o f a
,
 Br flm t J é t a kci .
[ L
OI XX III .

NO T ES .

Wheth er b e n e fic or m al e fic
( )
a .

Th e D asa peri od i s to be d i vid e d i nto th ree equ al

parts an d th e Siro day a P r ish t o day a and Sir ap ri s h t o daya
,

si gns are d efined i n S tanza 1 0 of C hapter I .

'

6. Th e S u n and M ars prod u ce th ei r e fiec t s ( a ) i m m e

di at el y after e n teri n g a si gn Ju piter and V e n u s wh en
passi n g th rou gh th e m i d dl e of a si gn S atu rn an d th e
M oo n before q u i tti n g a si gn and Me rcu ry th rou ghou t h is
cou rse .

NO T E S .

( )a Both an b en efic
d m al e fic .

Th e si gn m ust be supposed to be d i vid ed i nto th ree

equ al parts o f 10 d egrees each .

C H APT E R XX III .

On Mal efic Yogas .

1
. If at th e t i m e of bi rth of a pe r son th e 5 t h and 7 t h
h ou ses from th e Ascendan t or from th e Moo n be eith e r
occu p i ed or aspect ed b y b en e fic pl an ets or by th ei r lord s ,

su ch p erson will h ave respecti vel y son s (a ) and a wi fe

oth erwi se ( 5) h e will n ot h ave ei ther th e on e or th e oth er
, ,

I f Vi rgo b e th e ri si n g si gn and i f th e Su n occu p y i t th e ,

person w il l l ose h i s wi fe p rovided S atur n occ u pi es si gn

P i sces at th e sam e ti m e an d wil l lose h i s son s i f M a rs
o c c u p y s i g n C apri corn at th e same ti m e .

NO T E S .

a( ) of
On e 1 2 sorts of sons ( 1 ) O u ra sa ( 2 ) K s h e t r aj a , ,

( 3 ) D atta ,( 4) Krit ri m a ( 5
, ) Adh a m ap r ab h av a
( 6) G u dh o t ,

pan n a ( 7 ) Ap av iddh i ( 8 ) P o u n a r b h a v a ( 9 ) K an ee n a
, , , ,

( 1 0 ) S ah o d h a ( l
,
l ) K r ee t a and ( 1 2 ) D as i p r ab h a v a .

( b) T h at i s if th e 5 t h and 7 t h h ouses from th e As

c en dant or th e Moon b e not o ccupied or aspected by bene
C H X X II I ]
. Br ih a t J ava /ed . 2 03

He pla nets or by the l ords of th e h ou ses .

If th e Moon and Saturn occupy th e 7 t h house a per

’
son s wi fe wil l qui t h i m and m arry an oth er .

I f t h e 7 t h h ouse b e aspected b y th e M oon a nd S aturn ,

th e nu mber of w i ves of a person wi ll be th e n u m ber rep re

sented b y th e Na v am s a occupied by th e lord of th e 7 t h
h ouse co u n ti n g from th e Na v a m s a of Ari es .

If Ju pi ter or th e Moon and Ve n u s occu py th e 7 t h

h ouse an d th e Nav am s a of th e S u n or Mars th e person ,

wi l l h ave a si n gl e wi fe ; bu t i f th e 7 t h h ou se h e aspected
b y th e Moo n a n d Ven u s th e person will h ave severa l
,

w i ves .

2 I f at th e ti me of bi rth of a pe rson th ree m al efic

.
, ,

planets ( a ) occupy th e 4t h and 8 t h h ouse s fro m Venu s or

i f two m al efic planets be on both sides of Ven us on e o n ,

each si de (6) or i f Ve nu s be not acco m panied or aspecte d

by b e n e fic plan ets th e person s wife w i l l die by fire by
’
,

fall or by ropes respecti vel y (c) .

N OT E S .

( a) T h e Su n M ars an d Satu rn
,
.

( 5) E ith er i n th e sa m e si gn occu p i ed b v V en us or

i n th e ne x t si gn before or beh i nd .

(6) D u r i n g th e l i fe t i m e o f h er h usband .

Prov i ded i n th e first Yoga Ve nus at th e sam e ti m e

, ,

occu pies an A gn i ( fiery ) D re kk an a i n th e second a ,

N ipata ( falli n g ) D re k k an a an d i n th e th i rd at P asa

( rope ) D r e k k an a — Vz a e C hapter XXVII ( O n th e D rek
u
'
’

kanas ) .

3 If a t th e ti m e of bi rth of a person on e o f th e two

.
,

hou ses , th e 1 2 t h an d t h e 6t h fro m th e Ascendan t be ocen

,

p ie d b y t he S u n an d th e oth er b y th e Moon th e person ,

a nd h i s wi fe wil l each h ave a si ngle e y e Agai n i f Ve nus .

,

an d th e S u n ( a) occupy one of th e th re e h ou ses th e 7 t h ,

2 04 Bihr at J ci t a kci .
[OIL X X I II .

th e 9 t h a n d t h e 5 t h fro m t he Ascen dant , th e person s ’

w i fe w i l l be of d efe cti v e l i mbs .

NO T E S .

(a) Ven u s or th e S un accordi n g to so m e T h i s i s .

opposed to Garga wh om th e C o m mentator quotes .

4 I f at th e ti m e of birth of a person Satu rn occu py

.
, ,

th e risi n g si gn ( a ) an d i f Venu s occu py th e C h akra

sandh i Na v a m s as and the 7 t h h ouse th e perso n s wi fe
'

will be b arre n ( b ) prov ided th e 5 t h h ouse i s n o t occu pied

b y b e n e fic planets . Again i f th e m al e fic p lanets occu py
,

th e 1 2 t h and th e 7 t h h o uses a nd th e Asce nd an t ( c) an d

th e wani n g Moon occu py th e 5 t h house t h e person wil l ,

h ave n ei ther wi fe n or sons .

N OT E S .

( )
a It i s cl ear th at th e r i si n g si gn m us t be Tau rus or
Vi rgo or C apricorn i n wh ich case th e 7 t h h ouse w ill
respectivel y be S corpio P isces an d C an cer a n d th e last
,

Na v a m sas of t h ese th ree houses are k now n as C h akra

sandh i s or Rik sh as an dh is ( Vz a e S tanza 7 C h I )
'
’
. .
,

( 6) If th e person m arry again h e may get sons ,

accord i n g to so m e .

( c) All th e th ree h o uses or any two h ou ses or a ny

on e house accord i n g to th e C o m me n t ator .

.5 I f at th e t i me of b i rt h of a person Venu s occu py

, ,

th e 7 t h house from th e Ascendan t a nd b e i n the varga

( d i v i si on ) of S atu rn or Mars and be asp ected by S atu rn
or M ars th e person will co m m it adultery Agai n i f
, .
,

wh e n Ve nu s occu pi es th e varga of S at u rn or Mars and I S

aspected by S atu rn or Mars t he Moon S atu rn and Mars
, ,

occu py th e 7 t h house fro m the Ascen dant both th e m an ,

n d h i s wi fe wi ll com m i t ad ultery Agai n i f wh e n

a .
,

V en us occu pi es th e varga of Satu rn or Mars a n d i s aspect

ed by Saturn o r w he n Mars occupy the 7 t h h ouse f ro m
2 06 Br ih at J cit a /z d .
[OH . X X II I .

th e 7 t h hou se th e pe rson w ill be a ffl i cted w i th wh ite

,

l eprosy If at t h e ti m e of birt h of a person th e M oon

.
,

occu p y th e l ot h h ou se fro m th e Ascend an t M ars th e ,

7 t h h ouse an d S atur n t h e 2 n d h ou se from th e S u n su ch ,

person wi ll be of d efecti ve l i m bs .

N OT E S .

( 41 ) S u ch as eleph anti asis and th e li ke .

8. If at th e t i m e of birt h of a p erson th e M oon

, ,

o c c u p y a place be tween S atu rn a nd Mars and th e Su n

occu p y si gn C apri corn su ch person wi ll be a ffl i cted wi th
,

asth m a consu m pt io n th e d iseases of th e spleen or i ntern al

, ,

abscess ; a n d i f at t he ti m e of bi rth th e S u n an d th e M oon ,

occupy each th e sign or th e Na v am s a of th e oth er t h e

'

person wi ll be a ffl icted with pul m onary consumption an d ,

i f th e S u n and th e Moon occu p y togeth er eith er Cance r

or Leo t h e person wil l be reduced to a skeleton
,
.

9 . If at the ti me of bi rth of a person th e Moo n

, ,

occupy th e 5 t h Nav a m s a of S agi ttari (a ) or th e N av a m sa

of P isces C ancer C apricorn or Aries
, ,
and be ei ther ,

acco m panied or aspected b y S atu rn o r M ars su ch person ,

wi ll be a ffl i cted with l eprosy Aga in i f th e 5 t h or the ,

9 t h hous e fro m the Ascendant be si gn Scorpio C ancer , ,

T aurus or C apri corn and be eith er occup ied or aspected by

,

Satu rn and M ars th e person w i ll al so be afii ic t e d w i th

,

leprosy ( d ) .

NO TES
( a) T h at i s th e N av am s a of L eo i n si gn Sag i ttari .

(é) T h ese m a y be Nav am s as of any si gn .

( 0)A ccord i n g to Ya v an a c h ar y a i f th e Moon be ,

aspected b y b en e fic planets also at th e sam e ti m e th e ,

pe rson wi ll be of di sfigu red body resu lti n g from scratch i n g .

( d ) In oth er words th e rising si gn m ust be one of

,

th e trian gu lar si gns ( 1) V ris h ab h a Kanya Makara or (2 ) , ,

K atak a V r i s c h ik a, Meen a .
C H X X III ]
. Br ih at J dt a kd . 2 07

I f at th e ti me of bi rth of a person th e Sun t h e

10 .
, , ,

Moo n , Mars and Satu r n occu py th e 8 th 6t h 2 md an d 12 t h , ,

h ouses i n any way su ch person wil l become bli n d by

,

causes pertai ni n g to th e m os t po w erfu l of the four

planets
N OT E S .

(a ) powerful p l anet be th e M oon bl i nd n es s

I f the ,

wil l be caused by ph leg m ati c a ffecti o n s If su ch pl an et .

be M ars i t wi l l be cau sed b y bil iou s a ff ections ; i f i t be th e

,

S u n th e n by h eat or wood and i f i t be Satu rn i t w i ll be

, ,

caused by w in d y a ff ect ion s by stones and like , .

11 If at th e ti m e o f b ir t h of a person t h e m al e fic
.
, ,

pl anets ( a ) occu py th e 9 t h l l t h 3 rd and 5 th h ouses an d

, ,

be not aspected by b e n e fic pl anets s u ch person w i l l ,

become d eaf by cau ses pertai ni n g to th e most powerful

planet i f su ch m al e fic planets occupy th e 7 t h h ouse fro m
the Ascendan t ( b ) th e person wil l be of deformed te e th
, .

NOTES .

( )
a T h e S u n th e Moon Mars and Satu rn
, , .

6
( ) An d n ot aspected by
. b e n e fic planets .

I f at th e
12 .
,
ti m e of
bi rth of a person th e ecli psed ,

Moon occu py th e ri si n g si gn an d i f Satu rn an d Mars

, ,

occu p y th e 5 t h an d 9 t h houses fro m th e Ascend an t su ch

person wi ll be subject to th e i n fluence of gh osts Agai n , .

i f at th e ti me of bi rth th e ecli psed Su n occupy th e r i si n g

, ,

si gn and i f Satu rn and Mars occupy th e 5 t h an d 9 t h

hou ses from th e Ascendan t th e person w i ll lose h i s eyes , .

If at th e ti m e of bi rth of a p e rson Satu rn

13 .
, ,

occu py the 7 t h h o u s e and Ju piter th e Ascen dan t su ch ,

person will be a ffli cted with wi nd y co m plai nts If at th e .

,

ti m e of bi rth ( 1) Mars occu py th e 7 t h h ouse an d Ju pite r

,

th e Ascend an t or Satu rn occu p y th e Ascend ant an d

,

M ars occu py th e 5t h 7 t h or th e 9 t h hou se, or

, th e
2 08 Br ih at M ia /ed .
[C H . X X II I .

w an i n g M oon
S atu rn occu py th e 1 2 t h h ouse th e
and ,

person wil l beco m e i n sa n e or a n i diot .

14 If at th e ti m e of bi rth of a person o n e o f th e
.
, ,

fou r plan ets t h e lord of the Nav a m s a occu p i e d by th e

— v

Moon th e Su n th e Moon a n d J u p i ter —occup y th e

, , ,

Nav a m sa of th e lord of i ts d epression si g n or a n i n i m ical

Na v a m sa su ch person wi ll serve u nde r other m e n for h is
,

li vel i hood i f two of th e fo u r p lan e ts occup y ei th er th e

one Nav a m sa or th e o t her h e wil l beco m e a sl ave and i f
,

th ree of th e planets or all th e fou r occu p y th e on e

Nav am sa or th e oth er the pe r so n wil l be the son o f a
,

slave .

15 If at t h e t i m e of bi rt h of a pe rson th e risi n g
.
, ,

S i gn be Taurus Ari es o r Sagi ttari a nd i f m a l e fic plane t s

,

asp ect it , su ch person wi l l h ave u gly teeth if at the ti m e ,

of birth on e of th e m al e fic signs ( a ) o r sign Sagi tta ri or

,

Si gn T au rus be th e rising si gn and i f such sign be a s p e c

t ed by m al efic p l anets t he person w i l l be bald h e aded i f

,
-

th e S u n occupy th e 9 t h or th e 5 t h h ouse fro m t he A s een

dant and i f h e be aspected by m ale fic planets th e person ,

will be of weak si ght ; i f at th e t i m e of birth Sat u rn , ,

occupy th e 5 t h or th e 9 t h h ouse and be aspe cted b y

m al e fic planets th e perso n wi ll be a ffli cted wi th variou s
,

d iseases and i f at th e ti m e of bi rth M ars occu p y the 5 i h ,

or th e 9 t h house and be aspected b y m al e fic pl a n e ts th e ,

perso n wil l be of de fect i ve li m bs .

NOT E S .

( ) 4Th ese are t h e si gns of Aries Leo Scorpio , , ,

C apri co rn an d Aquari us .

16 If at th e ti m e of bi rt h of a pe rson th e m al e fic
.
, ,

planets occu p y th e 1 2 t h 5 t h 2 n d a n d 9 t h houses i n any

, , ,

w a y such person wi ll s u ffer i m pri son m en t and rest r a i n t o f

,

th e nat ure of th e risi n g s i gn ( a ) A g ain i f at th e t i m e o f .

, ,

birth th e ri sin g D rek k a n a be ei th er a S ar pa ( b) ( snake )

,
2 10 Br ih a t s
‘
a iai .
[C H . XX I V .

NOT E S .

( a ) If th e M O O 11 be subj ect to th e first of th e th ree

m al e fic Yogas th e person wi ll be a m an of h arsh speech
,

i f sh e be su bj ect to th e 2 n d Yoga the person wi l l be ,

a fflicted wi th e pil eps y and i f to th e 3 r d Yoga th e ,

person w i ll be a ffli cted with consu mption .

( b ) If one of th ree plan ets o dc u py th e l 0t h h ouse

th e person wi ll be a d i gn i fied servant If two pl a nets .

occu py th e l ot h h ouse h e will be a servant of m i ddl e

r a n k an d i f
‘
th ree occupy th e l ot h hou se h e wil l be a
servant of l ow ran k .

C HAPT E R X X IV .

On t h e H oro s cop y of W o m en .

1 Th e same remarks app l y to th e horoscopy of wo m e n

.

as to th e h oroscopy of m en bu t the e ff ects wh ich are

Suit ab le w i l l alon e a ff ect wo m en an d th e rest w il l a ffec t

th eir h usbands Accord in g to so m e all th e e ff ects (a ) wi ll

.
,

affe ct th e h usband Th e d eat h of th e h u sband shal l be

.

d eterm i ned fro m th e 8 th h ou s e ( fro m th e Ascend an t ) i n th e

horoscope of a wo m an Matters connected wi th th e phy
.

si q u e of a wo m an sh all be dete rmined fro m th e risi n g

sign and th e si gn occu pi ed by th e Moon and m at ters
connected wi th h er fortu ne an d h er h usband sh all be
d et ermi ned fro m th e 7 t h h ouse .

N OT E S .

( )
a E ff ects wh i ch can be en j oyed b y both wil l
a ff ect both Su ch e ff ects as h i gh appoi nt m ents i n th e
.

state will a ff ect th e h u sban d and m atters con n ected wit h

t h e bod y w il l a ff ect th e woman only Hen ce th e adv i s .

abil i ty o f a man m arr y i n g a gi rl born u n der e x cellent

pl an e t ary Yogas .

2 .If t h e risi n g s 1g n and th e s i g n o c c u p ed by th e

1
CH . XXI V ] . Br ih a t M al t a . 2 11

M oo n be eve n si gns th e wom an w ill be of a tru e

.

fe m i ni ne ch aracter and i f such si gns be aspecte d by

b e n e fic planets sh e wi ll be v irtuous and m odest and w i l l
wear orn a m ents ( a ) Bu t i f su ch si gns be odd th e
.
,

wo m an w ill possess a m ascu l i ne sh ape and w ill be of a

m asculi ne ch aracter ; and i f th e y be ei th er occu pi ed or
aspecte d b y m a l e fic planets sh e w ill be wicked an d
.

w i l l possess fe w vi rtues

NOT E S .

( ) a Accordi n g to so m e , vi rtu es w i ll be her orna 0

m ents .

( b)
If either t h e risi n g si gn or th e si gn occu p ied b y
th e Moon be od d or eve n w h ile th e other si gn i s eve n or
,

odd th e wo m an wi ll partake of t h e ch ara cter of a m al e

,

and a fe m ale A si m i lar re m ark appli es wh en on e of th e

.

si gns i s occu pied or aspected by a m al e fic or a b e n e fic

pl an et and th e ot her by a b e n efic or a m al efic p la n et .

When th e risi n g si gn or th e si gn p ccu p ie d by th e

3 .

M oon at t h e t i me of bi rth of a wo m an is ei th er Aries or

S co rpio i f th e risi n g T r im s am s a or th e T ri m s am s a oc e n
,

pied by th e Moon be th at of Mars she will beco m e u n ,

ch aste before m arriage if i t b e t h at o f Satu rn she will ,

lead a li fe of ser v i tu de I f i t b e th at of Ju pi ter sh e wi l l

.
,

be ch aste ; i f i t be that o f M ercur y sh e wil l be d e ceitful ,

and if i t be t ha t of Ven u s sh e w i ll be of bad characte r

, .

4 Wh e n t h e risi n g s i g n o r t h e si gn occupied b y
.
r a

th e Moon at th e ti m e of birth of a w o m an i s ei ther Tau ru s

or L ibra i f th e ri s n g T ri m s am s a or th e T r i m s am s a
,
i

o ccup ied b y t h e Moon be th at of M ars sh e w i l l be of bad ,

cond uct i f i t b e th at of S at urn sh e wil l m arry a s econd ,

ti me i f i t b e th at o f Jupiter sh e wi ll possess good qual i ,

ties i f it be th at of Mercur y sh e wi ll b e skilled i n m u s ic ,

a nd d an ce and i f it he that o f Ven us she w ill possess all ,

good qu al i t i es and w ill b e o f w ide spread fa m e Aga i n -

.
2 12 Br i h at J dt a kd .
[o n XXIV .

when t h e r i s i n g si gn or th e s i gn occupied by th e Moon

at the ti me of b i rth of a wom an i s ei ther Ge m i n i or
Virgo i f th e r i s i n g T r im sam sa or th e T r i m sam s a occu pied
,

by t h e M oon be th at of Mars sh e w il l be deceitful i f i t be

,

th at o f S atu rn s h e will partak e of th e n atu re of a h er

,

m a p h ro di t e if i t be th at of J u pi ter sh e w ill be ch aste ; ,

i f i t be th at of Mercu ry sh e w i ll possess m an y good,

qu al i ti es an d if it be th at of Ven u s sh e will ou t of l ust , , ,

co m m i t adultery .

.5 Wh e n th e risi n g si gn or th e s ign occup i ed by

th e Mo on at th e t i me of birt h of a woman is C ancer i f ,

th e risin g T rim s am s a or th e T rim sam sa occupied by th e

Moon be th at o f Mars sh e w i ll be o f a n i ndepen dent natu re ;
,

i f i t b e that of Saturn sh e will m u rde r h er h u sban d i f i t

,

be t hat of J u p i ter sh e will possess many good qu al ities ;

,

i f i t b e that of Mercury sh e w il l be skilled i n works of

,

art ; an d if i t be th at of Ve nu s sh e will be o f bad character, .

Whe n th e risi n g sign or t he si g n occu p i ed by th e

Moo n at the ti m e o f birth of a wo m an i s L eo i f th e r i ,

s i n g T r i m s am s a or the T ri m s am s a occupi ed by the M o o n

be t hat of Mars sh e w i ll be of a m asculi n e natu re (a ) If

, .

i t be that of Sat u rn , sh e w ill com m it adu ltery i f i t be th at

of J upi ter sh e will be t h e wi fe of a ki n g ; i f i t be th at of
,

M erc u ry sh e wil l be of a m ascul i n e n at ure an d i f it be

,

that of Venu s she wil l com m i t adu lte ry wi th a pe rson of

,

low ca ste .

W h e n th e risin g sig n or t he s i gn occup i ed by th e

M oon at th e t i me of birth of a wo m an i s ei th er S ag i ttari or
P isces i f the ri si n g Tr im sam s a or the T ri m sa m sa o ccu p i ed
,

by th e Moon be that of Mars sh e wi ll possess m any good ,

qu ali t i es ; i f i t b e th at of Satu rn sh e w ill not i n d ulge ,

m u ch i n sexu al u n ion i f i t be that of J up i ter she wi l l ,

possess many good qual i ties i f i t be th at of Mercury she ,

will be a woman of knowled g e a nd i f i t be t h at of

Ve n u s, sh e w i l l no t b e ch as te .
2 14 Br ih a t M i a /ed .
[C H XXI V
.
'

N OT E S .

occupied a c cc r d in g to t h e C om m en tator
Or , .

( b ) I f i t be a fi xed si gn th e h usban d wil l re m ai n i n

h is pl ace and i f i t be a co m m on sign h e w ill travel to ,

forei gn l and s bu t wi ll be retu rning to h is place e v e r v now

an d th en .

9 . If th e 7 t h h ous e from the ri si ng si gn or from th e

,

si gn occu pied b y th e Moon at th e t i m e of bi rth of a wo m an ,

b e occu p i ed by sev eral m al e fic planets th e w o m an wi ll ,

becom e a wi dow i f such 7 t h hous e be occu pied by

severa l b en e fic and m al e fic planets sh e will qu it h er h u s
band and m arry a n oth e r person and i f su ch 7 t h h o u s e b e
occupi ed by a m al e fic planet ( a ) be w eak and be aspect
, , ,

ed by a b en efic planet ( b ) th e wo m an w ill be rej ected by

h er h u sband .

If Venu s and Mars occupy e ach other s Na v a m s a th e ’

wo m an will co m m i t adultery ; and i f th e 7 t h h ouse from

th e risi n g si gn be occu pied by th e Moon Ve nu s a n d Mars , ,

sh e wi ll co m m i t adultery w i th th e p er m iss i on of h er h u s
band .

NO T E S .

(a ) E ith er th e S u n or Mars or Satu rn .

( 6 ) E ith er M ercu ry or Jup iter or Ve n us .

10 If at t h e ti m e of bi rth of a wo m an th e ris i ng si g n
.

be th at of Sat u rn ( a ) or Mars ( 6) an d if i t be occupied by

th e Moo n and Ven us an d aspected by m al efic planets the ,

woman an d h er m other will co m m i t adu ltery i f th e

sett i ng Na v am s a be th at of Ma rs an d i f th e sett in g si gn
b e aspe cted by Saturn th e wo m an wi ll poss ess a di seas ed
,

geni tal organ an d i f th e settin g N av am sa be th at of a

'

b e n e fic planet th e wo m a n wi ll possess a fi ne gen i tal orga n

an d will become a n agr eeable w i fe .

N OT E S .

( 11 ) C apri cor n or Aquari us .

( b ) A ri e s or S c o rp io .
.
CH . XXIV ] . Br zlz at
'

J zi t a kd .
f2 15

11 If at the t i me of bi rth o f a woman th e set t i n g

.
, ,

si gn or th e sett i n g N av a m s a be th at of S atu rn th e h us ,

band o f th e wo m an wil l be an old m an and a foo l ; i f

su ch si gn or N a v am s a be th at of Mars th e h usband w i ll ,

be of i rasci bl e te m per bu t wil l be at tached to h i s wife If .

su ch sign or Na v am s a be th at of Ve n us t h e h u sband wil l ,

be beau ti fu l and fond of h i s w i fe i f such si gn or

N av a m s a be th at of Mercu r y th e h usband wi ll be l earned
,

an d i nte l li gent .

NO T E S .

In th i s an d i n th e n ex t stanza th e C o mm e n t a t or ,

su pposes th at th e 7 t h house i s u noccupied by p l anets .

If th e settin g si gn or th e setti n g Nav am s a at

12 .

t h e t i m e of bi rt h of a wo m an be th at of th e M oon th e ,

h usband w i ll be full of l ustfu l desi res and of a qu iet

natu re If su ch si g n or Na v am sa be th at of J upiter th e
.
,

h usband w il l possess cou rage and oth er v i rtues and wi l l

h ave a control over h is passions an d d esi res i f su ch si gn
or Nav a m s a be th at of th e S u n th e h u sband w i ll be of ,

very soft n atu re a n d w ill en gage i n many works ( a) .

NO T E S .

Accordi n g to so m e th e read i n g of th i s port i on

( a) ,

of th e text i s Rat i ka/rm a i nstead of At t kar m a i n wh i ch c ase ,

th e m e ani n g i s th at th e h usband wil l i ndu lge m uch i n

sexu al u n i on A gai n i f th e sett i n g si gn be that of o n e
.
,

pl anet an d th e setti n g N a v a m s a be th at of another plan et ,

th e e ff ects d escri bed for su ch si gn or Nav a m s a wh i ch ,

e ve r i s powerfu l wil l com e to pass , .

13 If at th e ti m e of bi rth of a wom an th e ri si ng
.
, ,

si gn be occu pied b y th e Moon an d Venus th e wom an ,

wi ll be envi ou s of th e prosperi ty of oth e r p erson s and wil l

be greatly m i n df u l of h er comfort s ; i f t h e ris i n g si gn b e
2 16 Br i h at M l
ia /ed .
[OH . XX I V .

b y t h e M0 0 1
'

oc c u p i e d and Mercu ry t h e woman will be

1 ,

l e a rned i n th e fi ne art s w i l l be i n th e enj oy m e nt of

,

com fort an d w i ll possess m a n y good qu al iti es ; i f th e

ris i n g si gn be occu p i ed b y Ven u s an d Mercu ry th e woman
l ,

w i ll be bea uti ful m u ch l i ked by h er h u sban d an d learned

,

i n m usi c voca l an d i nstru ment al ; i f th e ri si n g si gn be

,

occu pi ed by th e Moon M ercury and Venu s th e wo m an

, ,

w il l be i n th e enj oy m en t of i m m ense wealt h and com fort

and possessed of many good qu al i ties If th e ri si n g si gn .

be occu p i ed by Mercury Jupi t e r an d Ven us th e same , ,

remarks apply .

14 If at t h e t i m e of b i rth of a wom an th e 8 th h ou se
.
, ,

from t h e A s cen dan t b e occu p i ed by a m al e fic plan et th e ,

woman w i ll becom e a wi dow and th e wi dowh ood wil l

occu r ( a ) i n th e An t ardasa per i od of th e plan e t whose
Nav am sa i s occu p i ed by th e lord of su ch 8 th h ou se If .

th e 8 th ho u se b e occu pi ed by a m al e fic pl an et an d i f t h e
2 n d hou se be occu pi ed by a b en e fic pl an et th e wo m an ,

w i l l d i e before h er h u sban d and i f th e M oon occu py si gn

Vi rgo Scorp i o T au ru s or Leo sh e wil l h ave very few
, , ,

sons .

( ) a After m ar r i age of cou rse accordi n g to th e C om

, ,

m en t at o r .

15 If, at th e t i me of b i rth of a wom an Satu rn be

.

n ei ther powerful nor weak th e Moon V enu s an d Mercury , ,

be weak an d th e Su n Mars and J u pi ter be powe rful an d

, ,

i f th e r i si n g s i g n be odd the wo m an will be o f a m as o n

,

l i n e ch aracter ( a ) .

If at th e t im e of bi rt h of a w o m a n Ju piter Mars V e
, , , ,

n u s and Mercu ry be powerfu l an d i f the ri si n g sign be an

even si gn th e wom an will be of wi despread fa m e wil l be
, ,

vastly learn ed and learned also i n t h e Sc i ence of D i vi nity .

21 8 Bi h a t
r C H
[ XXV . .

M ercu ry i t w i ll be caused by fever ; i f by J u p i t er i t w i l l

, , ,

b e ca u sed b som e u nk n own d i seas e ; i f by Ve n u s i t w i l l

y , ,

be caused by th i rst and 1f i t be occu p i ed by Sat u rn d eat h

, ,

w i ll be caused by starvatio n ( c) Agai n i f th e 8 t h h ou se .

,

h e a m ovable s i gn th e person wi l l d i e i n fore i gn lands i f

,

i t be a fixed si gn h e w il l d i e i n h i s own cou n try a nd i f

,

it be a c om m on si gn h e will d i e on h is way , .

NO T E S .

H u m ou rs

T he S u n Bi l e
T h e Moo n W i n d an d phl egm
Ma rs Bil e
Mercu ry All th e th ree h u mou r s
J u p it e P hl egm
Ven us W i nd an d Phl egm
S atu rn Win d
1
'

S tanza 4 C hapte r’
b
( ) V z a e ,
.

( c) If th e planet be powerful th ere w i ll be d eath w h i l e ,

th e perso ni s en ga ged 111 a good w ork i f t h e p l an e t be

weak d eath wi l l ensu e w h il e th e person i s e n g aged i n a
,

bad work an d i f th e pla n et be n ei th er powerfu l n or weak

th e p erson wil l d i e wh i le en gaged i n a work of
an i nd i ff erent ch aracter .

2 I f at th e ti m e of bi rth o f a person ,th e Su n an d

.
.

Mars occu py th e 4t h or th e l ot h h ou se from t h e ris i n g

s i gn th e pe rson w il l d i e bei n g stru ck w i th
,
stones I f .
~

th e 4t h 7 t h an d l ot h h o u ses be respecti vel y occu p i ed by

,

S atu rn th e Moon an d M ars th e perso n w i ll d i e b y fall

, ,

i n g i nto a wel l If th e S un an d Moon occu py sign

.

Vi rgo an d i f th ey be aspected by a m al e fic plan et th ere

’
will be death cau sed by th e person s kinsmen I f th e .

risi n g si gn be a co m mon sign and i f i t be occu pi ed by th e

S u n and the M oon th ere wi ll be death by d rown i n g , .

3 I f at th e t i m e of birth o f a person Satu rn occupy

.
, ,

si g n C an cer and th e Moon si gn C apricorn th e person wi ll ,

die from a n att ack of d ro p s y I f t h e M oo n occu p y s i gn

’
“

.
(511 Bl w as
'

i
‘
. 1 r z za t .

A ries or Scorp i o a nd be betwee n mal ah e plan ets , d ea th w i ll .

be caused by weapons or by fire I f th e Moon occupy s i gn .

Vi rgo an d be betwee n m al e fic plan ets, d eat h w i l l be caused

by a corru pt i on of th e blood or by want of bl ood If th e .

Moon occu py si gn C apri corn or Aquar i us and be betwee n

m al e fic pl anets , there wi ll be d eath by h an g i n g, by fir e or ,

by fal l .

4
If at th e ti me of birth of a person the 5 th or th e
.
, ,

9 t h h o u s e b e occupi ed by two m al e fic planets and i f such

plan ets be not aspected by b e n e fic planets th e pe rson wi l l ,

meet h i s death by bei n g sh u t u p i n a priso n or by other

restrai nt I f t h e 8 t h hou se from th e ri sin g sign conta i n a
.

Sarpa o r Pasa or N igal a D re k k a n a ( a ) death wil l also ,

resul t from i m prison m en t or oth er restrain t If Vi rgo be th e .

7 t h h ouse fro m th e Ascendan t an d i f i t be occu p i ed by t h e

M oon a c c o m p ain e d by a b e n e fic pl anet i f Venu s occupy ,

si gn Ar i es an d th e S u n th e risin g sign th e p erson wil l ,

die i n h i s own house a n d su ch d eat h w ill be c au sed by a

woman .

NOT ES .

( a ) Vi da no tes to S tanza 1 6 of C hapter XXII I and

to Stanza 6 C h apter XXI ,
.

5 I f at t h e t i m e of bi rth of a person ( 1) th e 4t h h ouse

.
, ,

fro m th e Ascendan t be occup ied by Mars or th e S u n an d

i f th e l ot h house be occu pied by S atu rn or ( 2 ) i f th e S u n , ,

M ars S atu rn and th e wan i n g Moo n occu py the Ascendant ,

,

the 5 th h ouse a n d I t h e 9 t h hou se or ( 3 ) i f th e Su n occu py ,

th e 4t h house and i f Mars whi ch oc cu pies th e 1 0t h h ou se

be aspecte d by th e wani n g Moon th e perso n wi l l d i e i n , ,

each case bei ng stabbed w i t h a spear A ga i n i fth e S u n

,
.
,

o ccu py th e 4t h h ouse an d i f M ars wh i c h occu pies th e

l Ot h h ouse be aspected by S atu rn the per so n w i l l d ie ,

be i n g struck w i t h a piece of ‘

6 I f a t th e t i m e of bi rt h of a pe rson th e 8 th , l 0t h
.
, ,

l st and 4t h h ou ses b e o ccup ied respe ct i v ely b y the w a

,
'
 2 20 Bi h
r at J dt a fni .
[CH .

ni n g M oo n M ars , S a t urn and t h e S un , , t h e person w i l l di e

be i ng s t ruck w i t h a cl ub o r st i ck If t h e 10t h 9 t h l s t .
, ,

an d 5 t h h ouses be occupied respect ively by th e wan i n g

Moon Mars S atu rn an d th e S u n th e d eat h of th e person
, , ,

W il l be cau sed by s m oke by fi re by i mpr i s on men t or by , ,

bl ows .

7 I f at th e t i me of bi rth of a person th e 4t h 7 t h ,
.
, , ,

an d 1 0t h h ou ses be respecti vely occupied by Mars th e ,

S u n an d Satu rn th e pe rso n will d i e by weapons by fire or , ,

by th e ki ng If th e 2 n d, 4t h a n d 1 0t h houses be r e sp e c
.

t i v e l y o ccu p i ed b y S at u rn t h e Moon an d Mars t h e pers o n , ,

wil l d i e of sores an d wor ms .

th e t i m e of b i rth of a p e rson th e S un
If
‘

8 at
’

.
, ,

o cc u py t h e l Ot h h ou se an d M ars o ccu py th e 4t h h o use

' ' '

t h e per son w ill d ie i n co nsequence of a fall fro m a veh icl e

or con ve y ance If Ma rs Occu py t h e 7 t h h ouse and the S u n
.
,

t h e M eon and Satu rn occu py th e r 1sm s 1 g n th e perso n <r

,

W il l d ie b ei n g c au gh t m a mach i ne If ( 1) si g n L i bra be
'

.
a

occupi ed b y Mars si g n Aries by S atu rn a nd s ig n C ap ri ,

corn o r Aqu ari us by th e Mo on or ( 2 ) i f th e l ot h 7 t h an d , ,

,

4et h h o uses b e res p ect i vely occu p ied by t he wani n g MOO 11 ,

”

by th e Su n an d by Mars th e p erson wil l d i e i n t h e m i ddl e ,

of excreme n t .

I f th e w a n i n g Moon be aspected b y powerfu l

9 1

M ars ari d i f S atu rn occupy th e 8 t h h ouse t he person wi ll

di e of d iseases a ff ecti n g t h e pri vi ties ( a l —th e p art affected
,

wil l b e e ith er eate n th rou g h by worms or cu t w i th t h e

‘

l a nc et or bu rn t or bl i stered
.
‘
.

N OT E S .

( 11) Su ch as p i les and fist ul a in th e P ude n d um

‘
M u l i ebre .

If, at th e t i me of bi rth o f a p e rson th e Su n and

10 . ,

M a rs occ upy th e 7 t h h ouse Satu r n o ccupy th e 8 t h h ou se

'

:
,

a n d t h e wani n g M oon occupy t h e 4t h hou s e th e deat h of ,

222 Bi '

r z zat J dt a f m
‘
.
[CH X XV. ;

w ell ; Leo— forest a ; Vi rgo — water bank L i bra — bazaar -

or store hou se ; Scorp io —a h ole ; Sag i ttar i — place fre

-
.

t d by h orses Capri corn — wate r y tracts Aquari us

—
q u e n e - .

a h ouse P i sces — watery places .

Th e above i s general I f a d i st i nct place of de ath h e

“

m entioned i n con necti on w i th a Yoga relati n g t o death ,

t h e death w ill occu r onl y i n su ch a place ,

( b ) If d i f f erent places of d eat h are poi nted ou t by

d i ff eren t pl anets th e place be longing to th e si gn of ; t h e
,

most powerful plan et w ill be th e place of death Agai n

’

of th e two s i g ns o f a planet th e place of th e M o o l a t r i ,

kona s i gn w ill be th e place of death Accord i n g to some .

,

th e pl ace of death i s the part i cular porti on of th e h ous e

belon g i n g to th e most powerful p l an et — su ch as th e place
of worsh i p th e bath roo m th e k i tch en & c ( Vida S t anza
,
-
, ,
.
,

12 of C h apter II ) .

( b) If th e r isi n g si gn be aspected by i ts l o r d a n d by .

a b e n e fic planet t h e period of i nsen sib i l it y w i ll be si x

'

t i mes as l on g .

13 . If at th e ti m e of b i rth of a person th e 2 2 n d
, ,
’

D re k k an a from th e risi n g D rek k a n a be a fiery D re k k an a

( a ) th e bod y of th e person after death wil l be burnt a nd
,

red uced to ash es I f th e 2 2 md D rekk a n a be a watery

.

D re kk a n a ( b) the body wil l be th rown i nto water f i f su ch

,

D re k k an a be a M isra D r ekk a n a ( c) th e body will b e ,

n eith er bu rnt n o r t h ro w n i n t o water but allo w ed to dry '

up . If t h e 8 th h ou se contai n a Sarpa D rek k an a ( d ) th e ,

bod y w i ll be d evou red by d ogs j ackals crows an d th e , ,

l i ke T h u s h as bee n described th e ch an ge of th e bod y

‘ ‘

after d eath .For a knowled ge of th e past an d future li fe

o f a p erson and of th e natu re of such l i fe t h e reader i s ,

referred to h i g h er works o n Horoscop y .

NOT E S .

( 4 ) AF i ery D rek k a na i s th e D re k k ana of a m al e fic

C H XXV ]
. . Br ih at J dt a ka
‘

( b) A Wat ery D r ek k an a 1 s th e D rekk an a of a b en é fic

pla net .

( ) 6 A M i sra D r e k k an a 1 5 th e D r e k k a n a of a be ne i
f c
planet occu pi ed by a jn al efic pl anet as w el l as th e D rek
kan a of a m al e fic pl anet occu pied by a b e n efic p lan et
an as —
.

d
( ) S arpa D r e k k Th ese are th e l s t and 2 n d
D re k k an as o f C an ce r the l s t a nd 2 n d D rekk an as of S eor
,

p i o a n d th e 3 t d D r e k k an a of Ac c ord i n g to S ub
h o dh i n i th e term s , V yal a varga i s i n terpreted i nto the ”

Dr ek k an a s o f V yal a ( Sarpa ) G ridh r a ( v ul tu re ) Ko la ( hog)

, ,

a nd th e l i ke . g

14 If th e l o rd of th e D rek k ana occup i ed by the Su n

.

or th e M oo n wh i ch ever i s powerfu l be J u pi te r th e per

, , ,

son h as com e fro m De val ok a; i f su ch lord be e i th e r th e

M oo n or Venu s th e perso n h as co m e from P it ril o k a i f
,

such lord be th e Su n or M ars th e perso n h as com e fro m ,

th e worl d of lower an i m als a n d i f su ch l ord be ei ther

Satu rn or Mercu ry t h e person h as come from th e reg i on
,

of h el l .

'
I f t h e lord of th e D r ekkan a occu p i ed by th e Su n o r
'

th e Moon wh ich ever i s power ful f be i n h i s exal tat i on

, ,
i
s ig n s u c h l ast l i fe of th e pe rson w ill b e o f an exal ted
'
'

,
?
ch aracter i f su ch l ord occupy a pl ace betwee n th e
exaltat i on and d epression si gns t h e l ast l ife wi l l b e on e of
'

m iddl e i mport an ce an d 1 f su ch l ord occupy h i s de p res

s ion s i gn th e last l i fe of th e perso n w i ll be one of a low
,

ch aracter .

15 If th e 6t h and th e 8 t h h ouses be u noccu p i ed

.
,

th e person w i ll , after d eath o to th e world of th e planet ,

0
g3

m ost powerful o f th e lord s o f th e D rek k a na s of s u ch 6 t h

an d 8 t h h ouses ( a) or th e person wi ll go to th e world of
t h e plan et occup y in g th e 6t h 7 t h or th e 8 t h house ,

Again i f Jupi ter occu py th e 6t h h ouse or on e o f th e

,

Ken dra houses or th e 8 t h h ou se an d be at th e sam e t i me

'

:
i n h is ex altati on si g n or i f t h e r i s i n g s i g n be Pi sces an d
2 24 Bik r ot J dt a kd .
( on X X,V I .

J u p i ter occu py i t a nd be i n t h e Na v amsa of a b enefic

,

planet wh i le th e oth er planets are weak th e perso n wi l l ,

ob tai n S al vat i on after d eat h ( c) .

NO T E S .

( a ) F o r t h e worl ds of th e severa l pl anet s Vz de l as t

'

st an z a .

( b ) If two or m ore planets occup y th e 6t h 7 t h a nd ,

8 th h ou ses th e pe rso n w i ll go to th e world of th e m ost

,

p owerfu l of th e m .

( 0) T h e nex t world may also be d ete rmi n ed from

t h e pos i t i o n of th e planets at th e t i m e of d eath as at t h e
t i me of b i rt h of a per s on .

C H A P T E R X XVI .

On Lo s t H oroscop es .

1 W h en a per s on i s i gnora nt of th e t i m e of h is
.

con cept i on or b i rth the t i m e of b i r th sh al l wh en dul y

, ,
.

q u e st i o n e d about b e det er m
, ined from th e P ra s u a L agn a

( )
a . If t h e l s t h al f of th e ri s i n g s i gn be cu t by t h e

h or i zon , t h e m o nth of bi rth w i ll be i n th e Ut t arayan a ( b )

a n d i f th e 2 n d h al f be cu t by t h e h ori zon , t h e mo n th wi l l ,

b e i n th e D ak sh in ayan a
NO T E S .

P r as u a Lagna th e r 1s1n g si gn at th e t i me o f
qu e y r
.

( b
) U t t arayan a : th e 6 month s fi o m C ap ri c orn t o .

Gem i n i .

(c) D ak s h i n ayan a
: the 6
m onth s fro m C nc er t o a .

S ag i ttar i .

2 If at th e t i m e of qu ery th e fi rst D rekk ana of a

.

s i gn be g i n t o r 1s e t h e si gn occ u pi ed b y Ju p i ter at t h e
,

t i m e o f b i rt h w i ll b e t h e P ras u a Lag na itself I f t h e z ud .

 Bih a t Z X I
'

2 2 16 r J dt a kd .
[C H X V Z

a n of h h é
'

e as i ly a s cer t a i n e d f ro m t h e appe ra ce t e p e rs o n t ,

n u mbe r zo f t h e cycle sh al l b e d eterm i ne d fro m t h e part of

b o dy; t au c11 ed by a pers on a t th e t i m e I n S tanz a 2 4 o f

.
:

C hapte r 7 0 of th e Brih at Sa m h i ta th e h u man b od y i s ,

'

di vi d ed i nto t e n parts each part corresp ond i n g t o a D as a

“

per i od of .

3 Fee t and ankles .

Sh anks an d kn ees .

T h e t h ig h s a n d gen i tal organ

-
.

Th e loi ns an d th e n avel .

T h e belly .

Th e breast and th e boso ms

'

T h e sh ou lders .

Th e neck a nd l i ps
.
.

Th e eyes a nd brows ;
-

T h e foreh ead and th e h ea d .

S o th at i f t h e b el l v be tou ch e d i t m ay be d eterm i ned ,

t ha t at th e t i me of qu ery J u piter i s i n h is 5 th round So

th at th e age of th e person will be 4x 1 2 o r 48 years pl us ,

th e n u mber o f years taken by Ju pi te r to mov e fro m th e

si gnoccu pi ed by h i m at th e t ime of b i rth t o th e s i g n
o ccup i ed by 1 11 1 at th e t i me of query
1 1 .

c) So th at i f th e Su n occup th e P ras u a L agna or i f

( , y
th e D rekk an a of th e S un r i se at th e t i m e o f query th e ,

Ri t n 1 s G re es h m a .

I f V e n u s o cc u p y th e Pr as n a Lagn a or i f th e Dre k
kan a of Venu s rise at th e ti m e of quer y t h e Ritu i s V a ,
-

santa ( wh e n th e Su n passes th rough A ri es and T a u rus )

'

I n th e case of M ars and h i s D rek k an a th e Ritu i s G ree ,

ah ma ( Ge m i n i a n d C anc e r) I n t h e case o f th e Moo n and .

-

h e r D r ek k a n a the Ritu 1 s Varsh a

, ( Leo an d Vi rgo ) In .

t h e cas e of Mercu ry a n d h i s D r e k k a n a th e R i tu i s S ara t ,

Libra an d S corpio ) I n th e case o f Ju p i ter and h is Drek

( .
a

k ana } h e R
,
it n i s Hem ant a ( Sagit t ari an d C ap ricorn } Tn .

R
,

in ease o
'

g f S at u r n a nd h i s D r ek ka na t h e i t n i s S is i ra ,
.
¢H X X VI
z
} fir ifia t J é t a kd: -

2 27

( Aqu a r i us a nd Pi sces ) .
,
I f t wo or more p l anets o cc u py th e,
Pr as n a L ag n a, th e R it u of th e m o s t p o w erfu l pl ane t w i l l
b e t h e Ri t n o f birth
'

(4) Su p pose th e
“

A37
det ermi ned from St an z a li t o
-

am :
‘
f

b e t h e U t t a rayan a s o th at th e mo u th of bir t h i s be t
'
‘
'
.
1
,

wee n C apr i cor n a nd G e mi ni S uppos e th e P i as n a La g na

’ '

. l

to be occu pi ed by t h e M OO11 w ho se Ritu i s Varsh a ( Leo

'

an d Vi rgo) I n su c h a case th e Ri tu of Ve n us th e al t e r »
.
, , .

n at i ve pl anet of t h e M oo n v i a th e V a s an t a ( Ari es a n d
, , .

T a u ru s) , sh al l b e d eter m i n ed as th e Ri tu o f bi r t h as ex
p l a i n ed i n th e d stanza
'

3 r .

3 If t h eRi t u do not agree w i th th e the

“

Ri t u o f t h e alternat i ve pl a net shal l be de t ermi ned as t h e

R i tu of bi rth of a person ( a ) Th e M oon an d Venu s a re . .

al tern at i ve planets So are Mercury and M ars ( b l and

.
,

so are Ju pi ter an d S etu l u I f th e first h al f of th e r isi n g

”
.

D rek k a n a shoul d r 1s e a t th e t i m e of query t h e m on t h o f

"

birth w ill b e th e fi rst of t h e t w o m onth s of t h e Ri t u ; a11d '

i f th e s econd h al f sh ould rise th en t h e 2 u d m o nth o ff t h e ,

Ri tu w il l be th e m o nth of bi rth Th e d ate o f bi rt h sh al l .

be d eter m i n ed fro m th e port ion of th e h al f D rek k a na tha t

h as ri s e n above t h e h oriz on ( c ) .

NOT ES

ti ote ( d) to th e last stanza .

1 1 5:

(é) Accord in gto th e C o m men ta to r M er c u ry, Mar s ,

a n d th e Su n are alternat i ve pl an e ts .

As the h alf D rekka n a wh i c h may

ti me of query represent s al l th e 3 0 d ays
j us t on e h al f of i t sh oul d h ave ris en
i rt h m ust h av e occu rred j ust after
b
1 11 oth er w ord s, t h e da t e of bi rth ma
’

t h e p ortion of th e
r izon by pro p o rt io
ho
 Bl ’

r z z aL J dt a/l d
.
te a . m m .

D re k k ana i s 5 degrees an d a t h i rt ie t h p ar t of i t i s 10
'

of a

mi n ut es, so tha t every 10 m i nu tes of th e ri s i n g h al f Dr ek

kan a represents a day It wi ll be conve n ien t i f th e L a gn a
.

Sp h u t a ,th e exact l on git ude i n s i gns d egrees a n d ,

m i n u tes of th e po i n t o f th e ecl i pti c cu t by th e h or i zon b e

de te rm i ned i n th e fi rst i nstan ce ( Vz de Ap pe nd i x )
'

4 Th e Learned B
. rah m i ns i n t h e Scien ce of Ho ro scopy
s ay th at th e n u mbe r of d egrees passed ove r by th e Su n i n
,
.

a ny parti cu lar si gn represents th e l u nar day at th e t i m e of

b i rth (a ) If th e P ras u a Lagn a be a da y s z gn , th e b i rth
.

w i l l h ave occu rred at a nd i f i t b e a m gfit s 1gn th e b i rt h r

,

wi l l h a v e oc cu rred by da y th e g/z a l z ka of bi rth sh al l b e

'

det e rmi ned from th e port i on of th e ris i n g si gn th a t h as

r i sen abo v e th e h or i zon
NOT ES .

( as) Be g i n n i n g from th e fi rst lu n ar d ay int h e M oon s

‘ ’

i n crease su ppose the Su n to occupy th e 2 4t h d egree of

,

S agi ttar i at t h e t i me of birth T h e l u nar day or Tz l /z z at

’ '

t h e t im e o f bi rth i s th e 2 4t h d ay cou nte d fro m th e fi r s t

v
,

day i n th e M on s i n crease or
o
’
2 4 — 1 5 o r th e 9 t h day i n
h er w an e .

b
( ) Th e leng t h of th e day or n i gh t of b i rth be i n g
k now n i t i s represented by th e risi n g si gn a n d th e Lagn a
Sp h u t a w i l l gi ve u s th e exa ct proportion o f th e S i gn th a t
h as risen a bove th e ho rizon By th e Ru l e o/ T/z r ee we
.
,

can arri ve at t h e exact ti me of birth from Su n rise or S u n -

set ; Whe n t h is i s known th e Horoscope m ay be cast with

.
,

t h e h el p of th e Astronom ical T ables or th e Al manac T h e

’

first fou r s tanzas th erefore g i ve u s a co m pl ete process for

, ,

th e d i sco v ery of th e ti m e of bi rth of a pers on from t h e

‘

P r i s n a La g na ;
’

5 .Accord i n g to som e th e l u n ar 772 0 72 112 of b i rth s ha l l

,

be determined from t h e Na v a m sa occup i ed by th e Moon at

t h e ti me o f qu e ry ( a ) Again th e Sign o ec u p ied by t h e
.
,

Moo n at th e ti m e of bi rth will be ei ther th e Prasu a Lagna

o r t h e 5 t h h ouse or 9 t h h ouse f r o m i t , w h i che v er is m os t
 Bih r at E M MA
“

[ r X X VI
Cu .

( 1 1) 2 ud part of th e of t h e N
5 th p a1t
a
Na v am sao f Aq ua1 iu s v am sa of Pi sces . .

( 1 2 ) 5 t h part o f th e
. 8 t h part of th e Na As w ayu
Nav am s a of P i sces v am sa of A ri es j a . .

( b ) For i nsta nc e i f at th e t i m e creatu res rep r es e n

, , ,

t i ng any of t h e si gns of th e Zod i ac be seen or th e i r sou nd s

h eard th e Moo n wi ll occu py su ch 5 1 11 at th e ti m e of
,
0

bi rth .

6
. T h e si gn o ccu pied by th e Moon at t h e ti m e of
b i rth of a p erson w i ll be as m any signs re m oved fro m th e
sign oc cu p i ed by t h e M O O 11 at th e t im e of query a s th e
m
Moon 15 re m ove d fro t h e r i si n g s 1g n at the ti m e of quer y
( at )
. Bu t i f th e ris i n g si gn be Pi sces th e n P i sce s wi ll be ,

th e si gn occup i ed by th e Moon at t h e ti m e Of bi rth ( I 1i

. .

case o f do n b t ) th e sign shall be d ete rm i ned by an y art icles

,

of food th at m ay be brou g h t an y fi g u res th at m ay a p 3 ,

p e a r o r by any so u nd s t h at m a y be h eard at th e ti m e
NO T ES .

( a) For i nstan ce su ppose Sc o rp 1o 15 th e r i s i n g si gn

,

a n d Pisce s th e si g n occu i ed by th e Moo n at: t h e ti me of

p
query From S c orp i o to Pisces i s 5 si gn s ; th e 5 t h si g ri
’
‘

fro m Pisces i s C ancer C an cer wi ll th erefore be th e si g n

.
, ,

occu p i ed b y th e Moon at th e ti m e of bi rth o f a person

( b) From articl es h avi n g th e sh ape of or i n any way ,

con nected w i th the cr eat ures representi n g th e s 1g n s of

the Zodi ac an d from t h e sou nds of th e li ke crea t u r e t h e ,

si gn o ccu p i ed by th e Moon m ay be d eter m i ned I n al l .

t h ese cases i t i s assu m ed th at a n Al l pervad i ng I nte

, , ll i gent -

Bei n g h elps an astrolog er by v ar io u s s i gns and su gg es

tions .

7 T h e r i s i n g s ign a t th e ti m e of birth w i l l be th e
.

s i gn of th e l ord o f t h e ris 1n g Na v a 1n saat th e t i m e of ghe ry

'

( a ) O r, th e ri si ng si g n at th e t i m e of birth w
. . il l be as
m any si gns r em oved fro m P ra s u a La gna as t h e D r ek k a»
 s u m m ers/14: 2 31
'

piedby th e S ti 11 is re m o y e d fro m t l ie risi n g Drek S

' "
' ‘

n a o cc u
'
.
z

kan a at t he ti me o f q u ery f

NO T E S .

( a ) S upposi ng th e r is ing gNav am sa at th e t i me of

q u ery to be th at of Sag i t ta ri t h e ris i n g sig n at t h e t i m e
‘

0 [bi rt h t s Sagi t ta ri .

( b ) S u pp o se th e r i s i n g D r e k ka n a at t h e t i m e of -

qu e ry t o be th e 2 n d Drek k an a of s i gn Gem i n i and t h e

D re kk an a occu pied by th e Su n at th e s ame ti m e t o b e t h e
3 rd D rek k an a o f Sa i t ari T h e n mbe r of D r ek kana s
g 1 u
from th e one to th e ot h er 15 2 0 Therefore th e ris m g s 1g n
.
,

a t th e t i m e of b i rth i s t h e 2 0th s i gn from Gem i n i , sub

tr act i n g 12 f rom 2 O 1 t i s t h e 8 t h si g n f rom Gem i n i ,

s i gn C ap r i cor n .

O r m ul t i ply th e t h e planet
“

8
'

.
,

o r of th e m os t pow erful pla n et occu py i n g?t h e r 1s m g s 1g n

b y th e n u mbe r o f i n c h es i n th e l en gth of th e s h ado w o f

.

a t w el v e i n ch Sank u ( a s t r a i g h t rod ) p l aced vert i ca lly o n

'
‘

a h o r1z o nt al surf ace and i n t h e Su n di v ide t h e prod u c t

'

by 1 2 Th e re m ai nder w il l g i ve th e r is ing si gn at th e
.

A cc ordi n g t o oth ers i f t h e q u er e nt be ,

s eat ed at th e t i m e of query th e 7 t h h ouse from th e r is i n g

,

si gn a t th e ti m e will be th e Lagna at th e t i m e o f bi rth ,

i f th e queren t be l yi ng at th e ti me th e 4t h hou se from t h e ,

r i sin g s i gn wi ll be th e L agn a at th e ti m e of b i rth i f th e

’

s t andin g at t h e t i m e th en t h e 1 0t h h o u s e wi ll
q ueren t be , ,

be t h e Lagn a ; an d 1 f h e b e r i sing from h is se at th en t h e ,

r isi n g si gn i tsel f w i l l be th e La g na at th e t i m e of birth ( b) .

NOT E S
Su ppose th e l o ng it ud e o f th e planet o f , ( W h ere
( )
31 ,

the r e are several planets ) of the m ost powerfu l planet

occu p yi n g t h e ris i n g si gn to be 4 si gns 10 d egrees and 2 0
m i nu tes a nd su ppose th e l e n g th of th e sh adow to be
i nch es t h e p rod uct of th e two n u m be rs i s 19 si g n s 1 6
degrees an d 3 0 m inutes Th is , d i vid ed b y 12 , g i ves as
'
23 2 Bi h
r at J a t a kd
‘

.
[C H X X VI . .

rem ai n e r,
d 7 s ig ns 16 degrees an d 8 0 m i n u te s Th e La gn a
, .

at th e t i me of birth i s th erefore t h e 8 th s ig n from A r i es ,

2 2a s i gn S corp i o
, .

5
( ) A ccord i n g to S u b h o dh in i t h e 7 t h 4t h ,
t o m , ,

a n d l s t h ouse s are no t w i th r e feren ce t o t h e P rasu a

Lagn a as exp l a i n ed by Bh at t a Utpa l a bu t w i t h re fe re nc e -

t o t h e Lag n a obtai ned fro m th e proc ees g i ve n i n t h e fi rst

h al f of t h e t ex t tha t i s from sig n S corp io i n t h e i n stan ce
, ,

q uo t ed i n n ote ( a
) .

9 . I f th e ri s i n g s ig n at th e t i me of qu e r y b e T au
r us or L eo mul t i ply th e L a gn a S h u t a ( t h e Lon g i tude o f
‘ ’

, p
th e Asc en dan t ) by 10 , i f i t b e G em in i or Sco rpi o t h e n ,

m u lt i pl y t h e Sp h u t a by 8 if A r i es o r L i b ra th e n by 7 ; i f
, ,

V i rgo or C apri corn th e n by 5 a n d i f i t be any of t h e

, ,

r e m a i n i n g s i gn s th e n b y t h e n u mbe r o f s uch s i gn from

b ,
’

Ar i e s ( a ) Ag ai n i f th e pl ane t occ u pyi n g th e r i s i n g s i gn

.
,

be J u pi ter m u l t i pl y th e Lagn a Sp h u t a by 1 0 ; i f i t h e
,

Mar s by 8 ; i f Venus, by 7 ; i f any of t h e rema i n i n g p l a

,

n et s b y 5 If se veral p l anets occu py th e ris i n g s i g n t h e n

:
,

m ulti p l y t h e L agn a Sp h u t a by th e factor fo r each of such

p l an et s A dd
. u p the severa l prod uc t s and fi nd t h e

s um

NO l ‘

ES O

In th i s a nd i n th e next st a nz a t h e Au thor state s a

proce ss for d i scoveri n g th e N ak sh at ra ( Aster i sm o o eup ied
b y th e M oon ) of th e qu e ren t , h i s wi fe , brot h er so n and ,

e nemy Th e figu res gi v en i n th e T e x t are kno w n as th o s e

.

of Rasi G u n a k a ra and G ra h a G u n ak a ra—Zod iacal a n d

Planetary fac t ors, r eferred to i n t h e C hap t er on As h t ak av
a rgas .

( a)
For i n s tan ce i f C an cer be t h e S1g n i t b eing t he
, ,

4t h si gn fro m Ari es th e fa ctor for C ance r i s 4 ; T e

,
h .

factor for S ag i ttari 1s 9 th at for Aq u a1 i ns 1s 1 1 and th a t

,

fa r Pisc es 1s 12 .
23 4
; Bi z/ f
at Mi a /M .
[c m X X V L
‘

th e Sph ut a
’
“

of t h e 7 t h h o use wh ic h rep r ese nt s a pe rs on s

wife; Multi ply the sev er al Sp h ut as b y th e Z odiac al fae
'

t o rs of t h e s ever al h ouses and b y t h e fac t o rs of t h e p l ane t

dcc ii pyi n g Such h ou s es add t h e p r od ucts m ult i pl y t h e 5 11 111
, ,

b y 7 ad d or su b t ract 9 i f nece ssar y d ivide t h e s u m 01 re

” '

, , ,

rfi ai ndé r b y 2 7 th e remai nd e r wil l g i Ve yo u the N ak sh a

’
' ’

11a o f th e Se v e ra l per s o ns .

1 1 Mul t i p l y th e sam e sum ’a ) by 10 8 7 5 ; add

.
, , ,

dr s u bst ract 9 i f n ece ss ary as st ated abo ve

,
di v i de t h e ,

re sul t by th ei r a p propria t e n u m b e rs you wi ll o b t ai n

th e Year Ri t n Mon t h Lu nar day d ay or n i gh t Nak sh a
’

, , , , ,

tra th e G h a t ik a th e r i si n g S i gn and the r i s i ng Nav am sa

, ,

at th e t i me of b i rt h .

NO T ES .

i n t h i s an d in th e fo l low i n g t h ree sta n zas t h e Au t h o r ,

s tates an o th er process fo r d iscover i n g th e year, m on t h , & c .

of t h e b i rt h o f a erson
p .

(a) T he s um obta i ned at t h e e nd of Stanz a 9 .

T h ese and t h e processe s of d i v i s i o n w i l l be fou nd

( 6)
e xp l ai ned 1 11 th e next t h ree s tan z as
'

From th e produc t of th e su m by 10 sh al l b
12 .
e

d eterm in ed t h e yea 1 ( age ) R i t u and m on th of b i rt h ( a ) ,

a h d from t h e prod u ct of th e s um b
‘

y 8 s h all be dete rm i ned

t h e P a ks /z a ( fo r t ii ig h t ) and Tz / fiz ( l unar day ) ( b )
’

NOT E S .

(a) T hi s p rod u ct i s th e fi rst

th e fo u r prod uct s of
r efe rred to i n t h e la st sta nz a w i th 9 add ed t o or su btract
‘

ed froin i t i f n ecess ary , Di v id e th e qu an t i ty b y 12 0 t h e

.
,

re i h ai ndé r wi l l gi ve t h e age of th e p e rso n D i vid e t h e .

Sa m e quant it y by 6 t h e r emai nd er wil l g i ve th e R

, it n of
b iit h fro m Sis ira Divid e t h e s a m e quan tity by 2 th e
.
,

re ih a h i der Wi ll g i ve t h e firSt o r the sec on d m on t h of t h e

‘

Ritn .
Cn X xv I j
,
’

.
B ‘

i
r z zat J a ta legz
‘
'

Th i s p r od uct i s the second of t h e fo u r prod ucts

( 5)
re ferre d to i n the l as t s tanza w i th 9 ad ded or subtract ed , i f
n ec essary D i v i d e t h i s quanti ty by 2 th e re m a inder
.

wi l l g i v e t h e fo rt n ig h t of birth D i v i de t h e sa m e qu ant i
‘
.

t y jb y 15 t h e r e m ai n d e r w il l g i ve t h e l u nar d ay
,
-
.

1 3 Fro m t h e pro d u ct of (a ) t h e s u m by 7 sh a ll b e
.

d eterm i n ed wh ether th e bi rth occu rred by day or by n i gh t

a nd a lso th e N ak s h at ra .

( a ) T h is produ ct i s th e 3 r d of t h e fou r p r o d u cts m en .

t io n e d i n th e 1 1 t h s t a n z a wi th 9 ad ded o r s ub t racte d if
s
, .
,

neces sary Div i d e t h e qu anti ty by 2 , th e bi rth wil l h ave

.

occurred by day or n igh t accord i ng as th e re m ai nder i s

one or m ore than one D ivi d e th e sa m e q u an ti ty b y .

t h e rema i nder w ill g i ve t h e N a k s h a t ra from A sw in i .

14 From th e p rod u ct (a) of th e s u m by 5 sh all be

.
,
‘

de t e rm in d th e G h at i k a t h e ris i n g S i gn th e Ho ra an d t h e
, ,

r i s i ng N av am s a at t h e ti m e of bi rth
s o r es .

( ) Th is prod
a uct i s t h e l ast of th e fou r prod u cts m en
t io n ed i n S tanz a 1 1 w ith 9 added or subt racted “
.

n e c es ,

sary Divid e th e quan ti t y by th e n u mber of G h at ikas i n

.

th e day or n i gh t of b irth as th e case m a y b e ; th e re ~

m a i nde r w i ll g i ve t h e G ha t i k a from S u n gr i se o r S un se t a t -
i k

t h e t i m e o f bi r th
. D i vide t h e s a m e q u an ti ty by 1 2 th e
.
.
.
, ,

re m ain der w i ll gi ve th e r is i ng s i gn from Ar i es D iv id e th e

“ .

q u a nti ty by two th e H o w of bi rth wi l l b e t h e 1st or z ud

accord i n g as th e rema i nder 1s 1 o r more th an 1 D iv i de Eth e .

quant i ty by 9 th e re m a i nde r wi ll g i ve the n u m ber of

,

th e risi n g N av a m sa from t h e fi rst Nav am sa of th e r i s i n g

Si mi l arl y, d i vi d e t h e qu an ti ty by 1 2 the m m aingl e r ,

.
r

w il l g i ve gt h e n u mbe r 5; ,d ivid e
. t h e qu a nt ity fb y 8 t h e remai nd er g ri l l g i v e t h e r is iug n ek
,
,
v
L z ‘

ka na .
f
 Bih
-

t J ci t a kci T
‘ '

2 86 r a
'
s
[C 11 X X VI :

N B—I n al l th e abo ve cas es

. e vi dent th at th e , it 13

rema i nd er wi l l be 1 11 th e sh a pe of s 1g n s d egrees an d ,

m i n utes T h e n umb e r represe nt i n g th e sig n s i s t h e

.
,

nu mb er re present in g th e pa rti cul ar Nak s h a t r a Year , ,

M onth P aksh a T i t h i G h at ik a & c at th e t 1m e o f b 1rt h

, , , ,
.
,

t h e deg1 eé s and m inutes onl y go to 1n c reas e th e n u mber by

u m ty .

'
’

15
M ul ti pl y by two th e n u mber of Matr a s 1 11 a
.

person s n a m e ad d th e l en gt h of sh adow t o i t d i vid e

’

t h e r em a i nder wi l l giv e th e N ak sh a t ra
~

t h e s u 1n b y 2 7
'
"

at th e t i m e of bi r th co u nte d f rom D h an ish t a:

‘

,
0

NOTE S
The nam e i s th e n ame given to a person at th e N am a
ha ran a cere mony A sh or t vo wel sound 15 cou nted as o n e
.

M a tra and a l on vo w el s ou n d i s co u n ted a s two and a

or
,

”
c on so n a n t i s cou n ted as h al f a M at ra T he l en gth of .

th e sh a dow of a t we l ve i nch S a nku s h al l be ad ded i n

i n ch es .

16 T he D i k nu m bers are
. .

E as t 2 W es t
N Wes t
,

S E a st . 3 ,
.

Sb u t l r
S W est 10 N E ast
“

. .

Mult ipl yb y 1 5 t h e number for th e Dik or d i rec t ion w hich

t h e queren t faces ; add to th e produ ct th e numb er of
"

ersons aci ng th e same Dik d ivid e the s u m by 2 7 T h e

p f ,

rem ai n de r wi l l gi ve th e Nak s h at ra of th e person from

Dh anish t a .

Th i s stanza con t a i ns anoth er process aga i n to di sc o v er

th e f Nak s h at ra .

17T h n s h as be e n stated by m e vari ous proce ss esfo r

.

t h ee o n st ru Ct io n of a lost h oro scope I nt ell igen t pu p i ls

r
.

s h al l study them carefull y a nd use th em

 23 8
‘

Bihatr
( C H X X X/ I i
. .

m us i c dance pai nt i ng wr i ti n g a n d th e l i ke , sk i lled at th e

, , ,

pl ou gh an d m works co n ne ct e d wi th a co nveyan ce wi th ,

a n ec k bent l i k e t h at of t h e bu l l ock t h i r s ty w i th a face , ,

l ike th a t of th e ram an d d ressed 111 d i rty garments , .

NOT ES .

Th i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh ap e d b atik :a m an an d a

qu adruped M ercu ry i s i t s l ord . .

6 T h e 3 r d D r ek kan a of s i g n T au ru s 1s a m a n wi th a
.

bod y rese m bl i n g th at of an el eph ant wi th lar g e teeth w it h , ,

feet th ose of th e came ] of a brown color , ,

attac hed t o ra in an d to th e a n i mals of the forest .

NO T ES .

Th i s D rek k an a i s both of h u man and q u adr up e d

sh ape S atu rn i s i ts lord
. .

37 Th e 15 i: D re k k an a o f s i gn G e m i ni i s a w om an
. f .

f ond o f decorati o n w it h
’

f o n d o f nee dl e . ,

ou t ch i ld ren , w i th ra i sed hands h av i n g attai n e d p ub ert y ,

and 1 1111o f l u stful : th ou g h t s

‘

Thi s D rek kan a i s oft he sh ape of a w om a n Mer

“

cu ry is i t s l or d ’
‘
‘

8 T h e 2 nd
. si gn G em in i i s a m a n
D rek ka n a o f
h es idin g i n a flo w er :g arden w e ari n g a m a il COat zl ro l di 11 g ,
:
,

a b o w in h i s ha n d , fond of figh t, carry ing arr o ws i b i s ifa c e J ,

qb e ing l ik ét h at o f a G a r u da
-
(Bra l 1 1n an i kit e
) h is th o u gh ts
’

e . .
,

d ire ct e d i mp l ay c h ild re n or n a m en t s and wealt h

, ,
.

T h i s D rek k an a i s of t h e shape of a m an ‘
a nd
’
is arm
-

ed I t i s also of th e s h a pe o f a bi rd Venu s i s i ts lord

. .
'

. .

9 Th e 3 1d Drek k a n a o f s ign G em i n i 1s a m a n
“
.
‘ ‘

W ear i n g orna ments po ssess i n g man y gems , w ea ring a ,

mai l coat a n d i t arget p ca rr yin g a Sb o iomi n ih is h a nd l e a rned

'
,

i n aurt h e arts an d a l it e ra ry wr i te r
" ‘ ‘

1 . .
C H X X V II
. .
] Br b ’

z at J dt a kd . 23 9

NO T E S .

Th is D rek k an a i s o f t h e shape o f a man an d i s a rh 1

’

ed Satu rn i s it s l o rd
. .

I O Th e l st D re k k ana of C a11Ce r is a man ea rrin g

.

l eav es roots a n d fru i ts, h as a b ody re se m bl i n g t h at of t h e

,

el ephant ; l i ves i n a forest n ea r sandal t rees h as feet as ,

l ar g e as t h at of th e ca mel h as a fac e l i ke th at of t h e l 1og ,

an d a n eck l ike th at of a h orse .

NOT E S .

T h i s Dr ek k an a i s of t h e sh a p e of a q u ad rup ed . Th e
Mo on i s it s lo rd
“

11 . Th e 2 n d D r ekk ana o f Sig n C ance r is a Woma n

W e a ri n
g in h er h ead lotus flow e rs, carry i n g a snake, h ard
h earted youn g cry i ng i n a fores t and
, , ,
h ol ding a b ran c h
of th e Palasa tree in h er h and .

NOT E S .

T h i s D rek kan a i s of t h e sh ap e of a w o m a n M ars i s .

i t s l ord .

12 T he 3 rd D re k k an a of sig nC a ncer is a m an s ur
.

rou nded by a snake sail i n g i n a boat in th e sea on ac

,

co u nt of procu r i n g ornaments fo r h is wi fe, weari ng orna

m ents m ad e of gold an d w i th a flat face .

NO T E S .

Th i s D rek k a na i s of th e shape o f a m an a nd a
'

'

snake a .i te r i s i ts l or d .

13 T h e l st D rek k an a o f s i g n Leo i s a m an o f t h e
.

s h a pe of a v ultu re and a j ackal seated on th e t o p o f a ,

Sal m al it ree rese m bl i ng a dog i n a ppearance an d i s also

,

of the s h ap e of a m a n d res sed i n di rty garment s and

separated from h is paren ts and cryin g alo ud .

N OT E S .

Th i s D re k kan a i s o f th e s h ap e of aman a q uadru ped

”
, ‘

an d a b ird
'

T h e Sun i s i t s l o rtl
. .
2 40
‘

Bl '

r z zat Li t a /uh [C H X.X VII,

14 . T he of sig n Leo i s a m an of t h e
z ud D rek k an a
sh ape of a h orse wear i n g a sl i gh tly whi te garla n d of
flowers i n th e h ead a nd covered w i th d e er ski n a n d
flan n el u napproach abl e l ike th e l ion h o l din g a b o w i n
, ,

his h and and wi th a be nt n ose .

NO T E S .

Th i s D re k k ana i s of th e sh ape of a m an and i s a n n ed .

J u p i ter is i ts lord .

15 T h e 3 1 d D r ekk a na of Leo i s a man w i th th e

.

face of a bear th e pranks of a monkey with a club i n h i s

, ,

h and carry i n g fru i ts an d m eats w ith a lon g beard an d ,

wh isker s and w i th cur l i n g h a i rs “

NOT E S .

T h i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh ape of a ma n and a qua ;

drup ed an d i s ar m ed Mars is it s lo rd
.

16 T h e 1 s t D re k k a na of s ig n Vi rg o i s a vi rg i n g i rl
.

carry i ng a pot fil l ed w i th flo w ers d ressed i n dirty g ar ,

ments and fond of cloths an d wealth an d proceed i n g to th e

h ous e o f h e r p receptor .

NOT E S .

T h i s D rek k a n a i s o f th e sh ape o f a wo m an . Me rcu ry

i s i ts lord .

17 . o f s i gn Vi rgo i s a m an hol d
T h e 2 n d D r ekk a n a
i n g a p en i n h is h and bl ack wit h cloth tied rou nd h i s
, ,

h ead e x a m m m g 1 te ms of rece 1p t a n d ex p end i tu re wi th a

, ,

l arge b o w i n h i s h and a n d co v ered wi th h a i rs al l over h i s

bod y
NO T E S .

Th i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh a p e of a man a n d i s armed .

Satu r n i s i ts l ord .

18 . T h e 3 rd D re kk ana of s i gn Vi rgo i s a woman of

yellow color d ressed i n wh i te silk carr yi n g a pot and
,

l ad l e i n her h ands, pu re a u d p ro c ee din g to a tem pl e

2 42 Br z b a t J amh i Xx v i i
' ‘

[C H
-

. .
.

23 . Th e of Scorp i o i s a woman w i th
2 n d D rekk an a
a body l i ke that of a tur tl e or p ot d es i r i n g th e c om fort of ,

h er pl ace o n accou n t of h er h u sban d an d w i th serpe n t

c oiled rou n d h er body .

NOT E S .

This D re kk an a i s
of th e sh ape of a woman an d a
serpent J u pi ter i s i ts lord
. .

2 4 T h e 3 rd D r e kk an a o f si g n S corp i o i s a l i o n
1
.

w i th a broad an d a fla t face l i ke th at o f a t u rtle scari n g ,

dogs d e e r j ack al s a nd h ogs i n t h e w oods an d lo rd i n g

, ,

over a co u n try abou nd i n g i n s and al t re e s .

NOT E S
T h i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh ape o f a qu ad rupe d T h e .

Moon i s i ts l ord .

25 Th e l s t D rek k an a of s i gn Sag i ttari i s a man

.

w i th th e body of a horse w ith a lon g b o w i n h i s h and

, ,

sto pp i n g i n h is h ermitage and wat ch i n g o v er t h e several

arti cl es requ i red for Sac r ific ial r i t es .

NOT E S .

Th is D rekk an a i s of th e sh a p e of a m an an d a
qu ad ru ped and i s armed J up i ter i s i ts l ord
. .

26 Th e 2 u d D rek k an a of s i gn Sag i t ta r i i s a beau t i

.

ful wo m an bri ght as gold and th e C h a m paka flower

, ,

seated o n a th ron e o f m iddl e size and pi ck i n g u p th e ,

ge m s of th e S ea .

NO T E S .

T h i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh ap e of a woman Mars .

i s i ts l ord .

27 T h e 3 r d D rek k an a of S agi ttar i i s a m an with

.

a l on g beard an d wh i skers of th e col or of gold and th e

,

C h a m pak a flower seated 0 11 a th ron e w i th a cl u b i n h is

,

h and and dressed i n w h i te si l k a n d deer sk i n ,

ch . X X V II ] . 2 43

NO T E S .

Th i s D rek k an a i s of th e sh ap e of a m an an d is
a rm ed T h e S u n i s i ts lord
. .

28 Th e first D rek k an a of si gn C apricorn i s a man

.

covered w i t h h ai rs stron g as th e sea m onste r, w i th a

,

bod y like th at of a h og wearin g a nose str i ng an d fe tters

,

an d w i t h a d eform ed face .

N OT E S .

T h i s D rekk a n a i s of th e sh ape of a m a n l oad ed w i t h

fet t ers Satu rn i s i ts lord
. .

29 Th e 2 n d D r ekk an a of s i gn C apr i corn i s a

.

wo m a n sk i lled i n th e arts w i th eyes l ike th e petal s o f

,

of th e lot us bl ack h anker i n g after various th i ngs and

, ,

w e ar i n g ear orn aments m ad e of i ron .

No T E s
Th i s D re kkan a i s of th e sh ape of a wom an . Ven us
i s i ts lord .

30
Th e 3 rd D r ekk an a of s i gn C apr i corn i s of t h e
.

s hape of a Ki n n ara ( a celest i al bei n g ) covered wi th flann el ,

w it h a qu i ver a bow and a mai l coat and carryi ng o n

,

h is sh oulders a pot set wi th preciou s ston es .

NO T E S .

T h i s D rekk an a i s armed M ercu ry i s i ts l ord . .

31 Th e l s t D re k k an a of si gn Aqu ari us is a man

.

w i th th e face of a vultu re w i t h h i s thou gh ts d irecte d

.
,

towards th e gai n of oil liquor water and meals an d , , ,

d ressed i n flannel , s i lk and deer skin .

NO T ES .

T h i s D rek k a na i s of th e shape of a m an . Satu rn i s

it s lord .

3 2 . T he 2 n d Drekk ana of s i gn Aquari u s i s a woma n

a car burnt w i t h th e wood of Sal m ali i n i t an d col l ect
in
'

m g i ro n , l i v i n g i u a fo r es t an d dr essed i n d i rty g arm en t s

,
2 451 B z lz M i a /li d X X VI I
'

1 r at
[C H
‘

. . .

NO T E S .

T h i s D rek kan a i s of th e sh ape of a woman who

carr 1es fire Me rcu ry i s i ts l ord
. .

33 T h e 3 rd D re k k an a of si gn Aquar i u s i s a black
.

m an w i th hai rs i n h is ear weari n g a crown and carr y i n g

‘

, ,

bark leaves th e oi l of b edel l iu m , i ron an d po t s from o ne

, , ,

pl ace to anoth er .

N OT ES
T h is Drek k ana i s of th e sh ape of a man Ven us i s i t s .

34 Th e l s t D re k k a n a of S i gn P i sces i s a m a n wit h
.

th e vessels of s ac rific 1al r i tes post pearls gems a nd conch , , ,

sh ells i n h i s h and s, carryi n g orn aments an d saili n g i n a

boat 0 11 th e s ea for th e pu rpose of d ecorat i n g h i s w i fe .

N OT ES
J u p i ter is the l ord of th is D rekk a n a .

35 Th e 2 n d D rek k an a of s i gn Pisces i s a woma n

.
‘

w i th a lon g fla g sta h and ban ner,sai lin g i n a boat to th e

'

oth er sh ore of th e sea accom p a n ied by h er fr i end s a nd w i t h

a face bri gh t as th e C ha m paka flower .

N OT ES .

Th i s D rek k a 11a i s o f t h e sh ape of a woman T h e

~
.

Moon i s i ts lord
. .

36 Th e 3 i d D rek k a n a of s i gn Pi sces i s a m an wi t h
.

a snake coiled rou nd h i m stand in g naked 0 11 th e bri nk of

,

a p i t i n a forest su ff eri n g fro m th i eves from fi re a nd

, ,

from h u n ger an d weepin g .

NOT E S .

T h i s D rekka n a i s of th e sh ape of a snake M ar s i s i t s .

Nol es —T h e A uth or h as stated t h e use of these

. des c rip
t i o ns of t h e Drek kanas i n h is Yatra . If th e D rek kan a b e
 Bri h a t M ta /ai .
[C H X X
.
T
VI T
-

14 . plan e t ary Y ogas

O n D ouble .

15 O n A scet i c Yogas
. .

16 O n th e N aks h a t ras or the Moo n

. in the Aste r i sm s .

17 O n th e Moon i n th e several si gns o f th e Zod iac

. .

18 O t
n h
. e S u n Mars and other —
planets i n th e s e
,

v eral si gns of th e Z odi ac

-
.

19 O n P l anetary Aspec t s
. .

20 O n th e P lanets i n t h e B
. h av as .

21 O n th e Plan ets i nth e i r se v eral Vargas

. .

22 O n M i scel la neou s Y ogas

. .

23 O n M al e fic Yogas
. .

24 O n th e H oroscopy of Women
. .

25 O n D eath
. .

26 O n t h e D i scove ry of a l ost Hor osco pe

. .

27 O n th e D r ek k a n as
.
.

4 5 a n d 6 I shall n o w g i ve a su m
,
. mary of th e
subj e cts treated of i n my work o n Yarta .

These are
P ras u a P rab h eda .

T it h ib al a .

3 . N ak sh at rab h idh a na .

4 . V arap h al a .

5 M u h u rt a N irde sa
’

. .

6 . C h an dra Bala .

7 . Lagna N ish ay a .

L agna B h e da .

9 . G rah as u h i .

10 . Ap a v ada .

11 . M is r a k a .

T anu v ep an a .

G u h yak ap uj a
’
l3 . .
 Brz lz af J a m
'

CH X X V I I L]
'

. . 2 17

14 Sw ap n a ( D i e arn s )
-
.

15 . Sn a n av idh i ( B at h ) .

16 . G rah ay aj n a .

17 . Pr ayan a ( T ravels ) .

18 . Sak u n aru t a .

h ave also trea t ed of V i v ah ak al a and G rah ak arau a

I

( Pl an ets) .

T h e l as t of th e above subj ects h as bee n separate l y

treated of by m e i n m y Astronomi cal w ork known as Pan
c h a s i ddh an t a Thus th e t h ree bran ches of th e J yo t is h a
.

Sastr a v i a , As t ron omy Horoscopy an d Sam h i ta ( a ) hav e

, , ,

been trea t ed of by m e for th e benefit of i n tell i gen t

stu dents .

7 T hese br i ef wo rks h ave been wr i tten by me o n a

.

ful l stud y and exam i n at i o n of th e el aborate wo rks of th e

an cie n t wr i ters I f an y i mportant poi n ts h e fou n d om i t
.

ted I crave th e forbearanc e o f th e learned cr i tics

,
.

8 I f any port i on of th e Text b e fou n d o m i tt e d by

.

th e wr i ter wh o copi ed or th e tea cher w h o tau gh t th e ,

l earn ed w i ll k i nd l y s uppl y th e o m i ss i o n set t in g asid e all

f eel i ngs o f j eal ousy Aga i n i f th ere be fou n d i n t h e T ext
.
,

e rrors i m perfect i ons or o m i ss i ons t h e l earn e d wil l ki nd ly

, ,

m ake th e n ecessary correct i on s an d s uppl y what i s

w an ted .

9 Varab a M i h ira th e son of th e Brah m i n A d i tya

. ,

dasa fro m who m h e recei ved h i s ed ucati on obtai ned th e ,

boon of k now l ed ge f rom th e Su n i n t h e v ill a ge of

K ap i t t h a spen t h i s d ays i n th e cou rt o f Ujj ai n i i n t h e
,

provi nce of Avan t i an d h as wri tten th i s n ea t work on

Horoscopy after a carefu l exam i nation of t h e works of th e
an ci e n t sa ges on th e subj ect .

( a ) V ar ah a M ih ira r
'
s w or k On As t ro n o m y
i s k n o w n a s Pan c h a Si dd h an t i k a .

An E n g l i s h T r an sl at io n o f t h is wo r k b y Dr
G Th i b h a u t m ay b e h a d fr o m
. .

Bo m b a y H i s w o rk s o n H o ro sco p y an d Sa m h i t a ar e k n o w n as t h e r ih at
. B
J at a k a an d t h e B t i ba t - Sa m h it a An E n g l i s h Tran sl at io n o f t h es e bo o k s
.

m a b e o bt a in ed fr om t h e M an a g e r , Th e Th eo s o p h i s t Ofii ep , dyar
y A .
2 48 Br ih a t J dt a /eaz
‘

.
[C H XX V I I I
. .

10
. h ave bee n enab l ed to w r i te t h e p res en t work
I
by th e grace o f th e Sun of V asi sh t h a, and of Adit ya dasa
, ,

worsh i pped by m e Salutat i o n to th e A n c i e n t Wr i ters of

.

Horoscopy .

E nd of U t t arab h ag a ( Par t I I ) “

FI NI S.
 T O F I ND OU T TH E C O RRE CT L O CAL T I M E .

”
M
Draw a pretty l arge se m i circl e on each side of a ; w ei l
~
,

pl aned an d s m ooth o b l o n gu l ar plank Place its e d ge al on g .

a strai g ht line drawn east to west on a s m ooth level ground ,

t h e plank b ei n g i ncl i ne d at an angle with the pl a n e of t h e

h orizon equal to th e co m plem ent of the Latitude of t h e
,

place s o that a strai g ht needl e fixe d at t h e centre of t h e

,

sem i circle and at ri g ht an g l es to the p lan e o f t h e plank

-

wi ll point to the Pole and the plane of the plank wil l be

aral l e l t o the plan e of t h e E quator The ed g e of an o h . . ~

o n g u l ar piece of woo d placed at t h e centre wil l serve as well

as a needle N ow divide the se m i— ci rcle i nt o 1 2 equal part s
‘

. .

m arking the p oints of division w ith the fi g u res fro m 6 do w n

to 1 2 an d from 1 2 up to 6 The divisions represent the. .

hours If t h e diam eter be about a cubi t i n l en gt h each

.

di vis i on m ay fur t her be div i ded i nt o 3 0 or 60 equal pa rt s so .

t h at the position o f the sha do w of the n ee d le will g ive th e

ti m e W ith i n a m inute NO W appl y the equ at i o n of ti m e and
.

th e result wi ll be the local cloc k ti m e or t h e m ea n solar

ti m e requi re d This c an be conve rted i nto G h at i k as a n d
.

V i g h at i k as from Su n Rise from the table s h owin g t h e ti m e o f

Sun Rise for e ach d ay .

NO TE s .

The latitude of the pl ace m ay be foun d frorn a ‘

prett y goo d Atlas or it m ay be asc e rt ai n d b y n oti n g the ‘

alti tude of t h e Pole star bot h at t h e ti m e of its cul m i natio n

-

and the t i m e o f its depression and taki n g th e m ean .

( 2 ) The com ple m ent of the an g le of latitude m ay be

m arke d on a piece of soli d wood an d the portion m ay be c u t
out i n the sh ape of a fine wed g e and m ade to support the
plank of the i ncl in ed dial .

(3 ) The east a n d west line m ay be m arked pretty cor

r e ct l y w i t h th e help of a m ariner s com pass or it m ay be ’

foun d b y m arkin g the t wo po i nts o f contact of the end of

the shad o w of a strai g ht rod fixe d vert ical l y at the centre of
a ci rcle dra w n on a s m ooth horizontal sur face wit h the, ,

circu m ference of the circl e both befo re a n d af ter m id d a y -

t h e l ine j o i nin g the two points bein g d u e east and we st .

(4) A level horizontal

,
groun d L
m a
y b e pr e
p ared wi t h
t h e h el p of a Spirit leve l -
.
 11 .
AT NIGHT .

Attac h eq ual wei g hts to the ends of a lon g fine stri n g

and th row the strin g over two fine m etallic wi res each about
a foot in len g th fixe d ri g idl y betwee n supports an d at the
hei g ht of about 5 or 6 feet fro m t h e g round runnin g e as t
,

t o west and about 5 or 6 feet apart fro m each other

,
No w
.

t h e two plu m b l in e s are certainl y vertical an d t h e plan e p aSS

, r

i n g throu g h the m will be a vertical plane Th is plane m ay

.

be m ade to pa ss t hrou g h the Pole star ab out the ti m e of its

c ul m i nation or d epression b y s l i g htl y m oving the strin g
over one of t h e wi res to the e ast or west till the two plu m
li nes hide the Pole star to an observer statione d 2 or 3 feet
-

t o t h e South of the southern pl u m bl in e a n d l ookin g wit h

on e ey e the other e y e bei n g closed
,
W e have thus secured
.

the plane of th e m eridian No w attach the ends of a

.

sli g htl y ti g ht strin g to the two p l u m b l in e s abo ut t h ei r

m id d le points . Th e observer m ay now li e d own below with ,

his face turned up t h e head suppor t ed b y a pillow an d o n e

,

e y e p l ace d exactl y u nder the two strin s runnin

g g n o r t h an d
south so that th e upper strin g i s wh olly conceale d b y t h e -

lower and observe t h e transit of stars across t h e strin g s .

The Al m anac g ives the ti m e of cul m ination of t h e Vernal

E quinox fo r each d ay o f t h e y ear and also t h e ti m es at which
particular sta rs cul m inate after the cul m ination of t h e Verna l
E quinox . If the t wo ti m es be added we g e t t h e ti m e of
,

cul m ination of a particu l a r star from 1 2 noon that day

Bu t if the s u m excee d 2 4 h ours th e n subtract fro m i t 2 3
.

h o urs and 5 6 m in utes the re m ain d er wi l l b e the ti m e o f

,
.
.

c u l m ination of t h e St a r fro m 1 2 noon t h at d ay

.
.
 E QU AT O I N OF TI M E .

2
0

0
E
71
m m m O O m m O N m
d O O
2
H
m w a m n m m m e m . A m
m M 6 as a a m m m w m m O m
m
2
e O
fi ; a H ; m a H 4 H a ” : p fi : a

[0 If : I f: e fi 'fi fi e wfi m m m w n w w w fl fi a fi O O O

o
n
m m.

fi
O
N
O O
w fi
a
n
m . O
fl
N
H 3 m
”
m
:
«
a
m N
: H
O
”
h
o

e e m m m m m m a w

O fi m fi a H N NNNm m m

—
O m O N @ c O O O O O
” e w a N m v m . N N m
O O O O O v -‘ v-i v-t l H N N NNNN

m O O O
w v w fi

m a“ e e

m
N
.

v
H
 10 ‘

TABLE G Sh ow i n g t h e t i m e of cu l m i n at ion of t he Su n
an d t h e Y er n al E q u i nox .

Mo n t h D at e .

J a nu a r y

F eb r u ary Au g u s t

M ar c h Se p t e m b er

Oc t o be r

No ve m b er

D e c em b e r

Not e —
As t h e V ern al
. E q u i n o x i s s u bjec t t o a r e t ro g rade m o t io n o f o v er
.

an d G w i ll h av e t o b e p ro p o s ed f r o m t h e
/

50 s eco n ds a y ear , t ab l es F . .

Al m an ac f or t h e y e ar
.
 Unive rs it y a t C alif orn ia
SO UTH ER NREGIO NAL LIBR ARYFAC ILITY
405 H ilga rd A ve nue , Loo A n ge le s , C A9002 4- 13 8 8
Ret urn th is mat e rial t o th e lib rary
fro m wh ic h it was b o rro wed .